Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9 · PDF fileConfiguration Guide CUSTOMER 2017-12-11 Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0

Configuration Guide CUSTOMER

2017-12-11

Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0

Content

1 About this Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

2 General Configuration Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112.1 Activate Localization in a Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112.2 Change Data Before Settlement Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112.3 Change Settlement Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122.4 Create Loan Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122.5 Configuration for Tax Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Preparation Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Define Tax Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Define Tax Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Define Tax Item Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Map Industry-Specific Operations to Tax Item Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Assign Tax Item Types to Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Map Tax Manager Operations to Posting Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Specify Tax Rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Specify Tax Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Specify Tax Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

2.6 Configuration for Interest on Arrears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Configuration for Turnover Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Create Transaction Types for Payment Distribution Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Configuration for Payment Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Define Time Period for Backdated Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Create Number Range Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Configuration for Direct Debit for IoA and Taxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Configure Loan Product Attributes for IoA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Configuration for Payoff with Interest on Arrears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Configuration for Disbursement with IoA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Configuration for Capitalization with IoA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Settings for Automatic Extension of Contract (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Activate BAdIs for Interest on Arrears Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

2.7 Configuration for Order of Tax on Loans Payment Replanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Configure Product Attributes for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

2 C U S T O M E RLocalizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0

Content

Define Number Range Interval for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Define Condition Types for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Assign condition Types to Condition Group Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Configure Localization Parameters for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Determine Turnover Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Configure Loan Product Attributes for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Configure Tax Manager for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

2.8 Configuration for Direct Debit Localization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50General Settings for Direct Debit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Account Product Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Direct Debit for Interest on Arrears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Direct Debit for Taxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Configuration for Partial Payment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Configuration for Number of Attemps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

2.9 Configuration for Positive Pay and Stop Payment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Configure Product Attributes for Positive Pay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Configure Product Attributes for Stop Payment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Define Agreement Differentiation Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Configuration for Posting Control Framework. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Configure Fees and Charges for Posting Control Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Configuration for Posting Control Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Configuration for Posting Control Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Configuration for Stop Payment Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

2.10 Configuration for Waiver Reasons for Early Withdrawal Penalties (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Define Waiver Reasons for Early Withdrawal Penalties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Configure Time Deposit Account Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

2.11 Configuration for Installment Prepayment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Configure Product Attributes for Installment Prepayment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Define Condition Types for Installment Prepayment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Configure Localization Parameters for Installment Prepayment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Assign Condition Types to Condition Group Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Define Assignment Reasons for Individual Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Define Number Range Interval for Installment Prepayment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Define Reasons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Assign Reasons to Order Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Setting Up Custom Validations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Define Event Type for Posting Lock Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0Content C U S T O M E R 3

Set Up Release Process for Installment Prepayment Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Define Calculation Method for Installment Prepayment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Business Add-Ins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

2.12 Configuration for Master Contract Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Define Account Determination for Process Interim Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Define Condition Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Define Condition Group Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Configure Transaction Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Configure Direct Charge Condition Type for Loans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

2.13 Configuration for Escrow Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Create Transaction Types for Payment Distribution Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Configuration for Payment Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Configuration for Turnover Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Define Posting Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Assign Transaction Types to Posting Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Define Condition Types for Escrow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Assign Escrow Condition Types to Condition Group Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Configuration for Product Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Configure Escrow Implementation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Activate BAdI for Escrow Payment Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123FICA Customizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

2.14 Configuration for Payment Advice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Create New Payment Advice Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124Link Payment Advice Category to Corresponding Memory Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

2.15 Configuration for Regional Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125General Settings for Regional Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Configuration for Region Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Configuration for Account Validations Based on Region-Specific Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Configuration for Automatic Determination of Financial Conditions According to Region Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

3 Configuration Information for Argentina. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573.2 Configuration for Tax Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Tax Manager Customizing Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Specify Business Partner Roles for Gross Income Tax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Specify Business Partner Roles for Gross Income Tax Perception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Account Related Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Configuration for Loans Tax Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168


Content

Configuration for Taxes on Interest on Arrears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703.3 Master Data Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Enter Tax Data for Business Partners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

3.4 Configuration for Interest on Arrears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Settings Delivered As Standard for IoA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Configuration for Calculation Bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Create Condition Types for Interest on Arrears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Assign Condition Types to Condition Group Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Create Condition Group and Condition for Interest on Arrears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Configure Loan Product Attributes for IoA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Configuration for Disbursement with IoA for Argentina. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

3.5 Configuration for Gross Income Tax Perception on Loan Installment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Create Condition Types for GITP on Loan Installment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Assign condition Types to Condition Group Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Tax Manager Configuration for GITP on Loan Installment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Configure Localization Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Configure Loan Product Attributes for GITP Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

4 Configuration Information for Brazil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2214.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2214.2 Activate Localization-Specific Implementations for Business Add-Ins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2214.3 Sample Financial Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Checking Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Time Deposit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Multidate Savings Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Corporate Savings Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Loans Taken Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Fund Pool Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313Loans Given Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

4.4 Configuration for Branch Calendars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Organizational Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323Product Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Transaction Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

4.5 Configuration for Checkbook Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Localization Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Business Partner Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329


Basic Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Printing Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Configuration for Fee Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Business Add-Ins and Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Authorization Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Procedures and Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

4.6 Configuration for Tax Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Withholding Tax on Corporate Savings Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344IOF on Loans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

4.7 Configuration for Payment Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Define Main Rule Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428Create Transaction Types for Brazilian Bank Transfers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Assign Offsetting Transaction Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438Assign Processing Priority to Recipient Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440Define Payment Media and Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Set Default Values for Order Creation Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443Configure Localization Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Define Customer-Specific Validations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

4.8 Configuration for Payment Advice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Define Payment Directive Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Define Payment Advice Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Define Main Rule Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Create Offsetting Transaction Types for Brazilian Bank Transfers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449Assign Offsetting Transaction Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453Assign Counterparty External Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453Assign Payment Directive Types with Transaction Types and Medium/Payment Methods. . . . . . . . 454Configure Localization Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

4.9 Configuration for Compound Interest Calculation on Loans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455Define Condition Type for Variable Interest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Create Financial Conditions for Settlement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457Define Inpayment Agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461Create Loan Account Product and Configure Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

4.10 Configuration for Inflation Adjustment of Loan Installments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466


Content

Define Condition Types for Inflation Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468Create Financial Conditions for Settlement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469Define Inpayment Agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474Create Loan Account Product and Configure Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

4.11 Configuration for Interest on Arrears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Settings Delivered As Standard for IoA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Configuration for Calculation Bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480Create Condition Types for Interest on Arrears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482Assign Condition Types to Condition Group Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488Configuration for Late Payment Penalty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489Configure Loan Product Attributes for IoA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496Configuration for Disbursement with IoA for Brazil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

4.12 Configuration for Revenue Recognition for Performing Loans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Maintain Nonbalance-Balance-Changing Transaction Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Assign Nonbalance-Changing Posting Categories to Nonbalance-Changing Transaction Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500Configure Localization Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500

4.13 Configuration for Installment Prepayment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501Settings Delivered As Standard for Installment Prepayment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501Configure Localization Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

5 Configuration Information for Canada and the United States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5035.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5035.2 Configuration for Lines of Credit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503Configuration Steps in Customizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503Master Data Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545Configuration for BDT Events for Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553Configuration for Payment Distribution Management for LoC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

5.3 Configuration for Early Withdrawal Penalty on Time Deposits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560Maintain Transaction Types for Information Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560Define Turnover Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562Define Derivation Rules for Turnover Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563Calculation Basis for Exponential Interest Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564Create Condition Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564Assign Condition Types to Condition Group Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566


Assign Condition Types for Clearing of Info Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567Assign Posting Types to Transaction Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568Configure Localization Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

5.4 Configuration for Bank Statement for Loans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570Maintain Application Forms for Correspondence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

5.5 United States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570Servicemembers Civil Relief Act (SCRA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570Internal Revenue Services (IRS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579Unfair, Deceptive, or Abusive Acts or Practices (UDAAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582Truth in Lending Act (TILA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582Configuration for Financial Product Eligibility Checks for Account Holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585Regulation D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586UCC Lien Collateral Agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587Military Lending Act (MLA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

6 Configuration Information for Russia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5986.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5986.2 Business Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5986.3 Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

Configure Alternative ID Key and Generation Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598Organizational Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600Configuration of Integration Between Bank Analyzer and ANE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605Configuration for Multidigit Account Number of External Banks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607Business Partner Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609Mandatory Business Partner Identification Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610Account Profile Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

6.4 Product Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612Sample Account Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612Product Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

6.5 Account Number Engine Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6346.6 Business Process Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Document Order Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634Customizing for Event After Reporting Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637Customizing for Interest Accrual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641Customizing for Capital Yield Tax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642Customizing Settings for Early Withdrawal of Time Deposit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660Customizing Settings for Automatic Product Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663Setup of End-of-Day Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665Customizing for Accounting Document Externalization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667Customizing for Accounting Entry Externalization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668


Content

Customizing for Year-end Closing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672


1 About this Guide

1.1 Introduction

This guide is the central source of configuration information for the localizations for banking services from SAP 9.0. This guide provides configuration information for the following topics:

● General settings● Configuration information for Argentina● Configuration information for Brazil● Configuration information for Canada and the United States● Configuration information for Russia


About this Guide

2 General Configuration Settings

2.1 Activate Localization in a Client

Use

You can use the localizations for banking services from SAP for multiple countries within a region. This chapter describes the procedure how to specify the country for which you are using the localization.

NoteThis step is mandatory if you are using a localization solution that is relevant for more than one country.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Activate Localization for a Country in a Client .

2. Choose the localization that you want to activate.3. Save your entries.

2.2 Change Data Before Settlement Calculation

Use

If you want to change the period or rate, for example, before the settlement calculation, you can create your own implementation of the Data Compression (COMPRESS_CALCULATED_DETAILS) Business Add-In (BAdI).

Procedure

1. Disable the standard BAdI implementation.2. Create a new implementation of the BAdI by copying the standard Localization Compress Details (/FSGLO/

COMPRESS_DETAILS_SETTL) implementation.3. Make the required adjustments to the code in the implementation that you create.

Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0General Configuration Settings C U S T O M E R 11

4. Activate the new implementation.

Example

You use this BAdI if you want to use one interest rate for one business partner and a different interest rate for another business partner.

2.3 Change Settlement Calculation

Use

If you want to carry out additional calculations based on the settlement results that the localization provides, you can create your own implementation of the After Rounding (AFTER_ROUNDING_RESULTS) Business Add-In (BAdI).

Procedure

1. Disable the standard BAdI implementation.2. Create a new implementation of the BAdI by copying the standard Localization After Rounding Results (/

FSGLO/AFTER_ROUND_RES_SETTL) implementation.3. Make the required adjustments to the code in the implementation that you create.4. Activate the new implementation.

Example

You use this BAdI if you want to use a product that is not part of the standard scope of the localization for Brazil and you need to perform calculations required for these products as part of the settlement calculation.

2.4 Create Loan Product

Use

To use a loan product in your country, you create your own product based on an existing product, for example, based on the template product _LO_MORG.


General Configuration Settings

Procedure

1. Create your own loan account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .

2. Enter the following data:

Table 1:

Field Entry

New Product Enter the technical name of your product.

Template Product _LO_MORG

Product Version 0001

3. Choose Enter.4. On the Product Create: Administration screen, enter a description and validity period for the product and

choose Enter.

2.5 Configuration for Tax Manager

2.5.1 Introduction

This section describes the steps that are needed to configure tax manager for use with a customized development that you create, for example, to calculate a given tax in a personalized way.

For the country-specific configuration of tax manager that is covered by the standard delivery, see the section that corresponds to your country from the following table:

Table 2:

Country Chapter Description

Argentina Configuration for Tax Calculation [page 157]

Configuration steps needed for tax calculation in Argentina.

Tax Manager Configuration for Tax on IoA [page 177]

Configuration steps needed for tax calculation for interest on arrears (IoA) in Argentina.

Brazil Withholding Tax on Corporate Savings Accounts [page 344]

Configuration steps needed for the calculation of withholding tax on corporate savings accounts for Brazil.



Configuration steps needed for the calculation of complementary IOF on overdue loan installments in Brazil.

Russia Customizing for Capital Yield Tax [page 642]

Configuration steps needed for the calculation of capital yield tax for Russia.

To customize tax manager, follow the steps below.

NoteNote that there is a certain logic to the sequence of the steps in this list. For example, you need to have defined a tax operation before you can assign a tax item type to it. Likewise, you need to have defined a tax type and tax area before you can specify the relevant rates and limits for that tax type in the given area, and so on.

2.5.2 Preparation Steps

2.5.2.1 Introduction

For initial preparation and setup of your system, begin with the following steps.

2.5.2.2 Copy Configuration Entries from System Client 000

Use

Some entries in the following tables are delivered by SAP in system client 000:

Table 3:

Table Name Description

/FSGLO/TAX_RATE Tax Rates

/FSGLO/TAX_LIMIT Tax Limits

TB070 Tax Classification: Tax Types per Country

TB071 Define Business Partner Tax Groups

You need to copy these settings to your operational clients to enable the tax manager to work correctly. Note that these tables are all type C, as delivered by SAP in system client 000.



Procedure

1. Ensure that system client 000 is ready for copy.2. Log in on the target client.

3. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Tools Administration Client Administration Special FunctionsCopy Transport Request

4. Copy the entries from the tables above from client 000 to the target client.

NoteTo ensure that the tax manager can work properly, SAP recommends that you do not change these entries.

2.5.3 Define Tax Operations

Use

The tax manager uses tax operations internally for tax processing and calculation purposes. The defined tax operations are associated with corresponding tax item types.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Operations .

2. Define the tax operations required for your tax calculations.3. Define if the operation is a debit operation.

Example

Table 4:

Tx Op ID Debit Description

1 x CHARGE

2 x INTEREST

3 x DEBITS

4 CREDITS

5 CREDIT PAYMENT

6 CREDIT INTEREST


Tx Op ID Debit Description

7 x CHARGE LOANS

8 x INTEREST LOANS

9 REPAYMENT LOANS

10 x EVENT CHARGES

11 LOANS RECEIVABLES

2.5.4 Define Tax Types

Use

Tax types represent the different taxes to be applied during tax processing and calculation in the tax manager. If required, you can assign the calculation of a tax type to a calculation class/interface instead of using the tax manager standard calculation routines.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Types .

2. Define the tax types required for your tax calculations.

Example

Table 5:

Tax Type Description Class/Interface

DECR DEBIT & CREDIT /FSLAR/CL_DEB_CRED_CALCULATOR

GIT GROSS INCOME TAX /FSLAR/CL_GIT_CALCULATOR

GITP GROSS INCOME TAX PERCEPTION /FSLAR/CL_ARGENTINA_CALCULATOR

INC INCOME TAX /FSLAR/CL_ARGENTINA_CALCULATOR

STA STAMP TAX /FSLAR/CL_STAMP_CALCULATOR

VAT VAT /FSLAR/CL_ARGENTINA_CALCULATOR



Tax Type Description Class/Interface

VATP VAT PERCEPTION /FSLAR/CL_ARGENTINA_CALCULATOR

VATW VAT WITHHOLDING /FSLAR/CL_ARGENTINA_CALCULATOR

2.5.5 Define Tax Item Types

Use

In this step, you create the tax item types that you want to use to map the operations on which you want to calculate taxes using tax manager.

Tax manager uses a tax item type with the following purposes:

● Map industry-specific transactions, for example, a taxable transaction type in banking services from SAP to a tax operation within tax manager

● Map a tax that tax manager calculates to a system-specific posting operation

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Item Type .

2. Define the tax item types required to map your taxable operations.

Example

Table 6:

AcctPr. Grp Description

000001 DEBITS

2.5.6 Map Industry-Specific Operations to Tax Item Types

Use

Tax manager uses a mapping table to assign industry-specific operations to a given tax item type. You define the mapping specific to banking services from SAP as described below.


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Transaction Types and Condition Types to Tax Item Type

2. Enter the mapping assignments for all transaction types and condition types that are relevant for tax calculation.

Example

Table 7:

CondTyp Condition Type Name

TranTyp Desc. Transact. Type

Tax Item Typ Description

500720 Loan Payoff 000007 CHARGE LOANS

501100 Charge PrCond: (PP)

000008 INTEREST LOANS

501501 Nom.Int.Rate Disb. Charge

000007 CHARGE LOANS

090015 Payment Receipt 000005 CREDIT PAYMENT

105100 Debit Interest 100100 Debit Interest 000002 INTEREST

190900 Debit VAT 190900 Debit VAT

2.5.7 Assign Tax Item Types to Operations

Use

Assign the tax item type that you use for a given tax operation to the corresponding operation IDs. These assignments serve as a mapping between the transactions from the business landscape and the operations inside the tax manager.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Tax Item Types to Operations .

2. Enter the mapping assignments for each relevant combination of tax operation and tax item type.



Example

Table 8:

Tax Op ID Description Tax Item Type Description

000007 CHARGE LOANS 1 CHARGE

000008 INTEREST LOANS 2 INTEREST

2.5.8 Map Tax Manager Operations to Posting Transactions

Use

The tax manager uses a mapping table for the assignment of tax operations and tax types to tax item types. Tax manager posts the resulting amounts for a given tax type in a certain operation using the assigned tax item type. You maintain the mapping entries as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Posting Transactions to Operations .

2. Enter the mapping assignments for each relevant combination of tax operation and tax type.

Example

Table 9:

Tax Op ID Description Tax Type Description Tax Item Type Description

1 Charge DECR DEBIT & CREDIT 910110 Deb Cred Acct Mainten.

1 Charge GITP GROSS INCOME TAX PERCEPTION

910112 VATP Transaction Charge

1 Charge VAT VAT 190900 Debit VAT

1 Charge VATP VAT PERCEPTION 910103 VATP Transaction Charge

7 Charge Loans GITP GROSS INCOME TAX PERCEPTION

919000 Gross Income Tax Perception


2.5.9 Specify Tax Rates

Use

You maintain the tax rates that apply for a given combination of tax type, country and region, and validity period as described below.

NoteIf a business partner is entitled to a special rate for gross income tax (GIT) or gross income tax perception (GITP) in a particular region, you enter the tax rates in the business partner master data.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Rates .

2. Enter the applicable rates for each relevant combination of tax type, country and region, and validity period.

Example

Table 10:

Tax Rate ID Start Date Tax Rate Tax Type Country Region

1 01.01.2000 4.0 VAT PY

2 01.01.2000 10.0 VAT BR RS

3 01.01.2000 3.0 INC AR 00

2.5.10 Specify Tax Limits

Use

A tax limit is the maximum or minimum amount of tax to be charged for a certain tax type in a given country and region and within a specified validity period.

NoteTax limits are not mandatory for tax calculation. Therefore, you only need to specify a tax limit where applicable.

A limit can specify only a minimum amount, only a maximum amount, or a range between a minimum and a maximum. If the payable tax amount falls below the minimum the tax will not be charged, whereas if the payable



tax amount is above the maximum only the maximum amount will be charged, not the full amount. A limit may apply over the taxable base amount to be calculated or over the final calculated amount (the tax amount itself). You maintain the relevant limits for tax calculation as described below.

If the currency of the limit to be applied is different from the currency of the taxable amount, the system automatically converts the currency of the limit to match the currency of the taxable amount.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Limits .

2. Enter the applicable limits for each relevant combination of tax type, country and region, and validity period.

Example

Table 11:

Tax Limit ID

Start Date

Minimum Amt

Maximum Amt

Tax Type Country Region Limit Application Base

C.key Exemp Rule

1 01.01.2000

21.30 VATP AR 00 Calculated Amount

USD Total Exempted

2 01.01.2000

12.00 VATW AR 00 Calculated Amount

USD Total Exempted

3 01.01.2000

20.00 INC AR 01 Calculated Amount

USD Total Exempted

4 01.01.2000

50.00 GITP AR 04 Calculated Amount

USD Total Exempted

5 01.01.2000


USD Total Exempted

6 01.01.2000


USD Total Exempted

7 01.01.2000


USD Total Exempted

8 01.01.2000

4.50 STA AR 19 Calculated Amount

USD Total Exempted

9 01.01.2000


USD Total Exempted


Tax Limit ID

Start Date

Minimum Amt

Maximum Amt

Tax Type Country Region Limit Application Base

C.key Exemp Rule

10 01.01.2000


USD Total Exempted

23 01.01.2000

AR 00 Calculated Amount

USD Total Exempted

34 01.01.2000


USD Total Exempted

48 01.01.2000


USD Total Exempted

67 01.01.2000


USD Total Exempted

2.5.11 Specify Tax Assignments

Use

Tax assignments specify the tax types that apply to a given tax operation within a country and region. If there is more than one tax type that applies to a given tax operation you can define the sequence of taxes in the tax assignment for that operation. If applicable, you can define specific classes to handle special cases for rate and limit determination according to the tax being calculated. You maintain the tax assignments as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Assignments .

2. Enter the applicable tax types for each relevant combination of tax operation and country and region.3. In cases where you have assigned more than one tax type to a given operation you can use the Predecessor

Tax Type field to define the sequence of taxes for that operation.



Example

Table 12:

Country Region Tax Op ID Tax Type Start Date

End Date Pred. Tax Type

Rate Determiner

Limit Determiner

Reference Data Control

AR 00 1 VAT 01.01.2000

31.12.2020

/FSLAR/CL_VATP_DETERMINE_RATE

/FSLAR/CL_VATP_DETERMINE_LIMIT

/FSLAR/CL_TAX_VAT_DATA_CONTROL

AR 00 1 VATP 01.01.2000

31.12.2020

VAT /FSLAR/CL_VATP_DETERMINE_RATE


/FSLAR/CL_TAX_VAT_DATA_CONTROL

AR 00 1 GITP 01.01.2000

31.12.2020

VATP /FSLAR/CL_VATP_DETERMINE_RATE


AR 01 2 VAT 01.01.2000

31.12.2020

/FSLAR/CL_VATP_DETERMINE_RATE


AR 01 2 VATP 01.01.2000

31.12.2020

VAT /FSLAR/CL_VATP_DETERMINE_RATE


AR 01 2 GITP 01.01.2000

31.12.2020

VATP /FSLAR/CL_VATP_DETERMINE_RATE


AR 01 2 STA 01.01.2000

31.12.2020

GITP /FSLAR/CL_VATP_DETERMINE_RATE



2.6 Configuration for Interest on Arrears

2.6.1 Introduction

This section describes the steps that are needed to configure the interest on arrears (IoA) solution for use with a customized development that you create.

For the country-specific configuration of IoA that is covered by the standard delivery, see the section that corresponds to your country from the following table:

Table 13:


Argentina Configuration for Interest on Arrears [page 186]

Configuration steps needed for IoA processing in Argentina.

Configuration for Taxes on Interest on Arrears [page 170]

Configuration steps needed for calculating taxes (VAT and VATP) on IoA in Argentina.

Brazil Configuration for Interest on Arrears [page 479]

Configuration steps needed for IoA processing in Brazil.

For information about the settings required to collect IoA during direct debit execution, see Configuration for Direct Debit for IoA and Taxes [page 33].

To customize the IoA solution for generic use, follow the steps below.

2.6.2 Configuration for Turnover Classes

2.6.2.1 Define Turnover Classes

Use

To enable the system to process interest on arrears (IoA) and taxes on IoA, you must define three turnover classes for each for the following:

● Settlement● Billing● Repayment

For defining your own turnover classes, you can use the standard L051, L053, and L156 classes as templates. A 1:1 relationship is required between logical and real turnover classes.



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Turnover Classes for Flexible Account Balances Define Turnover Classes .

2. Choose New Entries.3. Enter data as follows:

Table 14:

Field Entry

Turn. Class Enter an ID for your turnover class.

Description Turnover Class Enter any description as required.

Assignment Use the same value as in the template.

Update Use the same value as in the template.

IA Deselected

4. Save your entries.

2.6.2.2 Define Derivation Rules for Turnover Classes

Use

For each turnover class that you defined for interest on arrears (IoA) and taxes on IoA, you must assign two transaction types, one debit and one credit transaction type. That is, you define two different derivation rules for each turnover class as described below.

Prerequisites

● You have defined turnover classes. For more information, see Define Turnover Classes [page 24].● You have defined transaction types.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Account Management Item Management Turnover Classes for Flexible Account Balances Define Derivation Rules for Turnover Classes .


2. Right-click the first node with the <No Condition Defined> condition and choose Create As Last Lower-Level Node .

3. Choose the Create pushbutton in the Condition group box and enter the following data:

Table 15:

Field Entry

Condition Field Trans. Type

Condition Cat Equal

Value Enter the transaction type to be assigned to the turnover class.

4. Choose the Create pushbutton in the Target group box and enter the turnover class to which you want to assign the transaction type in the Turnover Class field.


2.6.3 Create Transaction Types for Payment Distribution Items

Use

To enable the system to close open items for interest on arrears (IoA) and tax on IoA correctly, you must create a transaction type for each item.

For creating your own transaction types, you can use the standard 092700 (Credit Memo from Installment Payment) transaction type as a template.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment

Items .2. Choose New Entries and enter data as follows:

Table 16:

Field Entry

Trans. Type Enter a code for your transaction type as required.

Item Type Recipient



Field Entry

Short Descriptn Enter any short description.

Tax TA Type Deselected

Long Name Enter any long description.

Accounting Posting Check Selected

Limit Check Deselected

ValDte/SFP Selected

Facilities Deselected

Payment Form Deselected

Prenote Selected

Account Names None

Access Limit None

Availability Checks None

Payment Monitoring Payment Monitoring -Time Deposits

Overdraft Protection Deselected

Currency Exch. Deselected

Plan Monitoring Deselected

Own Check Deselected

CreditMemo Selected

Reversal OK Deselected

Prenote Required Selected

Multiple Recipients OK Deselected

Display Payment Notes Deselected

Intraday Relevant Deselected

Cust.Initiation Deselected

Check Facilities Deselected

Calculate CYT Deselected


Field Entry

Change PaytPlan Leave field blank.

Transfer PO PT Deselected

ValDte Spec. Value Date Entry Possible

ValueDte Deriv. Value Date Matches Value Date of First Position

Spec SubFinPayt Not a Subject to Final Payment Transaction Type

Deriv. SFP Date No SubFinPayt Date for More Payment Items Position

Payt From Type Leave field blank.

Event Leave field blank.

Corresp. Type Leave field blank.

PaytDistr. Payment Item Not Transferred

Other P/R Leave field blank.

Update Category Leave field blank.

Schedule Settlement Selected

Sett. Type Leave field blank.

Call Billing Deselected

Retain Blank Lines Deselected

No Posting Notif. Deselected

Online Ent. PI Deselected

Online PO Deselected

Online FO Deselected

Standing Order Not Used

TT Group Posting Check Other Credits

TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules Cr. Memos: Payt. Distrib. For Loans

Business Trans. Code 051



Field Entry

TT Grp CrcyExch Payment Transaction Credit


2.6.4 Configuration for Payment Distribution

2.6.4.1 Define Payment Distribution Processing Mode

Use

Payment processing for interest on arrears (IoA) is only available in the synchronous mode of payment distribution. That is, you must define this processing mode as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Payment Distribution Processing Mode .

2. Choose New Entries.3. Select Synchronous PD from the list for the Proc. Mode field.4. Save your entries.

2.6.4.2 Define Rules for Clearing Open Items

Prerequisites

You have defined transaction types for the relevant parts of the installment (for example, capital or interest) in Customizing for Account Management, under Product Management Payment Distribution Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System .

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Rules for Clearing Open Items .


2. Select a distribution step rule.3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Criteria node.4. Select a sort criterion.5. In the Dialog Structure, double-click Order node.6. Choose New Entries and enter data as follows:

Table 17:

Field Entry

Value of Sort Criterion Field Enter the code of the transaction type created for the relevant part of installment (for example, capital or interest) that you want to clear in a specific order. This code is defined in your OIM system.

Order num. Define the order of the item in the clearing process. For example, if you want to clear this part of the installment first, enter 1 in this field.


2.6.4.3 Configure Transaction Types and Payment Distribution Types

Use

To configure transaction types and payment distribution types to be used for interest on arrears (IoA) payment processing, perform the steps described below.

Procedure

1. Define transaction types for the open item management (OIM) system in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System .

2. Define payment distribution types in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account ManagementProduct Management Payment Distribution Define Payment Distribution Types .

3. Assign the transaction types you created for the OIM system to the usage category of the relevant payment distribution types in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Trans. Types for OIM System to Paymt Distr. Types .

4. Assign the transaction type (TransType field), a payment transaction type for offsetting a bank transaction (OffsetType field) and a reverse transaction type (Rev. Type field) to the payment distribution type in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Trans. Types and Reserv. Types to Paymt Distr. Types .



2.6.4.4 Assign Offsetting Transaction Types for Internal Processes

Prerequisites

You have defined transaction types and assigned them to payment distribution types. For more information, see Configure Transaction Types and Payment Distribution Types [page 30].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Payment OrderAssign Offsetting Transaction Types to Transaction Types Assign Offsetting Transaction Types (Internal

Processes) .2. Select the transaction type 042700 (Debit from Payment Distribution of Loan).3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Offsetting Transaction Type Assignment node.4. Choose New Entries and enter data as follows:

Table 18:

Field Entry

OfTrTy Enter the transaction types that you assigned to payment distribution types in the TransType field of the Assign Trans. Types and Reserv. Types to Paymt Distr. Types Customizing activity. Note that all transaction types defined in that activity has to be entered in this OfTrTy field as well.

Default Deselected


2.6.5 Define Time Period for Backdated Changes

Use

When an overdue installment is paid, an inpayment agreement is created, which means that backdated changes have to be added to the loan account. To permit these changes, you make the settings below.

Prerequisites

You have created the loan account product with interest on arrears (IoA) activated.


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Time Period for Backdated Changes .

2. Choose New Entries .3. Enter the following data for each IoA account product:

Table 19:

Field Entry

MktDatArea Enter your market data area.

PCat 0002

Product Enter your loan account product with IoA activated.

BackdChnge Enter the number of months as required.

BackdChnge Months


2.6.6 Create Number Range Interval

Use

For interest on arrears (IoA) processing, you create number range intervals for the /FSGLO/IOA object. This number range is used for internal business orders that are created when payment distribution is executed for an overdue account.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Interest on Arrears Define Number Range Interval for Interest on Arrears Orders .

2. Choose the Change intervals pushbutton.3. Define your number range interval for Number Range Number 01.4. Save your entries.



2.6.7 Configuration for Direct Debit for IoA and Taxes

For information about direct debit of interest on arrears and taxes, see Configuration Guide for Direct Debit Localization.

2.6.8 Configure Loan Product Attributes for IoA

Use

To enable the system to process interest on arrears (IoA), configure the product attributes for your loan account product as described in this section.

Procedure

1. Change your loan account product in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product. .

2. Activate the following product attributes:

Table 20:

Product Attribute Path in Product Attribute Tree

Required/Optional Comments

Generate Number of Installments

Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes

General Localization

Required

Calculate Interest on Arrears Used AttributesCountry-Specific Attributes


Interest on Arrears

Required

Receivable IoA Items with Installment Due Date

Used AttributesCountry-Specific Attributes


Interest on Arrears

Optional If you want the system to calculate receivable IoA items with installment due date, activate this product attribute.


Product Attribute Path in Product Attribute Tree


Automatic Extension of Contract



Interest on Arrears

Optional If you want to enable the automatic extension of the contract, activate this product attribute

NoteIf you enable this attribute you must make the settings described in Settings for Automatic Extension of Contract (Optional) [page 40].

2.6.9 Configuration for Payoff with Interest on Arrears


To use the functions for payoff with interest and taxes on arrears, you make the settings described in this section.

2.6.9.2 Define Gross Payoff Split Nodes

Use

To check the sum of the items of overdue taxes at the payoff order gross amount details, create the node as described below.



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services Account Management Order Management Account Order Early Payoff (Loans) Define Gross Payoff Split Nodes , find and select the node with the following information:

Table 21:

Node EPT P Node Sequence Operation Short Description

Long Description

LTXAOD Unchecked ADYOVD The last sequence number for the nodes with the ADYOVD P Node.

Add this amount to the Gross Payoff

OVERDUE TAXES

OVERDUE TAXES

2. Choose Copy As and change the following information:

Table 22:

EPT Sequence

Checked Set the next sequence number for nodes with the ADYOVD P Node.


NoteTo check the node you created, access the payoff order and check the Details of gross payoff amount on the Payoff Loan Early pop up screen, under Gross Amount Overdue Items Already Overdue Items Overdue Taxes .

NoteTo check the sum of the localized interest on arrears open items, access the payoff order and check the Details of gross payoff amount on the Payoff Loan Early pop up screen, under Gross Amount Overdue Items Already Overdue Items Overdue Taxes .

2.6.9.3 Update Job Chain for Payment Distribution

To conciliate processing of interest on arrears orders and payoff orders in the payment distribution job chain, after the Automatic Postprocessing for Payment Distribution (/FSPD/IPD_MR2) job, schedule an extra occurrence of the periodic jobs below:

● Invoicing, on Open Items Management system


● Automatic Postprocessing for Payment Distribution (/FSPD/IPD_MR2)

2.6.10 Configuration for Disbursement with IoA


To use the functions for disbursement with interest and taxes on arrears, you make the settings described in this section.

2.6.10.2 Assign Prenote Type to Update Category

Use

To disburse the open items related to interest and taxes on arrears, assign the prenote type to the relevant update category.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Account OrderDisbursement (Loans) Define Prenote Types for Withhold Categories .


Table 23:

UpdateCat. Prenote Type Offset Prenote Adv Pmt Prenote Type

Adv Pmt Offset Prenote

Select the update category you want to withhold

Enter prenote type Enter offset prenote type

Enter advanced payment prenote type

Enter advance payment offset prenote type




2.6.10.3 Activate the Ensure Selection of Overdue Items on Disbursement Product Attribute (Optional)

Use

Activate this product attribute if you want to ensure that all overdue items are selected on the Withheld tab page of the Disburse Loan program before the activation of a disbursement order.

Procedure

1. Change your checking account product in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product .

2. In the product attributes structure, choose Used Attribute Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Arrears Item .

3. Enable the Ensure Selection of Overdue Items on Disbursement product attribute.4. Save your changes.

2.6.10.4 Define Main Rule Sets for Delivered Error Types

Use

To configure the first response of the system, configure the main rule sets for ErrorTypes LF1 and LF2.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Define Main Rule Set .


Table 24:

Error Type Type of Item First Response

LF1 Ordering Party Post Processing

LF2 Ordering Party Post Processing



2.6.10.5 Assign Return Type to Ruleset

Use

This section describes the settings to assign a return process type to the ruleset assigned to your loan product.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Return Type to Ruleset .


Table 25:

Error Type Type of Item

Enter the ruleset assigned to your loan product Return process with reversal of open item clearing


2.6.10.6 Assign Error Types to Main Rule Sets

Use

To assign an error type to a main rule set, follow the steps described in this section.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Error Types Assign Error Types , enter the following data:

Table 26:

Check Obj Check Result No Amnt Limit Netw. Affil. Error Type

Own Check Own Check LF01 Leave field empty Leave field empty LF1

Own Check Own Check LF02 Leave field empty Leave field empty LF2




2.6.10.7 Configure Own Check for Transaction Types of Disbursement Debit

1. In customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment

Items .2. Select the Own Check checkbox for all your disbursement debit transaction types. The standard debit

transaction types are 020010 and 020014.3. Save your changes.

2.6.10.8 Define Rules for Payment Distribution

Use

To update the definition of rules for payment distribution, follow the steps described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Rules for Payment Distribution .

2. Select the Rule Set you want to modify and go to Processing Sequence.3. Create a new entry with the following data:

Table 27:

Seq. Num Usage Cat.

Next number in sequence 008


2.6.11 Configuration for Capitalization with IoA


To use the functions for capitalization with interest on arrears (IoA) and related taxes, you make the settings described in this section.


2.6.11.2 Configure Capitalization Product Attribute

1. Change your loan account product in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Change Account Product .

2. In the product attributes structure, under Used Attributes, activate the Capitalization product attribute.3. Save your changes.4. Activate your account product.

2.6.11.3 Permit Capitalization for Receivable Condition

Use

To allow capitalization for the receivable condition types, follow the steps below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type .

2. Select the condition type, go to Amount Category and select the Capitaliz. checkbox.3. Save your changes.

2.6.12 Settings for Automatic Extension of Contract (Optional)

Use

To avoid unwanted changes in the payment plan after the automatic extension of contract, it is recommended that you set the same end date for the inpayment and pricing conditions as the end of contract date in the account contracts that you create.

NoteAs an alternative for the recommendation you can create an implementation for the Business Add-In (BAdI) Inpayment Conditions for Automatic Contract Extension (/FSGLO/IOA_COND_AUT_RENWAL_EOC) and activate it in Customizing for Financial Services under, General Localization Settings Interest on Arrears Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) .

For more information about the BAdI, see the corresponding system documentation.



Prerequisites

You have activated the Automatic Extension of Contract product attribute as described in Configure Loan Product Attributes for IoA [page 33].

2.6.13 Activate BAdIs for Interest on Arrears Processing

To enable the system to manage and process interest on arrears (IoA) correctly, you must activate the following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs):

Table 28:

Enhancement Spot Business Add-In Customizing Path

/FSPD/ES_PROCESS_ITEM /FSPD/BN_PROCESS_ITEM Financial Services Account

Management Product Management

Payment Distribution Business Add-

Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Implement Logic for

Process Item

ES_BCA_OR_AF_ORDER_INBOUND BCA_OR_ACCOUNT_ORDER_INBOUND None

2.7 Configuration for Order of Tax on Loans Payment Replanning

2.7.1 Introduction

This section describes the customizing settings that are necessary to process an order of tax on loans payment replanning in localization for banking services.

2.7.2 Configure Product Attributes for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning

Use

To activate and configure the tax on loans payment replanning feature in your account product, make the settings described below.


Procedure

1. Change your loan account product in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product .

2. In the product attribute structure, under Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Loans , activate the Tax on Loan Payment Replanning product attribute.

3. Save your entries.4. Activate your account product.

2.7.3 Define Number Range Interval for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning

Use

To enable the system to assign sequential numbers to the orders of tax on loans payment replanning when creating them, define a number range interval as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Account OrderLocalization Settings Tax on Loans Payment Replanning (Loans ) Define Number Range Interval for Tax on

Loans Payment Replanning .2. Choose Change Intervals pushbuttom and create a new number interval for the order of tax on loans payment

replanning using the data below.

Table 29:

No From No. To No. NR Status Ext

01 Enter the first number of the range

Enter the last number of the range

Leave the field empty. Deselected




2.7.4 Define Condition Types for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning

Use

To process tax on loans payment replanning, you define condition types for the following processes:

● Trigger tax manager● Tax renegotiation repayment

This section describes how you create these condition types.

Procedure

Create Condition Type for Tax Manager Triggering


2. Create a new entry for the condition type for interest using the following data:

Table 30:

Field Entry

Condit. Type Enter a code for your condition type, for example, 999173.

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Tax on LPPR trigger.

Condition Category 900000

Posting +/- Sign Debit Memo

Screen Sequence 105021

Calc. Category Leave the field empty.

Update Category Leave the field empty.

Posting Type Leave the field empty.

Screen Sequence Leave the field empty.

Determ. Time StdCon. Use Conditions for Interest Fixing

Determ. Time Ind.Con Use Conditions at Calculation Time

Ref. Cond. Type Leave the field empty.


Field Entry

Cond. Determin Selected

Number Calendar 3

Tiered/IntAllow Selected

Exch. rate. type Leave the field empty.

Amt Limit PayCurr Deselected

Waiver Method Leave the field empty.

Incl. Cond. Deselected

Totaled Based on Detailed Results

Intercomp. Loan Deselected

Bal. Time Type Leave the field empty.

ChargeEventCat. Event Charge

RestartInf Overlap

Overlap Leave the field empty.

RefIntAss All Reference Interest Rates

One-Time Cond. Deselected

AgreegateCalBas Deselected

Seasonal Limit No Reference to Seasonal Limit

Event AccountBilling Deselected

3. Choose Enter.4. Save your entries.

Create Condition Type for Tax Renegotiation Repayment



Table 31:

Field Entry




Field Entry

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Rec: (PP) Tax on LPPR.




Calc. Category 1555

Update Category GB31

Posting Type Enter C8 or choose your own posting type.



Determ. Time Ind.Con Condition Determination Timepoint as Standard Conditions

Ref. Cond. Type Leave the field empty.

Cond. Determin Deselected

Number Calendar 3

Tiered/IntAllow Deselected

Exch. rate. type M


Waiver Method Leave the field empty.




Bal. Time Type Leave the field empty.

ChargeEventCat. Not Defined

RestartInf Save Restart Information

Overlap Leave the field empty.


Field Entry

RefIntAss For Debit Balances


AgreegateCalBas Deselected



3. Choose Enter.4. In the Dialog Structure, choose the Amount Category node and enter the following data:

Table 32:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 160000

Perc. Fee No Percentage Charge

Other columns Deselect the checkboxes

5. Choose Enter.6. In the Dialog Structure, choose the Date Category node and enter the following data:

Table 33:

Field Entry

Date Cat. 225010: Due Date


2.7.5 Assign condition Types to Condition Group Types

Use

To process financial condition types, you assign all condition types that are relevant for your financial product to a condition group type.

The standard system contains the condition group 240. To meet your system requirements, you can assign the condition types to this standard condition group. Alternatively, you can use your own condition groups for loans repayment.



Prerequisites

You have created condition types for repaying tax on renegotiation in Define Condition Types for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning [page 43].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Group Type .

2. Select the condition group type 240 - Payment: Loans (or your custom condition group type), double-click Condition Type in the Dialog Structure, and add the condition types that you created for tax renegotiation repayment on Define Condition Types for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning [page 43].


2.7.6 Configure Localization Parameters for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning

Use

In the localization parameters, you specify the condition types that the system uses for posting the interest and the prepayment capital when you execute an order of tax on loans payment replanning.

Prerequisites

You have defined the condition types as described in Define Condition Types for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning [page 43].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Configure Localization Parameters , select the following entry:

Table 34:

Column Value

Localization Global


Column Value

Parameter Group ORDER_TAX_LPPR

Parameter Subgroup TAX_MANAGER_TRIGGER

Parameter Name CONDITION_TYPE

2. In the Dialog Structure, under Customer Parameter Values, enter the condition type you defined in the Define Condition Types for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning [page 43] section.


2.7.7 Determine Turnover Classes

Use

To enable the system to process tax on loans payment replanning, determine a turnover class for each of the following processes:

● Settlement● Billing● Repayment

The system requires a 1:1 relationship between logical and real turnover classes.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Turnover Classes for Flexible Account Balances Define Turnover Classes .

2. Choose New Entries and enter data as follows

Table 35:

Turn. Class Description Turnover Class

Agg Assignment Update IA

Enter an identifier, for example, TXR0.

Enter a description for the turnover class, for example, Tax Renegotiation: To Pay.

Select the checkbox.

Assignment via Application

Update via Application

Deselect the checkbox.






Enter a description for the turnover class, for example, Tax Renegotiation: Owed.






Enter a description for the turnover class, for example, Tax Ren.: Paid (Clearing).






2.7.8 Configure Loan Product Attributes for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning

1. Change your loan account product in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Change Account Product .

2. In the product attributes structure, under Used Attributes General Settlement Attributes Relevant to Clearing Logical Turnover Class , assign the following logical turnover classes to real turnover classesas follows:

Table 36:

Logical Turnover Class Real Turnover Class

GB31 Enter the real turnover class created.

3. Save your entries.4. Activate your account product.

2.7.9 Configure Tax Manager for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning

Use

To process tax on loans payment replanning, you define the taxes that the tax manager calculates in the steps below.


Procedure

To configure the Tax Manager, follow the steps described in Configuration for Tax Manager [page 13].

NoteIn the Map Industry-Specific Operations to Tax Item Types [page 17] step, use the condition type you defined in the Define Condition Types for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning [page 43] section.

2.8 Configuration for Direct Debit Localization

2.8.1 Introduction

To use the specific requirements of localization for Direct Debit, you make the Customizing settings described below.

2.8.2 General Settings for Direct Debit

2.8.2.1 Maintain Transaction Type for Payment Items

Use

You do the configuration described below to enable the system to verify if there is available balance in the recipient account (a counterparty's checking account, for example) to pay an installment of an ordering account (a LoC or a Loan account, for example). If the balance is available, the system creates prenotes to reserve the amount to be collected in the recipient account.

NoteIf you already use the transaction type Debit for Collection Authorization Procedure (005000), and for this, the Prenote or the Prenote Required attributes are not used, you must create a new payment advice type. To do that see

Procedure


Items



2. Select the Debit from Collection Authorization Procedure (005000) transaction type, and choose the Details pushbutton

3. In the following sections, check the items described:

Table 37:

Section Item Check

Relevant Checks Prenote Yes

Control Prenote Required Yes


2.8.2.2 Create Payment Advice Type (Optional)

2.8.2.2.1 Introduction

You create a new payment advice type to differentiate the localized direct debit solution from the standard one.

Follow these steps if you already use the transaction type Debit from Collection Authorization Procedure (005000), and for this, the Prenote Required attributes are not used.

2.8.2.2.2 Create Transaction Type for Payment Items


Items2. Select the Debit from Collection Authorization Procedure (005000) transaction type and choose Copy as3. Change Trans. Type and enter a code for your transaction type as required, for example 0049994. In the following sections, check the items described:

Table 38:

Section Item Check

Revelant Checks Prenote Yes

Control Prenot Required Yes



2.8.2.2.3 Create Payment Directive Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Basic Settings Payment Directive Types Define Payment Directive Types


Table 39:

PayDirType PayDirCat. Cash Flow Description of Payment Directive Type

Enter a code for your payment directive type as required, for example 00000102

Add Internal Debit Memo


2.8.2.2.4 Assign Payment Directive Type with Transaction Type

Prerequisites

● You have created a new transaction type as described in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items [page 51]

● You have created a new payment directive type as described in Create Payment Directive Type [page 52]

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Payment OrderAssign a Payment Directive Type with Transaction Types and Medium/PayMeth


Table 40:

PayDirType TT OrdPart TT Recip. Med. Payment Method

Enter the payment directive type that you created in Create Payment Directive Type [page 52]

Enter the Cr: Debit Collection Deposit transaction type (071100)

Enter the transaction type that you created in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items [page 51]

0001 0001




2.8.2.2.5 Assign Offsetting Transaction Type

Prerequisites

You have created a new transaction type as described in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items [page 51].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Payment OrderASsign Offsetting Transaction Types to Transaction Types Assign Offsetting Transaction Types (PO

Dialog)2. Select the Cr: Debit Collection Deposit transaction type (071100) and choose Assign Offsetting transaction

type3. Enter the following data::

Table 41:

Off Transaction Type Desc. Transact. Type Default

Enter the transaction type that you created in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items [page 51]

Deb. Collection Authoriz.


2.8.2.2.6 Define Payment Advice Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Define Payment Advice Type


Table 42:

PA Type Payt Adv. Ty. Desc.

PA catg. Dr./Cr. Acct Symb. Corresp. PayDirType

Enter a code for your payment advice type as required, for example 000131.

Enter a description for your Payment Advice type, for example Direct Debit Order (LOCALIZED).

100000 Dr Debit 00000102



2.8.2.2.7 Maintain Payment Advice Settings

Prerequisites

You have created a payment advice type as described in Define Payment Advice Type [page 53].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Maintain Payment Advice Settings


Table 43:

Bus. Proc. Pr. Rs Ct. PA Type

00300000 00300000 Enter the Payment advice type you created in Define Payment Advice Type [page 53]









2.8.2.2.8 Activate BAdIs for Direct Debit

To enable the system to manage and process interest on arrears (IoA) correctly, you must activate the following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs):

Table 44:

Business Add-In Customizing Path Action

BAdI: Validation of Account Balance for Direct Debit

Financial Services Product

Management Billing Direct Debit

Collections Business Add-Ins

(BAdIs)

Activate

BAdI: Request for Full Collection of Receivables for Direct Debit




(BAdIs)

Activate

BAdI: Calc. of Amount for Lead Days Based Collection (Direct Debit)




(BAdIs)

Activate

BAdI: Prepare Data for PD Dir. Creation for Partial Payment (Direct Debit)




(BAdIs)

Activate

BAdI: Creation of PD Directive (BCA_DD_PDD_CREATE)




(BAdIs)

1. Activate the BAdI Implementation BAdI: To execute Direct Debit based on Country (/FSGLO/BCA_DD_COMMON)

2. Deactivate the BAdI implementation BAdI: To create the payment distribution directive for Direct Debit order(EL_BCA_DD_COMMON)


2.8.3 Account Product Configuration

2.8.3.1 Configure Account Product

1. Change your existing account product or create a new one in Customizingfor Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create / Change

Account Product

Table 45:

Product Attribute Path in the Product Attribute tree


Enable Direct Debit Used AttributesCountry-Specific Attributes


Direct Debit

Required Enable product attribute

Transaction Type Groups / Media

Used AttributesTransaction Type Groups /

Media Postings

Required Enable transaction type 1300 - Credits from Debit Collectors for Media 0001 - Internal

Execution Period (Days) Used AttributesCountry-Specific Attributes


Direct Debit

Required Enter the maximum number of days for overdue payment processing


2.8.4 Direct Debit for Interest on Arrears


To enable the direct debit features for interest on arrears in the system, make the Customizing settings described below.



2.8.4.2 Payment Advice for Interest on Arrears

2.8.4.2.1 Define Process Result Category

1. In Customizingfor Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Define Process Result Category


Table 46:

Field Entry

Bus.Proc. 00300000

Proc. Rslt Cat. Desc Enter a description for your process result category, for example, Billing - Interest on Arrears.

Dr. Dir. Required

Cr. Dir. Not Allowed

Payt Split Deactivated


2.8.4.2.2 Define Process Result Type

Prerequisites

You have created your process result category as described in Define Process Result Category [page 57].

Procedure

1. In Customizingfor Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Define Process Result Type


Table 47:

Field Entry

Pr. Rs Typ Enter a unique identifier for your process result type, for example, 00300070


Field Entry

Pr. Rs Ct. Enter the process result category that you have created in Define Process Result Category [page 57]

Default X


2.8.4.2.3 Maintain Payment Advice Settings for Interest on Arrears

Prerequisites

You have created your process result type as described in Define Process Result Type [page 57]

Procedure

1. In Customizingfor Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Maintain Payment Advice Settings


Table 48:


00300000 Enter the process result category that you have created in Define Process Result Category [page 57]

000121

3. If you have created a new payment advice type as described in !!!! enter the following data:

Table 49:



000131




2.8.4.2.4 Configure Localization Parameters

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Configure Localization Parameters

2. Choose the localization country Global and the parameter group DIRECT_DEBIT, parameter subgroup PAYMENT_ADVICE_DD_ARREARS.


Table 50:

Parameter Name Entry

PAYMENT_ADVICE_TYPE Enter the payment advice type that you have created in Maintain Payment Advice Settings [page 58]

PROCESS_RESULT_TYPE Enter the payment advice type that you have created in Maintain Payment Advice Settings [page 58]


2.8.5 Direct Debit for Taxes

2.8.5.1 Define Process Result Category for Direct Debit for Taxes

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Define Process Result Category


Table 51:

Field Entry

Bus. Proc 00300000

Pr. Rs Ct. Enter a unique identifier for your process result category, for example, 00300041

Proc. Rslt Cat. Desc Enter a description for your process result category, for example, Billing - Taxes

Dr. Dir. Required

Cr. Dir. Not allowed

Party Split X



2.8.5.2 Define Process Result Type

Prerequisites

You have created your process result category as described in Define Process Result Category [page 57].

Procedure

1. In Customizingfor Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Define Process Result Type


Table 52:

Field Entry

Pr. Rs Typ Enter a unique identifier for your process result type, for example, 00300070

Pr. Rs Ct. Enter the process result category that you have created in Define Process Result Category [page 57]

Default X


2.8.5.3 Maintain Payment Advice Settings for Direct Debit for Taxes

Prerequisites

You have created your process result type as described in Define Process Result Category [page 57].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Maintain Payment Advice Settings




Table 53:

Bus. Proc. Pr.Rs Ct. PA Type


000111


000121


000131


000201


000202


000501


000601


000701


2.8.5.4 Assign Condition Type to Process Result Category for Repayment Conditions

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type


2. Find your financial conditions on your account product and fill in the following field:

Table 54:

Field Entry

ProcResCat Enter the process result category that you have created in Define Process Result Category [page 57]


2.8.6 Configuration for Partial Payment


To enable the partial payment features for direct debit in the system, execute the Customizing settings described below.

2.8.6.2 Configure Account Product for Partial Payment

1. Change your existing account product or create a new one in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create / Change

Account Product

Table 55:



Enable Direct Debit Partial Collection



Direct Debit Partial

Collection

Required Enable product attribute





Clearing Categ. for full Collection on Partial DD



Direct Debit Partial

Collection

Optional Define the clearing categories according to your requirements.

NoteThe system does not consider interest on arrears (IoA) amount as a clearing category.

2.8.7 Configuration for Number of Attemps


To enable the number of attempts feature for direct debit in the system, execute the Customizing settings described below.

2.8.7.2 Define Counter Type for Direct Debit and Assign to Counter

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management CountersDefine Counter Types


Table 56:

Field Entry

Counter Type Enter a unique identifier for your counter type, for example, 9999

Count. Type Desc Enter the description for your counter type

Counter Cat. 003

CounterCatDescr Transaction Counter

Assignment Application


Field Entry

Man. Changeable X


4. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Counters Define Counter Type


Table 57:

Field Entry

Counter Enter a unique identifier for your counter type, for example, 999

Count. Desc Enter the description for your counter

Count. Type Enter the same identifier for your counter type, you used in previous step


2.8.7.3 Configure Account Product for Number of Attempts

1. Change your existing account product or create a new one in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create / Change

Account Product

Table 58:



Maximum Number of Attempts



Direct Debit Number of

Direct Debit Attemps

Required Enter the maximum number of attempts. Values must be within the 1 - 9999 range

Counter for Direct Debit Attempts



Direct Debit Number of

Direct Debit Attemps

Required Enter the ID for the counter you created in Define Counter Type for Direct Debit and Assign to Counter [page 63], for example 999




2.9 Configuration for Positive Pay and Stop Payment

2.9.1 Introduction

This section describes how to configure the system to use the implementations of the posting control framework for the positive pay and stop payment services.

2.9.2 Configure Product Attributes for Positive Pay

Use

To use the functions for positive pay on your account, you make the settings described below.

NoteYou can activate the positive pay feature only for checking accounts. That is, you must set the account product group of your account product to “10” (checking account).

Prerequisites

You have created a checking account product.

Procedure


2. In the product attributes structure, choose Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization and activate the Positive Pay product attribute.


3. In the product attributes structure, choose Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Positive Pay , and make the settings for the product attributes as shown below:

Table 59:

Product Attribute Value

Agreement Number Select Display Field

Start of Term Select Required Field

End of Term Select Required Field

Low Threshold Amount Currency Enter the account currency.

Note that you cannot use a currency different from the account currency for the positive pay agreement. If you do that, you get a warning when you save the product and during account maintenance, the system overwrites the low threshold amount currency with the account currency.

Low Threshold Amount Enter an amount as required. Checks with an amount equal to or lower than this amount are automatically paid.

High Threshold Amount Currency Enter the account currency.

Note that you cannot use a currency different from the account currency for the positive pay agreement. If you do that, you get a warning when you save the product and during account maintenance, the system overwrites the high threshold amount currency with the account currency.

High Threshold Amount Enter an amount as required. Checks with an amount equal to or higher than this amount are sent to postprocessing even in the case of full match.

Default Disposition Enter P (Pay) or N (No Pay) as required.

Differentiation Code If required, enter the differentiation code that you defined.

4. Save and activate your product.

2.9.3 Configure Product Attributes for Stop Payment

Use

To use the functions for stop payment on your account, you make the settings described below.



NoteYou can activate the stop payment feature only for checking accounts. That is, you must set the account product group of your account product to “10” (checking account).

Prerequisites

You have created a checking account product.

Procedure


2. In the product attributes structure, choose Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization and activate the Stop Payment product attribute.


2.9.4 Define Agreement Differentiation Codes

Use

For positive pay, you can set up the system to perform additional validations for selected positive pay agreements. To do that, you define differentiation codes and assign them to the relevant positive pay agreements.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localizations Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Positive Pay Define Agreement Differentiation Codes .

2. Create a new differentiation code as required and save your entries.

3. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account Management Account Account Master Data Create/Change Account .

4. On the Positive Pay Agreement tab page, assign the differentiation code to the positive pay agreement as required.

NoteThe validations derived from the differentiation codes have to be set up during the implementation of the posting control framework. For more information, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=http%3A%2F%2Fhelp.sap.com%2Fbankingservices80loc

bankingservices80loc SAP Library Localizations for Banking Services from SAP General Localization Functions Posting Control Posting Control Framework .

2.9.5 Configuration for Posting Control Framework


To use posting control registration for the positive pay and stop payment services, you make the Customizing settings described below.

NoteFor positive pay and stop payment, predefined entries are delivered for object categories and registration types, thus, you do not need to make any settings for them.

2.9.5.2 Define Posting Control Media

Use

For positive pay and stop payment, customers can use different channels (for example, phone, Internet, in person) to register items, such as checks or electronic funds transfers, or take actions upon them (whether to pay or not). To define the possible registration media, you make the settings described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Posting Control Posting Control Framework Define Posting Control Media .

2. Enter an ID and a description for the medium as required.3. Save your entries.




2.9.5.3 Configuration for Data Archiving

2.9.5.4 Archiving of Posting Control Registration of Checks with /FSGLO/CHQ

Context

Make residence time customizing settings from the localizations for banking services and perform standard archiving customizing activities.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Data Archiving Define Residence Time for Checks .

2. Specify the period after which checks are archived for each bank posting area.3. Save your entries.4. Execute the following standard transactions to complete the configuration for the archiving of exemption

orders:1. ○ IRM_CUST - IRM Customizing2. IRM_CAT - IRM Policies3. ILMARA - Audit Area Processing4. IRMPOL - ILM Policies

5.

2.9.5.5 Archiving of Posting Control Registration of EFTs with /FSGLO/EFT

Context

Make residence time customizing settings from the localizations for banking services and perform standard archiving customizing activities.


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Data Archiving Define Residence Time for EFT .

2. Specify the period after which EFT are archived for each bank posting area.3. Save your entries.4. Execute the following standard transactions to complete the configuration for the archiving of exemption

orders:1. ○ IRM_CUST - IRM Customizing2. IRM_CAT - IRM Policies3. ILMARA - Audit Area Processing4. IRMPOL - ILM Policies

5.

2.9.6 Configure Fees and Charges for Posting Control Registration

Use

It is possible to configure the system to charge registration fees for stop payment and positive pay services, for example, using a listener object in the extensible object (XO) framework.

The localization delivers the /FSGLO/CL_PCI_REG_FEE_SAMPLE example class that you can use as a basis for the implementation of your listener object or implement directly, if it suits your needs.

More Information

● For more information about using the class in your implementation and about the class behavior, see the corresponding class documentation in the system.

● For more information about how to implement posting control registration, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc SAP Library Localizations for Banking Services from SAPGeneral Localization Functions Posting Control Posting Control Framework Posting Control RegistrationImplementing Posting Control Registration .





2.9.7 Configuration for Posting Control Validation


To use posting control validation for the positive pay and stop payment services, you make the Customizing settings described below.

2.9.7.2 Configuration for Payment Item


To enable the system to validate payment items during posting control validation, you make the settings described below.

2.9.7.2.2 Configure Payment Note Type for Check Issue Date

Use

The check issue date information is required for validating a check for the positive pay and stop payment services. However, the payment item structure does not have a standard field for check issue date. Thus, you need payment notes that contain this information.

To configure the payment note, you define the payment note type and assign it to the localization parameter as described below.

Procedure

Define Payment Note Type for Check Issue Date

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsBasic Posting Settings Define Types for Structured Payment Notes .

2. Choose New Entries and define a payment note type for the check issue date as required.3. Save your entries.

Assign Payment Note Type to Localization Parameter

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Configure Localization Parameters .

2. Select the parameter for the check issue date, which has the following data:○ Localization: Global


○ Parameter Group: POSTING_CONTROL○ Parameter Subgroup: PAYMENT_NOTE_TYPE○ Parameter Name: CHEQUE_ISSUE_DATE

3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click Customer Parameter Values.4. Enter the payment note type you created as the parameter value.5. Save your entries.

2.9.7.2.3 Configure Transaction Type for Check

Use

To enable the system to process checks during posting control validation, you create a transaction type for checks and assign it to the validation group parameter as described below.

Procedure

Create Transaction Type for Checks


Items .2. Create a new transaction type by copying the existing transaction type 001000 (Debit from Bearer Check

(Undocumented)).3. Ensure that the following checkboxes are selected:

○ Payment Form○ Own Check○ Display Payment Notes

4. Select a payment form type in the Payt Form Type field as required.5. Save your entries.

Assign Check Transaction Type to Validation Group

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Assign Validation Groups to Transaction Types .

2. Choose new entries.3. Enter the following data:

Table 60:

Field Data

Transaction Type Enter the check transaction types as customized in Create Transaction Type for Checks



Field Data

Validation Group CHECK


2.9.7.2.4 Configure Transaction Type for EFT

Use

To enable the system to process electronic funds transfers (EFTs) during posting control validation, you create a transaction type for EFTs and assign it to the validation group as described below.

Procedure

Create Transaction Type for EFTs


Items .2. Create a new transaction type for EFT as required and ensure that the Own Check checkbox is selected.3. Save your entries.

Assign EFT Transaction Type to Localization Parameter

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Assign Validation Groups to Transaction Types .

2. Choose new entries.3. Enter the following data:

Table 61:

Field Data

Transaction Type Enter the EFT transaction types as customized in Create Transaction Type for EFT

Validation Group EFT



2.9.7.3 Configuration for Posting Control Rules


The posting control framework raises its own messages during posting control validation. At the end of the validation process, these error messages must be translated to an own check to ensure that transactional banking can handle these errors and determine how to respond (post, reject, or send the item to postprocessing).

Thus, you must define new own check errors and main rule sets that can be mapped to your own error messages raised by the posting control framework.

2.9.7.3.2 Define Own Check Results

Use

You assign result numbers to application areas and messages for own check as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Define Own Check Results .

2. Create a new entry with the following values:

Table 62:

Field Entry

Check Objects Own Check

Check Own Check

Result No Enter the result number as required.

Appl. Area Enter the message class.

Message Enter the message number.




2.9.7.3.3 Define and Assign Error Types

Prerequisites

You have defined result numbers. For more information, see Define Own Check Results [page 74].

Procedure

Define Error Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Error Types Define Error Types .

2. Create a new entry for your error type as required.3. Save your entries.

Assign Error Type to Result Number

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Error Types Assign Error Types .

2. Create a new entry and assign the result number you created in the Define Own Check Results Customizing activity to your error type.


2.9.7.3.4 Define Main Rule Set

Use

Account Management uses the main rule set for posting control rules to control how the system responds in case of a posting problem.

Prerequisites

You have defined error types. For more information, see Define and Assign Error Types [page 75].

Procedure



2. Choose New Entries.3. Enter the error type you defined in the Define Error Types Customizing activity.4. In the First Response field, enter the response that you want to be executed automatically for a posting

problem.5. Save your entries.

2.9.7.4 Configuration for Posting Control Office


This section describes how to set up the posting control office for the validation process of the positive pay and stop payment services.

2.9.7.4.2 Configure Error Groups for Processing Methods

Use

In this step, you define error groups for positive pay and stop payment to determine whether an item order is processed manually with the Posting Control Desktop, or automatically with the automatic processing function.

Procedure

Define Error Groups for Processing Methods

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Posting Control Office Posting Control Order Item- and Payment Distribution Order Define Error Groups for Processing Methods .

2. Choose New Entries and create an error group as required.3. Save your entries.

Assign Error Groups to Processing Methods

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Posting Control Office Posting Control Order Item- and Payment Distribution Order Assign Error Groups and Amount Limits for Processing Methods .

2. Choose New Entries.3. In the EG Meth field, enter the error group you defined in the Define Error Groups for Processing Methods

Customizing activity.4. Choose Manual and Automatic Processing Method.5. Save your entries.



2.9.7.4.3 Configure Worklist

Define Error Groups for Worklist

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Posting Control Office Worklist Define Error Groups for Worklist .

2. Choose New Entries and define your error group as required.3. Save your entries.

Define Worklist

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Posting Control Office Worklist Define Worklist .2. Choose New Entries and define your worklist as required.3. Save your entries.

Define Distribution Criteria for Worklist

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Posting Control Office Worklist Define Distribution Criteria for Worklist .

2. Choose New Entries.3. In the EG Worklist field, enter the error group that you defined in the Define Error Groups for Worklist

Customizing activity.4. In the Worklist field, enter the worklist that you defined in the Define Worklist Customizing activity.5. Enter other data as required.6. Save your entries.

2.9.7.4.4 Configure Automatic Processing of Posting Control Orders

Define Error Groups for Automatic Processing Control

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Posting Control Office Automatic Processing: Automatic Processing of Posting Control Orders Define Error Groups for Automatic Processing Control .

2. Choose New Entries and create your error group as required.3. Save your entries.


Define Automatic Processing Groups and Assign Priority

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Posting Control Office Automatic Processing: Automatic Processing of Posting Control Orders Define Automatic Processing Groups and Assign Priority .

2. Choose New Entries, create your automatic processing group and assign a priority as required.3. Save your entries.

Assign Error Groups for Automatic Processing Control

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Posting Control Office Automatic Processing: Automatic Processing of Posting Control Orders Assign Error Groups for Automatic Processing Control (Payment Items) .

2. Choose New Entries.3. In the EG AutoPro field, enter the error group you defined in the Define Error Groups for Automatic Processing

Control Customizing activity.4. In the AutoProGrp field, enter the automatic processing group you defined in the Define Automatic Processing

Groups and Assign Priority Customizing activity.5. Enter other data as required.6. Save your entries.

2.9.7.5 Configuration for Response Codes for Account Management


This section describes the configuration steps required for response codes that the posting control framework returns during the validation process.

2.9.7.5.2 Configure Response Codes for Posting Control Framework

Use

You define response codes to identify different type of errors found during posting control validation. These response codes need to be mapped to messages, which determines which message the validation process has to raise in case the posting control framework returns a given response code.



NoteThere are predefined response codes delivered for positive pay and stop payment. You can use these response codes or define new response codes for your own validations.

Procedure

Define Response Codes

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Posting Control Posting Control Framework Posting Control Validation Define Response Codes .

2. Choose New Entries and define your response codes as required.3. Save your entries.

Assign Response Codes to Messages

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Posting Control Posting Control Framework Posting Control Validation Assign Response Codes to Messages .

2. Choose New Entries.3. In the Registration Type field, enter the registration type, which indicates the type of service. For positive pay,

enter POSITIVE_PAY, for stop payment, enter STOP_PAYMENT.4. Enter other data as required.5. Save your entries.

2.9.7.5.3 Assign Response Codes to Result Numbers

Use

To ensure that the Account Management system can interpret the results returned by the posting control framework and determine the required system response after validation, you make the settings described below.

Prerequisites

● You have defined response codes. For more information, see Configure Response Codes for Posting Control Framework [page 78].

● You have defined result numbers. For more information, see Define Own Check Results [page 74].


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Assign Response Codes to Result Numbers .

2. Choose New Entries and enter data as follows:

Table 63:

Field Entry

Registration Type Enter the registration type that you assigned to the response code in the Assign Response Codes to Messages Customizing activity.

RespCode Enter the response code that you defined in the Define Response Codes Customizing activity.

Result No. Enter the result number that you defined in the Define Own Check Results Customizing activity.


2.9.7.6 Define Tolerance for Encoding Errors

Use

For the positive pay service, you can specify an amount for encoding errors that is tolerated by posting control validation for a specific bank posting area and currency.

If posting control validation for positive pay finds a difference between the amount of a registered check and the amount on a check presented for payment, it checks whether this difference is within this tolerated range. In case of such a difference, the posting control validation checks your Customizing settings to decide whether the check should be paid, returned, or sent to postprocessing. In case the difference is outside this tolerated range, the check is not paid by the bank.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localizations Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Positive Pay Define Tolerance Amount for Encoding Error .

2. Choose New Entries and enter a tolerated amount for a specific bank posting area and currency.3. Save your entries.



2.9.8 Configuration for Posting Control Action


To enable the system to determine actions for a processed validation item, you must proceed with the configuration described below.

2.9.8.2 Define Dispositions

Use

To enable the system to use dispositions to determine de final action for a validation item, you define the possible dispositions for each registration type.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localizations Posting Control Posting Control Framework Posting Control Action Define Dispositions for Registration Types .

2. Enter your dispositions as exemplified below:

Example

Table 64:

Registration Type Action Disposition Disposition Description

POSITIVE_PAY P001 Pay

POSITIVE_PAY R001 Return – Refer to Maker

POSITIVE_PAY R002 Return – Counterfeit

POSITIVE_PAY R003 Return – Forged Drawer

POSITIVE_PAY R004 Return – Altered

POSITIVE_PAY R005 Return – Post / Stale Dated

STOP_PAYMENT P001 Pay

STOP_PAYMENT R001 Return



2.9.8.3 Assign Default Dispositions to Positive Pay Agreement

Use

You choose some of the dispositions previously created and use them as default dispositions for Positive Pay.

Prerequisites

You have defined the dispositions for positive pay registration type as described in Define Dispositions [page 81]

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localizations Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Positive Pay Define Default Dispositions for Agreement

2. Enter your default dispositions as exemplified below:

Table 65:

Registration Type Action Disposition Disposition Description

POSITIVE_PAY P001 Pay

POSITIVE_PAY R001 Return – Refer to Maker


2.9.8.4 Assign Dispositions to Result Numbers

Use

To enable the system to determine the action that has to be taken in case the user selects a specific disposition to the item with the postprocessing status you must assign action dispositions to result numbers.

Prerequisites

You have defined the dispositions and own check result numbers as described in Define Dispositions [page 81] and Configuration for Posting Control Rules [page 74].



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localizations Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Assign Dispositions to Result Numbers

2. Make your assignments as per the following example:

Table 66:

Registration Type Action Disposition Result number

POSITIVE_PAY P001 01

POSITIVE_PAY R001 02


2.9.9 Configuration for Stop Payment Notifications


To enable the system to send notifications to the bank clients about the validity status of their Stop payments registers, execute the following configuration steps.

2.9.9.2 Notifications of Check and EFT Stop Payment Registers

2.9.9.2.1 Creation Notification

Use

To enable the system to send Creation notifications, under the POSTING CONTROL REGISTRATION business object type, create a listener object in the Extensive Object Framework (XO) and define a new class implementing the IF_XO_LISTENER_OBJECT interface for the listener object.

More Information

For more information about Extensive Object Framework (XO), see the corresponding documentation in the system.


2.9.9.2.2 Alert and Ended Notifications

2.9.9.2.2.1 Introduction

To select and send notifications of stop payment registers using the reports Select Check Stop Payment Registers for Notification (/FSGLO/REG_NOTIF_CHQ) and Select EFT Stop Payment Registers for Notification (/FSGLO/REG_NOTIF_EFT), execute the following configuration steps:

2.9.9.2.2.2 Customizing of Lead Days for Alert Notifications

Use

NoteThis configuration is required only for Alert notifications. The Alert notifications are used to notify the bank client about registers that are about to expire.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localizations Settings Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Define Lead Days for Stop Payments Notifications


Table 67:

Bank Posting Area (BPA) Posting Control Registration Object Number of Lead Days

Enter the BPA of your choice. Check Enter the number of lead days of your choice, for example, 4

Enter the BPA of your choice. Eletronic funds Transfer (EFT) Enter the number of lead days of your choice, for example, 4


2.9.9.2.2.3 Activate BAdI for Stop Payment Check Notifications

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localizations Settings Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Notifications for Stop Payment Registrations .



2. Activate the enhancement implementation Notifications of Check Stop Payment Registers (/FSGLO/PCI_REG_NOTIF_CHEQUES).

2.9.9.2.2.4 Activate BAdI for Stop Payment EFT Notifications

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localizations Settings Posting Control Posting Control for Account Management Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Notifications for Stop Payment Registrations .

2. Activate the enhancement implementation Notifications of EFT Stop Payment Registers (/FSGLO/PCI_REG_NOTIF_EFT).

2.10 Configuration for Waiver Reasons for Early Withdrawal Penalties (Optional)

2.10.1 Introduction

This section describes the settings that are needed to enable the selection of waiver reasons when performing early withdrawals.

2.10.2 Define Waiver Reasons for Early Withdrawal Penalties

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Account OrderEarly Withdrawal (Time Deposit) Localization Settings Define Penalty Waiver Reasons .

2. For each of the reasons that you want to create, enter the following data:

Table 68:

Field Entry

Penalty Waiver Rsn. Enter a unique identifier of your choice for your waiver reason.

Desc. of Penalty Waiv. Rsn. Enter a description of your choice for your waiver reason.



2.10.3 Configure Time Deposit Account Product

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product / Change Account Product .

2. Create a new account product or select the product that you want to change.3. In the product attribute tree, activate the following attributes:

Table 69:

Product Attribute Path of Product Attribute

Early Withdrawal for Time Deposits Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes

Reason for Penalty Waiver Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes Early

Withdrawal for Time Deposits

4. Optionally, you can limit the reasons that are available for selection for a specific product by opening the Reason for Penalty Waiver attribute and entering a value restriction.


2.11 Configuration for Installment Prepayment

2.11.1 Introduction

This section describes which customizing settings are necessary to process an installment prepayment order in banking services.

2.11.2 Configure Product Attributes for Installment Prepayment

Use

To activate and configure the installment prepayment feature for your product, make the settings described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Produc .



2. Select the product for which you want to activate or configure the installment prepayment feature.3. In the product attribute structure, configure the product attributes as shown in the table below:

Table 70:

Product Attribute Path in Product Attribute Tree Entry

Recalculate Immediately When Change is Made

General Settlement Product

Settings

Selected

Work Rule General Settlement Attributes

Relevant to Clearing

1001 Loan: Payment Planned Principle, Interest - > Repayment

Installment Prepayment Country-Specific Attributes


Activate the feature.

Calculation Method for Installment Prepayment

Country-Specific Attributes

General Localization Installment

Prepayment Request Attributes

Select the calculation method you defined in the Define Calculation Method for Installment Prepayment [page 98] section.

Allow Change to Prepayment Date Country-Specific Attributes



Prepayment Date

Set it to TRUE if you want to allow the user to change the planned prepayment date.

Maximum Offset Days for Prepayment Date




Prepayment Date

Enter the maximum offset days between the prepayment date and the posting date in the Contract Manager.

Working Day Shift for Prepayment Date




Prepayment Date

Select how the system proceeds when the user selects a non-working day for the prepayment date.

Correspondence for Activation Country-Specific Attributes



Correspondence

Indicate whether correspondence is generated for the customer as a result of order activation.



Correspondence for Deactivation Country-Specific Attributes



Correspondence

Indicate whether correspondence is generated for the customer as a result of order deactivation.

Correspondence for Reversal Country-Specific Attributes



Correspondence

Indicate whether correspondence is generated for the customer as a result of order reversal.

Reason for Prepayment Country-Specific Attributes



Reason

Select the default reason for the creation of orders.

You must have defined these reasons in the Define Reasons [page 95] section.

Reason for Deactivation Country-Specific Attributes



Reason

Select the default reason for the deactivation of orders.


Reason for Reversal Country-Specific Attributes



Reason

Select the default reason for the reversal of orders.


Allow Charges for Prepayment Country-Specific Attributes



Indicate whether charges are applicable for creating an installment prepayment order.

PLM Document Type for Locking Product Features




Select the event type you created based on the Define Event Type for Posting Lock Management [page 97] section.




2.11.3 Define Condition Types for Installment Prepayment

Use

To process installment prepayments, you define condition types for the following processes:

● Prepayment order for interest● Prepayment order for capital

Procedure

Create Condition Type for Capital Prepayment


2. Choose Position... and enter the condition type you use for capital repayment, for example, 511010.3. Choose Copy As... Change the values for the Condit. Type and Cond. Type Nameaccording to your needs.4. Choose Enter.5. Choose Copy All to confirm that you want to copy the dependent entries.6. Save your entries.

Create Condition Type for Interest



Table 71:

Field Entry

Condit. Type Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, 901651.

Condition Type Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, PrCond: (PP) Inst Prepaym.




Calc. Category 2010

Update Category 1010

Posting Type E1


Field Entry

PstingType PAdj E1

PstgType NgAdj. E2



Cond. Determin Select the checkbox.

Tiered/IntAllow Select the checkbox.

Exch.rate type M

3. Choose Enter.4. Under Dialog Structure, choose Amount Category and enter the following data:

Table 72:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 115060


Other columns Deselect the checkboxes.

5. Choose Enter.6. Under Dialog Structure, choose Date Category and create the following entries:

Table 73:

Date Cat Desc. Deadline Cat.

220010 Calculation

225010 Due Date


Create Condition Type for Interest Repayment




2. Create a new entry for the condition type for interest repaymentusing the following data:

Table 74:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Rec.: (PP) InstPr.NomInt.




Calc. Category 1555


Posting Type C8

Process Result Type 00300040

Determ. Time StdCon. Use Conditions at Calculation Time


Incl. Cond. Select the checkbox.

Totaled Select the checkbox.

3. Choose Enter.4. Under Dialog Structure, choose Amount Category and enter the following data:

Table 75:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 160000


AmtBaseRed Deselect the checkboxes.

PercReduct Deselect the checkbox.

Waiver Allowed Deselect the checkbox.

Capitaliz. Deselect the checkbox.


Field Entry

DeferralPermittd Select the checkbox.

Permit Extension Select the checkbox.

Permit Skip Select the checkbox.

5. Choose Enter.6. Under Dialog Structure, choose Date Category and create the following entries:

Table 76:

Date Cat Desc. Deadline Cat.

220010 Calculation

225010 Due Date


2.11.4 Configure Localization Parameters for Installment Prepayment

Use

In the localization parameters, you must specify the condition types that are used for posting the interest and the prepayment capital when an installment prepayment order is executed.

Prerequisites

You have defined the condition types as described in Define Condition Types for Installment Prepayment [page 89].

Procedure

Configure Localization Parameter for Interest




2. Select the following entry:

Table 77:

Column Value

Localization Global

Parameter Group INSTALLMENT_PREPAYMENT

Parameter Subgroup CONDITION_TYPE

Parameter Name PREPAYMENT_INTEREST

3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Customer Parameter Values node.4. Enter the condition type you defined for the interest in the Define Condition Types for Installment Prepayment

section.5. Save your entries.

Configure Localization Parameter for Prepayment Capital



Table 78:

Column Value

Localization Global

Parameter Group INSTALLMENT_PREPAYMENT


Parameter Name PREPAYMENT_CAPITAL

3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Customer Parameter Values node.4. Enter the condition type you defined for the prepayment capital in the Define Condition Types for Installment

Prepayment section.5. Save your entries.

2.11.5 Assign Condition Types to Condition Group Types

Use

To process condition types for installment prepayment, you assign the condition types you created for interest and prepayment capital to condition group types.


Prerequisites

You have created the condition types as described in Define Condition Types for Installment Prepayment [page 89].

Procedure

Assign Condition Type for Interest

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Group Types .

2. Select the condition group type used for loan settlement.3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Condition Type node.4. Enter the condition type you created for interest as described in the Define Condition Types for Installment

Prepayment section.5. Save your entries.

Assign Condition Type for Prepayment Capital


2. Select the condition group type used for payment loans.3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Condition Type node.4. Enter the condition type you created for prepayment capital as described in the Define Condition Types for

Installment Prepayment section.5. Save your entries.

2.11.6 Define Assignment Reasons for Individual Conditions

Use

You define reasons for the assignment of individual conditions for information purposes. The assignment reasons help you identify the financial conditions that were created in the contract during the execution of the installment prepayment order.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Assignment Reasons .

2. Choose New Entries.



3. Enter the following reasons:

Table 79:

Assignment Reason Assignment Reason Desc

1 Inst.Prep. Price Adjust 1

2 Inst.Prep. Price Adjust 2


2.11.7 Define Number Range Interval for Installment Prepayment

Use

To enable the system to assign sequential numbers to the installment prepayment orders during creation, you define a number range interval as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Account Order Localization Services Installment Prepayment (Loans) Define Number Range Interval for Installment

Prepayment .2. Choose Edit and create a new interval for the installment prepayment order. You must enter the value 01 as

the number range number.

Table 80:

No From No. To No. NR Status Ext

01 XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX <leave blank> <deselected>

2.11.8 Define Reasons

Use

This section describes how you define reasons for the different actions (creation, deactivation, and reversal of the order) within the processing of installment prepayments.


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Basic Settings Define Reasons .

2. Check if all the reasons you need were created in this activity. If not, choose New Entries to add a new reason.

2.11.9 Assign Reasons to Order Category

Prerequisites

You have defined reasons as described in Define Reasons [page 95].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Basic Settings Assign Reasons to Order Category .

2. If applicable, assign all the reasons that you created based on the Define Reasons [page 95] section to order category nameLOAN_INSTALLMENT_PREPAYMENT.

2.11.10 Setting Up Custom Validations

Use

If required, you can implement validations in the extensible object (XO) framework (transaction XO80) for processing installment prepayment orders.

For Brazil, the validation object VO_INP_PRPAYMT_DATE_VAL is delivered (see Settings Delivered As Standard for Installment Prepayment [page 501]). If you want to implement the same validations, you can assign this validation object to the segment object for installment prepayment as described below.

Procedure

1. Open the extensible object (XO) framework (transaction XO80) and select the Order business object type.

2. On the XO Cockpit screen, go to ORDER Components Segment Objects .3. Double click on LOAN_INST_PREPAYMENT_ITEMS and click on Edit.4. In the Assigned Validation Objects section, choose Add Validation Object.



5. Choose the line with the value VO_INP_PRPAYMT_DATE_VAL, click on it and save.

2.11.11 Define Event Type for Posting Lock Management

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Posting Lock Management Basic Settings Define Event Type .

2. Check if the 520000 (Installment Prepayment) event type exists.○ If it exists, ensure that its values correspond to the settings described in the next step.

○ If it does not exist, choose and select PLM document category 0001 (Account)3. Enter the following data:

Table 81:

Field Value

Event Type 520000

Description Installment Prepayment

Hdr Data tab page

Event Type Class 50

Doc. Clos. Action Automatically

Stand.Doc.Status Active

Acct tab page

Feature Lock 0014 Disbursement Lock

0015 Payment Plan Change

0017 Loan Payoff

0018 Waiver

2.11.12 Set Up Release Process for Installment Prepayment Orders

Use

If required, you can set up an approval process for any status change in the installment prepayment order. To do that, you can configure the release process following the standard procedure for .


For the release process of installment prepayment orders, SAP delivers the release object OR_INP. You can make settings for this release object as described below.

Procedure

1. Assign a release process to the release object OR_INP.You do that in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Order ManagementAccount Order Localization Settings Installment Prepayment (Loans) Release Assign Release Object to Release Procedure .

2. Assign a rule to the individual release steps of the release procedure for the OR_INP release object.You do that in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Order ManagementAccount Order Localization Settings Installment Prepayment (Loans) Release Assign Rule to Release Steps .

3. Assign a release procedure workflow to the release procedures of the release object OR_INP.You do that in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Order ManagementAccount Order Localization Settings Installment Prepayment (Loans) Release Assign Release Procedure to Release Procedure WF .

2.11.13 Define Calculation Method for Installment Prepayment

Use

This section describes how you define a calculation method for installment prepayment.

You then set up how this calculation method works in your implementation of the BAdI: Installment Prepayment Calculation (see Business Add-Ins [page 99]) and assign the method to your product in the Product Configurator (see Configure Product Attributes for Installment Prepayment [page 86]).

Procedure

1. In Customizing forFinancial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Account Order Localization Services Installment Prepayment (Loans) Define Calculation Method for Installment

Prepayment .




Table 82:

Field Value

Calc. Meth. Enter an unique ID for the method.

Inst. Prep. Calc. Method Description Enter the method description.


2.11.14 Business Add-Ins

Use

To adjust the processes for installment prepayment order processing in accordance with your requirements, a number of Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) are available.

You can create and activate your implementations for the following BAdIs:

● BAdI: Installment Prepayment CalculationYou can use this BAdI to calculate the prepayment and remaining amount for the due receivable items during order creation or activation.

● BAdI: Contract Changes for Installment PrepaymentYou can use this BAdI to define new pricing and payment conditions for the contract to adjust the cashflow with the prepaid amounts during order execution.

● BAdI: Creation of CorrespondenceYou can use this BAdI to create correspondence when the status of an order changes.

● BAdI: Authorization CheckYou can use this BAdI to run authorization checks for an order in addition to those available in the standard system.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Account Order Localization Services Installment Prepayment (Loans) Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) .

2. Create and activate an implementation for the BAdI that you need.

More Information

For more information, see the BAdI documentation in the system.


2.12 Configuration for Master Contract Facilities

2.12.1 Define Account Determination for Process Interim Account

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Master Contract Management General Settings Define Account Determination for Process Interim Account .

2. Create a node as First lower level node.3. Create a condition with one of the options: BPA, Cost Object or Currency.4. Create a target with the internal bank account

2.12.2 Define Condition Type

Use

You must define an event controlled condition type that has Fees for Accounts as the Differentiation Category.

Procedure

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type .

2. The standard system contains the condition type 117021 for event charges in the Master Contract. To meet your customer-specific requirements, create your own condition type by copying condition type 117021.

NoteThe condition category must always be 115020.

Table 83:

Field/Checkbox/Radio Button Entry

Condition Type New condition type ID


Calc Category 2060

Charge Event Category Event Charge

3. On the Differentiation Category tab, delete the Master Contract differentiation category.



4. Add the following differentiation category:

Table 84:

Field/Checkbox/Radio Button Entry Optional / Mandatory

Differentiation category L02 – Fees for Account Mandatory

Condition = Mandatory

Dimension Value Request Mandatory

2.12.3 Define Condition Group Types

Use

You must define the one-time fee condition type as an event of the master contract.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Group Types .

2. Select the Condition Group Category: 50 - Evente: Master Contract3. In the dialog structure, choose the Condition Type folder.4. Choose New Entries and enter the following:

Table 85:


Condition type Condition type created in Define Condition Type


2.12.4 Configure Transaction Types


You must define a transaction type for the debit of the one-time fee payment item on the master contract's interim account. You must then define the debit and credit transaction types for the payment order used.


2.12.4.2 Create Transaction Type for Debit on Interim Account

Use

You must define your own one-time fee transaction type for posting to the interim account.

Procedure

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services, Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items .You create your own Transaction Type based on the standard type 110000 (Direct Charge (Paid) as follows:

2. Select Transaction Type 110000 – Debit Charge (Paid)3. Choose the Copy as... pushbutton.4. Choose the Save pushbutton.

2.12.4.3 Assign Transaction Type to One-time Fee Condition Type

Use

Assign the transaction type to the one-time fee condition type that is posted in the interim account.

Procedure

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Transaction Types for Transaction Charges and Event Charges .

2. Choose the New Entries pushbutton.3. Enter the following data:

Table 86:


Condition Type Condition Type created in Define Condition Type

DC1 L02




Diff. Value 001

Transaction Type Transaction Type created in Create Transaction Type for Debit on Interim Account


2.12.4.4 Configure Payment Order Transaction Types (Optional)


The following configuration settings are already in the system as they are pre-configured. However you may configure different transaction types for the payment order that is created from the interim account to the collection account.

2.12.4.4.2 Create Transaction Type for Credit on Interim Account

Use

You can define your own one-time fee transaction type for the posting to the interim account.

Procedure

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Transaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment

Items .You can create your own transaction type based on the standard 071150, Cr from Collection Authorization - Settlement as follows:

2. Select the Transaction Type 071150, Cr from Collection Authorization - Settlement3. Choose the Copy as… pushbutton.4. Choose the Save pushbutton


2.12.4.4.3 Create Transaction Type for Debit on The Collection Account of The One-time Fee

Use

You can create a transaction that is used in the Payment Item of the Interim Account.

Procedure

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Transaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment

Items .2. Select the Transaction Type 005000 – Debit from Collection Authorization Procedure3. Choose the Copy as… button.4. Unmark the relevant check for Prenote5. Mark the control for Call Billing6. Choose A (Other Price/Receivable) for Other P/R7. Save your entries.

Steps 4 and 5 are only required if you also want to use the transaction type for charging the one-time fee to a loan account.You must configure the steps described under Configure Direct Charge Condition Typees as well.

NoteThe one-time fee trigger and posting don’t create a prenote. If you mark the relevant check for the prenote and do not create your own prenote, the item will go into postprocessing.

2.12.4.4.4 Payment Directive Types

Use

You must define a new payment direct type for the one-time fee.

Procedure

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Master Contract Management General Settings Payment Directive Types Define Payment Direct Types .



2. Create a new payment Directive Type by copying the standard directive type 000051003. Save your entries.

2.12.4.4.5 Assign Payment Directive Type to Process Result Categories

You must define a new payment directive type for the one-time fee.

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Master Contract Management General Settings Payment Directive Types Assign Payment Directive Type to Process Result Categories .

2. Create a new entry assigning your payment directive type to process result category 000051003. Mark your entry as Default Values4. Unmark Default Value for the other existing assignment of process result category 000051005. Save your entries.

2.12.4.4.6 Assign Payment Directive Type to Transaction Types and Medium and PayMeth

You must assign the debit and credit transaction types for your payment order, as well as the medium and payment method. To do this you do the following:

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Account Management Order Management Payment Order Assign a Payment Directive Type with Transaction Types and Medium/PayMeth , and create a new entry as

follows:2.

Table 87:

Field Name Entry

PayDirType your defined payment directive type

TT OrdPart your defined debit transaction type

TT Recip. your defined credit transaction type

Med the medium to be used in the payment order

PM the payment method of the payment order



2.12.4.4.7 Assign Offsetting Transaction Types (Internal Processes)

You must enable the debit transaction type that you will use as an offset transaction type for the credit transaction type.

1. In customizing, choose Financial Services Account Management Order Management Payment Order Assign Offsetting Transaction Types to Transaction Types Assign Offsetting Transaction Types (Internal

Processes) .2. Create a new entry with the credit transaction type3. Select the new entry and double click Offsetting Transaction Type Assignment4. Entry your debit transaction type5. Save your entries.

You mark the debit transaction type according to your business needs.

2.12.5 Configure Direct Charge Condition Type for Loans

2.12.5.1 Create Direct Charge Condition Type

You must create the direct charge condition type for your loan account.

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type .

2. Select Condition Type 115060 – Direct Charge (Fixed Amt).3. Click on the Copy as… button.4. Copy all entries.5. Change the Update Category to 2000.6. Save your entries.

2.12.5.2 Assign Direct Charge Transaction Type to Condition Type

You must assign the payment item’s transaction type to the direct charge condition type for charging in your loan account.

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Assign Condition Type to Transaction Type .

2. Choose the New Entries pushbutton.3. In transaction type, fill with the one you created in Create Transaction Type for Debit on Interim Account.4. In condition type, fill with the one created in Create Direct Charge Condition Type.5. Save your entries.



2.12.5.3 Create Receivable Condition Type

Create the receivable condition type for your loan account.

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type .

2. Select the Condition Type 511200 – Receivable: (PP) Charge3. Choose the Copy as... pushbutton.4. Copy all entries.5. Save your entries.

2.12.5.4 Assign the Receivable Condition Type to a Condition Group

To be able to use the receivable condition type, you must to add it to a condition group type.

1. In Customizing, choose Financial Services Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Group Types .

2. Select the condition group type 240 – Payment: Loans3. Open the Condition Type folder.4. Add the condition type created inCreate Receivable Condition Type.5. Save your entries.

2.13 Configuration for Escrow Management

2.13.1 Introduction

This section describes the steps that are needed to configure the escrow solution for use with a customized development that you create.

To customize the escrow solution for generic use, follow the steps below.

2.13.2 Create Transaction Types for Payment Distribution Items

Use

You must define transaction types for payment distribution items that the system uses to control the processing of payment items for escrow.


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Transaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment

Items .2. Choose New Entries and enter data as follows:

Table 88:

Tran Type Desc Transact. Type Long Name Trans. Type

992731 Db: Escrow Outgoing Flood Escrow Outgoing Payments (Insurance)

992732 Db: Escrow Outgoing Escrow Outgoing Payments (Tax)

992810 Escrow: Initial

992820 Escrow: Monthly


2.13.3 Configuration for Payment Distribution

2.13.3.1 Define Payment Distribution Processing Mode

Use

Payment processing for escrow is only available in the synchronous mode of payment distribution. You must define this processing mode as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Payment Distribution Processing Mode .

2. Choose New Entries.3. Select Synchronous PD from the list for the Proc. Mode field.4. Save your entries.



2.13.3.2 Define Payment Distribution Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services choose, Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Payment Distribution Types .


Table 89:

PD Type PD Type Desc Usage Cat. Usage Categ. Desc.

Enter a unique identifier of your choice, for example, 900310.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Escrow Payment - Initial.

Enter the usage category number, for example, 003.

Enter the description of the usage category, for example, Due Item Clearing.


Enter a description of your choice, for example, Escrow Payment - Monthly.

Enter the usage category number, for example, 003.

Enter the description of the usage category, for example, Due Item Clearing.

3. Save your entries..

2.13.3.3 Assign Transaction Types and Reserve Types to Payment Distribution Types

1. Assign the transaction type (Trans Type field), a payment distribution type for offsetting a bank transaction (Offset Type field), a reverse transaction type (Rev. Type field), and a reverse reserve type (Rev Res Type field) to each created payment distribution type in Customizing for Financial Services under, Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Trans. Types and Reserv. Types to Payment Distr. Types .

2. Choose New Entries and enter the following data:

Table 90:

PD Type PD Type Desc Trans Type Offset Type Rev. Type Res. Type Rev Res

900310 Escrow Payment-Initial

992810 042900 042804 0543 0643

900320 Escrow Payment-Monthly

992820 042900 042804 0543 0643



2.13.3.4 Define Transaction Types for the OIM System

1. Define transaction types for the Open Item Management (OIM) system in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System .

2. Choose New Entries, and enter the following data:

Table 91:

Trsn Type Trsn Type Desc

GE11 Debit Position for Escrow Payment - Initial

GE21 Debit Position for Escrow Payment - Monthly


2.13.3.5 Assign Transaction Types to Payment Distribution Types

Prerequisites

You have defined payment distribution types, and created transaction types for the OIM System.

Procedure

1. Assign the transaction types you created for the OIM system to the usage category of the relevant payment distribution types in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Trans. Types for OIM System to Payment Distr. Types


Table 92:

Usage Cat. Trsn Type Trsn Type Desc

003 GE11 Debit Position for Escrow Payment - Initial

003 GE21 Debit Position for Escrow Payment - Monthly




2.13.3.6 Define Rules for Clearing Open Items

Prerequisites

You have defined transaction types in Customizing for Account Management, under Product Management Payment Distribution Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System .

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Rules for Clearing Open Items .

2. Select a distribution step rule.3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Criteria node.4. Select a sort criterion as Sort Crit: 2 Description of Sort Criterion: Transaction Type.5. In the Dialog Structure, double-click Order node.6. Choose New Entries and enter data as follows:

Table 93:

Field Entry

Value of Sort Criterion Field Enter the code of the transaction type created for the escrow initial and monthly payments. This code is defined in your OIM system. For example, GE11 for escrow initial and GE21 for escrow monthly payment.

Order num. Define the order of the clearing process. For example, if you want to clear escrow initial payment first that has GE11 defined as the transaction code defined in the OIM system, then, enter 1 in this field corresponding to GE11 as the value of the sort criterion.


2.13.3.7 Define Rules for Payment Distribution

Use

To update the definition of rules for payment distribution, follow the steps described below.


Procedure


2. Select the Rule Set: 40.3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Processing Sequence node.4. Choose New Entries and enter the following data:

Table 94:

Seq. Num Usage Cat. Distribution Step Rule Description of Distribution Step Rule

Next number in sequence 003 30

This is the same distribution step rule that you defined for clearing open items

Sort by Due Date, Then by Transaction Type


2.13.3.8 Assign Return Type to Ruleset

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Return Type to Ruleset .


Table 95:

Rule Set Ret. Type

Enter the ruleset that you used while defining rules for payment distribution.

Return process with reversal of open item clearing


2.13.3.9 Define Derivation Rules for Payment Distribution

Use

You must map the rule set created for payment distribution with the product.



Procedure


2. Choose the parent node and create a new node as the last lower-level node.3. Under Condition, enter the following data:

Table 96:

Field Entry

Condition Field dervatParam1

Condition Cat. Equal

Value LOAN_ESCR

4. Under Target, enter the following data.

Table 97:

Field Entry

Rule Set 40


2.13.4 Configuration for Turnover Classes

2.13.4.1 Define Turnover Classes

Use

To enable the system to process escrow payments, you must define turnover classes for each for the following:

● Escrow Initial Payments● Escrow Monthly Payments● Insurance Payments● Tax Payments

Procedure



2. Choose New Entries.3. Enter data as follows:

Table 98:


ES10 Escrow Initial: To Pay

ES11 Escrow Initial: Owed

ES12 Escrow Initial: Paid

ES20 Escrow Monthly: To Pay

ES21 Escrow Monthly: Owed

ES22 Escrow Monthly: Paid

ES30 Escrow Initial Incoming

ES31 Escrow Monthly Incoming

ES40 Insurance: To be paid

ES50 Tax Premium: To be paid

4. Select the appropriate values for the Assignment and Update columns.5. Save your entries.


Use

For each turnover class that you define for escrow payments, you must assign transaction types that you have created. By assigning transaction types to the turnover classes, you define different derivation rules for each turnover class as described below.

Prerequisites

● You have defined turnover classes. For more information, see Define Turnover Classes [page 113]● You have defined transaction types. For more information, see Create Transaction Types for Payment

Distribution Items [page 107]



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Turnover Classes for Flexible Account Balances Define Derivation Rules for Turnover Classes .

2. Right-click the first node with the <No Condition Defined> condition and choose Create As Last Lower-Level Node .

3. Choose the Create push button in the Condition group box and enter the following data:

Table 99:

Field Entry


Condition Cat Equal

Value Enter the transaction type to be assigned to the turnover class.

4. Choose the Create push button in the Target group box and enter the turnover class to which you want to assign the transaction type in the Turnover Class field.


2.13.4.3 Assign Turnover Classes and Condition Group Types

Use

For each turnover class that you define for escrow payments, you must assign condition group types.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Turnover Classes for Flexible Account Balances Assign Turnover Classes and Condition Group Types .

2. Choose the New Entries and enter the following data:

Table 100:

Turn. Class DescTurnCls Con.Gr.Typ CoGrTyDesc

ES30 Escrow Initial Incoming

999351 Escrow Outgoing FC


Turn. Class DescTurnCls Con.Gr.Typ CoGrTyDesc

ES31 Escrow Monthly Incoming


ES40 Insurance: To be paid


ES50 Tax Premium: To be paid


3. Select the Assignment column as required.4. Save your entries.

2.13.5 Define Posting Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Maintain Posting Types .


Table 101:

Field Entry

PT Enter the posting type defined, for example O1.

Credit Memo Select based on the posting type

Proc Enter the process number, for example 0010

Desc. Posting Type Enter the description for the posting type, for example, Esc for flood.


2.13.6 Assign Transaction Types to Posting Types

Use

You must assign the transaction types that you create for escrow with the posting types maintained.



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Assign Transaction Types to Posting Types .


Table 102:

Field Entry

PT Enter the posting type defined, for example O1.

Tran Ty Enter the corresponding transaction type that you have created, for example, 992731

Desc. Transact. Type Enter the description for the transaction type, for example Db:Escrow Outgoing Flood


2.13.7 Define Condition Types for Escrow

Use

To process escrow payments, you define condition types for the following processes:

● Insurance premium payment● Property tax payment● Initial payment● Monthly payment

To create these condition types, follow the procedure as described below:

Procedure


2. Expand Condition Type node in the Dialog Structure.



Table 103:

Cond Type Condition Type Name

CondCat Post.+/- ScnSeq CC UpdateCat Posting Type

999311 Escrow FC Insurance Flood

815010 Select the appropriate value.

115011 9090 GE40 O1

999312 Escrow FC Prop Tx


115011 9090 GE40 O2

999331 Escrow Initial Payment


160001 8080 GE11 O3

999332 Escrow Monthly Payment


160001 8080 GE11 O4


NoteThe condition types described in this procedure are template condition types. For these condition types, you must use the same values as given for Amount Category, Date Category, Differentiation Category, Bonus, Waiver, or Master Contract under the Dialog Structure.

2.13.8 Assign Escrow Condition Types to Condition Group Types

Use

To process escrow condition types, you assign all condition types that you created for escrow to a relevant condition group type.

Procedure


2. Select the Condition Group Category as L.



3. In the dialog structure, choose the Condition Type folder.4. Choose New Entries and enter the following:

Table 104:

Field Entry

Condition Type Name and Condition Type Enter the condition types that you created for escrow insurance and escrow tax

5. Select the 6: Payment Loans Condition Group Type.6. In the dialog structure, choose the Condition Type folder.7. Choose New Entries and enter the following:

Table 105:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Enter the condition types that you created for escrow initial and monthly payments


2.13.9 Configuration for Product Attributes


You have the following possibilities when you configure the product:

● Escrow account is same as the loan account● Escrow account is different than the loan account

There are two sets of attributes available:

● Escrow Payment Agreement for the escrow account● Escrow Account for the loan account

NoteIf the product must function as both escrow and loan, you must enable both sets of attributes, Escrow Payment Agreement and Escrow Account. To enable both sets of attributes, you must configure product attributes for both escrow account and loan account as described in the following sections.


2.13.9.2 Configure Product Attributes for Escrow Account

Use

To enable the system to process escrow payments, configure the product attributes for your escrow account product as described in this section.

Procedure


2. Select Current Version, enter the product name, and press Enter .3. Press Enter .

4. Under Used Attributes Country Specific Attributes General Localization Escrow Payment Schedule Escrow Payment Agreement , activate the following product attributes:

Table 106:

Product Attribute Group Product Attribute Required/Optional

General Data Agreement Number Required

Duration of Agreement Required

Unit of Agreement Duration Required

End of Agreement Term Required

Fixed End of Term Required

Periodicity Period Required

Period Unit - Day Optional

Period Unit - Week Optional

Period Unit - Month Optional

Period Unit - Year Optional

Monday Optional

Tuesday Optional

Wednesday Optional

Thursday Optional



Product Attribute Group Product Attribute Required/Optional

Friday Optional

Saturday Optional

Sunday Optional

Day in Month Optional

Calendar Month Optional

Working Day Shift Optional

2.13.9.3 Configure Product Attributes for Loan Account

Use

To enable the system to process payments, configure the product attributes for your loan account product as described in this section.

Procedure


2. Select Current Version, enter the product name, and press Enter .3. Press Enter .

4. Under Used Attributes Country Specific Attributes General Localization Escrow Account , activate the following product attributes:

Table 107:

Product Attribute Required/Optional

Bank Country Optional

Bank Key Optional

Account Number Optional

Contract Currency Optional

Differentiation Characteristic Optional



IBAN Optional

ID Key Optional

Identification Optional

Propose Loan Account as Escrow Account Optional

2.13.10 Configure Escrow Implementation

Use

You must define the mode of operation of escrow servicing. Escrow servicing can be done externally or internally by the bank. You define a mapping between the implementation class in which you perform escrow servicing and the communication technology used to interact with the escrow account.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services choose, General Localization Settings Escrow ManagementGeneral Settings Configure Escrow Implementation , click New Entries.


Table 108:

Field Entry

Object Type Name Enter the implementation, for example, the class or interface name.

Technique. Enter the code for the communication technology used, for example, 03.

Active If you make multiple entries, select the field to specify which entry stands currently active in the system.

3. Press Backspace .4. Save your entries.



2.13.11 Activate BAdI for Escrow Payment Processing

Use

The following Business Add-In (BAdI) is available for implementation for calculating the initial amount of an escrow account.

Table 109:

Business Add-In Customizing Path

/FSGLO/ESCR_INITIAL_AMOUNT_EPS Financial Services General Localization Settings

Escrow Management Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdI:

Calculating Initial Amount

NoteThe implementation of this BAdI is optional.

More Information

For more information, see the BAdI documentaion in the system.

2.13.12 FICA Customizing

The table TFK033D (Account determination: Data ) is maintained for the creation of new transaction type in FICA.

For newly configured clearing category in TRBK, corresponding transaction type is maintained in FICA. During execution, the system calls different events which further call the following customizing to find the value of Transaction Type depending on the keys.

Run the SE11 transaction, and select Database Table: TFK033D for the following customizing:

Table 110:

MAN DT APP LK BUB ER KTOPL KEY 01 KEY 02 KEY 03 KEY 04 KEY 05 FUN01 FUN02 FUN04

511 S 2640 XSTCLNT100

GE11 GE11 0010 US01

511 S 2610 CANA US01 01 GE11 0010 0000800001


MAN DT APP LK BUB ER KTOPL KEY 01 KEY 02 KEY 03 KEY 04 KEY 05 FUN01 FUN02 FUN04

511 S 2611 CANA US01 01 GE11 0000141010

511 S S000 CANA US01 01 GE11 0000140001

511 S S001 CANA US01 01 GE11 0010

511 S 2640 XSTCLNT100

GE21 GFE1 0010 US01

511 S 2610 CANA US01 01 GE21 0010 0000800001

511 S 2611 CANA US01 01 GE21 0000141010

511 S S000 CANA US01 01 GE21 0000140001

2.14 Configuration for Payment Advice

2.14.1 Introduction

This section describes the standard settings to configure the payment advice solution.

2.14.2 Create New Payment Advice Category

1. Create a new payment advice category in Customizing for Financial Services under Account ManagementProduct Management Payment Advice Counterparty Define Payment Advice Category .


Table 111:

PA Catg Dr. Cr. Impl. Class AD Act / Pasv PAC Description

Pymt Method

L00001 Possible Possible /FSPAM/_CARRIER

Customer Account

Active Brazilian Bank Transfer

0001




2.14.3 Link Payment Advice Category to Corresponding Memory Objects

1. Create a link between the payment advice category and the corresponding memory object in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Payment Advice CounterpartyMap Payment Advice Category and Tables .


Table 112:

Payment Advice category Table Name

L00001 /FSLBR/CP_ACCD


2.15 Configuration for Regional Compliance

This section describes how to configure your system to enable regional compliance.

2.15.1 General Settings for Regional Compliance

This section describes general settings for regional compliance.

2.15.1.1 Configure Product Attributes for Region Assignment

To enable the system for region assignment, configure the product attributes for your account product as described in this section.

Procedure

Procedure

1. Change your account product in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product .


2. Under Used Attributes Country Specific Attributes General Localization State Assignment , activate the following product attributes:○ Banking Category○ Banking Category Description○ Additional Identifier○ Country○ Region○ Valid From○ Valid To

3. Save and activate your account product.

2.15.1.2 Define Custom Banking Categories and Subcategories

Standard categories and subcategories are provided, but you can also define your own, as described in the following documentation.

2.15.1.2.1 Define Banking Categories in BRFplus (Optional)

Context

The following procedure describes how to define custom banking categories in Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus).

NoteThe standard banking categories are available in the system application /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG in the Default Categories (CATEGORY_DEFAULT_TABLE) decision table.

Procedure

1. Call BRFplus using transaction brfplus.

2. Search for the customizing application /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES.

3. In the navigation tree, choose /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES Expression Decision Table and select the Custom Categories (CATEGORY_CUSTOMIZING_TABLE) decision table.

4. Select Edit and then enter the required category IDs and descriptions in the table.5. Save and activate your entries.



2.15.1.2.2 Define Banking Subcategories in BRFplus (Optional)

Context

The following procedure describes how to define custom banking subcategories in BRFplus.

NoteThe standard banking subcategories are available in the system application /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG in the Default Subcategories (SUBCATEGORY_DEFAULT_TABLE) decision table.

Procedure



3. In the navigation tree, choose /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES Expression Decision Table and select the Custom Subcategories (SUBCATEGORY_CUSTOMIZING_TABLE) decision table.

4. Select Edit and then enter the required subcategory IDs and descriptions in the table.5. Save and activate your entries.

2.15.2 Configuration for Region Determination

This section describes how to configure region determination.

2.15.2.1 Define Custom Processing Layer for Process Orchestration

You have to define a custom processing layer that is responsible for orchestrating region determination. This processing layer is responsible for the following tasks:

● Retrieving the input data for region determination, for example, contract data from Account Management (FS-AM), business partner data from Business Partner (FS-BP), and collateral data from Collateral Management (FS-CMS), and feeding this data to BRFplus.

● Receiving the BRFplus output and returning it to the relevant business application (for example, Account Management).

To create this processing layer, you can use SAP Process Object Builder. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Process Object Builder on SAP Help Portal at https://help.sap.com.


https://help.sap.com

2.15.2.2 Configuration of BRFplus Applications for Region Determination

The following table provides an overview of the BRFplus applications that are provided for region determination:

Table 113: BRFplus Applications for Region Determination

Technical Name Use

/FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG This system application contains, for example, default banking categories and subcategories, and functions for retrieving and validating categories and subcategories. It also contains the region determination output table for returning the determined region per category to the custom processing layer that orchestrates region determination.

You cannot change anything in this application. To add your own content (for example, custom categories and subcategories) and to define the rules for region determination, use the customizing application described below.

/FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES This customizing application contains empty rulesets and decision tables that allow you to configure region determination according to your requirements.

In this application, for example, you define the rules for region determination and all custom banking categories and subcategories for which the region may need to be determined.

/FSGLO/LR_CATEGORY_OBJECTS

/FSGLO/LR_SUBCATEG_OBJECTS

/FSGLO/LR_BANK_OBJECTS

/FSGLO/LR_BP_OBJECTS

/FSGLO/LR_CONTRACT_OBJECTS

/FSGLO/LR_COLLATER_OBJECTS

/FSGLO/LR_REGIONDET_OBJECTS

These system applications contain the required input parameters (for example, bank attributes and business partner attributes) and output parameters (for example, region attributes) that are used by the system application and customizing application.

Note that you cannot add parameters to these applications. If you require additional parameters, create a new custom application.

2.15.2.2.1 Define Region Determination Rules in BRFplus

Context

The following procedure describes how to define region determination rules in BRFplus.



Procedure



3. In the navigation tree, choose /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES Expression Decision Table and select the Determine Region (DETERMINE_REGION) decision table.

4. Select Edit and then enter the required rules in the table.5. Save and activate your entries.

ExampleIn this example, if the original amount financed is more than or equal to $10,000 and the bank is a regional bank, the applicable region is taken from the bank branch location. Otherwise, the applicable region is taken from the business partner location at account origination. This rule applies to all categories and subcategories.

To define this rule in the Determine Region (DETERMINE_REGION) decision table, you make the following entries:

Table 114: Example 1: Region Determination Rule

Category ID Subcategory ID Bank Type Limit Amount Country Location

No entry No entry =00 (Regional Bank) >=10,000.00 USD Bank Branch Country

No entry No entry =00 (Regional Bank) <=10,000.00 USD BP Original Location Country

No entry No entry =01 (National Bank) No entry BP Original Location Country

Note that the columns for category ID and subcategory ID are empty because this rule applies to all categories and subcategories.

In the next example, the rule is defined as follows:

● If the category is 001 and the subcategory is 001 or 002, and the bank is a regional bank, then the region is taken from the bank branch location.

● If the category is 001, and the subcategory is 001 or 002, but the bank is a national bank, the region is taken from the current location of the business partner.

● If the category is 001 and the subcategory is neither 001 nor 002, the region is taken from the original location of the business partner, for any type of bank (regional or national).

● If the category is different to 001, the region is taken from the collateral location, for any type of bank and any subcategory.

This rule is defined as follows in the decision table:

Table 115: Example 2: Region Determination Rule

Category ID Subcategory ID Bank Type Country Location Region Location

=001 =001; =002 =00 (Regional Bank) Bank Branch Country Bank Branch Region


Category ID Subcategory ID Bank Type Country Location Region Location

=001 =001; =002 =01 (National Bank) BP Current Location Country

BP Current Location Region

=001 <>001; <>002 No entry BP Original Location Country

BP Original Location Region

<001> No entry No entry Collateral Location Country

Collateral Location Region

2.15.2.2.2 Region Determination Process Flow in BRFplus

The following documentation provides an overview of the process flow in BRFplus for region determination.

Note that the following abbreviations have been used in the documentation:

● /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG application: system application● /FSGLO/LOR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES application: customizing application

Process

1. BRFplus receives the required input parameters from the custom processing layer (see Define Custom Processing Layer for Process Orchestration [page 127]).For example, bank attributes, business partner information, and the banking categories and subcategories for which the region needs to be determined.

2. BRFplus checks the validity of the received categories.The system executes the Validate Categories (VALIDATE_CATEGORY) function in the system application. This function checks if each category received as input is valid, that is, it exists in the corresponding tables in BRFplus.To validate the categories, it calls the Get Categories (GET_CATEGORIES) function in the system application. This function uses the corresponding rulesets to return the list of categories defined in the Custom Categories (CATEGORY_CUSTOMIZING_TABLE) table in the customizing application (see Define Banking Categories in BRFplus (Optional) [page 126]) and Default Categories (CATEGORY_DEFAULT_TABLE) table in the system application.

3. For each valid category, the system determines the region using your customized region determination rules (see Define Region Determination Rules in BRFplus [page 128]).The process flow is as follows:1. The system calls the Determine Applicable Regions (DETERMINE_APPLICABLE_REGIONS) function in the

customizing application.2. This function executes the Determine Applicable Regions (DETERMINE_APPLICABLE_REGIONS) ruleset

(customizing application). A loop expression is executed and the rules defined in the Determine Region (DETERMINE_REGION) decision table are applied to assign the corresponding region for each category and subcategory.



4. BRFplus returns the determined country and region for each category and subcategory from the Region Determination Output (REGION_DETERMINATION_OUTPUT) table in the system application to the custom processing layer.

2.15.2.2.3 Enhancement of Category Retrieval and Validation

The logic for calling BRFplus is defined in the Business Add-In BAdI: Category Retrieval and Validation (/FSGLO/LOCAL_RULES_CONFIG). You can define your own custom implementation of this BAdI to integrate a different rules engine or to enhance the logic for defining and validating categories and subcategories.

For more information, see Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Regional Compliance Region Validation Business Add Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Category Retrieval and Validation .

2.15.3 Configuration for Account Validations Based on Region-Specific Rules

This section describes the customizing settings that you do to enable account validations according to the region assignment in banking services.

SAP provides default account validations that considers the region of the account, additionally you can create different account validations. For more information on how to create other account validations see Configuration for Custom Regional Validations [page 149].

Prerequisites

You have activated the product attributes as described in Configure Product Attributes for Region Assignment [page 125].


2.15.3.1 Configuration for Financial Conditions Validations

To enable the system to perform validations for financial conditions according to rules defined for banking categories and subcategories, you need to assign condition types to banking categories and subcategories. This section describes how to make these settings.

2.15.3.1.1 Assign Condition Types to Banking Category and Banking Subcategory

To enable the system to validate the financial condition according to rules defined to a banking category and banking subcategory, follow the procedure described below.

Prerequisites

You have defined the condition types in Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Financial Services Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Country-Specific Settings State Compliance Assign Condition Type to Sub Category .

2. Select Change, then choose the New Entries pushbutton and enter the following data to each condition type that needs to be validated:

Field Entry

CondTyp. Enter the Condition Types to be validated.

Bank Categ 001

Bank Subct Enter the banking sub category that is relevant for your condition type. The existing banking sub category are the following:○ 002 Interest○ 003 Payoff Request Charge○ 004 Overdue Payment Charge○ 005 Bad Check Fee



Field Entry

○ 007 Lien Release Fee○ 008 Contract Copy Fee○ 009 Deferral Charge


2.15.3.1.2 Configurations in BRFplus

You use Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) applications to define region-specific rules for your business processes. During certain business transactions, the system calls process applications in BRFplus, which can validate some criteria against region-specific rules. For the validation, the BRFplus process application calls a customizing application, where the region-specific rules are defined. After validation, BRFplus returns the output parameters back to the calling application in the SAP system.

This section describes how to customize region-specific rules in BRFplus customizing applications.

2.15.3.1.2.1 Configuration for Interest Calculation Method Validation

To enable the system to validate the financial condition for interest calculation method, follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_INT_CAL_METHOD_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_INT_CAL_METHOD_RULES Expression Decision Table , open the decision table INTEREST_CALC_METHOD.

4. Choose Edit and enter the following data in Table Contents for each rule to be validated:

Field Entry

COUNTRY Enter the country that is relevant for the rule.

REGION Enter the region that is relevant for the rule.

ORIG_AMOUNT Enter the original committed amount if it is relevant for the rule.


Field Entry

PRODUCT Enter the account product if it is relevant for the rule.

EVALUATION_DATE Enter the validity of the rule.

INTEREST_CALC_METHOD Enter the calculation method that is allowed.

5. Save your entries and activate.

More information

For more information about the different objects in BRFplus (applications, decision tables, functions, rulesets), on the General screen area for the object, select the Documentation tab page.

2.15.3.1.2.2 Configuration for Interest Rate Validation

To enable the system to validate the financial condition for interest rate, follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS+).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_MAX_INT_RATE_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_MAX_INT_RATE_RULES Expression Decision Table , open the decision table MAX_INTEREST_TABLE.


Field Entry






MAX_INTEREST_RATE Enter the maximum interest rate that is allowed.




More Information


2.15.3.1.2.3 Configuration for Exponential Interest Calculation Validation

To enable the system to validate the financial condition for exponential interest calculation, follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_EXP_INT_CALC_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_EXP_INT_CALC_RULES Expression Decision Table , open the decision table EXP_INTEREST_CALC_DT.


Field Entry




CONTRACT_INTEREST Enter the contract interest rate if it is relevant for the rule.



EXPONENTIAL_INTEREST_CALC Enter True if the exponential interest calculation is allowed or False if the exponential interest calculation is not allowed.



More Information


2.15.3.1.2.4 Configuration for Payoff Request Charge Validation

To enable the system to validate the financial condition for payoff request charge, follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_PAYF_REQ_CHRG_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_PAYF_REQ_CHRG_RULES Expression Decision Table , open the decision table /FSGLO/LR_PAYF_REQ_CHRG_TABLE.


Field Entry






ALLOW_PAYOFF_CHARGE Enter True if payoff request charge is allowed or False if payoff request charge is not allowed.


More Information




2.15.3.1.2.5 Configuration for Lien Release Fee Validation

To enable the system to validate the financial condition for lien release fee, follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_LIEN_REL_FEE_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_LIEN_REL_FEE_RULES Expression Decision Table , open decision table LIEN_RELEASE_FEE_TABLE.


Field Entry





ALLOW_LIEN_RELEASE_FEE Enter True if lien release fee is allowed or False if lien release fee is not allowed.


More Information



2.15.3.1.2.6 Configuration for Overdue Payment Charge Validation

To enable the system to validate the financial condition for overdue payment charge, follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_OVERDUE_PYMNT_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_OVERDUE_PYMNT_RULES Expression , open decision table OVERDUE_PAYMENT_CHARGE_DT.


Field Entry






OVERDUE_PYMNT_CHARGE_AMOUNT Enter the maximum overdue payment charge amount that is allowed.

OVERDUE_PYMNT_CHARGE_PERCENT Enter the maximum overdue payment charge percentage that is allowed.


More Information




2.15.3.1.2.7 Configuration for Bad Check Fee Validation

To enable the system to validate the financial condition for bad check fee, follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_BAD_CHECK_FEE_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_BAD_CHECK_FEE_RULES Expression Decision Table , open decision table BAD_CHECK_FEE_DT.

4. Choose Edit and enter the following data in Table Contents to each rule for be validated:

Field Entry






BAD_CHECK_FEE_AMOUNT Enter the maximum bad check fee amount that is allowed.

BAD_CHECK_FEE_PERCENTAGE Enter the maximum bad check fee percentage that is allowed.


More Information



2.15.3.1.2.8 Configuration for Contract Copy Fee Validation

To enable the system to validate the financial condition for contract copy fee, follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_CONTR_COPY_FEE_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_CONTR_COPY_FEE_RULES Expression Decision Table , open decision table CONTRACT_COPY_FEE_TABLE.

4. Choose Edit and then enter the following data in Table Contents to each rule for be validated:

Field Entry





CONTRACT_COPY_FEE_AMOUNT Enter the counter of contract copy fee that is relevant for the rule.


COPY_FEE_CHARGE_AMOUNT Enter the maximum contract copy fee amount that is allowed.

5. Save your entries and validate.

More Information




2.15.3.1.2.9 Configuration for Deferral Charge Validation

To enable the system to validate the financial condition for deferral charge, follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_DEFERRAL_CHRG_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_DEFERRAL_CHRG_RULES Expression Decision Table , open decision table DEFERRAL_CHARGE_TABLE.

4. Choose Edit, then enter the following data in Table Contents to each rule to be validated:

Field Entry





CONTRACT_INTEREST Enter the contract interest rate if it is relevant for the rule.


DEFERRAL_CHARGE_AMOUNT Enter the maximum deferral charge amount that is allowed.


More Information



2.15.3.2 Configuration for Cashflow Ratio

This section describes how to configure the cashflow ratio for different effective interest rate calculations.

2.15.3.2.1 Create Cash Flow Ratio Variant

The variant of cashflow ratio describes the business environment of the relevant cashflow key figure for the effective interest rate calculation. To configure these variants, follow the steps below:

Procedure

1. In the SE11 transaction, select the BCA_DOM_CFR_VARIANT domain.

2. Choose the Change pushbutton.3. Under the Goto menu, choose Fixed Value Append and create a new append. Use the customer namespace,

for example, Z>domain_name>.

4. In the Value Range tab, define the variant IDs required for your business needs. The variant IDs can represent regions, for example.


2.15.3.2.2 Implement BAdI for Effective Yield Reason Code

To map the internal codes of the cashflow ratio variants through services calculations and have the specific reason codes, implement BAdI: FS_TB_MV_GDT_EFF_YLD_REAS_C.

Procedure

1. In the SE18 transaction, display the BAdI: FS_TB_MV_GDT_EFF_YLD_REAS_C.

2. Create a new BAdI Implementation with the information below. Name it using the customer namespace, for example, Z<your enhancement implementation>.

3. Save the object in your package.4. Select your enhancement implementation and name your BAdI implementation using the customer

namespace, for example, Z<your enhancement implementation>.

5. Save the object in your package.6. At your new enhancement implementation, choose Implementing Class.7. Implementing the mapping for the effective reason code according to your needs as described below:



Method Short Description

IF_FS_TB_GDT_EFF_YLD_REAS_C~MAP_EXT2INT Maps external to internal representation

IF_FS_TB_GDT_EFF_YLD_REAS_C~MAP_INT2EXT Maps internal to external representation

2.15.3.2.3 Define Transaction Types for Effective Interest Rate Calculation

Banking services from SAP standard development uses transaction types to define the relevant key figures for the effective interest rate calculation. You maintain the mapping entries as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Define Transaction Types for Calculation of Cash Flow Key

Figures .2. Assign each transaction type that is relevant for effective interest rate calculation to the variant you created in

Create Cash Flow Ratio Variant [page 142] as exemplified below.

Example

Table 116:

Tran Ty Desc Transact Type Variant Operator

020010 Loan Disbursement 80 Variant for CA (APR) - Minus Deduction

042800 Reversal of Payt Install 80 Variant for CA (APR) - Minus Deduction

042810 Reversal of Interest Payt 80 Variant for CA (APR) - Minus Deduction

092700 Cr Payment Installment 80 Variant for CA (APR) + Plus Contribution


2.15.3.2.4 Define Methods and Variant Bundle

In the cashflow ratio, you can define combinations of region and effective interest rate to each variant. You maintain the mapping entries as described below.

Context

NoteFor regions with the same effective interest rate transaction types, you may use a generic rule (with no region defined, as in the first example of the table below).

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Cashflow Ratio Define Methods and Variant Bundle .

2. Choose the New Entries pushbutton and enter the mapping assignments for each relevant combination of APR Calculation as exemplified below.

Table 117:

Bundle Cty. Region Variant IRR Method

CFRUNI US 00 Legal Cash Flow Key Figure (Basic Variant)

10 US-APR

CFRUNI US CA 80 Variant for CA (APR)

10 US-APR

CFRUNI US FL 81 Variant for FL (APR) 10 US-APR

CFRUNI US CA 80 Variant for CA (APR)

10 US-APR



2.15.3.2.5 Define Business Operations and Validity Period for Cashflow Ratio

You define details of calculation of the effective interest rate for each business operation and product.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Cashflow Ratio Define Business Operations and Validity Period for Cashflow Ratio .

2. Choose the New Entries pushbutton, and enter the mapping assignments for each product or business operation as exemplified below:

Field Entry

OCat Enter the business operation, for example, CAPT – Capitalization.

Product Enter the product to use.

Country Enter the country of the account.

Region Enter the region of the account.

Date Category Enter the date category for the business operations.

+ Select the checkbox.

CFR Error Enter if you want to specify and error handling for effective interest rate calculation.


Context


To enable the system to validate the financial condition for effective interest rule, follow the procedure described below.


Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_EFF_INT_RATE_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under EFFECTIVE_INTEREST_RULES Expression Decision Table , open the decision table EFFECTIVE_INTEREST_RULES.

4. Choose Edit, then enter the following data in Table Contents for each rule to be validated:

Field Entry





CFR_VARIANT Enter the cashflow ratio variant.

AGREEMENT_LENGHT Enter the duration of the agreement in days.

MIN_CFR Enter the minimum rate that is allowed.

MAX_CFR Enter the maximum rate that is allowed.


More Information


2.15.3.2.6.1 Defining Time Dependency for Rulesets

To create time dependent rulesets, create a new rule that evaluates the VALID_FROM data object by following the steps below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).



2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_EFF_INT_RATE_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under the Ruleset node, choose the ruleset EFFECTIVE_INTEREST_RULESET.

4. Choose the Insert Rule pushbutton and use the VALID_FROM data object on the first IF clause.

5. It can be checked against a specific date or a timeframe.6. Save and activate your changes.

2.15.3.3 Configuration for Interest Accrual Reference Date

2.15.3.3.1 Assign Condition Types for IARD Validation

To enable the system to validate the interest accrual reference date during loan disbursement against region-specific rules defined for banking category, you must assign the relevant condition types to the banking category.

Prerequisites

You have defined the condition types in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type .

Procedure

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Financial Services General Localization Settings Regional Compliance Region Validation Local Rules Assign Condition Types for Banking Category and Subcategory .

2. Choose New Entries and enter the following data for each condition type that needs to be validated:

Field Entry

CondTyp Enter the condition types to be validated.

Bank Categ 005

Bank Subct Leave the field empty.




Context


To enable the system to validate the interest accrual reference date during loan disbursement against region-specific rules, follow the procedures described below.

Procedure

1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_REF_DATE_CHECK_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_REF_DATE_CHECK_RULES Expression Decision Table , open the decision table REF_DATE_CHECK_DT.

4. Choose Edit, then enter the following data in Table Contents for each rule to be validated:

Field Entry






ACCRUAL_REF_DATE Enter the allowed accrual reference date method (Disbursement, Account Opening Date or Legal Period).

SHIFT_REF_DATE Enter the number of units (days or months) for shifted reference date for the legal period.

UNIT_REF_DATE Enter the unit used for the legal period (days or months).




More Information


2.15.3.4 Configuration for Custom Regional Validations

SAP provides standard Banking regional validations. This section describes how to create custom regional validations.

2.15.3.4.1 Configuration for Banking Category and Banking Sub Category

This section describes how to define banking category and banking sub category for the custom region validations.

Localizations for banking services from SAP solution provides standard banking category and banking sub category that you can use to add new validations. Additionally, you can add new banking category and banking sub category following the sections below.

2.15.3.4.1.1 Define Banking Category (Optional)

Procedure

Procedure1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES Expression Decision Table , open decision table CATEGORY_CUSTOMIZING_TABLE.


Field Entry

CATEGORY_ID Enter the banking category identifier.

CATEGORY_DESCRIPTION Enter the banking category description.



2.15.3.4.1.2 Define Banking Sub Category (Optional)

Procedure

Procedure1. Access the Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRFPLUS).2. Search for the /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES application name with object type Application.

3. Under /FSGLO/LR_BANKING_CATEG_RULES Expression Decision Table , open decision table CATEGORY_CUSTOMIZING_TABLE.

4. Choose Edit and enter the following data in Table Contents to each rule for be validated:

Field Entry

CATEGORY_ID Enter the banking category identifier of the banking sub category

SUBCATEGORY_DESCRIPTION Enter the banking sub category description

SUBCATEGORY_ID Enter the banking sub category identifier


2.15.3.4.2 Configuration for Local Rule

This section describes how to create a new local rule validation.

2.15.3.4.2.1 Define Local Rules

Procedure

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, under State Compliance State Validation Local Rules Define Local Rules .

2. Select Change, choose the New Entries pushbutton and enter the following data for each local rule.



Field Entry

Local Rule Enter the name of your new local rule.

Local Rule Description Enter a description for your new local rule.


2.15.3.4.2.2 Assign Local Rule to Banking Category and Banking Sub Category

Procedure

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, under State Compliance State Validation Local Rules Define Local Rules .

2. Select Change, choose the New Entries pushbutton and enter the following data for each local rule.

Field Entry

Banking Category Enter the relevant banking category.

Banking Sub Category Enter the relevant banking sub category if there is one for the validation.

Local Rule Enter the local rule defined as described in Define Local Rules [page 150].

Rule Type Enter 01 (Validation).



2.15.3.4.2.3 Implement BAdI: Input Data Retrieval for Validation (Optional)

You can implement this BAdI to retrieve data for validation of a new banking category or to add additional data for an existing banking category.

Context

NoteIf you create a new implementation for a banking category and subcategory. If the banking category or subcategory already has an implementation, deactivate the old implementation.

Procedure

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, under General Localizations Settings State Compliance State Validation Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Read Input Data for Local Rules .

2. Create and activate an implementation for the BAdI: Input Data Retrieval for Validation (/FSGLO/LOCAL_RULE_APP_DATA).

More Information


2.15.3.4.2.4 Implement BAdI: Local Rules Validation

Procedure

NoteYou must implement this BAdI with the logic of the validation.



1. In Customizing for Financial Services, under General Localization Settings State Compliance State Validation Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Validate Local Rules .

2. Create and activate an implementation for the BAdI /FSGLO/LOCAL_RULE.

More Information


2.15.3.4.3 Configuration for Custom Validations for Financial Conditions

This section describes how to customize the system to support financial condition validations.

2.15.3.4.3.1 Assign Condition Type to Banking Category and Banking Sub Category (Optional)

To enable the system to validate the financial condition according to rules defined to a banking category and banking sub category, follow the procedure described below.

Prerequisites

You have defined the condition types in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type .

Procedure

1. In customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Country-Specific Settings State Compliance Assign Condition Type to Sub Category .

2. Select Change, then choose New Entries and enter the following data for each condition type that needs to be validated:

Field Entry

CondType Enter the condition types to be validated


Field Entry

Bank Categ 001

Bank Subct Enter the banking sub category that is relevant for your condition type. The existing banking sub category are the following:

○ 002 Interest○ 003 Payoff Request Charge○ 004 Overdue Payment Charge○ 005 Bad Check Fee○ 007 Lien Release Fee○ 008 Contract Copy Fee○ 009 Deferral Charge○ Banking subcategory that you have defined as descri

bed in Define Banking Sub Category (Optional) [page 150].


2.15.4 Configuration for Automatic Determination of Financial Conditions According to Region Assignment

This section describes how to customize the financial condition differentiation functionality to automatically determine financial conditions according to region assignment.

2.15.4.1 Define Differentiation Category for Condition Type

Banking services from SAP standard development uses differentiation category to define the condition types that the system discerns. You use the L04 differentiation category to discern the condition types in the localization for banking services from SAP solution.

Procedure


2. Select the condition type that the region assignment discerns.3. Under the Dialog Structure, select the Differentiation Category item.4. Choose the New Entries push button and add the L04 differentiation category to the condition type as

exemplified below.



Table 118:

Seq.No. Different. Differentiation Category 1 CO Dimension

1 L04 = Edit in columns


2.15.4.1.1 Define Custom Differentiation Category for Condition Type

You can enhance the feature to use new differentiation categories implementing the BAdI CUSTOMER_COND_DIFFERENTIATION as described below.

Procedure

1. In the SE18 transaction, display the BCA_SETTL_CALC enhancement spot.

2. Select the BAdI Definition CUSTOMER_COND_DIFFERENTIATION and create a BAdI implementation, name it using the customer namespace, for example, Z<your enhancement implementation>.

3. Save the object in your package.4. Select your enhancement implementation and name your BAdI implementation using the customer

namespace, for example, Z<your BAdI Implementation>)5. Select the BAdI /FSGLO/CUST_COND_DIFF_EXAMPLE and choose Inherit from Sample Class.

6. Save the object in your package.7. At your new enhancement implementation, choose Implementing Class and implement it according to your

requirements. Redefine the constructor method of the class to map the differentiation category and subcategory.

2.15.4.1.2 Assign Condition Categories to Differentiation Categories

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Assign Condition Categories to Differentiation Categories .


2. Choose the New Entries push button and add the condition category that is relevant to the L04 differentiation category.



3 Configuration Information for Argentina

3.1 Introduction

This section describes the configuration information that is necessary to meet legal requirements and conduct business according to common practices in Argentina.

The configuration information for Argentina comprises the following topics:

● Configuration for deposits and loans tax management● Business partner master data● Configuration for interest on arrears

3.2 Configuration for Tax Calculation

3.2.1 Introduction

This section describes the configuration for deposits and loans tax management using the tax manager for Argentina.

3.2.2 Tax Manager Customizing Activities


To customize tax manager according to Argentina requirements, follow the steps below.

NoteIn addition to the Customizing activities listed on this section, follow the steps described in Configuration for Tax Manager [page 13].

Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0Configuration Information for Argentina C U S T O M E R 157

3.2.2.2 Define Business Partner Tax Classification

Use

Tax manager uses tax classifications to identify if a business partner has especial tax rates or any kind of tax exemption.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Business Partner Tax Classification .

2. Define the tax classifications required for your business needs.

Example

Table 119:

Tax Classf Description

1 STATE

2 NON-PROFITABLE

3 OWN DEPOSITS

4 NATURAL PERSON

5 FINANCIAL INST.

6 REGISTERED

7 NOT REGISTERED

8 EXEMPT

9 REGISTERED SPONSOR

10 FINAL CONSUMER

11 MONO TRIBUTE

12 SIMPLIFIED


Configuration Information for Argentina

3.2.2.3 Define Contract Groups

Use

Tax manager uses contract groups to identify rates, limits, exemptions and taxes that relate to specific contract groups.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Contract Groups .

2. Define the contract groups required for your business needs.

Example

Table 120:

Cont. Grp. Description

1 CHECKING ACCOUNT

2 SAVINGS ACCOUNT

3 CREDIT CARD ACCOUNT

4 LINE OF CREDIT

5 LOANS

6 TIME DEPOSIT ACCOUNT

3.2.2.4 Define Tax Areas

Use

The tax manager uses tax areas and area codes during tax calculation to determine the applicable tax types, rates, limits, and so on, to be used in the context of a given tax operation. You can define a tax area code to designate any area required for tax calculation. The tax area code may apply, for example, to an entire country, a given state or province within a country, a specific city, or some other area such as a tax free zone.


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Areas .

2. Define the tax areas required for your tax calculations.

Example

Table 121:

Tx Area Cd Description Country Region

AR0000 ARGENTINA AR

AR0100 ARGENTINA - CAPITAL FEDERAL AR 00

AR0101 ARGENTINA - BUENOS AIRES AR 01

3.2.2.5 Assign BP Tax Classifications to BP Tax Groups

Use

Banking services from SAP standard development uses tax groups to group tax types and business partner tax groups. You relate tax manager tax classifications to banking services from SAP tax groups so that tax manager can retrieve this information and calculate taxes accordingly.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Business Partner Tax Classifications to Business Partner Tax Groups .

2. Assign the tax classifications you have created to the corresponding tax groups.

Table 122:

Tax Type Tax Group Tax Classf Description

VAT 01 1

VATP 01 1

VATW 01 1



3.2.2.6 Assign Contract Groups to Account Product Groups

Use

Banking services from SAP standard development uses account product groups to group account products information. You relate tax manager contract groups to banking services from SAP account product groups so that tax manager can retrieve this information and calculate taxes accordingly.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Contract Group to Account Product Group .

2. Assign the contract groups you have created to the corresponding account product group.

Example

Table 123:

AcctPr. Grp Description Cont. Group Description

60 Time Deposit Account 6 TIME DEPOSIT ACCOUNT

3.2.3 Specify Business Partner Roles for Gross Income Tax

Use

Specifically for gross income tax, when there is more than one business partner assigned to the same account (with different business partner roles, such as vendors or authorized card users), the system may apply different tax rate rules.

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country Argentina and the parameter group TAX_MANAGER.


3. Configure the parameter as described below:

Table 124:

Parameter Subgroup Parameter Name Parameter Value

GIT BP_ROLE_SPECIAL_RATE Enter all business partner roles that are to be considered for GIT tax calculation.

NoteFor more information about the parameter, see the corresponding documentation in the system.

3.2.4 Specify Business Partner Roles for Gross Income Tax Perception

Use

Specifically for gross income tax perception (GITP), the system may apply different tax calculation rules according to the business partner role (such as vendors or authorized card users).

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country Argentina and the parameter group TAX_MANAGER.3. Configure the parameter as described below:

Table 125:


GITP BP_ROLE_TAX_CLASSIFICATION Enter all business partner roles that are to be considered for GITP tax calculation rules.




3.2.5 Account Related Configuration


The following steps are related to the configuration of accounts, account types, and so on, for the purposes of tax processing and calculation by the tax manager.

3.2.5.2 Configure Account Exemptions

Use

A bank account can have a rate or fixed amount deduction or waiver for a given tax. The rate (in percent) or amount to deduct for a specified account and tax type is defined on account level. The system processes the waivers and exemptions using the Tax Exemption (118000) condition type.

NoteThe procedure below describes the steps required to configure exemptions for a single account. If you want all accounts based on a given product to be exempt from certain tax types, you configure the condition type described below on product level.

Procedure

Assign Condition Type for Exemptions

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account Management Account Account Master Data Create/Change Account .

2. On the Financial Conditions tab page, display the details for the Transaction condition group category.3. Choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and then the Tax Exemption (118000) condition type.

The Calculation tab page appears.4. Enter the following data:

Table 126:

Field Entry

Description of Cond. Enter a description for your tax exemption condition.


Field Entry

Tax Type Specify the tax type that is exempted.

NoteIf multiple tax types are exempted for the account, you must create one condition type for each tax type.

Valid From and End Date Specify the validity period.

Condition Form Statistical Condition

Percentage Rate or Amount Specify a percentage rate or amount for your tax exemption condition.

5. Choose Transfer.

Determine Condition Type for Exemptions

To enable the system to process the exemptions that you configure with condition types, you specify the condition type as described in the following steps:



Table 127:


ACCOUNT_EXEMPTION CONDITION_TYPE Enter the condition type that you use for tax exemptions, for example, 118000.


3.2.5.3 Create Salary Counter for Salary Accounts

Use

There has to be a salary counter defined for each salary account in order to calculate the debits&credits tax type correctly. For this reason, you need to create a counter type and a counter and assign these to the relevant salary account products. Ensure that the counter configuration is entered for all your salary account products.



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management CountersDefine Counter Types .

2. Create a new counter type for salary accounts with the following settings:

Table 128:

Field Entry

Counter Type Enter the type of your choice.

Counter Type Desc. Enter the description of your choice.

Counter Cat. 001

Counter Cat. Desc. Pymt Transaction Counter

AC (Amount Counter) Selected

Assignment Product

SRel (Settlement Relevant) Deselected

PCO (Relevant to PCO) Deselected

RI (Recipient Items) Deselected

MAN (Manually Changeable) Selected

3. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management CountersAssign Counter Types to Counters .

4. Create a new counter with the new counter type assigned:

Table 129:

Field Entry

Counter Enter the counter of your choice.

Counter Desc. Enter the description of your choice.

Counter Type Choose the previously created counter type.

5. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management CountersDefine Derivation Rules for Payment Transaction Counters .


6. Define a new rule for each transaction type that is to accumulate in the defined counter:1. In the Condition settings, enter the following data:

Table 130:

Field Entry



Value Choose the transaction type code of the relevant transaction.

2. In the Target settings, enter the following data:

Table 131:

Field Entry

Counter Choose the previously created counter.

3. Activate the deviation tree (saved as Deviation Tree Default).

7. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product .

8. Add the previously defined counter to the counter assignment attribute:

1. On the Used Attributes screen, choose Posting Data Counter Counter Assignment .2. Add the name of the previously defined counter to the list of counter assignments.

9. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Configure Localization Parameters .1. Choose the localization country Argentina and the parameter group TAX_MANAGER.2. Configure the parameters as required, as described below:

Table 132:


DEBIT_CREDIT SALARY_COUNTER_TYPE Enter the counter type created previously.

DEBIT_CREDIT SALARY_COUNTER Enter the counter created previously.

NoteFor more information about the parameters, see the documentation for each parameter in the system.



3.2.5.4 Specify Account Types for Time Deposits

Use

To enable the tax manager to calculate income tax correctly, you need to identify the account types for time deposits (also known as fixed term deposits), since income tax is not charged for time deposits in Argentina. The tax manager therefore needs to determine which product group a given account belongs to. The product groups related to time deposits are identified in the localization configuration as described below.

Procedure



Table 133:


FIXED_TERM_DEPOSITS ACCOUNT_PRODUCT_GROUP Enter all product groups related to time deposits.


3.2.5.5 Specify Transaction Types Related to Account Closure Events

Use

In Argentina, VAT applies to charges on account closure events. You need to specify which transaction types are related to account closure events in the localization configuration so that the system can calculate the correct tax amount over these events.


Procedure



Table 134:


VALUE_ADDED_TAX EVENT_RELEVANT Enter all transaction types subject to account closure charge.


3.2.6 Configuration for Loans Tax Management


In the following steps, you configure settings specific to loans tax processing and calculation by the tax manager.

3.2.6.2 Annual Stamp Tax Limit for Mendoza

Use

In the province of Mendoza, the stamp tax for a loan is calculated based on an annual rate and is also subject to an upper limit per year. This parameter specifies the rate to be applied over the committed capital of the loan to determine the annual upper limit for stamp tax calculation.

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country Argentina and the parameter group TAX_MANAGER.



3. Configure the parameter as described below:

Table 135:


STAMP_TAX MENDOZA_LOANS_TAX_UPPER_LIMIT Enter the applicable rate for calculation of the annual upper limit for stamp tax in Mendoza.


3.2.6.3 Specify Date Range for Loan Installment Payments

Use

For the calculation of gross income tax perception (GITP) during installment payment, it is necessary to provide the date of the installment being paid as a note in the payment item. This note establishes a link between the payment item and the installment, as the payment may be posted on a date different from the installment payment.

You can use the procedure below to specify the number of days in the past to consider when looking for the corresponding payment item created for the installment payment.

Procedure



Table 136:


GITP INSTALMENT_PAYMENT_RANGE Enter the number of days to consider when looking for the corresponding payment item created for an installment payment.



3.2.6.4 Specify Minimum Rate Limit for Account Holders in Multilateral Agreements

Use

For gross income tax perception (GITP), there is a minimum rate for tax calculation in case the account holder is registered in a multilateral agreement. In case the rate defined for the multilateral agreement is below the specified minimum rate, the tax is not calculated.

Procedure



Table 137:


GITP LOW_LIMIT_SPECIAL_RATE Enter the minimum rate for tax calculation for account holders registered in a multilateral agreement.


3.2.7 Configuration for Taxes on Interest on Arrears


In Argentina, banks collect taxes (VAT and VATP) on each type of interest on arrears (IoA) item.

This section describes how to configure the system to calculate these taxes.



3.2.7.2 Create Condition Types for Tax on Interest on Arrears

Use

You define condition types for tax on interest on arrears (IoA) for the following items:

● Condition types for settlement:○ VAT on compensatorio○ VATP on compensatorio○ VAT on compensatorio over taxes○ VATP on compensatorio over taxes○ VAT on punitorio○ VATP on punitorio○ VAT on punitorio over taxes○ VATP on punitorio over taxes

● Inpayment agreement condition types for repayment:○ VAT on compensatorio○ VATP on compensatorio○ VAT on compensatorio over taxes○ VATP on compensatorio over taxes○ VAT on punitorio○ VATP on punitorio○ VAT on punitorio over taxes○ VATP on punitorio over taxes


Note● Do not assign the condition types for tax on IoA settlement to your condition group. The financial condition

will be used by the tax manager.● Do not assign the condition types for IoA repayment to your condition group for inpayment agreement. If

you do that, your condition for IoA repayment will be valid for the whole loan period. The financial condition for IoA repayment has to be created only on the day of the repayment, and it is valid only for that specific day. This financial condition is automatically created when a repayment occurs in an overdue loan account.

Procedure

Create Condition Types for Tax on IoA Settlement




Table 138:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, VAT on IoA Punitorio Cap + Int.


Posting Sign Debit Memo


Calc. Category 1010

Update Category Enter an update category that is relevant for the tax on IoA type. For each financial condition, you must use a different update category as follows:

○ GA30: VAT on Compensatorio

○ GA40: VATP on Compensatorio

○ GA50 : VAT on Compensatorio over Taxes

○ GA60 : VATP on Compensatorio over Taxes

○ GA70: VAT on Punitorio

○ GA80: VATP on Punitorio

○ GA90: VAT on Punitorio over Taxes

○ GAA0: VATP on Punitorio over Taxes

Calc. Basis Leave field blank.

Posting Type Enter 10 or choose your own posting type for IoA.

PstingType PAdj Enter 10 or choose your own posting type for IoA.

PstgType NgAdj. Enter 13 or choose your own posting type for IoA.

ProcResCat Leave field blank.

Proc. Res.Positive Leave field blank.

ProcResultCategNeg Leave field blank.

Process Result Type Leave field blank.





Field Entry

Ref. Cond. Type Leave field blank.


Number Calendar 3


Exch.rate type Leave field blank.


Waiver Method Leave field blank.

Incl. Cond. Selected



Bal. Time Type Leave field blank.

Charge Event Cat. Event Charge

Restart Info. Overlap (if you want to have grace period for the product)

Overlap N (days of grace period)

RefIntRatAssign All Reference Interest Rates


AggregateCalBas Deselected



3. Choose Enter.4. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Amount Category node and enter the following data:

Table 139:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105020


Other columns Leave all checkboxes deselected.

5. Choose Enter.


6. In the Dialog Structure double-click the Date Category node and enter the following data:

Table 140:

Field Entry

Date Cat 225010: Due Date


Create Condition Type for Tax on IoA Repayment



Table 141:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, VAT on Comp.




Calc. Category 1555

Update Category Enter an update category that is relevant for the tax on IoA type. For each financial condition, you must use a different update category as follows:

○ GA31: VAT on Compensatorio

○ GA41: VATP on Compensatorio

○ GA51 : VAT on Compensatorio over Taxes

○ GA61 : VATP on Compensatorio over Taxes

○ GA71: VAT on Punitorio

○ GA81: VATP on Punitorio

○ GA91: VAT on Punitorio over Taxes

○ GAA1: VATP on Punitorio over Taxes


Posting Type Enter C8 or choose your own posting type for IoA.

PstingType PAdj 16



Field Entry

PstgType NgAdj. 13









Number Calendar Leave field blank.


Exch.rate type M







Charge Event Cat. Not Defined

Restart Info. Save Restart Information

Overlap Leave field blank.

RefIntRatAssign Leave field blank.





Field Entry



Table 142:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 160000


Capitaliz. Selected

DeferralPermittd Selected


5. Choose Enter.6. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Date Category node and enter the following data:

Table 143:

Field Entry


7. Choose Enter.8. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Waiver node and enter the following data:

Table 144:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1







3.2.7.3 Assign Condition Types to Condition Group Types

Use

To process financial condition types, you assign all condition types that are relevant for a given financial product to a condition group type. To execute the repayment conditions for loans, the standard system contains the condition group 240. To meet your customer-specific requirements, you can assign the condition types specific to Argentina to this standard condition group. Alternatively, you can use your own custom condition groups for loans repayment.

Prerequisites

You have created condition types for interest on arrears (IoA) repayment. For more information, see Create Condition Types for Tax on Interest on Arrears [page 171].

Procedure


2. Select the condition group type 240 - Payment: Loans (or your custom condition group), double-click Condition Type in the Dialog Structure, and add the condition types that you created for IoA repayment.


3.2.7.4 Tax Manager Configuration for Tax on IoA


To customize tax manager according to the requirements for tax calculation for interest on arrears (IoA), follow the steps below.

NoteFor more information about the configuration settings for tax manager, see Configuration for Tax Manager [page 13].


3.2.7.4.2 Define Tax Item Types

Use

In this step, you create tax item types for the following:

Table 145:

Tax Item Types for Input Tax Item Types for Posting

● Punitorio● Compensatorio● Punitorio on Taxes● Compensatorio on Taxes

● VAT on punitorio● VATP on punitorio● VAT on compensatorio● VATP on compensatorio● VAT on punitorio over taxes● VATP on punitorio over taxes● VAT on compensatorio over taxes● VATP on compensatorio over taxes




Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Item Types .


Table 146:

Tax ItmTy. Description

Enter any ID for the tax item type for input, for example, 13. Enter a description of your choice, for example, IoA Punitorio.

Enter any ID for the tax item type for posting, for example, 500046.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, VAT on IoA: Punitorio.




3.2.7.4.3 Assign Tax Item Types to Operations

Use

In this step, you assign the tax item types for taxes on interest on arrears (IoA) to the corresponding operation IDs. You make this assignment for the tax item types you created for input.

These assignments serve as a mapping between the transactions from the business landscape and the operations inside the tax manager.

Prerequisites

You have created the tax item types for input as described in Define Tax Item Types [page 178].

Procedure


2. Enter the mapping assignments for all relevant tax item types:

Table 147:

Tax ItmTy. Tax Op ID

Enter the code for your tax item type for punitorio 16

Enter the code for your tax item type for compensatorio 17

Enter the code for your tax item type for punitorio on taxes 18

Enter the code for your tax item type for compensatorio on taxes

19


3.2.7.4.4 Assign Condition Types to Tax Item Types

Use

In this step, you assign the tax item types you created for input and posting to the corresponding condition types.


Prerequisites

● You have created the condition type as described in Create Condition Types for Tax on Interest on Arrears [page 171].

● You have created the tax item types as described in Define Tax Item Types [page 178].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Transaction Types and Condition Types to Tax Item Types .

2. Enter the mapping assignments for all the relevant condition types.

Table 148: Condition Types for Input

CondTyp TranTy Tax ItmTy.

Enter the code of your condition type for punitorio.

Leave field blank. Enter the code of your tax item type for punitorio.

Enter the code of your condition type for compensatorio.

Leave field blank. Enter the code of your tax item type for compensatorio.

Enter the code of your condition type for punitorio on taxes.

Leave field blank. Enter the code of your tax item type for punitorio on taxes.

Enter the code of your condition type for compensatorio on taxes.

Leave field blank. Enter the code of your tax item type for compensatorio on taxes.

Table 149: Condition Types for Posting


Enter the code of your condition type for punitorio.

Leave field blank. Enter the code of your tax item type for punitorio.

Enter the code of your condition type for compensatorio.

Leave field blank. Enter the code of your tax item type for compensatorio.


3.2.7.4.5 Assign Posting Transactions to Operations

Use

In this step, you assign tax manager operations to the tax types and tax item types that you use for VAT and VATP on interest on arrears (IoA).



Prerequisites

You have created the tax item types for posting as described in Define Tax Item Types [page 178].

Procedure


2. Enter the mapping assignments for all tax operations delivered for taxes on IoA (see Settings Delivered As Standard for IoA [page 186], tax types for VAT and VATP, and tax item types for posting as follows:

Table 150:

Tax Op ID Tax Type Tax ItmTy.

16 Enter the code for your tax type for VAT.

Enter the code for your tax item type for VAT on compensatorio.

16 Enter the code for your tax type for VATP.

Enter the code for your tax item type for VATP on compensatorio.


Enter the code for your tax item type for VAT on compensatorio over taxes.


Enter the code for your tax item type for VATP on compensatorio over taxes.


Enter the code for your tax item type for VAT on punitorio.


Enter the code for your tax item type for VATP on punitorio.


Enter the code for your tax item type for VAT on punitorio over taxes.


Enter the code for your tax item type for VATP on punitorio over taxes.



3.2.7.4.6 Specify Tax Limits

Use

In Argentina, VATP is calculated only if the sum of the base amounts for the same type of interest on arrears (IoA) reaches a limit defined by law.

You maintain this limit for VATP calculation as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Limits .

2. Enter the VATP limit for the combination of tax type for VATP and country AR as shown below:

Table 151:

Field Entry

Tax Limit ID 31

Start date 01.01.2000

End Date 31.12.9999

Minimum Amt Enter the current limit based on legislation, for example, 1.420,00.

Maximum Amt 0

Tax Type Enter the code of your tax type for VATP.

Country AR

Region Leave field empty.

Limit Appl BA Base Amount

C.key ARS

Exemp Rule Total Exempted




3.2.7.4.7 Specify Tax Assignments

Use

Tax assignments specify the tax types that apply to a given tax operation within a country and region. If there is more than one tax type that applies to a given tax operation you can define the sequence of taxes in the tax assignment for that operation. If applicable, you can define specific classes to handle special cases for rate and limit determination according to the tax being calculated. You maintain the tax assignments as described below.

Procedure


2. Enter tax types created for VAT and VATP in combination with all tax operations delivered for Argentina (see Settings Delivered As Standard for IoA [page 186]):

Table 152:

Field Entry

Country AR

Region Enter as required or leave blank.

Tax Op ID Enter a tax operation ID, which can be the following:

○ 16: Punitorio

○ 17: Compensatorio

○ 18: Punitorio over taxes

○ 17: Compensatorio over taxes

Tax Type Enter the code of your tax type for VAT or VATP.


End Date 31.12.9999

Pred. Tax Type Leave field blank.

Rate Determiner For VAT, enter the standard class below or your custom rate determiner class:

○ /FSLAR/CL_VAT_DETERMINE_RATEFor VATP, enter the standard class below or your own custom rate determiner class:

○ /FSLAR/ CL_VAT_DETERMINE_RATE


Field Entry

Limit Determiner For VAT, leave this field blank.

For VATP, enter the standard class below or your custom limit determiner class:

○ /FSLAR/CL_VATP_DET_LIMIT_ARR

Reference Data Control /FSLAR/CL_ARGENTINA_DATA_CNTRL


3.3 Master Data Settings

3.3.1 Introduction

To enable the system to process business partner master data in line with requirements in Argentina, you enter the master data described below.

3.3.2 Enter Tax Data for Business Partners

Use

To enable the system to process special tax rates and tax exemptions that apply to business partners in Argentina, you store the required special rates in the master data of the business partners.

Prerequisites

You have created a business partner with the Argentina Tax Payer role.

Procedure

1. Edit the business partner.On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Business Partner Maintain Business Partner .



2. Enter the details of the rates and exemptions required for the business partner as follows:

Table 153:

Purpose Tab Page Area of Tab Page Data Entry

Define the tax classification of a business partner in a given country and region.

Control Tax Classification Enter the tax types that make up the tax classifica-tion of the business partner.

For example, if a given bank customer is Iva Responsable Inscripto (VAT registered), you have to configure the business partner to have tax type VAT with tax group value 01, which corresponds to Iva Responsable Inscripto.

Store the following:

○ Special tax rates (Padrón) for gross income tax (GIT) and gross income tax perception (GITP) that apply to a business partner per region

○ A fiscal risk that the government can define for business partners in a given region

Tax Details Special Tax Rates Enter the special tax rates (Pádron) for GIT and GITP.

NoteIf a business partner is not entitled to any special rates for GIT or GITP in a particular region, the system uses the general tax rate that you enter on region level in Customizing for Financial Services un

der General

Localization Settings

Tax Manager Specify

Tax Rates (see Specify Tax Rates [page 20]).

If required, enter the fiscal risk for the tax types that you enter in Special Tax Rates section of the Tax Details tab page.

Store tax exemptions or waivers for which a business partner is eligible.

Tax Details Tax Exemptions Enter the percentage waiver or exemption that applies to a particular tax type for a business partner.


Example

Assume that one of your bank's customers is eligible for a tax waiver of GIT in Buenos Aires and has an exemption certificate for VAT perception (VATP) as follows:

● A lower rate of 1% for GIT in Buenos Aires● Tax exemption of 20% for VATP

To enable the system to process the tax calculations correctly, enter the following data on the Tax Details tab page of the Maintain Business Partner (BP) transaction:

Special Tax Rates

Table 154:

Tax Type Region Valid From Valid To Tax Rate Fiscal Risk

GIT 00 01.01.2000 31.12.9999 1.0 n/a

Tax Exemptions

Table 155:

Tax Type Country Region Valid From Valid To Exemption

VATP AR n/a 01.01.2000 31.12.9999 20%


3.4.1 Introduction

This section describes how to configure the system to process interest on arrears (IoA) in line with requirements in Argentina.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to IoA processing, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP ArgentinaAccount Management (FS-AM) Loans Business Transactions for Loans Interest on Arrears (Argentina) .

3.4.2 Settings Delivered As Standard for IoA

Calculation Bases

Calculation Bases for Interest on Arrears Calculation




For the calculation of interest on arrears (IoA), the standard delivery for Argentina contains the following calculation basis templates:

● LIOA_RC: Interest on Arrears Based on Periodic Calculation● LIOA_PC: Interest on Arrears Based on Calculation on Payment Date● LIOA_RC_AA: Interest on Arrears Based on Periodic Calculation + IOA on IOA● LIOA_PC_AA: Interest on Arrears Based on Calculation on Payment Date + IOA on IOA

If you want to create your own calculation bases, you can use the templates above for reference.

Calculation Bases for Taxes on IoA Calculation

For the calculation of taxes on IoA, the standard delivery for Argentina contains the following calculation basis templates:

● LIOA_RTX: Interest on Arrears Upon Taxes Based on Periodic Calculation● LIOA_PTX: Interest on Arrears Upon Taxes Based on Calculation on Payment Date● LIOA_RTXAA: Interest on Arrears Upon Taxes Based on Periodic Calculation + IOA on IOA● LIOA_PTXAA: Interest on Arrears Upon Taxes Based on Calculation on Payment Date + IOA on IOA


Interest on Arrears Types

IoA Types for Interest on Arrears Calculation

For the calculation of IoA, the standard delivery for Argentina contains the following IoA types:

● APCI: Interest on Arrears Paym Date● ARCI: Interest on Arrears Regular

IoA Types for Taxes on IoA Calculation

For the calculation of taxes on IoA, the standard delivery for Argentina contains the following IoA types:

● APTX: Interest on Arrears Paym Date upon Taxes● ARTX: Interest on Arrears Regular upon Taxes

Tax Operations

For the calculation of taxes on IoA, the standard delivery for Argentina contains the following tax operations:

Table 156:

Tax Op ID Debit Oper Description

16 X IOA PUNITORIO

17 X IOA COMPENSATORIO



18 X IOA PUNITORIO UPON TAXES

19 X IOA COMPENSATORIO UPON TAXES

3.4.3 Configuration for Calculation Bases


For the calculation of interest on arrears (IoA), you can use the calculation basis templates delivered for Argentina (see Settings Delivered As Standard for IoA [page 186]). However, if you want to create your own calculation bases, you must make the settings described below.

3.4.3.2 Create Interest on Arrears Type

Use

You define interest on arrears (IoA) types and associate them with a calculation class as described below. Note that the system includes the following template IoA types:

● APCI: Interest on Arrears Paym Date● ARCI: Interest on Arrears Regular● APTX: Interest on Arrears Paym Date upon Taxes● ARTX: Interest on Arrears Regular upon Taxes

You can use these templates to create your own IoA types.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Interest on Arrears Define IoA Types .


Table 157:

Field Entry

IoA Type Enter a name for your interest on arrears type, for example, Z_IOA.



Field Entry

IoA Type Description Enter a description for your IoA type.

Interest on Arrears Calculation Class Enter one of the standard calculation classes below or your own custom calculation class:

○ /FSGLO/CL_IOA_CALCULATORCalculator for Interest on Arrears Based on Periodic Calculation

○ /FSGLO/CL_IOA_PAY_CALCULATORCalculator for Interest on Arrears Based on Payment Date


3.4.3.3 Assign Turnover Classes to IoA Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Interest on Arrears Assign Turnover Classes to IoA Type .


Table 158:

Field Entry

IoA Type Enter the ID of the IoA type that you created in the Define IoA Types Customizing activity (for example, Z_IOA).

Turn.Class Enter any turnover class that corresponds to the installment items whose amounts are used as the basis for IoA calculation, for example, interest (L013), deferral (L223), and capital (L023).

NoteDo not use the turnover class L053 (Insurance Int: Owed) for exponential calculation method. Instead, use the exponential calculation basis formula on the condition type, such as LIOA_PC_AA or LIOA_RC_AA).



3.4.3.4 Create Calculation Basis for IoA Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Foundation Cash flow Calculator Define Customer Calculation Bases and Display SAP Calculation Bases .


Table 159:

Field Entry

Calculation Basis Enter a name for your calculation basis (for example, Z_IOA).

Cal. Basis Description Enter any description as required.

3. On the Formula Edit screen, choose the IOA (Dispatch calculation basis for IoA) function.Your formula appears as IOA ( , ).

4. Place your cursor in the first field of the formula and choose the Constant pushbutton.5. Enter the IoA type that you created in the Define IoA Types Customizing activity (see Create Interest on

Arrears Type [page 480].6. Place your cursor in the second field of the formula and choose the String pushbutton.7. If you want to include posted IoA items in the calculation basis (that is, you want to charge IoA on IoA), enter X

in this field. Otherwise, leave this field blank.For example, if you used the IoA type Z_IOA, your formula can appear either as IOA( ‘Z_IOA’, ‘X’) or IOA(‘Z_IOA’, ‘’).


3.4.4 Create Condition Types for Interest on Arrears

Use

You define condition types for interest on arrears (IoA) processing for the following:

● IoA settlement● IoA repayment


Note● You must not maintain any date category for the pricing condition types for IoA. The IoA item is related to a

previous period, the period that is overdue.● You must maintain a date category for the repayment condition types for IoA.



Procedure

Create Condition Type for IoA Settlement



Table 160:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Interest on arrears for Argentina.




Calc. Category 1010

Update Category Enter an update category that is relevant for the IoA type. For each IoA type, you must use a different update category as follows:

○ GIA0: Compensatorio

○ GA00: Punitorio

○ GA20 : Compensatorio on taxes

○ GA10 : Punitorio on taxes

Calc. Basis Enter any of the following IoA calculation basis templates or any other custom calculation basis you defined:

○ LIOA_RC○ LIOA_PC○ LIOA_RC_AA○ LIOA_PC_AA○ LIOA_RTX○ LIOA_PTX○ LIOA_RTXAA○ LIOA_PTXAA




Field Entry










Number Calendar 3


















Field Entry



Table 161:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105020




Table 162:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1





Create Condition Type for IoA Repayment



Table 163:

Field Entry



Field Entry

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, IOA Repayment for Argentina.




Calc. Category 1555

Update Category Enter an update category that is relevant for the IoA type. For each IoA type, you must use a different update category as follows:

○ GIA1: Compensatorio

○ GA01: Punitorio

○ GA21: Compensatorio on taxes

○ GA11: Punitorio on taxes

















Field Entry

Exch.rate type M
















Table 164:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 160000



5. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Date Category node and enter the following data:

Table 165:

Field Entry


6. Choose Enter.


7. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Waiver node and enter the following data:

Table 166:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1






Use

To process financial condition types, you assign all condition types that are relevant for a given financial product to a condition group type. To execute the settlement and repayment conditions for loans, the standard system contains the condition groups 210 and 240, respectively. To meet your customer-specific requirements, you can assign the condition types specific to Argentina to these standard condition groups. Alternatively, you can use your own custom condition groups for loans settlement and loans repayment.

Prerequisites

You have created condition types for interest on arrears (IoA) settlement and IoA repayment. For more information, see Create Condition Types for Interest on Arrears [page 190].

Procedure


2. Select the condition group type 210 - Loan Settlement (or your custom condition group), double-click Condition Type in the Dialog Structure, and add the condition types that you created for IoA settlement.





3.4.6 Create Condition Group and Condition for Interest on Arrears

Use

To process interest on arrears (IoA) settlement, you define a condition group and the corresponding condition.

NoteDo not assign the condition type for IoA repayment to your condition group for inpayment agreement. If you do that, your condition for IoA repayment will be valid for the whole loan period. The financial condition for IoA repayment has to be created only on the day of the repayment, and it is valid only for that specific day. This financial condition is automatically created when a repayment occurs in an overdue loan account.

Prerequisites

You have created condition types for IoA settlement. For more information, see Create Condition Types for Interest on Arrears [page 190].

Procedure

Create Condition Group for IoA Settlement

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account Management Current SettingsFinancial Conditions Condition Group Edit Condition Group .

2. On the Condition Group Edit screen, choose the Create Condition Group pushbutton in the left frame.3. Enter the following data:

Table 167:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type You can select the standard one (Settlement: Loan Acct) or create your own equivalent one.

Condition Group Enter any number.


Field Entry

Condition Group Description Enter any description.

4. Choose Enter.5. Create the condition as described below.

Create Condition for IoA Settlement

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition type you created for IoA settlement.


Table 168:

Field Entry

Currency ARS

Valid From Enter the start date of the validity period

3. On the Calculation tab page, enter the following data:

Table 169:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Enter any description

Int. Calc. Method (Interest Calculation Method) 360/360

Percentage Rate Debit interest rate



Use

To enable the system to process interest on arrears (IoA) in line with the requirements for Argentina, configure the product attributes for your loan account product as described in this section.

Prerequisites

● You have created a loan account product.● You have defined a condition group for interest on arrears. For more information, see Create Condition Group

and Condition for Interest on Arrears [page 197].



● You have created turnover classes for IoA. For more information, see Define Turnover Classes [page 24].● You have created clearing categories for IoA in your Open Item Management System.

Procedure


2. In the product attributes structure, configure the product attributes as described below:

○ In Used Attributes Financial Conditions Condition Groups Condition Group , enter the condition groups you created for IoA.

○ Activate the product attribute Generate Number of Installments under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Interest on Arrears .

○ Activate the product attribute Calculate Interest on Arrears under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Interest on Arrears .

○ In Used Attributes General Settlement Attributes Relevant to Clearing Logical Turnover Class , assign the following logical turnover classes to real turnover classes:

Table 170:


GIA0 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA settlement.

GIA1 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA billing.

GIA2 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA repayment.

GA00 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA settlement.

GA01 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA billing.

GA02 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA repayment.






















3.4.8 Configuration for Disbursement with IoA for Argentina


This section describes the settings to configure the system to process interest on arrears on disbursement, in line with the requirements for Argentina.

3.4.8.2 Assign Transaction Types for OIM Payment Distribution Types

Prerequisites

To configure the relation between payment distribution usage category, payment distribution type, and open item management transaction type, you make the settings described in this section.



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Trans. Types for OIM System to Paymnt. Distr. Types .


Table 171:

Usage Cat. Trsn Type PD Type Desc.

008 GA01 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003












008 GAA1 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003

008 GAB1 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003

008 GAC1 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003

008 GIA1 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003

008 GTX1 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003


3.5 Configuration for Gross Income Tax Perception on Loan Installment

3.5.1 Introduction

This section describes how to configure the system to calculate gross income tax perception (GITP) during installment payment.

NoteThe following configuration steps describe how to configure GITP on loan installment (using GITL tax type). They are complementary to the GITP tax type, which is related to deposits accounts and loans special operations.



3.5.2 Create Condition Types for GITP on Loan Installment

Use

You define condition types for gross income tax perception (GITP) on loan installment for the following items:

● Condition types for settlement:○ GITP on Loan Installment○ GITP on Loan Installments on Arrears○ GITP on Loan Installment IoA Limit

● Inpayment Agreement Condition Types for Repayment:○ GITP on Loan Installment○ GITP on Loan Installment in Arrears


Note● Do not assign the condition types for GITP on Loan Installment Settlement to your condition group. The

financial condition is used by the tax manager.● The system automatically creates an individual financial condition for the GITP on Loan Installment in

arrears repayment condition type when a repayment occurs in an overdue loan account. So, you do not need to assign this condition type to your condition group for inpayment agreement.

Procedure

Create Condition Types for GITP on Loan Installment Settlement



Table 172:

Field Entry

Condit. Type Enter a code for your condition type, for example, 990092

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, GITP on Loan Installment





Field Entry

Calc. Category 1555

Update Category Enter an update category that is relevant for the GITP Over Payment Loan Installment Type. For each financial conditions, you must use a different update category as follows:

○ GAC0: GITP on Loan Installment○ GAB0: GITP on Loan Installment in Arrears○ GAB0: GITP on Loan Installment IoA Limit

Calc. Basis Leave field blank

Posting Type Enter V5 or choose your own posting type for GITP on Loan Installment

PstingType PAdj Enter V5 or choose your own posting type for GITP on Loan Installment

PstgType NgAdj. Enter 13 or choose your own posting type for GITP on Loan Installment

ProcResCat Leave field blank

Proc. Res. Positive Leave field blank

ProcResultCategNeg Leave field blank

Process Result Type Leave field blank



Ref. Cond. Type Leave field blank


Number Calendar 3


Exch.rate type Leave field blank


Waiver Method Leave field blank





Field Entry


Bal. Time Type Leave field blank



Overlap Leave field blank

RefIntRatAssign No Reference Interest

One-time Cond. Deselected




3. Choose Enter4. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Amount Category note and enter the following data:

Table 173:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105020


Other columns Leave all checkboxes deselected

5. Choose Enter6. Save your entries.

Create Condition Type for GITP on Loan Installment Repayment



Table 174:

Field Entry

Condit. Type Enter a code for your condition type, for example, 801101




Field Entry


Calc. Category 1555

Update Category Enter an update category that is relevant for the GITP Over Payment of Loan Installment Type. For each financial condition, you must use a different update category as follows:

○ GAC1: GITP on Loan Installment○ GAB1: GITP on Loan Installment in Arrears

Calc. Basis Leave field blank

Posting Type Enter C8 or choose your own posting type for GITP on Loan Installment

PstingType PAdj Leave field blank

PstgType NgAdj. Leave field blank

ProcResCat Leave field blank

Proc. Res.Positive Leave field blank

ProcResultCategNeg Leave field blank



Determ. Time Ind. Con Use Conditions at Calculation Time

Ref. Cond. Type 0


Number Calendar 3


Exch.rate type M


Waiver Method Leave field blank






Field Entry

Bal.Time Type 0



Overlap 0

RefIntRatAssign For Debit Balances




Event AccountBilling Deselect

3. Choose Enter4. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Amount Category node and enter the following data:

Table 175:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 160000


Capitaliz. Selected


Other columns Leave all checkboxes deselected

5. Choose Enter6. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Date Category node and enter the following data:

Table 176:

Field Entry

Date Cat 220010: Calculation


7. Choose Enter8. Save your entries.


3.5.3 Assign condition Types to Condition Group Types

Use

To process financial condition types, you assign all condition types that are relevant for your financial product to a condition group type. To execute the repayment conditions for loans, the standard system contains the condition group 240. To meet your system requirements, you can assign the condition types that are specific for Argentina to this standard condition group. Alternatively, you can use your own condition groups for loans repayment.

Prerequisites

You have created condition types for GITP on Loan Installment repayment in Create Condition Types for GITP on Loan Installment [page 203].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Group Type

2. Select the condition group type 240 - Payment: Loans (or your custom condition group type), double-click Condition Type in the Dialog Structure, and add the condition types that you created for GITP on Loan Installment Repayment.


3.5.4 Tax Manager Configuration for GITP on Loan Installment


To customize tax manager according to the requirements for tax calculation for gross income tax perception (GITP) on loan installment, follow the steps below.

NoteFor more information about the configuration settings for tax manager, see Configuration for Tax Manager [page 13].



3.5.4.2 Define Tax Item Types

Use

In this step, you create tax item types for input and for posting as follows:

Table 177:

Tax Item Types for Input Tax Item Types for Posting

● Installment charges receivable● Nominal interest receivable● Installment fees receivable● Insurance premium receivable● Installment IoA limit

● GITP on loan installment● GITP on loan installment in arrears




Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Item Types


Table 178:


Enter any ID for the tax item type for input, for example, 22. Enter a description of your choice, for example, Nominal Interst Receivable

Enter any ID for the tax item type for posting, for example, 500058

Enter a description of your choice, for example, GITP on Loan Installment



3.5.4.3 Assign Tax Item Types to Operations

Use

In this step, you assign the tax item types for gross income tax perception (GITP) on loan installment to the corresponding Tax Operation IDs. You make this assignment for the tax item types you created for input.

These assignments serve as a mapping between the transactions from the business landscape and the operations inside the tax manager.

Prerequisites

You have created the tax item types for input as described in Define Tax Item Types [page 209].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localizations Settings Tax Manager Assign Tax Item Types to Operations

2. Enter the mapping assignments for all relevant tax item types:

Table 179:


Enter the code for your input tax item type for Installment Charges Receivable.

11

Enter the code for your input tax item type for Nominal Interest Receivable.

22

Enter the code for your input tax item type for Installment Fees Receivable.

23

Enter the code for your input tax item type for Insurance Premium Receivable.

24

Enter the code for your input tax item type for Installment IoA Limit.

25




3.5.4.4 Assign Condition Types to Tax Item Types

Use

In this step, you assign the tax item types you created for input and posting to the corresponding condition types.

Prerequisites

● You have created the condition type as described in Create Condition Types for GITP on Loan Installment [page 203].

● You have created the tax item types as described in Define Tax Item Types [page 209].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Transaction Types and condition Types to Tax Item Types

2. Enter the mapping assignments for all the relevant condition types.Condition Types for Input

Table 180:


Enter the code of your condition type for installment charges receivable.

Leave field blank Enter the code of your tax item type for installment charges receivable.

Enter the code of your condition type for nominal interest receivable.

Leave field blank Enter the code of your tax item type for nominal interest receivable.

Enter the code of your condition type for installment fees receivable.

Leave field blank Enter the code of your tax item type for installment fees receivable.

Enter the code of your condition type for insurance premium receivable.

Leave field blank Enter the code of your tax item type for insurance premium receivable.

Enter the code of your condition type for installment IoA limit.

Leave field blank Enter the code of your tax item type for installment IoA limit.

Condition Types for Posting


Table 181:


Enter the code of your condition type for GITP on loan installment.

Leave field blank Enter the code of your tax item type for GITP on loan installment.

Enter the code of your condition type for GITP on loan installment in arrears.

Leave field blank Enter the code of your tax item type for GITP on loan installment in arrears.


NoteYou can define as many input condition types as necessary for each GITP on Loan Installment related tax item type.

For posting condition types you must define only one input condition type for GITP on Loan Installment and another input condition type for GITP Loan Installment in Arrears.

3.5.4.5 Assign Posting Transactions to Operations

Use

In this step, you assign tax manager operations to the tax types and tax item types that you use for gross income tax perception (GITP) on loan installment.

Prerequisites

You have created the tax item types for posting as described in Define Tax Item Types [page 209].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Posting Transactions to Operations

2. Enter the mapping assignments for all tax operations delivered for gross income tax perception over payments on loan installment and tax item types for posting as follows:Tax Item Type for GITP on Loan Installment



Table 182:


11 GITL Enter the code for your tax item type for GITP on Loan Installment.




Tax Item Type for GITP on Loan Installment on Arrears

Table 183:


16 GITL Enter the code for your tax item type for GITP on Loan Installment on Arrears.








3.5.4.6 Specify Tax Rates

3.5.4.6.1 Specify Tax Rates

Use

In Argentina, Gross Income Tax Perception (GITP) rate is determined according to the region.

You maintain this rate for GITP on Loan Installment as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Rates

2. Enter the GITP on loan installment (GITL) rate for each relevant combination of region and validity period as shown below:

Table 184:

Field Entry

Tax Rate ID Enter the tax limit ID, for example, 31

Start Date 01.01.2000

End Date 31.12.9999

Tax Rate Enter the current rate based on legislation, for example, 2,0000000000.

Tax Type GITL

Country AR

Region Enter as required, for example, 00.




3.5.4.6.2 Tax Rate for Corrientes with Business Partner Tax Classification Registered

Use

In the province of Corrientes (region 04), gross income tax perception (GITP) has a specific rate when the business partner is classified as registered. For more information about the rates, see Define Business Partner Tax Classification [page 158].

These parameters specify the rate to be applied for Corrientes when the business partner is classified as registered and when the business partner is not classified as registered.

Procedure

NoteIf gross income tax perception (GITP) calculation for the province of Corrientes (region 04), you do not need to configure these parameters.

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Configure Localization Parameters

2. Choose the localization country ARGENTINA and the parameter group TAX_MANAGER.3. Configure the parameters as described below:

Table 185:


GITP CORRIENTES_REGISTERED_TAXRATE Enter the applicable rate for calculation in Corrientes with tax classification registered.

GITP CORRIENTES_OTH_TAXCLASS_TXRATE

Enter the applicable rate for calculation in Corrientes without tax classification registered.

For more information about the parameter, see the corresponding documetation in the system.


3.5.4.7 Specify Tax Limits

Use

In Argentina, gross income tax perception (GITP) is calculated only if the sum of the base amounts reaches a limit defined by law.

You maintain this limit for GITP on Loan Installment as described below.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Limits

2. Enter the GITP on Loan Installment (Tax Type GITL) limit for each relevant combination of region and validity period as shown below:

Table 186:

Field Entry

Tax Limit ID Enter the tax limit ID, for example, 31


End date 31.12.9999

Minimum Amt Enter the current limit based on legislation, for example, 200,00.

Maximum Amt 0

Tax Type GITL

Country AR


Limit Appl BA Base Amount

C.key ARS

Exemp. Rule Total Exempted




3.5.4.8 Specify Tax Assignments

Use

Tax assignments specify the tax types that apply to a given tax operation within a country and region. If applicable, you can define specific classes to handle special cases for rate and limit determination. You maintain the tax assignments as described below.

Prerequisites

You have configured the Argentina taxes on Interest on Arrears, see Configuration for Taxes on Interest on Arrears [page 170].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Assignments

2. Enter GITL tax type with all tax operations delivered for Argentina for the required regions:

Table 187:

Field Entry

Country AR


Tax Op ID Enter a tax operation ID, which can be the following:

○ 11: LOANS RECEIVABLES - CHARGES○ 16: IOA PUNITORIO○ 17: IOA COMPENSATORIO○ 18: IOA PUNITORIO UPON TAXES○ 19: IOA COMPENSATORIO UPON TAXES○ 22: LOANS RECEIVABLES - NOM. INT.○ 23: LOANS RECEIVABLES - FEES○ 24: LOANS RECEIVABLES - INSURANCE○ 25: LOANS RECEIVABLES - LIMIT

Tax Type GITL



Field Entry

End date 31.12.9999

Pred. Tax type Leave field blank

Rate Determiner Enter the standard class below or your custom rate determiner class:

○ /FSLAR/CL_GITL_DETERMINE_RATE

Limit Determiner Enter the standard class below or your custom limit determiner class:

○ /FSLAR/CL_GITL_DETERMINE_LIMIT

Reference Data Control /FSLAR/CL_ARGENTINA_DATA_CNTRL


3.5.5 Configure Localization Parameters

Use

This section describes the necessary localization parameters that you need to configure.

Prerequisites

You have specified the business partner (BP) roles for gross income tax perception in Specify Business Partner Roles for Gross Income Tax Perception [page 162].

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country ARGENTINA and the parameter group TAX_MANAGER.



3. Configure the parameters as described below:

Table 188:


GITP BP_ROLE_SPECIAL_RATE Enter all BP partner roles that the system considers for GITP special tax rate rules.

For more information about the BP_ROLE_SPECIAL_RATE parameter, see the corresponding documentation in the system.

3.5.6 Configure Loan Product Attributes for GITP Calculation

Use

This session describes how to configure a product for a loan account that calculates GITP on its installments.

Procedure

1. Change your loan account product in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Change Account Product .

2. In the product attributes structure, under Used Attributes General Settlement Attributes Relevant to Clearing Logical Turnover Class ,assign the following logical turnover classes to real turnover classes:

Table 189:


GAB0 Enter the real turnover class created for GITP on loan installment in arrears settlement.

GAB1 Enter the real turnover class created for GITP on loan installment in arrears billing.

GAB2 Enter the real turnover class created for GITP on loan installment in arrears repayment.

GAC0 Enter the real turnover class created for GITP on loan installment settlement.

GAC1 Enter the real turnover class created for GITP on loan installment billing.



GAC2 Enter the real turnover class created for GITP on loan installment repayment.

3. Save your entries.4. Activate your product.



4 Configuration Information for Brazil

4.1 Introduction

This section describes the configuration information that is necessary to meet legal requirements and conduct business according to common practices in Brazil.

The configuration information for Brazil comprises the following topics:

● Localization-specific implementation for Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)● Sample financial products● Branch calendars● Checkbook management● Tax calculation (withholding tax on corporate savings accounts; IOF on loans)● Payment processing● Payment advice● Compound interest on loans● Inflation adjustment on loan installments● Interest on arrears (IoA)

4.2 Activate Localization-Specific Implementations for Business Add-Ins

Use

To enable the localization for Brazil to meet legal and business requirements, you must activate certain implementations of country-specific Business Add-Ins (BAdIs).

Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0Configuration Information for Brazil C U S T O M E R 221

Procedure

1. For each of the Brazil-specific BAdI implementations that you want to activate, follow the Customizing path listed on the following table:

Table 190:

Enhancement Implementation

BAdI Implementation

Description Financial Services Account Management

Product Management Payment Advice

Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Adjustment

of Payments

Customizing Path

/FSGLO/BCA_OR_DISB_CHECKS

/FSGLO/DISBURSEMENT_CHECKS

Implementation: Checks for Disbursement

Financial Services Account Management

Order Management Account Order

Disbursement (Loans) Business Add-Ins

(BAdIs) BAdI: Entry and Consistency

Checks

/FSGLO/BCA_OR_PAYF_CHECKS

/FSGLO/PAYOFF_CHECKS

Implementation: Checks for Payoff


Order Management Account Order Early

Payoff (Loans) Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)BAdI: Payment Receipt and Consistency

Checks

/FSGLO/BCA_SETTL_CALC

/FSGLO/COMPRESS_DETAILS_SETTL

Localization compress details


Product Management Settlement Business

Add-Ins (BAdIs) Enhancements in Calculation

Layer BAdI: Compress Settlement Details

/FSLBR/POSTPONE_SETTL_EXEC

/FSLBR/DETERM_DEFAULT_SAMPLE

Implementation: Payment Default upon Exceeding Committed Limit


Contract Management Account Business

Add-Ins (BAdIs) Country-Specific Settings

Brazil BAdI: Retrieval of Information About

Payment Default

/FSGLO/EI_BA1_SP_SI_F8

/FSGLO/BD_SI_F8_LOAN_PLA_CHG

Loans Taken Implementation

Financial Services Bank Analyzer

Infrastructure Settings for Enterprise Services

Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Financial

Instruments Analytical Source Data BAdI: LoanContractEventInChangeViewsBasedOnPric

eListAdaptationBulkChanged


Configuration Information for Brazil


BAdI Implementation




of Payments

Customizing Path

/FSGLO/EI_BA1_SP_SI_F8

/FSGLO/BD_SI_F8_LOAN_PLA_CRE

Example Implementation Financial Services Bank Analyzer

Infrastructure Settings for Enterprise Services

Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Financial

Instruments Analytical Source Data BAdI: LoanContractEventInChangeViewsBasedOnPric

eListAdaptationBulkCreated

/FSGLO/EI_BCA_CN_LC_SOUT

/FSGLO/CN_LC_PLADAPT_BLK

Implementation: InformOfContractPrice


Communication Between Logical Systems

Account Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdIs

for Enterprise Services BAdIs for Business

Object LoanContract BAdI for InformOfContractPriceListAdaptationCreationA

sBulk

/FSGLO/EI_BCA_CN_LC_SOUT

/FSGLO/CN_LC_PLADAPT_CH_BLK

Badi Implementation for replicating loans taken to Bank Analyzer


Communication Between Logical Systems


for Enterprise Services BAdIs for Business

Object LoanContract BAdI for InformOfContractPriceListAdaptationChangeAs

Bulk

/FSGLO/BCA_PO_SOUT

/FSGLO/PO_REQ_PAYM_ORD

BAdI Definition for Service Operation CollectivePaymentOrderRequest



for Enterprise Services BAdIs for Business Object BankAccountContractPaymentTransactionOrder

Request BAdI for

ReadPaymentOrderRequest



BAdI Implementation




of Payments

Customizing Path

/FSGLO/BCA_PO_SOUT

/FSGLO/PO_REQ_PAYM_ORD_BLK

BAdI implementation for RequestPaymentOrdersAsBulk



for Enterprise Services BAdIs for Business Object BankAccountContractPaymentTransactionOrder

Request BAdI for

RequestPaymentOrdersAsBulk

2. Select the Active (IMG) checkbox that corresponds to the BAdI implementation.3. Choose the Finished pushbutton.

4.3 Sample Financial Products

4.3.1 Introduction

This section describes the sample financial products that are configured for use in Brazil. The financial products are templates that you can use to create and configure financial products to meet your requirements.

The guide comprises settings that are delivered as standard and settings that you must make in the areas of Customizing and master data.

The standard delivery for Brazil contains the following sample financial products:

● Checking Account [page 225]● Time Deposit [page 251]● Savings Account for Private Individuals and Nonprofit Organizations [page 260]● Savings Account for Corporates [page 273]● Loans Taken Account [page 305]● Fund Pool Account [page 313]● Loans Given Account [page 317]



4.3.2 Checking Account


The sample checking account allows you to meet legal requirements in Brazil.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to checking accounts for Brazil, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAPBrazil Account Management (FS-AM) Deposits Checking Accounts .

4.3.2.2 Settings Delivered As Standard

Product Templates

The standard delivery for Brazil contains the following product template for checking accounts: _ACCT_C_BR.

Product Attributes

This section contains the product-specific attributes that are necessary to meet requirements in Brazil. You access the product attributes in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product .

Table 191:

Product Attribute Path in Product Attribute Description

Track with Settlement on Payoff Used Attributes Country-Specific

Attributes Brazil Taxes IOF

Checking Account Settlement Tracks

Suspended on Payment Default

Indicates a settlement track for the fi-nancial conditions that the system must suspend when a bank customer contract is in default and resume immediately after the contract ceases to be in default.

Track with Settlement on Periodic Run Used Attributes Country-Specific




Indicates a settlement track for the fi-nancial conditions that the system must suspend when a bank customer contract is in default and resume during the next periodic settlement after the contract ceases to be in default.



Calculation Bases

This section contains the calculation bases that are necessary to meet requirements in Brazil. You access the product attributes in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product ManagementFinancial Conditions Define Customer Calculation Bases and Display SAP Calculation Bases .

Calculation Bases for IOF Calculation Aggregated Over the Total Debit Balance

Table 192:

Calculation Basis Description

IOF_ADD Use this calculation basis to enable the system to calculate additional financial operation tax (IOF) over the total debit balance.

IOF_REG Use this calculation basis to enable the system to calculate regular IOF over the total debit balance.

Calculation Bases for IOF Calculation Separated Over Committed Limit and Tolerated Limit

Table 193:

Calculation Basis Description

IOF_ADD_C Use this calculation basis to enable the system to calculate additional IOF over the committed limit.

IOF_REG_C Use this calculation basis to enable the system to calculate regular IOF over the committed limit.

IOF_ADD_T Use this calculation basis to enable the system to calculate additional IOF over the tolerated limit.

IOF_REG_T Use this calculation basis with a condition type to enable the system to calculate regular IOF over the tolerated limit.

Localization Parameters

This section contains the parameter that is required to meet requirements in Brazil. You access the parameter in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Configure Localization Parameters .

For more information about the parameter, see the corresponding documentation in the system.

Table 194:

Parameter Group Parameter Subgroup Parameter Name Parameter Value

IOF CHECKING_ACCOUNT MAX_DAYS 365



4.3.2.3 Configuration Steps in Customizing


To use the product that you create on the basis of the sample financial product, you make the settings described below.

NoteBy using the settings described below, the system calculates IOF separately over the committed limit and over the tolerated limit. To configure the system to calculate IOF over the total debit balance with no distinction between the committed limit and the tolerated limit, you can follow the same steps analogously.

4.3.2.3.2 Define Settlement Types

Use

To enable the system to calculate the settlement results in alignment with requirements in Brazil, you define two separate settlement types; one for the calculation and postings of IOF over the committed limit, and another for the tolerated limit.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management SettlementDefine Settlement Types .


Table 195:

Sett. Type Settlement Type Session Capitalize

Enter any key for IOF settlement over the committed limit.

Enter any description. Definitive Deselected

Enter any key for IOF settlement over the tolerated limit.

Enter any description. Definitive Deselected


4.3.2.3.3 Define Settlement Tracks

Use

To enable the system to suspend the calculation and postings of IOF for contracts in payment default, you define two separate settlement tracks, one for each settlement type created in the previous step.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management SettlementExtended Settlement Define Settlement Tracks .


Table 196:

Track ID Name of Track CYT-Relev.

Enter any key for the settlement track for IOF over the committed limit.

Enter any name. Deselected

Enter any key for the settlement track for IOF over the tolerated limit.

Enter any name. Deselected

4.3.2.3.4 Create Posting Types

Use

You define the posting types, for example, settlement postings, that the system generates automatically when it calculates taxes on a checking account. You organize the postings internally in the system by means of posting types.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsMaintain Posting Types .



2. Create posting types for regular IOF and additional IOF, including the respective posting types for positive adjustment and negative adjustment, as follows:

Table 197:

Posting Type Credit Memo Process Desc. Posting Type

Enter any key for additional IOF.

Deselected 0140 Enter any description.

Enter any key for regular IOF. Deselected 0140 Enter any description.

Enter any key for plus additional IOF.


Enter any key for minus additional IOF.

Selected 0090 Enter any description.

Enter any key for plus regular IOF.


Enter any key for minus regular IOF.

Selected 0090 Enter any description.

4.3.2.3.5 Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items

Use

To enable the system to calculate and adjust the postings of regular IOF and additional IOF, you define the transaction types that the system uses to control the processing of payment items.

Procedure


Items .


2. Enter transaction types for regular IOF and additional IOF, including the respective transaction types for credit and debit from adjustment, as follows:

Table 198:

Transaction Type

Description Trans. Type

Item Type Reversal Display Payment Notes

Other P/R

TT Group Posting Chec

Business Trans. Code

TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules

TT Grp CrcyExc

Enter any key for regular IOF.

Enter any description.

04 Selected Selected A 0900 1100 808 Internal

Enter any key for additional IOF.


04 Selected Selected A 0900 1100 808 Internal

Enter any key for credit from adjustment of regular IOF.


04 Selected Selected 0900 1100 817

Enter any key for debit from adjustment of regular IOF.


04 Selected 1900 1100 817

Enter any key for credit from adjustment of additional IOF.


04 Selected Selected 0900 1100 817



Transaction Type

Description Trans. Type

Item Type Reversal Display Payment Notes

Other P/R

TT Group Posting Chec

Business Trans. Code

TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules

TT Grp CrcyExc

Enter any key for debit from adjustment of additional IOF.


04 Selected 1900 1100 817

4.3.2.3.6 Assign Posting Types to Transaction Types

Use

To enable the system to post items in the corresponding accounts, you must assign posting types to transaction types in the correct sequence.

Prerequisites

You have defined the posting types and transaction types that you require in your system (see Create Posting Types [page 228] and Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 229]).

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsAssign Posting Types to Transaction Types .

2. Create the following entries to assign the posting types to the transaction types you created in the previous steps:

Table 199:

PT (Posting Type) TranTy (Transaction Type)

Enter the posting type that you have created for additional IOF.

Enter the transaction type that you have created for additional IOF.


PT (Posting Type) TranTy (Transaction Type)

Enter the posting type that you have created for regular IOF. Enter the transaction type that you have created for regular IOF.

Enter the posting type that you have created for minus additional IOF.

Enter the transaction type that you have created for adjustment of debit from additional IOF.

Enter the posting type that you have created for plus additional IOF.

Enter the transaction type that you have created for adjustment of credit from additional IOF.

Enter the posting type that you have created for minus regular IOF.

Enter the transaction type that you have created for adjustment of debit from regular IOF.

Enter the posting type that you have created for plus regular IOF.

Enter the transaction type that you have created for adjustment of credit from regular IOF.

4.3.2.3.7 Create Financial Condition Types

Use

You create condition types to enable the system to calculate regular IOF and additional IOF separately over the committed limit and the tolerated limit on a checking account.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Condition Define Condition Type .

2. Create the following condition types as described in the subsections below.

Condition Type for Regular IOF Over Committed Limit

Table 200:

Field Entry

Condition Type Enter any name.


Settlement Interest




Field Entry


Debit Interest

Calculation Category 1010

Balance Interest Calculation


Interest: To be Capitalized

Calculation Basis IOF_REG_C

Posting Type Enter the posting type that you have created for regular IOF.

Posting Type Adj Enter the posting type that you have created for plus regular IOF.

Posting Type NgAdj Enter the posting type that you have created for minus regular IOF.


Under Amount Category, enter the following data:

Table 201:

Field Entry Optional/Mandatory

Amount Category 105020

(Debit Interest)

Mandatory

Condition Type for Regular IOF Over Tolerated Limit

Table 202:

Field Entry



Settlement Interest



Overdraft Interest


Field Entry





Calculation Basis IOF_REG_T




RefIntRatAssign For Overdraft Balances


Table 203:



(Overdraft Interest)

Mandatory

Condition Type for Additional IOF Over Committed Limit

Table 204:

Field Entry



Settlement Interest



Debit Interest





Field Entry



Calculation Basis IOF_ADD_C






Table 205:



(Debit Interest)

Mandatory

Condition Type for Additional IOF Over Tolerated Limit

Table 206:

Field Entry



Settlement Interest



Overdraft Interest





Calculation Basis IOF_ADD_T


Field Entry




RefIntRatAssign For Overdraft Balances


Table 207:



(Overdraft Interest)

Mandatory

4.3.2.3.8 Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type

Use

To process financial condition types, you assign all condition types that are relevant for a given financial product to a condition group type. To meet country-specific and customer-specific requirements, you assign the Brazil-specific condition types to the standard condition group for settlement on checking accounts.

Prerequisites

You have created the financial condition types, for example, for additional IOF and regular IOF, that you require for your financial product (see Create Financial Condition Types [page 232]).

Procedure




2. Select the 1 - Settlement: Current Acct condition group type, double click Condition Type in the left frame, and add the condition types that you created for additional IOF and regular IOF (see Create Financial Condition Types [page 232]).


Table 208:

Field Entry

Condition Type for Regular IOF Over Committed Limit

Enter the condition type that you have created for regular IOF over the committed limit.

Condition Type for Regular IOF Over Tolerated Limit

Enter the condition type that you have created for regular IOF over the tolerated limit.

Condition Type for Additional IOF Over Committed Limit

Enter the condition type that you have created for additional IOF over the committed limit.

Condition Type for Additional IOF Over Tolerated Limit

Enter the condition type that you have created for additional IOF over the tolerated limit.

4.3.2.3.9 Create Product and Configure Attributes

4.3.2.3.9.1 Create Checking Account Product

Use

To use the product that you create on the basis of the sample financial product, you make the settings described below.

Prerequisites

You have performed all previous configuration steps listed in Configuration Steps in Customizing [page 227] and created the financial conditions that are described in Master Data Settings [page 242].

Procedure

1. Create your own checking account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .



Table 209:

Field Entry


Template Product _ACCT_C_BR



choose Enter.

5. In the product attribute structure, choose Financial Conditions Condition Groups Condition Group .6. Enter the IDs that you want to use for the following condition groups (see Master Data Settings [page 242]):

○ Settlement○ Transactions○ Events

7. Complete the master data settings described below and then save and activate your product.

4.3.2.3.9.2 Configure Attributes for Checking Account Product

Use

To enable the system to perform and control the calculation of taxes correctly, the system uses a set of product attributes for checking accounts. In this section, you configure the product that you created based on the sample product to meet requirements in Brazil.

Prerequisites

You have configured settlement types (see Define Settlement Types [page 227]), settlement tracks (see Define Settlement Tracks [page 228]), and condition groups (see Create Condition Group and Conditions for Settlement [page 243]).

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .

2. To meet requirements in Brazil, configure the product attributes in the tables below.

Financial Conditions



Condition Group for IOF Over Committed Limit

Table 210:

Name of Product Attribute Path to Product Attribute Entry

Condition Group Category Used Attributes Financial

Conditions Condition Groups

1 - Settlement

Settlement Type Used Attributes Financial


Enter the settlement type that you have created for IOF settlement over the committed limit (see Define Settlement Types [page 227]).

Condition Group Type Used Attributes Financial


1 - Settlement: Current Acct

Condition Group Used Attributes Financial


Enter the condition group that you have created for IOF over the committed limit (see Create Condition Group and Conditions for Settlement [page 243]).

Condition Group for IOF Over Tolerated Limit

Table 211:




1 - Settlement



Enter the settlement type that you have created for IOF settlement over the tolerated limit (see Define Settlement Types [page 227]).



1 - Settlement: Current Acct



Enter the condition group that you have created for IOF over the tolerated limit (see Create Condition Group and Conditions for Settlement [page 243]).

Extended Settlement

Settlement Track for IOF Over Committed Limit


Table 212:


Track Identification Number Used Attributes Extended

Settlement Settlement Tracks

Enter the settlement track that you have created for IOF over the committed limit (see Define Settlement Tracks [page 228]).

Periodically Used Attributes Extended


Selected

Period ID Used Attributes Extended


Enter a period ID as per business requirements.

Settlement Track for IOF Over Tolerated Limit

Table 213:


Track Identification Number Used Attributes Extended


Enter the settlement track that you have created for IOF over the tolerated limit (see Define Settlement Tracks [page 228]).

Periodically Used Attributes Extended


Selected

Period ID Used Attributes Extended


Enter a period ID as per business requirements.


Table 214:


Track with Settlement on Payoff Used Attributes Country-Specific




● Set the traffic light to green.● Close the padlock.● Enter the settlement track that you

have created for IOF over the committed limit (see Define Settlement Tracks [page 228])

● Set the field modification to Hidden.




Track with Settlement on Periodic Run Used Attributes Country-Specific




● Set the traffic light to green.● Close the padlock.● Enter the settlement track that you

have created for IOF over the tolerated limit (see Define Settlement Tracks [page 228])

● Set the field modification to Hidden.

Save Product

Save and activate your product.

4.3.2.3.10 Define Job Nets

Use

To ensure the system calculates IOF correctly for checking accounts, you define the reports that need to be executed during the end-of-day processing, as described below.

Prerequisites

You have created at least one checking account product using the template delivered by SAP (_ACCT_C_BR).

Procedure

1. Define the report execution in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management End-of-Day Processing Define Job Nets .

2. Double-click Process Flow Template to access this view, choose a process flow, and double-click Reports of the Process Flow Template.

3. Click the New Entries pushbutton to add a line for the Postpone Settlement Execution Date report, and enter the following data:

Table 215:

Field Entry

Report No. Enter any number.


Field Entry

Report /FSLBR/POSTPONE_SETTL_EXEC_PP

4. Double-click Predecessors <-> Successors, and click the New Entries pushbutton.5. Enter the following data to ensure that the Postpone Settlement Execution Date report runs after the change of

the posting date for payment transactions:

Table 216:

Field Entry

Report No. (First Column) 60

Report No. (Second Column) Enter the report number you created in step 3.

6. Click the New Entries pushbutton again and enter the following data to ensure that the Postpone Settlement Execution Date report runs before the change of the posting date for end-of-day processing:

Table 217:

Field Entry

Report No. (First Column) Enter the report number you created in step 3.

Report No. (Second Column) 150

7. Click the New Entries pushbutton again and enter the following data to ensure that the Postpone Settlement Execution Date report runs before the account settlement:

Table 218:

Field Entry




4.3.2.4 Master Data Settings


To use the checking account product that you create based on the sample product for Brazil, you enter the master data described below.



4.3.2.4.2 Create Condition Group and Conditions for Settlement

Use

To calculate IOF and interest over checking account limits, you define condition groups and the corresponding conditions.

Prerequisites

1. You have created the financial condition types for additional IOF and regular IOF (see Create Financial Condition Types [page 232]).

2. You have assigned the financial condition types to a condition group type (see Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type [page 236]).

Procedure

Create Condition Group for IOF Over Committed Limit



Table 219:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Settlement: Current Account

Condition Group Any number

Condition Group Description Any description

4. Choose Enter.5. Create the conditions described below.

Create Condition for Additional IOF

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition for additional IOF over the committed limit that you previously created (see Create Financial Condition Types [page 232]).



Table 220:

Field Entry

Currency BRL

Valid From Start date of the validity period


Table 221:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Any description

Rounding Category Round to the Nearest

Percentage Rate 0.38


Rounding Unit 0

Interest Calc. (Exponential/Linear Interest Calculation) Straight-line

Create Condition for Regular IOF

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition for regular IOF over the committed limit that you previously created (see Create Financial Condition Types [page 232]).


Table 222:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 223:

Field Entry



IntRateTimeUnit (Time Unit for Interest Rate) Interest Rate per Annum



Field Entry

Percentage Rate 1.5


Rounding Unit 0


Create Condition Group for IOF Over Tolerated Limit



Table 224:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Settlement: Current Account




Create Condition for Additional IOF

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition for additional IOF over the tolerated limit that you previously created (see Create Financial Condition Types [page 232]).


Table 225:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 226:

Field Entry



Field Entry




Rounding Unit 0


Create Condition for Regular IOF

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition for regular IOF over the tolerated limit that you previously created (see Create Financial Condition Types [page 232]).


Table 227:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 228:

Field Entry




Percentage Rate 1.5


Rounding Unit 0


Create Condition Group for Interest

Create Condition for Debit Interest

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Debit Interest (105100).




Table 229:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 230:

Field Entry






Rounding Unit 0


Create Condition for Overdraft Interest

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Overdraft Interest (105120).


Table 231:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 232:

Field Entry




Field Entry




Rounding Unit 0



4.3.2.4.3 Create Condition Group and Conditions for Transactions

Use

You define the condition group and conditions that you use for transactions related to checking accounts as follows:

Procedure

Create Condition Group for Transactions



Table 233:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Transaction: Current Account




Create Condition for the Value Date



1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Value Date (205010).


Table 234:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 235:

Field Entry


Value Date Def. (Value Date Definition Category) No Value Date Calculation

Type of Days Calendar days

Number of Days 0

Working Day Shift No shift

Tolerance Days Val.Dte.Min 3

Tolerance Days Val.Dte.Max 3

Create Condition for the Transaction Charge

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Transaction Charge (115050).


Table 236:

Field Entry

Currency BRL

Transaction Type 020000




Table 237:

Field Entry


Rounding Cat. (Rounding Category) Round to the Nearest

Tiered/Interval No Tiered/Interval

Amount 2.00


4.3.2.4.4 Create Condition Group and Conditions for Events

Use

You define the condition group and condition that the system uses when a certain event occurs. For example, if a customer creates a new standing order or changes the parameters of an existing standing order, you want the system to calculate a charge directly on the checking account. You create the condition group and conditions as follows:

Procedure

Create Condition Group for Events



Table 238:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Events: Checking Account



4. Choose Enter.5. Create the condition described below.

Create Condition for Direct Charge



1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Direct Charge (Fixed Amt) (115060).


Table 239:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 240:

Field Entry


Amount 5.00


4.3.2.5 Business Add-Ins and Interfaces

Localization-Specific Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)

The Business Add-In (BAdI) for checking accounts is specific to the Brazil localization and is provided with a default implementation. The default implementation can be redefined by customer-specific implementations, as required.

You can access that BAdI in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Contract Management Account Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Country-Specific Settings Brazil .

BAdI: Retrieval of Information About Payment Default

You can use this BAdI to determine whether a bank customer contract is in default.

The default implementation determines that a bank customer contract is in default when the account balance exceeds the committed limit. In addition, it sets a 30-day grace period before setting the payment default.

4.3.3 Time Deposit


The sample time deposit products for Brazil enable you to calculate financial operation tax (IOF), withholding tax (IRRF), and interest when bank customers withdraw funds from time deposit accounts.


NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to time deposits for Brazil, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP Brazil

Account Management (FS-AM) Deposits Time Deposits .


Product Templates

The standard delivery for Brazil contains the following product templates for time deposits:

● Time deposits allowing early withdrawals (_BR_TD)● Time deposits not allowing early withdrawals (_BR_TD_EWN)

Product Attributes


Table 241:

Name of Product Attribute Path to Product Attribute Description of Product Attribute

Condition Type for Regressive IOF Used Attributes Country-Specific

Attributes Brazil Taxes Regressive

IOF Condition Type for Regressive

IOF

Indicates the condition type that the system uses to calculate regressive IOF.

Condition Type for Regressive IOF Calc. Base

Used Attributes Country-Specific

Attributes Brazil Taxes Regressive

IOF Condition Type for Regressive IOF

Calc. Base

Indicates the condition type that the system uses to determine base amount for calculating regressive IOF.

Definition of Start Date for Calculation Used Attributes Country-Specific

Attributes Brazil Taxes

Withholding Tax Definition of Start

Date for Calculation

Indicates the start date for the calculation of withholding tax (IRRF).





Condition Type for Withholding Tax Used Attributes Country-Specific


Withholding Tax Condition Type for

Withholding Tax

Indicates the condition type that the system uses to calculate withholding tax (IRRF).

Condition Type for IRRF Calculation Base Used Attributes Country-Specific


Withholding Tax Condition Type for

IRRF Calculation Base

Indicates the condition type that the system uses to determine the base amount for calculating withholding tax (IRRF).

NoteFor more information about the product attributes, see the documentation for each attribute in the system.


Use

To use the time deposit product that you create on the basis of the sample financial products (_BR_TD or _BR_TD_EWN) for Brazil, you make the settings described below.

Procedure

Create Time Deposit Product



Table 242:

Field Entry


Template Product _BR_TD or _BR_TD_EWN


3. Choose Enter.


4. On the Product Create: Administration screen, enter a description and validity period for the product and choose Enter.

5. In the product attributes structure, choose Financial Conditions Condition Groups Condition Group .6. Enter the IDs that you want to use for the following condition groups (see Master Data Settings [page 254]):

○ Settlement○ Transactions○ Events

7. Complete the master data settings described below and then save and activate your product.



To use the time deposit products that you create based on the sample products for Brazil, you enter the master data described below.

4.3.3.4.2 Enter Tax Rates

Use

To enable the system to calculate the correct amount of financial operation tax (IOF) and withholding tax (IRRF) on time deposit accounts, you enter the applicable rates for each type of tax.

Procedure

Enter Tax Rates for Regressive IOF

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Country-Specific Settings Brazil Taxes Enter Regressive Tax Rates for IOF .

2. Enter the legally defined IOF rates along with the effective date and the validity period for each rate.

Enter Tax Rates for Progressive IRRF

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Country-Specific Settings Brazil Taxes Enter Progressive Tax Rates for IRRF .

2. Enter the legally defined IRRF rates along with the effective date and the validity period for each rate.




Use

To determine how the system calculates fixed and variable interest for time deposits, you define a condition group and the corresponding conditions.

Prerequisites

If you want to use a variable rate of interest, you must have entered the CDI (Intrabank rate for investment funds) percentage rates on the SAP Easy Access screen under Financial Services Account Management Current Settings Financial Conditions Reference Interest Rates Edit Reference Interest Rates .

Procedure

Create Condition Group for Settlement



Table 243:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Settlement: Time Deposit




Create Condition for Fixed Interest

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Credit Int. TDep. BR Var. (105117).



Table 244:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 245:

Field Entry



IntRateTimeUnit (Time Unit for Interest Rate) Interest rate per Annum

Percentage Rate 10

Int. Calc. Method (Interest Calculation Method) Act/360

Rounding Unit 0

Interest Calc. (Exponential/Linear Interest Calculation) Exponential

Int.Stllm.Freq (Interest Settlement Frequency) Annual Interest

Create Condition for Variable Interest

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select BR Credit Int. TDep. Var. (105117).


Table 246:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 247:

Field Entry




Field Entry


IntRateTimeUnit (Time Unit for Interest Rate) Interest rate per Annum

Ref.Int.Rate (Reference Interest Rate) CDI

Int. Calc. Method (Interest Calculation Method) ActW/252

Int. Calendar BR

Rounding Unit 0

Interest Calc. (Exponential/Linear Interest Calculation) Exponential

Int.Stllm.Freq (Interest Settlement Frequency) Annual Interest

4. In the Adjustment Date section of the Adjustment tab page, enter the following data:

Table 248:

Field Entry

Frequency Cat. Periodic

Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Days

RefDatStartDate At Start of Term

Shift Number 0

Work. Day Shift No Shift

Calendar for Working Day Shift BR

5. In the Fixing Date section of the Adjustment tab page, enter the following data:

Table 249:

Field Entry

Frequency Cat. Relative

Ref. Date Catg Adjustment

+/-Working Days 0



Field Entry




Use

You define the condition group and conditions that you use for transactions related to time deposits.

Procedure




Table 250:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Transaction: Time Deposit









Table 251:

Field Entry

Currency BRL




Use

You define the condition group and condition that the system uses when a certain event occurs, for example, when a bank customer makes an early withdrawal from a time deposit account.

Procedure

Create Condition Group for Events



Table 252:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Events: Time Deposit




Create Condition for Direct Charge

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Admin Charge EWTD (115500).



Table 253:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 254:

Field Entry


Payment Currency BRL

Amount 500.00


4.3.4 Multidate Savings Account


The sample account product for multidate savings accounts allows you to meet legal requirements in Brazil, such as calculating interest as outlined in Brazilian law number 12.703 from 2012.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to savings accounts for Brazil, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAPBrazil Account Management (FS-AM) Deposits Savings Accounts .

CautionFor accrual purposes, the system uses the daily base rate of Selic interest rate, which can generate slight differences between the accrued amount and the settled amount.





Product Templates

The standard delivery for Brazil includes a product template for multidate savings accounts called: _BR_ACCSPR.

Settings for Interest Calculation

To meet requirements in Brazil for interest calculation on multidate savings accounts, the standard delivery includes the following settings:

● Posting types, transaction types, and corresponding assignments● Condition group types and financial condition types● Calculation bases

The settings enable the calculation of base and additional interest, separated into interest on deposits made before May 4, 2012 and interest on deposits made as of that date.



To use the multidate savings account product that you create based on the sample product for Brazil, you enter the master data described below.

4.3.4.3.2 Create Condition Group and Financial Conditions for Settlement

Use

To define base and additional rates for interest calculation on multidate savings accounts, you must create a condition group and the corresponding conditions for settlement, taking into account separate conditions for deposits made before May 4, 2012 and as of that date.


Prerequisites

You have entered the base interest percentage rates for final period reference rate (TR) and Selic rate target on the SAP Easy Access screen, under Financial Services Account Management Current Settings Financial Conditions Reference Interest Rates Edit Reference Interest Rates .

Procedure




Table 255:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Enter Settlement Private Saving or any custom condition group type that you have created for this purpose.




Create Financial Condition for Base Interest Calculation (Before May 4, 2012)

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Cr. Base Priv Pre 05.12 or any custom condition that you have created for this purpose.


Table 256:

Field Entry

Currency BRL





Table 257:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Enter any description.


Ref. Int. Rate (Reference Interest Rate) TR

4. On the Adjustment tab page, enter the following data:

Table 258:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Days

RefDatStartdate At start of settlement period

Table 259:

Field Entry



Working Days 2

5. Choose Enter.

Create Financial Condition for Additional Interest Calculation (Before May 4, 2012)

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Cr. Add. Priv Pre 05.12 or any custom condition that you have created for this purpose.


Table 260:

Field Entry

Currency BRL




Table 261:

Field Entry



Percentage Rate 0.5


Create Financial Condition for Base Interest Calculation (as of May 4, 2012)

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Cr. Base Priv Post 05.12 or any custom condition that you have created for this purpose.


Table 262:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 263:

Field Entry




4. On the Adjustment tab page, enter the following data:

Table 264:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Days

RefDatStartdate At start of settlement period



Table 265:

Field Entry



Working Days 2

5. Choose Enter.

Create Financial Condition for Additional Interest Calculation (as of May 4, 2012)

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Cr. Add. Priv Post 05.12 or any custom condition that you have created for this purpose.


Table 266:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 267:

Field Entry



Ref. Int. Rate (Reference Interest Rate) SELIC

Relative Markup/Markdown Selected

Markup/Markdown Percentage 70



Use

You define the condition group and conditions that you use for transactions related to private and nonprofit savings accounts.


Procedure




Table 268:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Enter Trans. Savings Multi-Date or any custom condition that you have created for this purpose.




Create Condition

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Value Date.


Table 269:

Field Entry

Currency BRL


End Date 31.12.9999




This section describes how to configure the system to deal with the specific requirements of multidate savings accounts in Brazil.



4.3.4.4.2 Create Savings Account Product and Configure Attributes

Use

To use the multidate savings account, you must create a product based on the product template delivered by SAP for Brazil (_BR_ACCSPR) and make the settings described below.

Prerequisites

You have created the condition groups and corresponding financial conditions that you use for:

● Settlement (see Create Condition Group and Financial Conditions for Settlement [page 261])● Transaction (see Create Condition Group and Conditions for Transactions [page 265])

Procedure

1. Create your own multidate savings account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .


Table 270:

Field Entry


Template Product _BR_ACCSPR

Product Version Latest version


choose Enter.


5. In the product attributes structure, configure the product attributes in the table below:

Table 271:

Product Attribute Path in Product Attribute Tree Description



Enter the IDs that you want to use for the following condition groups:

○ Settlement○ Transaction

Condition Type for Base Interest Before 2012–05–04


Attributes Brazil Savings Account

Savings Multi-Date

Enter the condition type that you use to calculate the base interest of savings accounts for deposits made before May 4, 2012.

Condition Type for Add. Interest Before 2012–05–04



Savings Multi-Date

Enter the condition type that you use to calculate the additional interest of savings accounts for deposits made before May 4, 2012.

Condition Type for Base Interest as of 2012–05–04



Savings Multi-Date

Enter the condition type that you use to calculate the base interest of savings accounts for deposits made as of May 4, 2012.

Condition Type for Add. Interest as of 2012–05–04



Savings Multi-Date

Enter the condition type that you use to calculate the additional interest of savings accounts for deposits made as of May 4, 2012.


4.3.4.4.3 Define Job Nets

Use

To ensure the system calculates interest correctly multidate savings accounts, you define the reports that need to be executed during the end-of-day processing, as described below.

Prerequisites

You have created at least one savings account product using the template delivered by SAP (_BR_ACCSPR).



Procedure


2. Double-click Usable Reports to access this view, click the New Entries pushbutton, and enter the following data:

Table 272:

Field Entry

Report /FSLBR/SAV_CREATE_INFOITEM_PP

Description Calculate Multidate Balance

Restart Mode Choose the appropriate value.

3. Choose Enter.4. Double-click Process Flow Template to access this view, choose a process flow, and double-click Reports of the

Process Flow Template.5. Click the New Entries pushbutton to add a line for the Calculate Multidate Balance report, and enter the

following data:

Table 273:

Field Entry


Report /FSLBR/SAV_CREATE_INFOITEM_PP

6. Double-click Predecessors <-> Successors, and click the New Entries pushbutton.7. Enter the following data to ensure that the Calculate Multidate Balance report runs after the change of the

posting date for payment transactions:

Table 274:

Field Entry



8. Click the New Entries pushbutton again and enter the following data to ensure that the Calculate Multidate Balance report runs before the change of the posting date for end-of-day processing:

Table 275:

Field Entry



Field Entry


9. Double-click Reports of the Process Flow Template, click the New Entries pushbutton to add a line for the Accrue/Defer Account Results report, and enter the following data:

Table 276:

Field Entry


Report RBCA_ACCRUE_RUN_PP

Var. Use a variant that selects the multidate savings account products.

10. Repeat steps 6–8 for the Accrue/Defer Account Results report, this time using the report number you created in step 9.

11. Double-click Reports of the Process Flow Template, click the New Entries pushbutton to add a line for the Account Settlement report, and enter the following data:

Table 277:

Field Entry


Report RBCA_SETTLE_RUN_PP

Var. Use a variant that selects the multidate savings account products.

12. Double-click Predecessors <-> Successors, and click the New Entries pushbutton.13. Enter the following data to ensure that the Account Settlement report runs after the change of the posting date

for end-of-day processing for multidate savings accounts:

Table 278:

Field Entry







Use

This section contains the parameters that are necessary to meet requirements for multidate savings accounts in Brazil.

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country Brazil and the parameter group SAVINGS_ACCOUNT_PRIVATE.3. Configure the parameters as required, as described below:

Table 279:


SELIC SELIC_RATE_BARRIER Enter the percentage value for Selic interest rate target above which the system changes the calculation formula for additional interest rate on multidate savings accounts (applicable to deposits made as of May 4, 2012). For example: 8.5.

TRANSACTION_TYPE CREDIT_INTEREST_PRE_05_2012 Enter the credit transaction types that you use to calculate base and additional interest on multidate savings accounts for deposits made before May 4, 2012.

TRANSACTION_TYPE CREDIT_MD_BALANCE_PRE_05_2012 Enter the transaction type that you use for credit info items to calculate the balance of multidate savings accounts for deposits made before May 4, 2012.

TRANSACTION_TYPE CREDIT_MD_BALANCE_POS_05_2012 Enter the transaction type that you use for credit info items to calculate the balance of multidate savings accounts for deposits made as of May 4, 2012.

TRANSACTION_TYPE DEBIT_MD_BALANCE_PRE_05_2012 Enter the transaction type that you use for debit info items to calculate the balance of multidate savings accounts for deposits made before May 4, 2012.



TRANSACTION_TYPE DEBIT_MD_BALANCE_POS_05_2012 Enter the transaction type that you use for debit info items to calculate the balance of multidate savings accounts for deposits made as of May 4, 2012.


4.3.4.4.5 Create Legal Forms for Business Partner Checks

Use

To enable the sample implementation for the business partner check function, you must create a legal form for multidate savings accounts.

NoteFor more information about the business processes related to business partner checks for savings accounts, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP

Brazil Account Management (FS-AM) Deposits Savings Accounts Master Data for Savings AccountsBusiness Partner Checks for Savings Accounts .

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Cross-Application Components, choose SAP Business Partner Business PartnerOrganizations Maintain Legal Forms .Enter the following data:

Table 280:

Field Entry

Legal Form 20

Description Enter a description for nonprofit company and natural person.




Field Entry

Short Description Enter a short description for nonprofit company and natural person.


4.3.5 Corporate Savings Account


This section describes how to configure the system to process corporate savings accounts in line with the regulations. It covers the settings required for the following:

● Operational banking (see Configuration for Account Management [page 273])● Integration with analytical banking (see Integration Between Account Management and Bank Analyzer [page

300])● Analytical banking (see Configuration for Bank Analyzer [page 302])

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to savings accounts for Brazil, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAPBrazil Account Management (FS-AM) Deposits Savings Accounts .

4.3.5.2 Configuration for Account Management


The sample account product for corporate savings accounts allows you to meet legal requirements in Brazil, such as calculating interest as outlined in Brazilian law number 12.703 from 2012.

4.3.5.2.2 Settings Delivered As Standard

Product Templates

The standard delivery for Brazil includes a product template for corporate savings accounts called: _SBR_DEPTC.



Settings for Interest and Tax Calculation

To meet requirements in Brazil for interest and tax calculation on corporate savings accounts, the standard delivery includes the following settings:

● Non-balance-changing (NBC) transaction types● NBC posting categories● Assignment of NBC transaction types and NBC posting categories● Turnover classes to calculate interest● Own check result for invalid payment items● Error type for invalid posting period● Assignment of own check result to error type● Main rule set for error type● Payment note types

The settings enable the calculation of withholding tax, and base and additional interest, segregated for deposits made before May 4, 2012 and as of that date.

4.3.5.2.3 Configuration Steps in Customizing


This section describes how to configure the system to deal with the specific requirements of corporate savings accounts in Brazil.

NoteYou must define all transaction types used to post payment items to corporate savings accounts with Own Check selected.

4.3.5.2.3.2 Create Condition Types and Condition Group Types for Settlement

Use

To define additional and base rates for interest calculation on corporate savings accounts, you create condition types and condition group types for settlement.



Prerequisites

● You have created the transaction types for deposits made before and as of May 4, 2012 that you use to calculate base and additional interest and withholding tax. You define the transaction types in Customizing for Financial Services Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transaction Types Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items .

● You have created the posting types for deposits made before and as of May 4, 2012 that you use to calculate base and additional interest and withholding tax. You define the posting types in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Maintain Posting Types .

● You have assigned such transaction types to the corresponding posting types in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Assign Posting Types to Transaction Types .

Procedure

Create Condition Type for Base Interest for Settlement (Before May 4, 2012)

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management -> Product Management -> Financial Conditions -> Define Condition Type.


Table 281:

Field Entry

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Cr. Corp. Base Pre 04.05.2012.


Posting Sign Credit


Calc. Category 1010


Calc. Basis CSA_BB0305

Posting Type Enter the posting type that you have created for base interest before 2012–05–04, as previously described in Prerequisites.

PstingType PAdj 17


Field Entry

PstgType NgAdj. 14

ProcResCat 00004100

Proc. Res.Positive 00004102

ProcResultCategNeg 00004101





Exch.Rate Type M

Totaled Base on Detailed Results



RefIntRatAssign For Credit Balances


3. Choose Enter.4. Double click the Amount Category folder and enter the following data:

Table 282:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105030


Create Condition Type for Additional Interest for Settlement (Before May 4, 2012)





Table 283:

Field Entry

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Cr. Corp. Add Pre 04.05.2012.


Posting Sign Credit


Calc. Category 1010



Posting Type Enter the posting type that you have created for additional interest before 2012–05–04, as previously described in Prerequisites.

PstingType PAdj 17

PstgType NgAdj. 14

ProcResCat 00004100







Exch.Rate Type M





Field Entry




Table 284:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 220010


Create Condition Type for Base Interest for Settlement (as of May 4, 2012)



Table 285:

Field Entry

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Cr. Corp. Base Pre 04.05.2012.


Posting Sign Credit


Calc. Category 1010



Posting Type Enter the posting type that you have created for base interest as of 2012–05–04, as previously described in Prerequisites.

PstingType PAdj 17

PstgType NgAdj. 14

ProcResCat 00004100



Field Entry







Exch.Rate Type M







Table 286:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105030


Create Condition Type for Additional Interest for Settlement (as of May 4, 2012)



Table 287:

Field Entry

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Cr. Corp. Add Pre 04.05.2012.


Field Entry


Posting Sign Credit


Calc. Category 1010



Posting Type Enter the posting type that you have created for additional interest as of 2012–05–04, as previously described in Prerequisites.

PstingType PAdj 17

PstgType NgAdj. 14

ProcResCat 00004100







Exch.Rate Type M






3. Choose Enter.



4. Double click the Amount Category folder and enter the following data:

Table 288:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 220010


Create Condition Group Type for Settlement

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management -> Product Management -> Financial Conditions -> Define Condition Group Type.


Table 289:

Field Entry

Con.Gr.Typ. Enter any number.

Condition Group Type Description Enter any description.

Con.Gr.Cat. 1

B Selected

Corresp. Ind. Conds Indicator Not Set

RCategory 0090 - Generic

3. Choose Enter.4. Double click the Condition Type folder and enter the following data:

Table 290:

Field Entry

CondTyp Enter the condition type that you have previously created in Create Condition Type for Base Interest for Settlement (Before May 4, 2012).

CondTyp Enter the condition type that you have previously created in Create Condition Type for Additional Interest for Settlement (Before May 4, 2012).

CondTyp Enter the condition type that you have previously created in Create Condition Type for Base Interest for Settlement (as of May 4, 2012).


Field Entry

CondTyp Enter the condition type that you have previously created in Create Condition Type for Additional Interest for Settlement (as of May 4, 2012).


4.3.5.2.3.3 Create Condition Types for Withholding Tax Calculation for Tax Manager

Use

The system uses tax manager to calculate withholding tax. To post the results of this calculation, tax manager uses two financial conditions, one for deposits made before May 4, 2012 and another for deposits made as of that date.

NoteFor more information about how to configure tax manager to calculate withholding tax on corporate savings accounts, see Withholding Tax on Corporate Savings Accounts [page 344].

Prerequisites

● You have created the transaction types for deposits made before and as of May 4, 2012 that you use to calculate withholding tax. You define the transaction types in Customizing for Financial Services under

Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Transaction Types and Transaction Types Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items .

● You have created the posting types for deposits made before and as of May 4, 2012 that you use to calculate withholding tax. You define the posting types in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Maintain Posting Types .

● You have assigned such transaction types to the corresponding posting types in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Assign Posting Types to Transaction Types .

Procedure

Create Condition Type for Withholding Tax (Before May 4, 2012)





Table 291:

Field Entry

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Withholding Tax Corp. Sav. Pre 04.05.2012.




Calc. Category 1010


Calc. Basis

Posting Type Enter the posting type that you have created for withholding tax before 2012-05-04, as previously described in Prerequisites.

PstingType PAdj 16

PstgType NgAdj. 13

ProcResCat 00004103




Determ. Time StdCon. Use Conditions at Calculation Time Determ.

Time Ind.Con Condition Determination Timepoint as Standard Conditions


Exch.Rate Type M



Field Entry






Create Condition Type for Withholding Tax (as of May 4, 2012)



Table 292:

Field Entry

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Withholding Tax Corp. Sav. Pos 04.05.2012.




Calc. Category 1010


Calc. Basis

Posting Type Enter the posting type that you have created for withholding tax as of 2012–05–04, as previously described in Prerequisites.

PstingType PAdj 16

PstgType NgAdj. 13

ProcResCat 00004103




Field Entry



Determ. Time StdCon. Use Conditions at Calculation Time Determ.

Time Ind.Con Condition Determination Timepoint as Standard Conditions


Exch.Rate Type M







4.3.5.2.3.4 Create Non-Balance-Changing Transaction Types and Posting Categories

Use

To split the account balance of a corporate savings account between deposits made before and as of May 4, 2012, you create four non-balancing-changing (NBC) transaction types and assign them to the corresponding non-balance-changing posting categories.

NoteWhen you create the non-balancing-changing posting categories, use the standard NBC Process Data Transfer -Inventory (5000).


Procedure

Create Non-Balance-Changing Transaction Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsMaintain Non-Balance-Changing Transaction Types .

2. For each NBC transaction type that you want to create, enter the following data:

Table 293:

Field Entry

Non-Bal.ChngTransTyp Enter an ID for your condition type, for example, 600010.

TransTypDes Enter a description for your condition type, for example, Dr.Bal. Bef. 2012-05-04.


NoteYou assign the transaction types to your corporate savings account product. For more information, see Create Savings Account Product and Configure Attributes [page 297].

Create Non-Balance-Changing Posting Categories

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsMaintain Non-Balance-Changing Posting Categories .

2. For each posting category that you want to create, enter the following data:

Table 294:

Field Entry

NBCPostCat Enter an ID for your posting category, for example, 60.

Desc.Ps.Ct. Enter a description for your transaction type, for example, Debit Balance.

NBCProcess 5000

Desc.Proc. Data Transfer - Inventory


Assign Non-Balance-Changing Transaction Types to Non-Balance-Changing Posting Categories

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsAssign Non-Bal-Changing Posting Categories to Non-Bal-Changing Trans.Types .



2. For each mapping that you want to create between the transaction types and posting categories that you have create in the previous steps, enter the following data:

Table 295:

Field Entry

Non-Bal. Chg PostCat Enter the ID for your posting category, for example, 60.

Non-Bal.ChngTransTyp Enter the ID for your transaction type, for example, Debit Balance.


4.3.5.2.3.5 Create Posting Control Rules

Use

To raise an error message when users create invalid payment items, you customize own check results, own check error type, and main rule set.

Procedure

Define Own Check Result



Table 296:

Field Entry

Result No. Enter the ID for your own check result, for example, SC01.

Appl. Area /FSLBR/SAV_ACCT

Message 048


Define Error Types




Table 297:

Field Entry

Error Type Enter the ID for your error type, for example, SC1.

Error Type Description Enter a description for your error type, for example, Invalid SavCorp Posting Period.


Assign Error Types



Table 298:

Field Entry

Check Obj Own Check

Check Own Check

Result No. Enter the ID for the own check result that you have previously created.

Error Type Enter the ID for the error type that you have previously created.


Define Main Rule Set



Table 299:

Field Entry

ErrorType Enter the ID for the error type that you have previously created.

Ty. Ordering Party

First Resp Post Processing




4.3.5.2.3.6 Create Types for Structured Payment Notes

Use

To link the payment items to the non-balance-changing (NBC) items that you have created in Create Non-Balance-Changing Transaction Types and Posting Categories [page 285], you create two payment note types:

● One for posting of NBC items before May 04, 2012● One for posting as of May 04, 2012

Procedure

Create Payment Notes Types


2. For each payment note type that you want to create, enter the following data:

Table 300:

Field Entry

Payt Notes Type Enter an ID for the payment note type, for example, 600.

Descr. Type Payt Nts Enter a description for the payment note type, for example, NBC Before 2012-05-04.


4.3.5.2.3.7 Create Legal Forms for Business Partner Checks

Use

To enable the sample implementation for the business partner check function, you must create a legal form for corporate savings accounts.

NoteFor more information about the business processes related to business partner checks for savings accounts, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP

Brazil Account Management (FS-AM) Deposits Savings Accounts Master Data for Savings AccountsBusiness Partner Checks for Savings Accounts .



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Cross-Application Components, choose SAP Business Partner Business PartnerOrganizations Maintain Legal Forms .Enter the following data:

Table 301:

Field Entry

Legal Form 30

Description Enter a description for profitable company.

Short Description Enter a short description for profitable company.


4.3.5.2.3.8 Configure Localization Parameters

Use

This section contains the parameters that are necessary to meet requirements for corporate savings accounts in Brazil.

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country Brazil and the parameter group SAVINGS_ACCOUNT_CORPORATE.



3. Configure the parameters as required, as described below:

Table 302:

Parameter Subgroup Parameter Name Description

OWNCHECK_RESULT PAYITEM_INVALID_POSTING_PERIOD

Enter the result number of the own check that you use for errors that result from an invalid posting period in a payment item. For more information, see Create Posting Control Rules [page 287].

NoteYou can use the own check result SC01, which is delivered as standard, as the value for this parameter.

PAYMENT_NOTE_TYPE BALANCE_AFTER_MP567 Enter the payment note type that you use for non-balance-changing turnover posting for deposits made as of May 4, 2012. For more information, see Create Types for Structured Payment Notes [page 289].

NoteYou can use the payment note type 601, which is delivered as standard, as the value for this parameter.

PAYMENT_NOTE_TYPE BALANCE_BEFORE_MP567 Enter the payment note type that you use for non-balance-changing turnover posting for deposits made before May 4, 2012. For more information, see Create Types for Structured Payment Notes [page 289].

NoteYou can use the payment note type 600, which is delivered as standard, as the value for this parameter.


Parameter Subgroup Parameter Name Description

SELIC SELIC_RATE_BARRIER Enter the percentage value for Selic interest rate target above which the system changes the calculation formula for additional interest rate on corporate savings accounts (applicable to deposits made as of May 4, 2012). For example: 8.5.

NoteFor more information about the localization parameters, see the documentation for each parameter in the system.

4.3.5.2.4 Master Data Settings


To use the corporate savings account product that you create based on the sample product for Brazil, you enter the master data described below.

4.3.5.2.4.2 Create Condition Group and Conditions for Settlement

Use

To define additional and base rates for monthly interest calculation and withholding tax on corporate savings accounts, you create a condition group and corresponding conditions for settlement.

Prerequisites

You have entered the base interest percentage rates (TR) and Selic rate target on the SAP Easy Access screen, under Financial Services Account Management Current Settings Financial Conditions Reference Interest Rates Edit Reference Interest Rates .



Procedure




Table 303:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Enter the condition group type that you have created in section Create Condition Types and Condition Group Types for Settlement [page 274].




Create Condition for Base Interest Calculation (Before May 4, 2012)

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition type that you have created in Create Condition Type for Base Interest for Settlement (Before May 4, 2012) (see Create Condition Types and Condition Group Types for Settlement [page 274]).


Table 304:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 305:

Field Entry


IntRate TimeUnit (Interest Rate Time Unit) 12 Interest Rate per Month




4. Choose Enter.

Create Condition for Additional Interest Calculation (Before May 4, 2012)

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition type that you have created in Create Condition Type for Additional Interest for Settlement (Before May 4, 2012) (see Create Condition Types and Condition Group Types for Settlement [page 274]).


Table 306:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 307:

Field Entry


IntRate TimeUnit (Interest Rate Time Unit) 4 Interest Rate per Quarter


Ref. Int. Rate (Reference Interest Rate) 1.5

4. On the Time Periods tab page, enter the following data:

Table 308:

Field Entry


Repeat Period 3

Repeat Unit Months

1st Calc. Date 31.12.2999

Create Condition for Base Interest Calculation (as of May 4, 2012)

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition type that you have created in Create Condition Type for Base Interest for Settlement (as of May 4, 2012) (see Create Condition Types and Condition Group Types for Settlement [page 274]).




Table 309:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 310:

Field Entry


IntRate TimeUnit (Interest Rate Time Unit) 12 Interest Rate per Month



4. Choose Enter.

Create Condition for Additional Interest Calculation (as of May 4, 2012)

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition type that you have created in Create Condition Type for Additional Interest for Settlement (as of May 4, 2012) (see Create Condition Types and Condition Group Types for Settlement [page 274]).


Table 311:

Field Entry

Currency BRL



Table 312:

Field Entry


IntRate TimeUnit (Interest Rate Time Unit) 4 Interest Rate per Quarter


Ref. Int. Rate (Reference Interest Rate) SELIC


Field Entry

Absolute Markup/Markdown Selected

Markup/Markdown Percentage 70

4.3.5.2.4.3 Create Condition Group and Conditions for Transactions

Use

You define the condition group and conditions that you use for transactions related to corporate savings accounts.

Procedure




Table 313:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Enter Trans. Savings Corporate or any custom condition that you have created for this purpose.




Create Conditions

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Value Date.




Table 314:

Field Entry

Currency BRL


End Date 31.12.9999


4.3.5.2.5 Create Savings Account Product and Configure Attributes

Use

To use the corporate savings account product that you create based on the product template delivered by SAP for Brazil (_SBR_DEPTC), you make the settings described below.

Prerequisites

● You have created both the Settlement Condition Group and the Transaction Condition Group, as described in Master Data Settings [page 292].

● You have created the non-balance-changing transaction types and the corresponding non-balance-changing posting categories, as described in Configuration Steps in Customizing [page 274].

● You have created the transaction types for posting of withholding tax, for deposits made before and as of May 4, 2012, as described in Configuration Steps in Customizing [page 274].

Procedure

1. Create your own corporate savings account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .



Table 315:

Field Entry


Template Product _SBR_DEPTC

Product Version Latest version


choose Enter.5. In the product attributes structure, configure the product attributes in the table below:

○ General settings

Table 316:




Enter the IDs that you want to use for the following condition groups:

○ Settlement○ Transaction

Assignment Turnover Classes Posting Data Turnover Classes Enter the following turnover classes:

○ CSAB (SavCorp Bef. 2012-05-04)

○ CSAA (SavCorp as of 2012-05–04)

○ Settings for deposits made before May 4, 2012

Table 317:


Condition Type for Base Interest Country-Specific Attributes

Brazil Savings Account

Corporate Before 2012-05-04

Enter the condition type that you use to calculate the base interest of savings accounts.

Condition Type for Additional Interest Country-Specific Attributes



Enter the condition type that you use to calculate the additional interest of savings accounts.




Transaction Type for Withholding Tax Country-Specific Attributes



Enter the transaction type used to post withholding tax.

Turnover Class for Savings Account Balance




CSAB (SavCorp Bef. 2012-05-04)

Dr. Trans. Type for Non-Balance-Changing Turnover




Enter the debit non-balance-changing transaction types.

Cr. Trans. Type for Non-Balance-Changing Turnover




Enter the credit non-balance-changing transaction types.

○ Settings for deposits made as of May 4, 2012

Table 318:


Condition Type for Base Interest Country-Specific Attributes


Corporate As of 2012-05-04

Enter the condition type that you use to calculate the base interest of savings accounts.

Condition Type for Additional Interest Country-Specific Attributes



Enter the condition type that you use to calculate the additional interest of savings accounts.

Transaction Type for Withholding Tax Country-Specific Attributes



Enter the transaction type used to post withholding tax.

Turnover Class for Savings Account Balance




CSAA (SavCorp as of 2012-05–04)

Dr. Trans. Type for Non-Balance-Changing Turnover




Enter the debit non-balance-changing transaction types.



Cr. Trans. Type for Non-Balance-Changing Turnover




Enter the credit non-balance-changing transaction types.


4.3.5.3 Integration Between Account Management and Bank Analyzer


This section describes how to configure the system to exchange information between Account Management (FS-AM) and Bank Analyzer (FS-BA) for corporate savings accounts.

4.3.5.3.2 Create Flow Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management SettlementFlow Types Define Transaction Types .


Table 319:

Flow Type Flow Type Description

Enter an ID of your choice for the flow type for withholding tax (before May 4, 2012).

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Receivable: Withh. Tax Sav. Corp. Pre.

Enter an ID of your choice for the flow type for withholding tax (as of May 4, 2012).

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Receivable: Withh. Tax Sav. Corp. Pos.


4.3.5.3.3 Assign Flow Types to Condition Types and Update Categories

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management SettlementFlow Types Assign Flow Types to Condition Types and Update Categories .




Table 320:

Condition Type Flow Type

Enter the condition type for base interest for settlement (before May 4, 2012).

120000 (Interest Revenue)

Enter the condition type for additional interest for settlement (before May 4, 2012).


Enter the condition type for base interest for settlement (as of May 4, 2012).


Enter the condition type for additional interest for settlement (as of May 4, 2012).


Enter the condition type for withholding tax (before May 4, 2012).

Enter the flow type for withholding tax (before May 4, 2012).

Enter the condition type for withholding tax (as of May 4, 2012).

Enter the flow type for withholding tax (as of May 4, 2012).


4.3.5.3.4 Define Exceptions for Master Data Messages

Use

The system calculates interest and accrual only in Account Management (FS-AM) for corporate savings accounts. For this reason, you configure the system to send lean messages to Bank Analyzer (FS-BA).

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Basic Settings Information Messages Define Exceptions .


Table 321:

Recip. ID Product

DCCHG Enter your savings account corporate product, for example, BR_SAV_CORP.



4.3.5.4 Configuration for Bank Analyzer


This section describes how to configure the system to perform the accounting of corporate savings account in line with the regulations.

4.3.5.4.2 Settings Delivered as Standard

Production Control

The Business Content for Bank Analyzer (FS-BA) for Brazil includes a production control for corporate savings accounts called SBR_DEPT_C.


4.3.5.4.3.1 Create Activity Types

Use

To enable the system to replicate data correctly in Bank Analyzer (FS-BA), you create activity types that correspond to the transaction types that you have created for corporate savings account in Account Management (FS-AM).

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Bank Analyzer Source Data Layer Primary Objects Flow Data Business Transactions Edit Activity Types .




Table 322:

TranType Desc. Trasact. Type Long Name trans.Type Debit/Credit

Enter the transaction type for withholding tax (before May 4, 2012).

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Withh. Tax Corp. Sav. Pre.

Enter a long description of your choice, for example, Withh. Tax Corp. Sav. Before May 4, 2012.

D Debit

Enter the transaction type for withholding tax (as of May 4, 2012).

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Withh. Tax Corp. Sav. Pos.

Enter a long description of your choice, for example, Withh. Tax Corp. Sav. as of May 4, 2012.

D Debit


Enter a description of your choice, for example, Receivable: Withh. Tax Sav. Corp. Pre.

Enter a long description of your choice, for example, Receivable: Withh. Tax Sav. Corp. Before May 4, 2012.

D Debit


Enter a description of your choice, for example, Receivable: Withh. Tax Sav. Corp. Pos.

Enter a long description of your choice, for example, Receivable: Withh. Tax Sav. Corp. as of May 4, 2012

D Debit

Enter the transaction type for base interest (before May 4, 2012).

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Cr. Corp. Sav.Base Pre.

Enter a long description of your choice, for example, Cr. Corp. Sav.Base Before May 4, 2012.

C Credit

Enter the transaction type for additional interest (before May 4, 2012).

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Cr. Corp. Sav. Add. Pre.

Enter a long description of your choice, for example, Cr. Corp. Sav. Add. Before May 4, 2012.

C Credit

Enter the transaction type for base interest (as of May 4, 2012).

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Cr. Corp. Sav. Base Pos.

Enter a long description of your choice, for example, Cr. Corp. Sav.Base as of May 4, 2012.

C Credit

Enter the transaction type for additional interest (as of May 4, 2012).

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Cr. Corp. Sav. Add. Pos.

Enter a long description of your choice, for example, Cr. Corp. Sav. Add. as of May 4, 2012.

C Credit



4.3.5.4.3.2 Create Derivation Steps

Use

To enable the accounting of withholding tax and interest on corporate savings accounts, you create derivation steps.

Procedure

Derive Item Type from Payment Item

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Bank Analyzer Source Data Layer Interfaces to Other Applications Interfaces to Account Management Mapping Tool Module Editor Derivation Edit Derivation Steps .

2. Choose derivation environment S_SE_ITYPE, VALUE_MAPPING3. Edit derivation rule BRGAAP: Taxes (DM)4. Enter the following data:

Table 323:

Transaction Type Valid From Assig. Business Transaction Type

Item Type


01.01.2000 = DM04 G06E


01.01.2000 = DM04 G06E


Derive Item Type from Settlement Item

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Bank Analyzer Source Data Layer Interfaces to Other Applications Interfaces to Account Management Mapping Tool Module Editor Derivation Edit Derivation Steps .

2. Choose derivation environment S_PM_ITYPE, VALUE_MAPPING3. Edit derivation rule BRGAAP: Taxes (DM)




Table 324:


Item Type

Enter the flow type for withholding (before May 4, 2012).

01.01.2000 = DM03 IC0D

Enter the flow type for withholding (as of May 4, 2012).

01.01.2000 = DM03 IC0D

5. Edit derivation rule BRGAAP: Interest (DM)6. Enter the following data:

Table 325:


Item Type

Enter the transaction type for base interest (before May 4, 2012).

01.01.2000 = DM03 IC1D

Enter the transaction type for additional interest (before May 4, 2012).

01.01.2000 = DM03 IC1D

Enter the transaction type for base interest (as of May 4, 2012).

01.01.2000 = DM03 IC1D

Enter the transaction type for additional interest (as of May 4, 2012).

01.01.2000 = DM03 IC1D


4.3.6 Loans Taken Account


The sample loans taken account allows you to record all incoming fund details for a particular funded loan.


NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to loans taken accounts for Brazil, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAPGeneral Localization Functions Funded Loans .


Product Templates

The standard delivery for Brazil includes a product template for loans taken accounts called: _LNTK_ACC2.

Product Attributes


Table 326:

Product Attribute Path in Product Attribute

Risk Factor Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General

Localization Funded Loans Loans Taken

Bank Country Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General

Localization Funded Loans Fund Pool

Account Number Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General


Contract management Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General


Contract Currency Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General








This section describes how to configure the system to deal with the specific requirements of accounts in Brazil.

4.3.6.3.2 Create Product

Use

To use the loans taken account product that you create based on the product template delivered by SAP for Brazil (_LNTK_ACC2), you make the settings described below.

Prerequisites

You have created financial conditions as described in Master Data Settings.

Procedure

1. Create your own loans taken account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .


Table 327:

Field Entry


Template Product _LNTK_ACC2

Product Version Active Version

3. Choose Enter.

4. In the product attributes structure, choose Financial Conditions Condition Groups Condition Group .5. Enter the IDs that you want to use for the following condition groups:

○ Settlement○ Transaction○ Events

Complete the Master Data Settings described below. Then save and activate your product.




To use the loans taken account product that you create based on the sample product for Brazil, you enter the master data described below.


Use

You define the condition group and conditions that you use for transactions related to fund pool accounts as follows:

Procedure




Note that for loans taken account you must not create individual condition.

Table 328:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Transaction: Loans Taken

Condition Group 900236

Condition Group Description LNTK Price Condition

Table 329:

Inayment Agreement : Payable

Nominal Interest

Tab : Time Period

Calculation:



Field Value

Frequency Cat Periodic

Repeat. Period 1

Repeat. Unit Months

Key Date 31

RefDatStartdate At Contract Start

Work. Day Shift Next Working Day


Due Date:

Field Value


Repeat. Period 1

Repeat. Unit Months

Key Date 31



Pay. Date Shift Next Working Day


Table 330:

Inpayment Agreement : Payable

Repayment

Tab : Calculation

Receivable:

Field Value

Clearing Settlement on Calculation Date


Table 331:


Repayment

Tab : Time Period

Calculation:

Field Value


Repeat. Period 1

Repeat. Unit Months

Key Date 31




Due Date:

Field Value


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Months

Key Date 31





Table 332:

Financial Conditions : Settlement

Price Condition

Tab : Time Period

Field Value




Repeat. Period 1

Repeat. Unit Months

Key Date 31




Due Date

Field Value


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Months

Key Date 31




4. Choose Enter.5. Create the conditions.6. Save your changes.

4.3.6.4.3 Create Condition Group and Conditions for Transaction

Use

You define the condition group and conditions that you use for transactions related to loans taken accounts as follows:

Procedure





Table 333:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Transaction: Loans Taken


Condition Group Description LNTK & LNGV Transaction



Use

You define the condition group and conditions that the system uses when a certain event occurs.

Procedure




Table 334:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Transaction: Events Current Account/ Payment: Loans

Condition Group 7659/ 00250

Condition Group Description Events Current Account




4.3.7 Fund Pool Account


The sample fund pool account allows you to record all incoming and outgoing fund details for a particular funded loan.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to fund pool accounts for Brazil, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAPGeneral Localization Functions Funded Loans .

4.3.7.2 Settings Delivered as Standard

Product Templates

The standard delivery for Brazil contains product template Fund Pool Account (_FNPO_ACCT) for fund pool.



Use

To use the fund pool account product that you create based on the product template delivered by SAP for Brazil (_FNPO_ACCT), you make the settings described below.

Prerequisites

You have created financial conditions as described in Master Data Settings..



Procedure

1. Create your own fund pool account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .


Table 335:

Field Entry


Template Product _FNPO_ACCT



choose Enter.



7. Complete the Master Data Settings described below. Then save and activate your product.



To use the fund pool account product that you create based on the sample product for Brazil, you enter the master data described below.




Use

You define the condition group and conditions that you use for transactions related to fund pool accounts as follows:

Procedure




Table 336:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Transaction: Fund Pool


Condition Group Description Test Fund Pool Condition





Table 337:

Field Entry

Currency BRL




Table 338:

Field Entry


Value Date Def. (Value Date Definition Category) No Value Date Calculation

Type of Days Calendar days

Number of Days 0

Working Day Shift No shift

Tolerance Days Val.Dte.Min 3

Tolerance Days Val.Dte.Max 3

Create Condition for the Transaction Charge

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select Transaction Charge (115050).


Table 339:

Field Entry

Currency BRL

Transaction Type 020000



Table 340:

Field Entry


Rounding Cat. (Rounding Category) Round to the Nearest

Tiered/Interval No Tiered/Interval

Amount Any Amount




4.3.8 Loans Given Account


The sample loans given account allows you to record all outgoing fund details for a particular funded loan.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to loans taken accounts for Brazil, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAPGeneral Localization Functions Funded Loans .


Product Templates

The standard delivery for Brazil includes a product template for loans taken accounts called: _LNGV_ACC2

Product Attributes


Table 341:

Product Attribute Path in Product Attribute

Agreement Synchronization Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General

Localization Funded Loans Loans Given






This section describes how to configure the system to deal with the specific requirements of accounts in Brazil.


Use

To use the loans given account product that you create based on the product template delivered by SAP for Brazil (_LNGV_ACC2), you make the settings described below.

Prerequisites

You have created financial conditions as described in Master Data Settings.

Procedure

1. Create your own loans given account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .


Table 342:

Field Entry


Template Product _LNGV_ACC2


3. Choose Enter.



Complete the Master Data Settings described below. Then save and activate your product.





To use the loans given account product that you create based on the sample product for Brazil, you enter the master data described below.

4.3.8.4.2 Create Condition Group and Conditions for Transaction

Use

You define the condition group and conditions that you use for transactions related to loans given accounts as follows:

Procedure




Table 343:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Trans:Loan/Instllmnt Loan



Table 344:

Inayment Agreement : Payable

Nominal Interest

Tab : Time Period

Calculation:


Field Value


Repeat. Period 1

Repeat. Unit Months

Key Date 31




Due Date:

Field Value


Repeat. Period 1

Repeat. Unit Months

Key Date 31





Table 345:


Repayment

Tab : Calculation

Receivable:

Field Value

Clearing Settlement on Calculation Date



Table 346:


Repayment

Tab : Time Period

Calculation:

Field Value


Repeat. Period 1

Repeat. Unit Months

Key Date 31




Due Date:

Field Value


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Months

Key Date 31





Table 347:

Financial Conditions : Settlement

Price Condition

Tab : Time Period

Field Value



Repeat. Period 1

Repeat. Unit Months

Key Date 31




Due Date

Field Value


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Months

Key Date 31






Use

You define the condition group and conditions that you use for transactions related to loans given accounts as follows:

Procedure






Table 348:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Standard Settlement/ Loan Settlement




4.4 Configuration for Branch Calendars

4.4.1 Introduction

In Brazil, banks are not allowed to open nor to post any business transactions on nonworking days. Brazil has specific holiday calendars per city or region, which means different calendars have to be configured for the bank branches in different locations. This section describes how to set up the system to support the business rules and requirements in Brazil related to branch calendars.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to branch calendars, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP BrazilAccount Management (FS-AM) Bank Branch Calendar .

4.4.2 Organizational Data

This chapter deals with the master data and customizing parameters required to run the Brazilian localization for branch calendars.



Bank Key and Branch Key Specification

Use

Bank keys are used to identify banks in the SAP banking system. In Brazil, an external account identification includes the branch number along with the bank number and account number. There is no specific field available to store the branch number information in master data. The system offers two ways of specifying the branch number using standard available fields:

● Concatenate the branch number with the bank number in the Bank Key field● Concatenate the branch number with the account number in the Account Number field

If there is a need to route payments to specific branches, SAP recommends creating a unique bank key for each branch by using a concatenation of the bank number code and branch number in the Bank Key field.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Collateral Management Securities Create Depository Bank .

2. Create bank keys as follows:

Table 349:

Field Entry

Bank Country BR

Bank Key Enter combination of bank number and branch number.

Address Enter address data.

Control Data Enter control data.

3. Perform all Customizing activities related to the new bank key in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Basic Settings Organization .

Calendars

Use

The system allows the creation of different calendars to store local holidays. It is necessary to create one calendar for each city or group of cities with the same common local holidays.

Procedure

Define the required city calendars in transaction SCAL.

Bank Posting Area

Use



The bank posting area is used to define an independent accounting unit, usually the bank. It also defines the current posting date for payment transactions and the current posting date for end-of-day processing.

To support Brazilian national holidays assign the calendar with these holidays to the Bank Posting Area.

Procedure

In Customizing for Financial Services choose Account Management Basic Settings Organization Define Bank Posting Area and make the following settings:

Table 350:

Field Entry

Bank Posting Area Enter your bank posting area code.

Posting Calendar Select the corresponding calendar with holidays defined for the bank posting area.

Organizational Units

Use

In Brazil, organizational units are used to represent bank branches. They are assigned to:

● Bank Posting Area● Bank Key● Branch calendar containing the local holidays of the branch region/city

When a contract is created, the system uses the branch calendar assigned to the organizational unit as a default value in the contract master data and applies the corresponding Bank Posting Area and Bank Key assignments to the contract.

Procedure

1. Create the required organizational units for the bank branches in transaction PPOME.

2. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Tools Business Workflow Development EnvironmentOrganizational Management Detail Maintenance General .

3. For infotype Standard Bank Data, enter the following data:

Table 351:

Field Entry

Bank Country BR

Bank Key Enter the bank key for the given branch.


4. For infotype Bank Posting Area, enter the following data:

Table 352:

Field Entry

Bank Posting Area Code of the bank posting area that will be used for contracts created with this organizational unit

5. For infotype Calendar, enter the following data:

Table 353:

Field Entry

Contract Calendar 1 Calendar that will be used for contracts created with this organizational unit

4.4.3 Product Attributes

Contract Calendar Assignment

Use

Account products use the assigned contract calendar to determine valid execution times or due dates. When making postings to an account, the system will check the contract calendar in order to prevent postings on local holidays.

Prerequisites

You have defined all calendars used in the bank and assigned them to the respective organizational units (bank branches).

Procedure

In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product DefinitionAccount Products Change Account Product .

In the Product Attributes screen, navigate to Administrative Data / Contract Calendar / Contract Calendar 1 and enter the following configuration:

Table 354:

Setting Value Optional/Mandatory

Traffic Light Set to green. Mandatory

Padlock Set to closed. Optional

Contract Calendar 1 Leave blank. Optional

When the Contract Calendar 1 field is left blank on the product level, the system will take the calendar that is assigned to the organizational unit (bank branch) when creating an account.



Settlement Period

Use

The working day shift for settlement has to be configured in a way that only working days are considered for execution.

Procedure

In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product DefinitionAccount Products Change Account Product .

In the Product Attributes screen, navigate to Settlement / Time Periods / Settlement Date and enter the following configuration:

Table 355:

Setting Value Optional/Mandatory

Traffic Light Set to green. Mandatory

Padlock Set to closed. Optional

Working Day Shift for Next Execution Date

1 – Next Working Day Mandatory

Notes on Mass Run Settlement Processes

The Brazilian localization for Branch calendars allows the system to consider local holidays valid only for specific bank branches and not for all other branches of the bank.

In the execution of mass run settlement process, when a settlement is relevant for a branch that has a holiday, the contracts with the same calendar as the branch are excluded from the settlement run.

The following prerequisites apply for correct execution of mass run settlement processes

● The working day shift feature is activated in the product attributes (as described above).● The working day shift is properly set in the account contract master data.

If you want to change the way in which the system excludes contracts from the settlement run, you can create your own implementation of the Package Processing (BCA_AM_PP_PACKAGE) Business Add-In (BAdI). The standard implementation is /FSLBR/BCA_AM_BASIS.

4.4.4 Transaction Settings

Transaction Types for Payment Items

Use

Each transaction type that comes from an internal channel (banking services from SAP system) must have the option Own Check checked if a posting should not be allowed.

Procedure



Items .2. For all transaction types that are not allowed to be posted on holidays, activate the Own Check option.

4.5 Configuration for Checkbook Management

4.5.1 Introduction

In Brazil, checks are widely used by account holders as a means of payment. The localization for Brazil covers the following scenarios:

● On demandA checkbook can be requested as required by the account holder (“on demand”) via phone, website or at the bank branch. The checkbook can be charged or not, depending on the type of account.

● Automatic renewalThe system has the option to trigger an automatic renewal of checkbooks. When its minimum quantity of check forms is reached, the solution triggers automatically a new checkbook request based on check forms quantity.

● ATMIn Brazil, the banks offer the check forms available for printing in ATMs. It triggers the number of check forms allowed for the customer and checks if there's any restriction that would make the process be declined by the system.

This chapter describes the configuration settings required to use checkbook management in Brazil. It is assumed that the standard checkbook management solution has already been configured in the system.

For more information about the business processes and functions related to checkbook management for Brazil, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAPBrazil Account Management (FS-AM) Deposits Checkbook Management .

4.5.2 Localization Parameters

To update the parameter values for basic checkbook settings, proceed as follows:

1. From Customizing for Financial Services choose General Localization Settings Configure Localization Parameters .

2. Configure the parameters for Brazil in the CHECKBOOK parameter group. Enter the parameter values for the parameters listed in the table below. For more information about these parameters, see the documentation for each parameter in the system.




Table 356:

Parameter Subgroup Parameter Name Sample Parameter Values

BP_RELATIONSHIPS GUARDIAN BUR022

BP_DOCS EMANCIPATED <Customer Value ID Type in BP>

JOINT_ACCOUNT BP_RELATIONSHIP <Customer Value BP Relationship>

UNDER_X_AGE UNDER_X_AGE 18

BP_DATA CLIENT_SINCE BKCS

BP_DOCS ID_KEY FS0001

BP_ROLE BP_ROLE_CHECKBOOK <Customer Value BP Role>

FINANCIAL_RESTRICTION DECLINE_REASON <Customer Checkbook Decline Reasons>

FINANCIAL_RESTRICTION FINANCIAL_RESTRICTION 9FINRESTR

4.5.3 Business Partner Configuration

Business Partner Relationship

A BP relationship is needed for joint account holders. To define the required BP relationship, proceed as follows:

1. Execute transaction sm30 and maintain table V_TBZ9.2. Add a new relationship for the joint account relationship, choosing your own key for the new entry.3. Enter the following values:

Table 357:

Description

From BP1's View Has Partner in Joint Account

From BP2's View Is Account Holder of Joint Account

Title Joint Account Rel.

Additional Data

Differentiation Type 0

Data management app BUR [BP Relation.: Data (Attr.Tab.)]

Screen sequence BUB1 [BP Relationship/BP Role Definition: Standard]


One way relationship selected

Semantic Check

Time Constraint 0 No time constraint

No. in each set 0

Cardinality 0 : 0

Standard Reltnshp deselected

BP Role Cat. (Partner1) BCA010 Account Holder

BP Role Cat. (Partner2) BCA010 Account Holder

Partner 1

Organization deselected

Person deselected

Group selected

Partner 2

Organization deselected

Person selected

Group deselected

Category and Role for Business Partner Printing on Check Forms

To define the category and role for BP printing on check forms, proceed as follows:

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General SettingsBusiness Partner Basic Settings Business Partner Roles Define BP Roles .

2. Add the BP category key that you want to use for BP Printing on Check Form. Make sure you check Person and Organization.

3. Add the BP role using the category you created in the previous step. Make sure you check Standard assignment.



Identification Category and Type for “Emancipation Documents”

To specify the identification category and type for “Emancipation Documents”, proceed as follows:

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General SettingsBusiness Partner Basic Settings Identification Numbers Define Identification Categories .

2. Add the identification category that you want to use for “Emancipation Documents”.

3. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General SettingsBusiness Partner Basic Settings Identification Numbers Define Identification Types .

4. Add the identification type that you want to use for “Emancipation Documents” with Category set to the previously defined category.

Identification Category and Type for “Bank Client Since”

To specify the identification category and type for “Bank Client Since”, proceed as follows:

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General SettingsBusiness Partner Basic Settings Identification Numbers Define Identification Categories .

2. Add the identification category that you want to use for “Bank Client Since”.

3. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General SettingsBusiness Partner Basic Settings Identification Numbers Define Identification Types .

4. Add the identification type that you want to use for “Bank Client Since” with Category set to the previously defined category.

4.5.4 Basic Settings

In the Customizing activities described below, you define basic checkbook settings. In general, these settings will be redefined by the specific customer implementation.

Key Attributes

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Check Book Agreement and Check Book Key Attributes .

2. Specify the checkbook agreement key length (CBA key length).3. Specify the checkbook key length (CB key length).


Checkbook Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Define Check Book Types .

2. Define the checkbook types.3. Include the relevant data in the following fields for each checkbook type created:

○ CB Type Desc○ Check Book Cat.○ Payt Form Type○ No. of Checks○ No. checks fix○ Min. No. checks○ Max. No. checks○ Ordering Mode○ Renewal○ Renew Trigger No.○ Provider ID○ Layout ID○ Ord. Run Active

Description of Information Fields

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Define Information Field Description for Check Book Types .

2. Define the description of information fields shown on the screen.3. Fill in the relevant information for the available fields (from InfoFldDesc1 to InfoFldDesc10) accordingly.

Allowed Business Roles for Checkbook Holders

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General SettingsBusiness Partner Basic Settings Business Partner Roles Define BP Roles .

2. Create a role category for checkbook management.3. Create a BP role for the new role category.4. Add the BP role using the category you created in the previous step.

5. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Define Allowed Business Roles for Check Book Holders .

6. Insert the new BP role as an Allowed Business Role for Checkbook Holders.



Allowed Account Products for Checkbook Management

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Define Allowed Account Products for Check Book Management .

2. Define the allowed checking account products that may contain checkbooks.3. Also define which types of checkbooks are allowed for each product.

Checkbook Decline Reasons

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Define Check Book Decline Reasons .

2. Define the relevant reasons to decline checkbooks.

Event Types and Lock Categories

Assignment of Event Types to Lock Categories

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Assign Event Types to Lock Categories .

2. Assign lock categories to the relevant PLM (Posting Lock Management) event types related to checkbook management.

Lock Reasons with Associated Event Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Define Lock Reasons with Associated Event Types .

2. Define the reasons for locking checks in checkbook management and the associated PLM (Posting Lock Management) event types.

Posting Lock Management Settings

The following settings are required for “Locked” ordering mode. They are located in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Posting Lock Management Basic Settings .

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Posting Lock Management Basic Settings Define Number Range for PLM Documents and define the relevant number ranges.

2. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Posting Lock Management Basic Settings Define Event Type and define the event types for payment forms processing.Under 20: Account-Related Locks, choose 907000 : PF Processing / check book mgmt and ensure that the Allow Pmnt Form Lock setting (on the Payment Form tab page) is selected for the relevant payment form types.Payment forms processing will be triggered at mass run order processing for the PLM documents of the related single checks.


3. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Assign Event Type to Locks Categories and assign the previously created event type to the lock categories Usual Lock and Dispatch Lock (mass run order processing related).

Groups for Organizational Units

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Define Groups for Organizational Units .

2. Define the relevant groups for the organizational units and assign the respective organizational units to each group.

Checkbook Relevant Business Transaction Categories

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management Basic Settings Define Check Book Relevant Business Transaction Categories .

2. Specify the business transaction categories relevant for checkbooks (e.g. ATM).In this Customizing activity, you assign previously defined business transaction categories as checkbook relevant. The respective business transaction categories are defined in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Basic Settings Define Customer-Specific Business Transaction Categories .

4.5.5 Printing Configuration

In the Customizing activities described below, you define checkbook printing configuration. In general, these settings will be redefined by the specific customer implementation.

Define Check Book Providers

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management PrintingDefine Check Book Providers .

2. Define a list of print shop providers.

Define Check Book Layouts

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management PrintingDefine Check Book Layouts .



2. Define a list of layouts to be used by the provider.

Define Content Type of Print Line for BAdI

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management PrintingDefine Content Type of Print Line for BAdI .

2. Define the content types to be used on the print lines by the relevant BAdIs.The default print line configuration is as follows:

Table 358:

Content Content Description Default PL

01 Account Holder Name Print data line 1

02 Account Holder Tax Data, Client Since, Ch.Lot qty.

Print data line 2

03 Responsible Name Print data line 3

04 Responsible Tax Data Print data line 4

4.5.6 Configuration for Fee Handling


With the following Customizing activities you define the settings for triggering fee payments.

4.5.6.2 Define Differentiation Categories

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Differentiation Categories .

2. Define the relevant differentiation categories as follows:

Table 359:

DC 1 Diff. Cat. Descr. DiffValCat Table Reference Values

200 Check Book Activity 9 Value Transfer by BADI Not applicable

201 Check Book Category 9 Value Transfer by BADI Not applicable


DC 1 Diff. Cat. Descr. DiffValCat Table Reference Values

202 Check Book Type 1 Reference to Table Table Name: /FSCBM/T_CB_TYPE

Field Name 1: CB_TYPE

Text Table: /FSCBM/T_CB_TYPT

Language Field: SPRAS

Text Field: CBT_DESCRIPTION

203 Group of Org. Unit 1 Reference to Table Table Name: /FSCBM/T_ORG_GRP

Field Name 1: ORG_GROUP

Text Table: /FSCBM/T_ORG_GRT

Language Field: SPRAS

Text Field: GRP_DESCRIPTION

204 Business Trans. Category 9 Value Transfer by BADI Not applicable

4.5.6.3 Assign Condition Categories to Differentiation Categories

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Assign Condition Categories to Differentiation Categories .

2. Make the relevant category assignments as follows:

Table 360:

CondCat Condition Category Description

DC 1 Diff. Cat. Descr.

115020 Event-Controlled Cond. 200 Check Book Activity

115020 Event-Controlled Cond. 201 Check Book Category

115020 Event-Controlled Cond. 202 Check Book Type

115020 Event-Controlled Cond. 203 Group of Org. Unit



CondCat Condition Category Description

DC 1 Diff. Cat. Descr.

115020 Event-Controlled Cond. 204 Business Trans. Category

4.5.6.4 Define Condition Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type and define the relevant condition type.

2. In the ChargeEventCat. field, enter Event Charge.3. On the Differentiation Category tab page, assign the condition categories to the new condition type:

Table 361:

Seq. No. Different. Diff. Category Diff. Cat. Descr. CO. Dimension

1 200 Check Book Activity 1 = Value Request

2 204 Business Trans. Category

1 = Value Request

3 202 Check Book Type 1 = Value Request

4 203 Group of Org. Unit 1 = Value Request

5 201 Check Book Category 1 = Value Request

4. On the Waiver tab page, assign the relevant waivers:

Table 362:

Posting Type Waiver

PstgType NgAdj W2

PstingType PAdj W1


4.5.6.5 Other Relevant Customizing Activities

Use

The following Customizing activities are intended as a sample checklist of additional settings that will need to be redefined for the specific implementation:

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Group Types and define the relevant condition group types.

2. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Assign Condition Type to Transaction Type and make the relevant transaction type assignments.

3. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Transaction Types for Transaction Charges and Event Charges and assign the relevant transaction types for transaction and event charges.

4. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsReconciliation Define Internal Applications for Reconciliation and enter the relevant Account

Management applications.

5. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account Management Current SettingsFinancial Conditions Condition Group Edit Condition Group and create conditions for different checkbook activities:○ Activation○ Creation○ Lock○ Assignment

4.5.7 Business Add-Ins and Interfaces

Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)

The Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for checkbook management are provided with default implementations. The default implementations can be redefined by customer-specific implementations, as required.

You can access these BAdIs (and their respective implementations) in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Check Book Management BAdIs .

BAdI: Automatic Determination of Print Line Content

You can use this BAdI to automatically insert print data from the checkbook agreement on checkbooks.



The default implementation determines the full name and the standard address of the business partner (contained in the CB_HOLDER_ID field) and returns the name in the first print data line and the address in the following 3 lines.

BAdI: Numbering of Check Books/Single Checks

You can use this BAdI to automatically create external IDs for checkbooks and for single checks within a checkbook.

The default implementation increments the maximum checkbook number per account by one or increments the provided first single check number or the maximum single check number by one (per account and checkbook type).

BAdI: Numbering of Check Book Agreements

You can use this BAdI to automatically create external IDs for checkbook agreements.

The default implementation increments the maximum checkbook agreement number per account by one.

BAdI: Additional Checks for Check Books

You can use this BAdI to implement customer enhancements in the checkbook checking process.

The default implementation checks that the new single check numbers (for personalized checkbooks) are within the range of 10000000000000000001 and 60000000000000000000.

BAdI: Additional Checks for Check Book Agreements

You can use this BAdI for customer enhancements within the checking process of check book agreements. The BAdI is called in the CHECK method of checkbook agreements in all checkbook agreement maintenance transactions.

BAdI: Additional Open Conditions of Check Books

You can use this BAdI to implement customer enhancements in the checkbook creation and modification process. The BAdI is called in the OPEN method as part of the creation or change of checkbooks.

Note that this BAdI must be implemented if checkbooks are to be declined during the renewal process.

BAdI: Additional Open Conditions of Check Book Agreements

You can use this BAdI for customer enhancements in the process of creating and changing checkbook agreements, for example, to prevent a checkbook agreement from being opened. The BAdI is called in the OPEN method during creation or change of a checkbook agreement.

BAdI: Checks for Renewal Decision

You can use this BAdI for customer enhancements relating to the renewal decision within the mass run for the automatic renewal of checkbooks. It enables the bank to implement further checks regarding the renewal decision and filter which checkbooks are passed to the renewal process.

The BAdI is called in the LOAD_DATA_WITH_RANGE and LOAD_DATA_WITH_TAB methods of the mass run for automatic renewal of checkbooks. The decision to decline a checkbook renewal is made in the Additional Open Conditions of Check Books BAdI, which is processed later.

BAdI: Definition for Single Check I/O

You can use this BAdI to provide the base functionality for the Payment Forms Management component.

BAdI: Definition for Order I/O

You can use this BAdI to order personalized checkbooks in accordance with your requirements.


BAdI: Account I/O

You can use this BAdI to provide the base functionality for the Accounts component.

BAdI: Check Book Order I/O

You can use this BAdI to order personalized checkbooks in accordance with your requirements.

BAdI: Check Book Receiving Org Unit I/O

You can use this BAdI to implement your own business logic for the retrieval of organizational unit master data.


The following BAdIs specific to the Brazil localization are located in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Check Book Management BAdIs Country-Specific BAdIs Brazil .

BAdI: Account Holder BPs

You can use this BAdI to retrieve the account holders of a specific account when you check whether the account holders have legal or financial restrictions.

BAdI: Print Data Definition

You can use this BAdI to automatically insert print data on checks.

BAdI: Minor BP Validation

You can use this BAdI to check if you can create a checkbook for a minor business partner (BP).

Inbound Interface Layer

The inbound interface layer (package /FSCBM/IN) provides the complete checkbook management functionality to external components. The layer is intended for use with dialog and non-dialog channels, as well as for other processes such as Posting Lock Management (PLM).

Note that there are no Enterprise SOA services included in checkbook management. Instead, remote function modules (RFC) are offered.

The following functions are offered via interfaces for checkbooks and checkbook agreements:

● Create checkbook● Change checkbook● Lock checkbook● Unlock checkbook● Renew checkbook● Delete checkbook● Read checkbook (several functions are offered e.g. read for list of CBAs, read for an account)● Create checkbook agreement● Change checkbook agreement



● Read checkbook agreement (several functions are offered e.g. read for an account)● Retrieve classic change documents for checkbook● Retrieve classic change documents for checkbook agreement

The interfaces offered by checkbook management are based on classic RFC (Remote Function Call) enabled function modules. All function modules are incorporated in development package /FSCBM/RFC.

Outbound Interface Layer

The outbound interface layer (package /FSCBM/OUT_MAIN) comprises the functionality needed for the connection of other business objects required for the checkbook management application (Accounts, Business Partner, Organizational Unit, Payment Forms and Ordering).

The connection to these other applications is provided using the BAdI technology. SAP delivers a standard implementation for each required component located in the same system. Using the BAdI technology, it is possible to overwrite these standard implementations to connect alternative components, which may reside in the local or in remote systems. BAdIs exist for most of the checkbook management processes (see above).

4.5.8 Authorization Objects

In addition to standard worldwide authorization objects, the following authorization object is available for the Brazilian localization of banking services from SAP:

Table 363:

Authorization Object ID Description

F_BR_CBFNR Authorization object for financial restriction in checkbook management

This authorization object allows the manager to bypass a financial restriction when requesting a checkbook.

4.5.9 Procedures and Checks

Customer Requests a New Checkbook

The following BAdIs are necessary for the validation of financial restrictions and authorization of the checkbook.

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management BAdIs .2. Apply the following BAdIs as indicated:

● BAdI: Additional Checks for Check Book Agreements (/FSCBM/BD_AL_ADD_CHECK_CBA): check methods, all related transactions

● BAdI: Additional Checks for Check Books (/FSCBM/BD_AL_ADD_CHECK_CB): check methods, all related transactions


● BAdI: Additional Open Conditions of Check Books (/FSCBM/BD_AL_OPEN_COND_CB): create and change● BAdI: Additional Open Conditions of Check Book Agreements (/FSCBM/BD_AL_OPEN_COND_CBA): create and

change

Depending on customer requirements, authorization customizing may also be needed. Note that this documentation does not cover authorization customizing. For information about authorization objects for checkbook management, see Authorization Objects [page 341].

Check Financial Restriction (On Demand)



● BAdI: Additional Open Conditions of Check Books (/FSCBM/BD_AL_OPEN_COND_CB): create and change● BAdI: Additional Open Conditions of Check Book Agreements (/FSCBM/BD_AL_OPEN_COND_CBA): create and

change


Check Financial Restriction (Renewal or Request)

The following BAdIs are necessary for the validation of financial restrictions and authorization of checkbook requests or renewals.


● BAdI: Checks for Renewal Decision (/FSCBM/BD_AL_RENEWAL_DECISION): influences the selection of checkbooks within the mass run for the automatic renewal of checkbooks

● BAdI: Additional Checks for Check Book Agreements (/FSCBM/BD_AL_ADD_CHECK_CBA): check methods for checkbook agreements

● BAdI: Additional Checks for Check Books (/FSCBM/BD_AL_ADD_CHECK_CB): check methods for checkbooks


Check Financial Restriction (BP Rating Procedure)

For financial restriction checks, it is necessary to create a new BP rating procedure with corresponding ratings. The values shown below are sample values.



1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose SAP Business Partner for Financial Services Settings for Financial Services General Settings Ratings Set Rating Procedures and Ratings .

2. Create a new rating procedure and enter the appropriate values, as in the following example:

Table 364:

Field Value

Rat. Proc. 9FINRESTR

Description (Non Lang-Dep) Financial Rest.

Term Long Term

Description of Rating Procedure Financial restriction for checkbook printing

3. Enter corresponding ratings for the new rating procedure:

Table 365:

Field Value (Entry 1) Value (Entry 2)

Rating 0 1

Rank A B

Description (Non Lang-Dep) No restriction Financial restr.

Description of Rating No financial restriction for checkbooks Client with financial restriction for checkbooks

Checkbook Request (BS–CBM) 1

The following BAdIs is necessary for update of the Track Order ID field according to customer requirements.

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management BAdIs .2. Apply the following BAdI as indicated:

● BAdI: Check Book Order I/O (/FSCBM/BD_OUT_ORDER_IO): called in the order run, for example to determine the tracking ID, determine the provider ID and format the order data for the provider


Checkbook Request (BS–CBM) 2

The following BAdI is needed in order to add the required lines (fields) for printing according to the layout assigned to the checkbook.


1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Check Book Management BAdIs .2. Apply the following BAdI as indicated:

● BAdI: Check Book Order I/O (/FSCBM/BD_OUT_ORDER_IO): called in the order run, for example to determine the tracking ID, determine the provider ID and format the order data for the provider


Manual Check for Creation of Checkbook or Checkbook Agreement at Branch



● BAdI: Additional Checks for Check Book Agreements (/FSCBM/BD_AL_ADD_CHECK_CBA): check methods, all related transactions

● BAdI: Additional Checks for Check Books (/FSCBM/BD_AL_ADD_CHECK_CB): check methods, all related transactions

Depending on customer requirements, authorization customizing may also be needed. For information about authorization objects for checkbook management, see Authorization Objects [page 341].

4.6 Configuration for Tax Calculation

4.6.1 Introduction

This section describes how to configure the system to calculate the following taxes on the following products:

● Withholding tax on corporate savings accounts (see Withholding Tax on Corporate Savings Accounts [page 344])

● IOF on loans (see Configuration for Calculation of IOF on Loans [page 350])● Complementary IOF on overdue installments (see )

4.6.2 Withholding Tax on Corporate Savings Accounts


To customize tax manager according to the requirements for withholding tax calculation on corporate savings accounts, follow the steps below.



4.6.2.2 Define Tax Item Types

Use

In this step, you create tax item types to map the interest operations on corporate savings accounts on which tax manager calculates taxes to comply with the regulations.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Item Type .


Table 366:


Enter any ID for the tax item type that you want to use for tax on interest as of May 4, 2012, for example, 1.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, INTEREST.

Enter any ID for the tax item type that you want to use for tax on interest before May 4, 2012, for example, 2.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, INTEREST – SAC PRE MP567 – BR

Enter any ID for the tax item type that you want to use for posting of withholding tax on interest as of May 4, 2012, for example, 500001.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, IRRF POST.

Enter any ID for the tax item type that you want to use for posting of withholding tax on interest before May 4, 2012, for example, 500002.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, IRRF POST – SAC PRE MP567 – BR.


4.6.2.3 Assign Tax Item Types to Operations

Use

In this step, you assign the tax item types for interest on corporate savings accounts to the corresponding operation IDs.


Prerequisites

You have created the tax item types in Define Tax Item Types [page 345].

Procedure


2. Enter the mapping assignments for each relevant combination of tax operation and tax item type.

Table 367:

Tax Op ID Description Tax Item Type

15 INTEREST – SAC PRE MP567 – BR Enter the tax item type that you have created for tax on interest before May 4, 2012.

2 INTEREST Enter the tax item type that you have created for tax on interest as of May 4, 2012.


4.6.2.4 Assign Transaction Types and Condition Types to Tax Item Type

Use

In this step, you assign the tax item types for interest on corporate savings accounts to the corresponding condition types that you use for base and additional interest calculation on corporate savings accounts.

Prerequisites

● You have created the tax item types in Define Tax Item Types [page 345].● You have created the settlement conditions for base and additional interest in Create Condition Group and

Conditions for Settlement [page 292].



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Transaction Types and Condition Types to Tax Item Type .

2. Enter the mapping assignments for all condition types that are relevant for tax calculation.

Table 368:

CondTyp TranTyp Tax Item Typ RC Dec Places

Enter the condition type that you use for base interest on deposits made before May 4, 2012.

Enter the ID for the tax item type that you have created for tax on interest (before May 4, 2012).

Round to Nearest

Two Decimal Places

Enter the condition type that you use for additional interest on deposits made before May 4, 2012.

Enter the ID for the tax item type that you have created for tax on interest (before May 4, 2012).

Round to Nearest

Two Decimal Places

Enter the condition type that you use for base interest on deposits made as of May 4, 2012.

Enter the ID for the tax item type that you have created for tax on interest (as of May 4, 2012).

Round to Nearest

Two Decimal Places

Enter the condition type that you use for additional interest on deposits made as of May 4, 2012.

Enter the ID for the tax item type that you have created for tax on interest (as of May 4, 2012).

Round to Nearest

Two Decimal Places

Enter the condition type that you use for withholding Tax (as of May 4, 2012).

Enter the transaction type that you use for withholding Tax (as of May 4, 2012).

Enter the ID for the tax item type that you have created for posting of withholding tax on interest (as of May 4, 2012).

Round to Nearest

Two Decimal Places

Enter the condition type that you use for withholding Tax (Before May 4, 2012).

Enter the transaction type that you use for withholding Tax (Before May 4, 2012).

Enter the ID for the tax item type that you have created for posting of withholding tax on interest (before May 4, 2012).

Round to Nearest

Two Decimal Places



4.6.2.5 Assign Posting Transactions to Operations

Use

In this step, you assign tax manager operations to the condition and transaction types that you use for withholding tax calculation on corporate savings accounts.

Prerequisites

You have created the condition types for withholding tax calculation on corporate savings accounts in Create Condition Types for Withholding Tax Calculation for Tax Manager [page 282].

Procedure



Table 369:

Tax Op ID Tax Type Tax Item Type

2 IRRF Enter the ID for the tax item type that you have created for posting of withholding tax on interest (as of May 4, 2012).

15 IRRF Enter the ID for the tax item type that you have created for posting of withholding tax on interest (before May 4, 2012).


4.6.2.6 Specify Tax Rates

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Rates




Table 370:

Field Entry

Tax Rate ID Enter an ID for your tax rate.


Tax Rate 22,5

Tax Type IRRF

Country BR


4.6.2.7 Determine Process Integrator Implementation Spot

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Process Integration Settings Determine Process Integrator Implementation Spot


Table 371:

Field Entry

ProcIntId 7

BussProcDefID 7

AccTypePC DEPT

Business Process SETTLEMENT

Bus Proc Act Step AFTER_ROUNDING

ProcOrd 1

Implement. Spot Name AFTER_ROUNDING

PI Class Name /FSGLO/CL_TAX_PROC_INTEGRATOR



4.6.3 IOF on Loans


You use this section to configure loan products to meet tax calculation requirements in Brazil.

In Brazil, you are required to calculate regular IOF and additional IOF on loans, complementary IOF on arrears on overdue installments, and complementary IOF on renegotiation on loans payment replanning.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to loans for Brazil, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP Brazil Account Management (FS-AM) Loans .

4.6.3.2 Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items

Use

For the calculation and payment of IOF taxes, you need to set up the following transaction types for payment items:

● Regular IOF● Additional IOF● Complementary IOF on arrears● Complementary IOF on renegotiation● Reversal of advance payment of tax● Reversal payment of tax● Reversal of payment of tax on renegotiation● Reversal of payment of tax on arrears● Advance payment of tax● Credit from payment of tax● Payment of tax on arrears● Payment of tax on renegotiation

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Transaction Types and Transactions Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment

Items .




2. Create new transaction types as follows:

NoteOn the configuration screens listed below, leave all the fields and checkboxes that are not mentioned, empty or deselected.

Table 372: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Regular IOF

Field Entry

Trans. Type Enter a number of your choice, for example, 999115.

Item Type Turnover

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Regular IOF.

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Regular IOF.

Account Names None

Access Limit None


Payment Monitoring None

Plan Monitoring Select the checkbox.

ValDte Spec. Value Date Entry Required


Reversal OK Select the checkbox.


Deriv. SFP Date No SubFinPayt Date for More Payment Item Positions



TT Group Posting Check Debits - Interest and Charges

TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules Interest and Charges


TT Grp CrcyExch Internal


Table 373: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Additional IOF

Field Entry


Item Type Turnover

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Additional IOF.

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Additional IOF.

Account Names None

Access Limit None















Table 374: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Complementary IOF on Arrears

Field Entry


Item Type Turnover



Field Entry

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Comp. IOF on Arr..

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Complementary IOF on Arrears.

Account Names None

Access Limit None















Table 375: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Complementary IOF on Renegotiation

Field Entry


Item Type Turnover

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Comp. IOF on Renegot..


Field Entry

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Complementary IOF on Renegotiation.

Account Names None

Access Limit None















Table 376: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Reversal of Advance Payment of Tax

Field Entry


Item Type Recipient

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal Adv. Tax.

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal of Advance Payment of Tax.

Account Posting Check Select the checkbox.



Field Entry

ValDte SFP Select the checkbox.

Prenote Select the checkbox.

Account Names None

Access Limit None



Prenote Required Select the checkbox.





PayDistr. Payment Item Not Transferred

Call Billing Select the checkbox.


TT Group Posting Check Other Debits

TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules Debits from Payment Distr. for Loan


TT Grp CrcyExch Payment Transaction Debit

Table 377: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Reversal Payment of Tax

Field Entry


Item Type Recipient

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal Payt Tax.

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal Payment of Tax.



Field Entry

Limit Check Select the checkbox.


Account Names None

Access Limit None









Schedule Settlement Select the checkbox.






Table 378: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Reversal of Payment of Tax on Renegotiation

Field Entry


Item Type Recipient

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Rev. Payt Tax on Renegot..

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal of Payment of Tax on Renegotiation.




Field Entry



Account Names None

Access Limit None















Table 379: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Reversal of Payment of Tax on Arrears

Field Entry


Item Type Recipient

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Rev. Payt Tax on Arr..

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal of Payment of Tax on Arrears.



Field Entry



Account Names None

Access Limit None















Table 380: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Advance Payment of Tax

Field Entry


Item Type Recipient

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Adv. Payt Tax.

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Advance Payment of Tax.




Field Entry

ValDte/SFP Select the checkbox.


Account Names None

Access Limit None


Payment Monitoring Y Payment Monitoring - Loans

CreditMemo Select the checkbox.







Call Billing Select the checkbox.



TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules Cr Memos: Payt Distrib. for Loans


TT Grp CrcyExch Payment Transaction Credit

Table 381: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Credit from Payment of Tax

Field Entry


Item Type Recipient

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Credit Payt Tax.

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Credit from Payment of Tax.


Field Entry




Account Names None

Access Limit None











TT Group Posting Check Debits – Interest and Charges



Table 382: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Payment of Tax on Arrears

Field Entry


Item Type Recipient

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payt Tax on Arr..

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payment of Tax on Arrears.




Field Entry



Account Names None

Access Limit None











TT Group Posting Check Debits – Interest and Charges



Table 383: Transaction Type for Payment Item: Payment of Tax on Renegotiation

Field Entry


Item Type Recipient

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payt Tax on Renegot..

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payment of Tax on Renegotiation.


ValDte SFP Select the checkbox.


Field Entry


Account Names None

Access Limit None














3. Save your entries.4. To enable the system to post IOF taxes correctly during the forward order process, select the Own Check

checkbox for the following transaction types:○ 020010 (Debit from Loan Disbursement)○ 020014 (Debit from Disbursement Withholding)


4.6.3.3 Maintain Transaction Types for Information Items

Use

For IOF tax calculation, you need two transaction types for information items, one for regular IOF and another for additional IOF.



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transactions Type Groups Maintain Transaction Types for Information Items

2. Create two transaction types as follows:


Transaction Type for Information Item - Linear Calculation Method for Regular IOF

Table 384:

Field Entry


Item Type Item Relevant to Settlement

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Regular IOF.

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Regular IOF: For Information.

Reversal OK Select the checkbox

Display Payment Notes Select the checkbox

Online Ent. PI Select the checkbox



Transaction Type for Information Item - Linear Calculation Method for Additional IOF

Table 385:

Field Entry


Item Type Item Relevant to Settlement

Short Descriptn Enter a description of your choice, for example, Additional IOF.


Field Entry

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Additional IOF: For Information.

Reversal OK Select the checkbox

Display Payment Notes Select the checkbox

Online Ent. PI Select the checkbox




4.6.3.4 Assign Offsetting Transaction Types (Internal Process)

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Payment OrderAssign Offsetting Transaction Types to Transaction Types Assign Offsetting Transaction Types (Internal

Process) .2. Select the following transaction type:

Table 386:

Tran Ty Long Name Trans. Type

042700 Debit From Payment Distribution of Loan

3. Under Dialog Structure, choose Offsetting Transactions Type Assignment.4. Create new offsetting transaction types as exemplified below:

Table 387:

OfTrTy Desc. Transact. Type Default

092721 Adv. Payt Tax Deselect the checkbox.

092722 Credit Payt Tax Deselect the checkbox.

092723 Payt Tax on Arr. Deselect the checkbox.

092724 Payt Tax on Renegot. Deselect the checkbox.




4.6.3.5 Posting Type Settings


You determine the posting types, for example, settlement postings, that the system generates automatically when it calculates taxes on loans. You organize the postings internally in the system by means of posting types.

4.6.3.5.2 Create Posting Types

Use

You define the posting types, for example, settlement postings, that the system generates automatically when it calculates taxes on loans. You organize the postings internally in the system by means of posting types.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsMaintain Posting Types .

2. To meet your customer-specific requirements, create posting types, for example, as follows:

Table 388:

PT (Posting Type) Credit Memo Proc. (Process) Desc. Posting Type

IW Selected Payment Transaction IOF Payment

IX Deselected Direct Charges Overdue IOF

IY Deselected Direct Charges Additional IOF

IZ Deselected Direct Charges Regular IOF


4.6.3.5.3 Assign Posting Types to Transaction Types

Use

To enable the system to post items in the corresponding accounts, assign posting types to transaction types in the correct sequence.


Prerequisites

You have determined posting types as described in Create Posting Types [page 365].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsAssign Transaction Types Posting Types .

2. Create entries to assign the posting types that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365] to transaction types as exemplified below:

Table 389:

PT (Posting Type) TranTy (Transaction Type) Desc. Transact. Type

IN 999172 Comp. IOF on Renegot.

IX 999118 Comp. IOF on Arr.

IY 999117 Additional IOF

IZ 999115 Regular IOF


4.6.3.6 Create Financial Condition Types

4.6.3.6.1 Create Financial Condition Type for Additional IOF

Use

To enable the system to calculate additional IOF on a disbursement, use a specific condition type. The base amount that the system uses in the IOF calculation is the disbursement turnover.

Procedure




2. Choose the New Entries pushbutton and enter the following data:


Table 390:

Field Entry


Cond. Type Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Additional IOF.

Cond.Category 185000

Posting +/-Sign Debit Memo

Screen sequence 105021

Calc. Category 2010

Update Category GTX0

Posting Type Enter IY or choose the posting type that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365].

PstingType PAdj Enter IY or choose the posting type that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365].

PstgType NgAdj. Enter IY or choose the posting type that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365].




Number Calendar 3


Exch.rate type M

Incl. cond. Select the checkbox.


ChargeEventCat. Disbursement Charge


Field Entry

Restart Info. Overlap



Last Inst. Adjust Last Installment to Remaining Balance

3. Under Dialog Structure, choose Amount Category and enter the following data:

Table 391:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105020

Desc. Amt Category Debit Interest


Waiver Allowed Select the checkbox.


4.6.3.6.2 Create Financial Condition Type for Regular IOF

Use

To enable the system to calculate regular IOF on the planned principal portion of a loan installment, use a specific condition type.

Procedure






Table 392:

Field Entry


Cond. Type Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Regular IOF.




Calc. Category 2010

Update Category GTX0

Posting Type Enter IZ or choose the posting type that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365].

PstingType PAdj Enter IZ or choose the posting type that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365].

PstgType NgAdj. Enter IZ or choose the posting type that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365].




Cond. Determin Select the checkbox

Number Calendar 3

Tiered/IntAllow Select the checkbox

Exch.rate type M

Incl. Cond. Select the checkbox


ChargeEventCat. Disbursement Charge

Restart Info. Overlap




Field Entry



Table 393:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105020



Waiver Allowed Select the checkbox


4.6.3.6.3 Create Financial Condition Type for Complementary IOF on Arrears Pricing




Table 394:

Field Entry


Cond. Type Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Comp. IOF on Arrears Pricing.




Calc. Category 1010



Field Entry


Posting Type Enter IX or choose the posting type that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365].

PstingType PAdj Enter IX or choose the posting type that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365].

PstgType NgAdj. Enter 11 or choose the posting type that you created in Create Posting Types [page 365].





Number Calendar 3


Exch.rate type M

Incl. cond. Select the checkbox.


ChargeEventCat. Not Defined






Table 395:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105020




Field Entry

Waiver Allowed Select the checkbox.


4.6.3.6.6 Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type

Use

To process financial condition types, you assign all condition types that are relevant for a given financial product to a condition group type.

Prerequisites

You have created condition types for IOF as described in Financial Condition Types [page 368].

Procedure


2. Select the 210 Loan Settlement condition group type.3. Under Dialog Structure, choose Condition Type.4. Add the condition types that you created in Financial Condition Types [page 368] for regular IOF, additional

IOF, complementary IOF on arrears pricing, and complementary IOF on renegotiation pricing.5. Select the 240 Payment: Loans condition group type.6. Under Dialog Structure, choose Condition Type.7. Add the condition types that you created in Financial Condition Types [page 368] for disbursement IOF

payment, complementary IOF on arrears payment, and complementary IOF on renegotiation payment.8. Save your entries.



4.6.3.7 Tax Manager Settings

4.6.3.7.1 Define Tax Operations

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Operations .


Table 396:



X Enter a description of your choice, for example, DISBURSEMENT.


Leave field blank. Enter a description of your choice, for example, DISBURSEMENT EVENTS.


4.6.3.7.2 Define Tax Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Types


Table 397:

Tax Type Description Tax Calculator

Enter a unique identifier of your choice, for example, IOF.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, TAX IOF.

/FSLBR/CL_BRAZIL_CALCULATOR

Enter a unique identifier of your choice, for example, IOFA.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, ADDITIONAL IOF.

/FSLBR/CL_TAX_IOF_ADDITIONAL

Enter a unique identifier of your choice, for example, IOFR.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, REGULAR IOF.

/FSLBR/CL_TAX_IOF_REGULAR

Enter a unique identifier of your choice, for example, IOFC.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, COMPLEMENTARY_IOF.

/FSLBR/CL_TAX_IOF_COMPLEMENTAR




1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Item Types .


Table 398:

Tax ItemTy. Description

Enter the ID for the tax type for disbursement events, for example, 20.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, OPERATION ID 20.

Enter the ID for the tax type for complementary IOF, for example, 500053.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, POST COMPLEMENTARY IOF.

Enter the ID for the tax type for regular IOF, for example, 500063.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, POST REGULAR IOF.

Enter the ID for the tax type for additional IOF, for example, 500073.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, POST ADDITIONAL IOF.

Enter the ID for the tax type for disbursement, for example, 3.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, OPERATION ID 16.


4.6.3.7.4 Assign Transaction Types and Condition Types to Tax Item Types

Use

Assign the tax item types that you created for input and posting to the corresponding condition types as described below.

Prerequisites

● You have created condition types as described in Financial Condition Types [page 366].● You have created transaction types as described in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items

[page 350].● You have created tax item types as described in Define Tax Item Types [page 374].



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Transaction Types and Condition Types to Tax Item Types .

2. Enter the mapping assignments for all the relevant condition types:

Table 399:

CondTyp TranTy Tax ImTy RC Dec Places

Enter the standard condition type for loans capital repayment 511010.

NoteRegardless the payment condition type for capital that you use in the loan contract, use this entry in Assign Transaction Types and Condition Types to Tax Item Type [page 346].

Leave the field empty. Enter the tax item type ID that you created for input disbursement events, for example, 20.

Round To Nearest Two decimals places

NoteIt is not necessary to configure this condition type again if you use only the 511010 standard condition for loans capital repayment.

Enter the number of the condition type for loans capital repayment that you use in the loan contract.

Leave the field empty. Enter the tax item type ID that you created for input disbursement events, for example, 20.



CondTyp TranTy Tax ImTy RC Dec Places

Leave the field empty. Enter a number of your choice, for example, 020010.

Enter the tax item type ID that you created for input disbursement, for example, 3.


Enter the condition type that you created in Define Condition Types for Tax on Loans Payment Replanning [page 43], for example, 999173.

Leave the field empty. Enter the tax item type ID that you created for input tax on loans payment replanning, for example, 28.


Enter the condition type that you created for complementary IOF on arrears pricing, for example, 999799.

Leave the field empty. Enter the tax item type ID that you created for post complementary IOF on arrears, for example, 500053.

Round Down Two decimals places

Enter the condition type that you created for additional IOF, for example, 999798.

Leave the field empty. Enter the tax item type ID that you created for post additional IOF, for example, 500073.


Enter the condition type that you created for regular IOF, for example, 999797.

Leave the field empty. Enter the tax item type ID that you created for post regular IOF, for example, 500063.


Enter the condition type that you created for complementary IOF on renegotiation pricing, for example, 999796.

Leave the field empty. Enter the tax item type ID that you created for post complementary IOF on renegotiation, for example, 500083.




Prerequisites

● You have determined tax operations as described in Define Tax Operations [page 373].● You have created tax item types as described in Define Tax Item Types [page 374].



Procedure



Table 400:


Enter the tax item type that you created for input disbursement events in Define Tax Item Types [page 374], for example, 20.

Enter the tax operation ID that you created for disbursement events in Define Tax Operations [page 373], for example, 20.

Enter the tax item type that you created for input tax on loans payment replanning in Define Tax Item Types [page 374], for example, 28.

Enter the tax operation ID that you created for tax on loans payment replanning in Define Tax Operations [page 373], for example, 28.

Enter the tax item type that you created for input disbursement in Define Tax Item Types [page 374], for example, 3.

Enter the tax operation ID that you created for disbursement in Define Tax Operations [page 373], for example, 16.


4.6.3.7.6 Define Business Partner Tax Classification

Use

To comply with regulation and business practices, you determine a classification for your business partners to exempt a certain group of them from IOF or to apply special tax rates, for example, for companies under the Simples Nacional category.

NoteThe standard delivery contains the tax classification Court Exemption Order (25) that you can use to exempt a given business partner from paying IOF based on court orders.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Business Partner Tax Classification .



Table 401:

Tax Classf Description

Enter an identifier, for example, 8. Enter a description of your choice, for example, EXEMPT.

Enter an identifier, for example, 13. Enter a description of your choice, for example, SIMPLES NACIONAL.

Enter an identifier, for example, 25. Enter a description of your choice, for example, COURT EXEMPTION ORDER.


4.6.3.7.7 Define Tax Types and Tax Groups

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General Settings Business Partner Basic Settings Tax Types and Tax Groups Define Tax Type and Tax Groups .



Table 402:

Country Tax Type Description BPs Products Sequence

BR Enter an identifier for IOF, for example, IOF.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, IOF.



7

BR Enter an identifier for regular IOF, for example, IOFR.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Regular IOF.



8



Country Tax Type Description BPs Products Sequence

BR Enter an identifier for additional IOF, for example, IOFA.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Additional IOF.



8

BR Enter an identifier for complementary IOF on arrears, for example, IOFC.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Complementary IOF on Arrears.



7

3. Save your entries.4. Select the entry that you created for IOF.5. Under Dialog Structure, choose Assign Business Partner Tax Groups and enter the following data:

Table 403:

Country Tax Type Tax Group Description

BR Enter the tax type that you created for IOF, for example, IOF.

Enter an identifier for the tax group, for example, 1.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, SIMPLES NACIONAL.

BR Enter the tax type that you created for IOF, for example, IOF.


Enter a description of your choice, for example, COURT EXEMPTION ORDER.

6. Save your entries.7. Select the entry that you created for Regular IOF.8. Under Dialog Structure, choose Assign Business Partner Tax Groups and enter the following data:

Table 404:


BR Enter the tax type that you created for regular IOF, for example, IOFR.





Enter a description of your choice, for example, EXEMPT.






9. Save your entries.10. Select the entry that you created for Additional IOF.11. Under Dialog Structure, choose Assign Business Partner Tax Groups and enter the following data:

Table 405:


BR Enter the tax type that you created for additional IOF, for example, IOFA.









12. Save your entries.13. Select the entry that you created for Complementary IOF on Arrears.14. Under Dialog Structure, choose Assign Business Partner Tax Groups and enter the following data:

Table 406:


BR Enter the tax type that you created for complementary IOF on arrears, for example, IOFC.












4.6.3.7.8 Assign Business Partner Tax Classifications to Business Partner Tax Groups

Prerequisites

You have determined the business partner tax classification in Define Business Partner Tax Classification [page 377].

You have determined tax types and tax groups in Define Tax Types and Tax Groups [page 378].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Business Partner Tax Classifications to Business Partner Tax Groups .


Table 407:


Enter the tax type that you created for IOF in Define Tax Types and Tax Groups [page 378], for example, IOF.

1 Enter the ID for Simples Nacional that you determined in Define Business Partner Tax Classification [page 377], for example, 13.


Enter the tax type that you created for IOF in Define Tax Types and Tax Groups [page 378], for example, IOF.

3 Enter the ID for Court Exemption Order that you determined in Define Business Partner Tax Classification [page 377], for example, 25.


Enter the tax type that you created for regular IOF in Define Tax Types and Tax Groups [page 378], for example, IOFR.




2 Enter the ID for Exempt that you determined in Define Business Partner Tax Classification [page 377], for example, 8.







Enter the tax type that you created for additional IOF in Define Tax Types and Tax Groups [page 378], for example, IOFA.









Enter the tax type that you created for complementary IOF on arrears in Define Tax Types and Tax Groups [page 378], for example, IOFC.













Use

Assign tax manager operations to the tax types and tax item types that you use for regular IOF, additional IOF, complementary IOF on arrears, and complementary IOF on renegotiation.

Prerequisites

● You have created tax operations as described in Define Tax Operations [page 373].● You have created tax types for additional IOF as described in Define Tax Types [page 373].● You have created tax item types for additional IOF as described in Define Tax Item Types [page 374].

Procedure



Table 408:

Tax Op ID Tax Type Tax ItmTy

Enter the tax operation ID that you created for disbursement in Define Tax Operations [page 373], for example, 16.

Enter the tax type that you created for additional IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFA.

Enter the tax item type that you created for post additional IOF inDefine Tax Item Types [page 374], for example, 500073.


Enter the tax type that you created for regular IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFR.

Enter the tax item type that you created for post regular IOF in Define Tax Item Types [page 374], for example, 500063.


Enter the tax type that you created for complementary IOF on arrears in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFC.

Enter the tax item type that you created for post complementary IOF on arrears in Define Tax Item Types [page 374], for example, 500053.

Enter the tax operation ID that you created for tax on loans payment replanning in Define Tax Operations [page 373], for example, 28.

Enter the tax type that you created for complementary IOF on renegotiation in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFN.

Enter the tax item type that you created for IOF on renegotiation in Define Tax Item Types [page 374], for example, 500083.




Use

The system calculates complementary IOF on arrears using the same rate applied to regular IOF in the disbursement event.

To check this rate, follow the procedure described below.

Prerequisites

You have created tax types as described in Define Tax Types [page 373].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Rates .

2. Enter the tax rates as exemplified below:

NoteThe IOF rates are published by the government and are subject to change.


Table 409:

Tax Rate ID Start Date End Date Tax Rate Tax Type Country

102 01.01.2000 31.12.9999 0.38 Enter the tax type that you created for additional IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFA.

BR



Tax Rate ID Start Date End Date Tax Rate Tax Type Country

104 01.01.2000 31.12.9999 0.38 Enter the tax type that you created for additional IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFA.

BR

300 01.01.2000 31.12.9999 0.0082 Enter the tax type that you created for regular IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFR.

BR

301 01.01.2000 31.12.9999 0.0041 Enter the tax type that you created for complementary IOF on renegotiation in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFN.

BR

302 01.01.2000 31.12.9999 0.00137 Enter the tax type that you created for regular IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFR.

BR



Prerequisites

You have created tax types as described in Define Tax Types [page 373].

Procedure





Tax Assignment for Regular IOF

Table 410:

Field Entry

Country BR

Tax Op ID 20

Tax Type Enter the tax type that you created for regular IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFR.


End Date 31.12.9999

Rate Determiner /FSLBR/CL_IOFR_DETERMINE_RATE

Reference Data Control /FSLBR/CL_TAX_IOF_DATA_CONTROL

Tax Assignment for Additional IOF

Table 411:

Field Entry

Country BR

Tax Op ID 16

Tax Type Enter the tax type that you created for additional IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFA.


End Date 31.12.9999

Rate Determiner /FSLBR/CL_IOFA_DETERMINE_RATE

Tax Assignment for Complementary IOF on Arrears



Table 412:

Field Entry

Country BR

Tax Op ID 20

Tax Type Enter the tax type that you created for complementary IOF on arrears in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFC.


End Date 31.12.9999

Rate Determiner /FSLBR/CL_IOFC_DETERMINE_RATE


Tax Assignment for Complementary IOF on Renegotiation

Table 413:

Field Entry

Country BR

Tax Op ID 28

Tax Type Enter the tax type that you created for complementary IOF on renegotiation in Define Tax Types [page 373], for example, IOFN.


End Date 31.12.9999



4.6.3.7.12 Process Integrator Settings


NoteAll the rates specified below are for your reference. Enter the corresponding rate for the tax when making these settings.


4.6.3.7.12.2 Determine Process Integrator Implementation Spot

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Services Tax Manager Process Integrator Settings Determine Process Integrator Implementation Spot .


Table 414:

ProcIntID BussProcDefID

AccTypePC Business Process

Bus Proc Act Step

ProcOrd Implement. Spot

PI Class Name

51 51 LOAN DISBURSEMENT

AFTER_SKIP

1 AFTER_SKIP

/FSGLO/CL_TAX_PROC_INTEGRATOR

52 51 LOAN DISBURSEMENT

AFTER_SKIP

2 AFTER_SKIP

/FSLBR/CL_TAX_PR_INT_OVER_DISB

55 55 LOAN SETTLEMENT

AFTER_SKIP

1 AFTER_SKIP

/FSGLO/CL_TAX_PROC_INTEGRATOR

57 55 LOAN SETTLEMENT

AFTER_SKIP

3 AFTER_SKIP

/FSLBR/CL_TAX_PR_INT_ON_ARREAR


4.6.3.7.12.3 Assign Process Integrator Tax Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Services Tax Manager Process Integrator Settings Assign Process Integrator Tax Type .




Table 415:

ProcIntID Tax Type PrepareRelevant Calc Relevant Post Relevant

10 Enter the tax type that you have created for additional IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373].

Leave field blank. Selected Selected

51 Enter the tax type that you have created for regular IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373].

Leave field blank. Leave field blank. Leave field blank.

52 Enter the tax type that you have created for regular IOF in Define Tax Types [page 373].

Leave field blank. X X


Leave field blank. Selected Selected


Leave field blank. Leave field blank.

Leave field blank.


4.6.3.8 Amount Reservation Settings

4.6.3.8.1 Define Amount Reservation Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Basic Settings Amount Reservation Types Define Amount Reservation Types .



Table 416:

AmtResType Description

Enter an identifier of your choice for the amount reservation type, for example, 0L10.

Enter a description of your choice for the amount reservation type, for example, Payment of Tax.


Enter a description of your choice for the amount reservation type, for example, Reversal Payment of Tax.


Enter a description of your choice for the amount reservation type, for example, Advance Payment of Tax.


Enter a description of your choice for the amount reservation type, for example, Reversal Early Payment of Tax.


Enter a description of your choice for the amount reservation type, for example, Payment Comp. IOF on Arr..


Enter a description of your choice for the amount reservation type, for example, Reversal Payment Comp. IOF on Arr..


Enter a description of your choice for the amount reservation type, for example, Payment Comp. IOF on Renegot..


Enter a description of your choice for the amount reservation type, for example, Reversal Payment Comp. IOF on Renegot..


4.6.3.8.2 Define Payment Distribution Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Payment Distribution Types .




Table 417:

PD Type PD Type Desc. Usage Cat.

Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, 000900.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Prepayment of Tax.

004 Prepayment


Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payment of Tax.

003 Due Item Clearing


Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payment Comp. IOF on Arr..



Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payment Comp. IOF on Renegot..



4.6.3.8.3 Assign Transaction Types and Reserved Types to Payment Distribution Types

Prerequisites

● You have created transaction types for tax payment as described in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350].

● You have created payment distribution types as described in Define Payment Distribution Types [page 390].● You have created amount reservation types as described in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Trans. Types and Reserv. Types to Paymt Distr. Types .



Table 418:

PD Type TransType OffsetType Rev. Type Res. Type Rev Res Ty

Enter the payment distribution type that you created for the prepayment of tax in Define Payment Distribution Types [page 390], for example, 000900.

Enter the transaction type that you created for advance payment of tax in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 092721.

042831 042831 Enter the amount reservation type that you created for the advance payment of tax in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L12.

Enter the amount reservation type that you created for the reversal early payment of tax in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L13.

Enter the payment distribution type that you created for the payment of tax in Define Payment Distribution Types [page 390], for example, 000901.

Enter the transaction type that you created for credit from payment of tax in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 092722.

042900 042841 Enter the amount reservation type that you created for the payment of tax in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L10.

Enter the amount reservation type that you created for the reversal payment of tax in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L11.

Enter the payment distribution type that you created for the payment of complementary IOF on arrears in Define Payment Distribution Types [page 390], for example, 000902.

Enter the transaction type that you created for payment of tax on arrears in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 092723.

042900 042841 Enter the amount reservation type that you created for the payment of complementary IOF on arrears in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L14.

Enter the amount reservation type that you created for the reversal payment of complementary IOF on arrears in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L15.



PD Type TransType OffsetType Rev. Type Res. Type Rev Res Ty

Enter the payment distribution type that you created for the payment of complementary IOF on renegotiation in Define Payment Distribution Types [page 390], for example, 000904.

Enter the transaction type that you created for payment of tax on renegotiation in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 092724.

042900 042842 Enter the amount reservation type that you created for the payment of complementary IOF on renegotiation in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L16.

Enter the amount reservation type that you created for the reversal payment of complementary IOF on renegotiation in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L17.


4.6.3.8.4 Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System .


Table 419:

Trsn Type Trans. Type Desc.

GTX1 Debit Position IOF Disb.

GB21 Debit Position Comp. IOF on Arr.

GB31 Debit Position Comp. IOF on Renegot.


4.6.3.8.5 Assign Transaction Types for Open Item Management System to Payment Distribution Types

Prerequisites

You have created transaction types for the open item management system in Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System [page 393].


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Trans. Types for OIM System to Paymt Distr. Types .


Table 420:

Use Cat. Trsn Type Trans. Type Desc. PD Type PD Type Desc

003 GB31 Debit Position Comp. IOF on Renegot.

000904 Payment Comp. IOF on Renegot.

003 GTX1 Debit Position IOF Disb.

000901 Payment of Tax

003 GB21 Debit Position Comp. IOF on Arr.

000902 Payment Comp. IOF on Arr.


000900 Prepayment of Tax


000900 Prepayment of Tax

008 GB31 Debit Position Comp. IOF on Renegot.

000904 Payment Comp. IOF on Renegot.


000901 Payment of Tax


000902 Payment Comp. IOF on Arr.




4.6.3.8.6 Assign Condition Types for Limitation/Clearing of Info Items

Use

You have created transaction types for information items in Maintain Transaction Types for Information Items [page 362].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management SettlementAssign Condition Types for Limitation/Clearing of Info Items .



Table 421:

Trans. Type Offset Cond. Type Detail

700000 999797 999797

700001 999798 999798


4.6.3.9 Prenote Settings

4.6.3.9.1 Create Prenote Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Prenote Define Prenote Types .




Payment of Tax

Table 422:

Field Entry

Prenote Type Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, L10.

Desc. Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payment of Tax.


Account Names None

Access Limit None



Credit Memo Select the checkbox.

Create Mode Only BAPI

TransTyGrp Pstg Chck 1400

TA Type Grp CrcyExch 002000

Reversal Payment of Tax

Table 423:

Field Entry


Desc. Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal Payment of Tax.


Account Names None

Access Limit None


Own Check Select the checkbox.





Field Entry



Advance Payment of Tax

Table 424:

Field Entry


Desc. Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Advance Payment of Tax.


Account Names None

Access Limit None


Payment Monitoring Payment Monitoring - Loans





Reversal Early Payment of Tax

Table 425:

Field Entry


Desc. Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal Early Payment of Tax.


Account Names None

Access Limit None



Field Entry






Payment Complementary IOF on Arrears

Table 426:

Field Entry


Desc. Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payment Comp. IOF on Arr..


Account Names None

Access Limit Tunover-Based Only







Reversal Payment Complementary IOF on Arrears

Table 427:

Field Entry


Desc. Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal Payment Comp. IOF on Arr..




Field Entry

Account Names None

Access Limit None







Payment Complementary IOF on Renegotiation

Table 428:

Field Entry


Desc. Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Payment Comp. IOF on Renegot..


Account Names None








Reversal Payment Complementary IOF on Renegotiation


Table 429:

Field Entry


Desc. Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reversal Payment Comp. IOF on Renegot..


Account Names None

Access Limit None








4.6.3.9.2 Define Turnover Classes




Table 430:

Field Entry

Turn Class TAX0

Description Turnover Class Tax: To Pay

Agg Select the checkbox.



Field Entry

Assignment Assignment via Application

Update Update via Application

Table 431:

Field Entry

Turn Class TAX1

Description Turnover Class Tax: Owed




Table 432:

Field Entry

Turn Class TAX2

Description Turnover Class Tax: Paid (Clearing)




Table 433:

Field Entry

Turn Class TAX3

Description Turnover Class Tax: Adv. Payt




Table 434:

Field Entry

Turn Class TOA0


Field Entry

Description Turnover Class Tax on Arrears: To Pay




Table 435:

Field Entry

Turn Class TOA1

Description Turnover Class Tax on Arrears: Owed




Table 436:

Field Entry

Turn Class TOA2

Description Turnover Class Tax on Arrears: Paid (Clearing)




Table 437:

Field Entry

Turn Class TOA3

Description Turnover Class Tax on Arrears: Adv. Payt






Table 438:

Field Entry

Turn Class TXR0

Description Turnover Class Tax on Renegot.: To Pay




Table 439:

Field Entry

Turn Class TXR1

Description Turnover Class Tax on Renegot.: Owed




Table 440:

Field Entry

Turn Class TXR2

Description Turnover Class Tax on Renegot.: Paid (Clearing)




Table 441:

Field Entry

Turn Class TXR3

Description Turnover Class Tax on Renegot.: Adv. Payt




Field Entry



4.6.3.9.3 Assign Turnover Classes to Prenote Types

Prerequisites

● You have created prenote types as described in Create Prenote Types [page 395].● You have created turnover classes as described in Define Turnover Classes [page 400].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management PrenoteAssign Turnover Classes to Prenote Types .

2. On the Maintenance View for Prenote Types screen, select the prenote types that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395] and choose Assigned Turnover Classes.


Table 442:

Prenote Type Turnover Class

Enter the payment of tax prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L10.

TAX2

Enter the reversal payment of tax prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L11.

TAX2

Enter the advance payment of tax prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L12.

TAX3

Enter the reversal early payment of tax prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L13.

TAX3

Enter the payment complementary IOF on arrears prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L14.

TOA2



Prenote Type Turnover Class

Enter the reversal payment complementary IOF on arrears prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L15.

TOA2


4.6.3.9.4 Define Prenote Types for Withholding Categories

Prerequisites

● You have created transaction types for the open item management (OIM) system as described in Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System [page 393].

● You have created prenote types as described in Create Prenote Types [page 395].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Account OrderDisbursement (Loans) Define Prenote Types for Withhold Categories .


Table 443:



Enter the debit position IOF disbursement transaction type for the OIM system that you configured in Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System [page 393], for example, GTX1.





Enter the GB20 complementary IOF on arrears: to be requested transaction type for the OIM system.

546 646 557 657




Enter the debit position complementary IOF on arrears transaction type for the OIM system that you configured in Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System [page 393], for example, GB21.

546 646 557 657


4.6.3.9.5 Assign Amount Reservation Types to Prenote Types

Prerequisites

● You have created amount reservation types as described in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389].● You have created prenote types as described in Create Prenote Types [page 395].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Prenote Assign Amount Reservation Types to Prenote Types .


Table 444:

Country Tax Type

Enter the payment of tax amount reservation type that you created in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L10.


Enter the reversal payment of tax amount reservation type that you created in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L11.




Country Tax Type

Enter the advance payment of tax amount reservation type that you created in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L12.


Enter the reversal early payment of tax amount reservation type that you created in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L13.


Enter the payment complementary IOF on arrears.amount reservation type that you created in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L14.

Enter the payment complementary IOF on arrears prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L14.

Enter the reversal payment complementary IOF on arrears amount reservation type that you created in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L15.

Enter the reversal payment complementary IOF on arrears prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L15.

Enter the payment complementary IOF on renegotiation amount reservation type that you created in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L16.

Enter the payment complementary IOF on renegotiation prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L16.

Enter the reversal payment complementary IOF on renegotiation amount reservation type that you created in Define Amount Reservation Types [page 389], for example, 0L17.

Enter the reversal payment complementary IOF on renegotiation prenote type that you created in Create Prenote Types [page 395], for example, L17.



Use

For each turnover class that you determined for IOF, assign two transaction types, one for debit and another for credit. You determine two different derivation rules for each turnover class as described below.

Prerequisites

● You have created transaction types for payment items as described in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350].

● You have created turnover classes as described in Define Turnover Classes [page 400].


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Turnover Classes for Flexible Account Balances Define Derivation Rules for Turnover Classes , select the first node with the <No Condition Defined> condition, choose Create Node and select As Last Lower-Level Node.

2. In the Selected Node tab, create a new condition and enter the following data:

Table 445:

Field Entry

Node Active Select the checkbox.



Value Enter the reversal payment of tax transaction type that you created in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 042841.

3. In the Target group box, create a new target and enter the following data:

Table 446:

Field Entry

Turnover Class Enter the tax: paid (clearing) turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TAX2.

4. Save your entries.5. In the Selected Node tab, create a new condition and enter the following data:

Table 447:

Field Entry




Value Enter the credit from payment of tax transaction type that you created in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 092722.




Table 448:

Field Entry

Turnover Class Enter the tax: paid (clearing) turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TAX2.


Table 449:

Field Entry




Value Enter the reversal of advance payment of tax transaction type that you created in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 042831.


Table 450:

Field Entry

Turnover Class Enter the tax: advance payment turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TAX3.


Table 451:

Field Entry




Value Enter the advance payment of tax transaction type that you created in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 092721.



Table 452:

Field Entry

Turnover Class Enter the tax: advance payment turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TAX3.


Table 453:

Field Entry




Value Enter the reversal of payment of tax on arrears transaction type that you created in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 042843.


Table 454:

Field Entry

Turnover Class Enter the tax on arrears: paid (clearing) turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TOA2.


Table 455:

Field Entry




Value Enter the payment of tax on arrears transaction type that you created in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 092723.




Table 456:

Field Entry

Turnover Class Enter the tax on arrears: paid (clearing) turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TOA2.

19. Save your entries.20.In the Selected Node tab, create a new condition and enter the following data:

Table 457:

Field Entry




Value Enter the reversal of payment of tax on renegotiation transaction type that you created in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 042842.


Table 458:

Field Entry

Turnover Class Enter the tax on renegotiation: paid (clearing) turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TRX2.


Table 459:

Field Entry





Field Entry

Value Enter the payment of tax on renegotiation transaction type that you created in Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items [page 350], for example, 092724.


Table 460:

Field Entry

Turnover Class Enter the tax on renegotiation: paid (clearing) turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TRX2.


4.6.3.11 Configure Account Product for IOF on Loans

Use

When creating or adjusting the account product to enable IOF calculation on loans, make the settings as described below.

Prerequisites

You have created turnover classes as described in Define Turnover Classes [page 400].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create / Change Account Product .



2. In the product attribute structure, make the settings as described below:

Table 461:

Attribute Path in Product Attribute Tree Entry

Maximum No. Tolerance Days From Disbursement Date

Disbursement Item Withheld from

Disbursement

Enter the maximum number of days that the system allows, for example, 999999.

Logical Turnover Class General Settlement Attributes


GTX0

Real Turnover Class General Settlement Attributes


Enter the tax: to pay turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TAX0.

Table 462:




Disbursement




GTX1



Enter the tax: owed turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TAX1.

Table 463:




Disbursement




GTX2



Enter the tax: paid (clearing) turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TAX2.


Table 464:




Disbursement




GTX3



Enter the tax: advance payment turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TAX3.

Table 465:




Disbursement




GB20



Enter the tax on arrears: to pay turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TOA0.

Table 466:




Disbursement




GB21



Enter the tax on arrears: owed turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TOA1.



Table 467:




Disbursement




GB22



Enter the tax on arrears: paid (clearing) turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TOA2.

Table 468:




Disbursement




GB23



Enter the tax on arrears: advance payment turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TOA3.

Table 469:




Disbursement




GB30



Enter the tax on renegotiation: to pay turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TXR0.


Table 470:




Disbursement




GB31



Enter the tax on renegotiation: owed turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TXR1.

Table 471:




Disbursement




GB32



Enter the tax on renegotiation: paid (clearing) turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TXR2.

Table 472:




Disbursement




GB33



Enter the tax on renegotiation: advance payment turnover class that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 400], for example, TXR3.

3. Save and activate the account product.



4.6.3.12 Edit Descriptions for Seasonal Limits

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Contract Management AccountEdit Descriptions for Seasonal Limits .


Table 473:

Seas. Lim. Desc. Seasonal Limit

Enter a seasonal limit identifier of your choice, for example, LIF.

Enter a seasonal limit description of your choice, for example, Limit for Items to Fund.


4.6.3.13 Define Payment Note Categories for IOF




Table 474:

Payment Note Type Description Type of Payment Note

Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, 090. Enter a description of your choice, for example, Number of Days of IOF.

Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, 091. Enter a description of your choice, for example, Currency for IOF.

Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, 092. Enter a description of your choice, for example, Amount for IOF.

Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, 093. Enter a description of your choice, for example, Percentage of IOF.

Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, 094. Enter a description of your choice, for example, Disbursement Date.


Payment Note Type Description Type of Payment Note

Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, 095. Enter a description of your choice, for example, Installment Date.


4.6.3.14 Configure Localization Parameters

Prerequisites

● You have configured payment note categories as described in Define Payment Notes Categories for IOF [page 417].

● You have configured the industries that are tax exempt when you create the business partner in the transactional banking system.

Procedure


2. Select the following localization parameters one at a time.3. For each of the parameters, under Dialog Structure, choose Customer Parameter Value and enter the data

described in the Parameter Value column below.

Table 475:

Parameters Customer Parameter Values

Localization Parameter Group Parameter Subgroup Parameter Name Parameter Value

Global TAX_MANAGER PAYMENT_NOTE_ID DAYS Enter the number of days of IOF payment note type that you configured in Define Payment Note Categories for IOF [page 417].





CURRENCY Enter the currency for IOF payment note type that you configured in Define Payment Note Categories for IOF [page 417].

BASE_AMOUNT Enter the amount for IOF payment note type that you configured in Define Payment Note Categories for IOF [page 417].

RATE Enter the percentage of IOF payment note type that you config-ured in Define Payment Note Categories for IOF [page 417].

DISBURSEMENT_DATE

Enter the disbursement date payment note type that you configured in Define Payment Note Categories for IOF [page 417].

INSTALLMENT_DATE Enter the installment date payment note type that you config-ured in Define Payment Note Categories for IOF [page 417].

Brazil TAX_MANAGER IOF COMPANY_EXEMPTION

Enter the industries that are exempt from IOF.




LIMIT_AMT_FOR_RATE_DETERMI NER

Enter the maximum amount for the account committed limit of a loan for which the system applies special IOF rates, for example, for companies under the Simples Nacional category.

MAX_DAYS Enter the maximum number of days that the system uses to calculate regular and complementary IOF on arrears.

PRENOTE_ADDITIONAL

Enter the prenote type that the system uses to withhold additional IOF in a loan disbursement.

PRENOTE_REGULAR Enter the prenote type that the system uses to withhold regular IOF in a loan disbursement.

Brazil TAX_MANAGER IOFA COMPANY_EXEMPTION

Enter the industries that are exempt from additional IOF.

COURT_EXEMPTION_ORDER

Enter the industries that are exempt from additional IOF due to court exemption order.

EXEMPT Enter the industries that are exempt from additional IOF.

NOT_APPLICABLE Enter the industries for which additional IOF is not applicable.





RATE_ZERO Enter the industries that receive zero rate for additional IOF.

Brazil TAX_MANAGER IOFR COMPANY_EXEMPTION

Enter the industries that are exempt from regular IOF.

COURT_EXEMPTION_ORDER

Enter the industries that are exempt from regular IOF due to a court exemption order.

EXEMPT Enter the industries that are exempt from regular IOF.

NOT_APPLICABLE Enter the industries for which regular IOF is not applicable.

RATE_ZERO Enter the industries that receive zero rate for regular IOF.


4.6.3.15 Posting Control Settings for IOF

4.6.3.15.1 Define Own Check Results



Table 476:

Check Objs Check Result No. Appl. Area Message

Own Check Own Check LT01 /FSGLO/TAX_MANAGER

016


Check Objs Check Result No. Appl. Area Message

Own Check Own Check LT02 /FSGLO/TAX_MANAGER

017


4.6.3.15.2 Define Error Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Error Types Define Error Types , enter the error types as exemplified below:

Table 477:

Field Entry

Error Type LT1

Error Type Descript. Incorrect Planned Taxes


4.6.3.15.3 Assign Error Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Error Types Assign Error Types , assign the error types as exemplified below:


Table 478:

Check Obj Check Result No. Error Type

Own Check Own Check LT01 LT1

Own Check Own Check LT02 LT1





1. In Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Managements Posting Control Rules Define Rule Set , determine a rule set as exemplified below:


Table 479:

Field Entry

Error Type LT1

Ty. Ordering Party

TrTypGrPsg 0400

First Resp Post Processing


4.6.3.16 Configuration for Disabling Partial Clearing for Open Item Transaction Types

Use

The system does not allow you to pay IOF partially. To disable the partial clearing of IOF, make the settings as described below.

Prerequisites

You have created transaction types for the open item management (OIM) system as described in Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System [page 393].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Localization Settings Enable Partial Clearing for Open Item Transaction Types .


2. Determine a partial clearing for the open item transaction type as in the described below:

Table 480:

Field Entry

Rule Set Enter the rule set assigned to the loans product.

OI Trans Type Enter the transaction type that you configured in Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System [page 393], for example, GTX1.

Enbl. Part. Clear. Deselect the checkbox.

Table 481:

Field Entry


OI Trans Type Enter the transaction type that you configured in Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System [page 393], for example, GB21.


Table 482:

Field Entry


OI Trans Type Enter the transaction type that you configured in Define Transaction Types for the Open Item Management System [page 393], for example, GB31.



4.6.3.17 Create Dependency for Clearing Open Items

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Localization Settings Create Dependency for Clearing Open Items .




Table 483:

Field Entry


Dep. Group Enter an identifier for the dependency group, for example, A.

Partial Select the checkbox.

3. Save your entries.4. Select the new entry that you created.5. Under Dialog Structure, choose Open Item Transaction Types.6. Choose the New Entries pushbutton, and enter the following data in the OI TType field:

○ The standard open item transaction type for Debit Position Repayment (1550)○ The open item transaction type for Debit Position Complementary IOF on Arrears (GB21)


4.6.3.18 Configuration for Extending Disbursement Order

4.6.3.18.1 Configure New Object Categories

1. Run transaction SM34.2. Maintain view cluster VC_TBCA_ORLINK.3. Choose Object Types in the Dialog Structure.4. Create a new object category reference with value LDBF01.5. Save your entries.6. Choose Functions in the Dialog Structure.7. Create an entry for the newly created object category reference and assign the value FINADI in the

Differentiation Functions for References of Orders field.8. Save your entries.

4.6.3.18.2 Configure Disbursement Order

4.6.3.18.2.1 Configure Events for the Disbursement Order

There are 5 events that must be configured in order to enable the financing of disbursement withheld items.

Below is the configuration for each of them:

1. Under the SAP Easy Menu Access, choose Financial Services Account Management Tools BDT Customizing Disbursement (Loans) (Dialog Only) Structure .


2. Run transaction for configuring events F9BODB_S73. Select line for event DCHCK and double click on Event -> Function Modules.

○ Disable the function module call under id 1000000 (i.e., erase the field Call)○ Enable the function module call under id 7000000 (i.e., mark the field Call)○ Save your entries.

4. Select line for event DSAVC and double click on Event -> Function Modules○ Disable the function module call under id 1000000 (i.e., erase the field Call)○ Enable the function module call under id 7000000 (i.e., mark the field Call)○ Save your entries.

5. Select line for event FCODE and double click on Event -> Function Modules○ Disable the function module call under id 1000 (i.e., erase the field Call)○ Enable the function module call under id 7000000 (i.e., mark the fieldCall)○ Save your entries.

6. Select line for event ISDAT and double click on Event -> Function Modules○ Enable the function module call under id 7000000(i.e., mark the field Call)○ Save your entries.

7. Select line for event SCRND and double click on Event -> Function Modules○ Enable the function module call under id 7000000 (i.e., mark the field Call)○ Save your entries.


4.6.3.18.2.2 Configure Views for the Disbursement Order

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account Management Tools BDT Customizing Disbursement (Loans) (Dialog Only) Structure Screen Layout Views .

2. Choose the BODB01 Disbursement view.3. In the Function Module group box, in the After Entry field, enter /FSGLO/FINA_DISB_PAI_BODB01.4. Save your entries.

4.6.3.18.3 Define Prenote Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Prenote Define Prenote Types .

2. Choose the 500 Reservation: Disbursement - Loans prenote type.3. In the Checks group box, deselect the Facility checkbox.4. Save your entries.



4.7 Configuration for Payment Processing

4.7.1 Introduction

This section describes how to configure the system to process payments from customers to banks and between banks in line with requirements in Brazil.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to payment processing, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP Brazil

Account Management (FS-AM) Payment Processing .

4.7.2 Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules

Use

To enable the system to use the same posting rules for similar transactions, you create a transaction type group, and assign posting rules to the transaction type group. The system then uses the same posting rules for all related transaction types.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Define Transaction Type Groups .

2. Create two transaction type groups, one for debit transactions and another for credit transactions, by entering the following data:

Table 484:

Field Entry

TransTypGr (Transaction Type Group) Enter a technical name of your choice, for example, BRDEB and BRCRED.

Descript. Transaction Type Group Enter a description of your choice, for example, Debits – BR Bank Transfer and Credits - BR Bank Transfer.




4.7.3 Define Main Rule Sets

Use

To enable the system to react to errors when it processes payments, you define rules. In the rules, you can determine how the system reacts when there is an error with an item. For example, you can set up the system to post the item.

Prerequisites

You have defined the required transaction type groups (see Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules [page 427]).

Procedure


2. Define rules for each transaction type group, as described below.

Rules for Debit Transaction Type Groups

The example below is for the transaction type group for debits, BRDEB.

Create one rule for each error type, from C01 through C15, using the same values for each, as listed in the table below:

Table 485:

Field Entry

ErrorType C01 (from C01 through C15)

Ty. (Type of Payment Item) Ordering Party

TrTypGrPsg (Transaction Type Group: Rules for Posting Control)

BRDEB (see Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules [page 448]).

First Resp (First Response (Posting Control Rules)) Post Processing (example only)

Proc.Reas. (Processing Reason) 2

Rules for Credit Transaction Type Groups

The example below is for the transaction type group for credits, BRCRED.



Create one rule for each error type, from C01 through C12, using the same values for each, as listed in the table below:

Table 486:

Field Entry


Ty. (Type of Payment Item) Recipients


BRCRED (see Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules [page 448]).


Proc.Reas. (Processing Reason) Leave field blank.

Rules for Other Transaction Type Groups

To ensure that the system does not forward payment items to post processing when an error occurs for a transaction type group other than the ones above, you configure the error types C01 through C12 for all other transaction type groups that you use, as shown in the following table:

Table 487:

Field Entry


Ty. (Type of Payment Item) Leave field blank.


Leave field blank.

First Resp (First Response (Posting Control Rules)) Post



4.7.4 Create Transaction Types for Brazilian Bank Transfers

4.7.4.1 Create Transaction Types

Use

To differentiate standard transaction types from the transaction types that are required in Brazil, you create new transaction types for use in Brazil. The transaction types are as follows:

Table 488:

Purpose of Transaction Type Transaction Type

Debit for Customer-Bank Transfers DOC Debit

TED Debit

Bank Transfers

Bill Payments

Boleto

NoteBoleto is a common method of payment by bank transfer in Brazil. A vendor sends its customer a boleto (bank payment slip), which serves as an invoice. The customer pays the boleto at a local bank, and this bank then sends the payment to the vendor’s designated house bank.

Debit for Bank-Bank Transfers DOC C Debit

DOC D Debit

TED C Debit

TED D Debit

Credit for Customer-Bank Transfer DOC Credit

TED Credit

Bank Transfers

Credit for Bank-Bank Transfers DOC C Credit

DOC D Credit

TED C Credit



Purpose of Transaction Type Transaction Type

TED D Credit

Offsetting Transaction Types for Credit Credits to Checking Account

Rent Payments

Duplicatas

NoteDuplicatas are copies of invoices that you send to banks to collect receivables.

Exchange Transactions

Credit Card/Debit Transactions

Public Service Payments

Tax Payments

Public Sector Payments

Dividend Payments

Salary Payments

Prerequisites

You have created transaction type groups (see Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules [page 427]).

Procedure


Items .2. Create the transaction types described in the table above. For debit transaction types, see Create Debit

Transaction Types [page 432]; for credit transaction types, see Create Credit Transaction Types [page 435].

NoteThe sequence of the fields in the tables below is correct in the detail view of the transaction types. We therefore recommend that you make all settings in the detail view.


4.7.4.2 Create Debit Transaction Types

For each debit transaction type listed in the table above, enter the data described in the tables below:

NoteEach subheading in this section represents a group box in the detail view of the transaction types.

Transaction Type Maintenance

Table 489:

Field Entry

Trans. Type Enter a technical name of your choice, for example, CNAB10.

Short Description Enter a short description of your choice, for example, DOC Debit Transfer.

NoteFor your short description, you can enter the transaction type names listed in the Transaction Type column of the table above.

Long Name Enter a long name of your choice, for example, DOC Debit Transfer.

NoteFor your long name, you can enter the transaction type names listed in the Transaction Type column of the table above.

Item Type Ordering Party




Relevant Checks

Table 490:

Field Entry

Account Posting Check Selected

Limit Check Selected

ValDte/SFP Selected

Facilities Selected


Prenote Deselected

Account Names None


Availability Checks All

Payment Monitoring Payment Monitoring - Time Deposits

Overdraft Protection Selected


Plan Monitoring Selected

Own Check Selected

Control

Table 491:

Field Entry

CreditMemo Deselected

Reversal OK Selected


Display Payment Notes Selected



Field Entry

Cus. Initiation Selected



ValDteSpec Value Date Entry Possible

Spec Sub FinPayt Not a Subject to Final Payment Transaction Type

Payt Form Type Leave field blank.




Other P/R Not Relevant

Schedule Settlement Deselected

Clearg Category Not Relevant for Billing



Use

Table 492:

Field Entry


Online PO Selected

Online FO Selected




Assignment

Table 493:

Field Entry

TT Group Posting Check 800

TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules BRDEB (see Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules [page 427])


TT Grp CrcyExch 1000

4.7.4.3 Create Credit Transaction Types

For each credit transaction type listed in the table above, enter the data described in the tables below:


Table 494:

Field Entry

Trans. Type Enter a technical name of your choice, for example, CNAB20.

Short Description Enter a short description of your choice, for example, DOC Credit Transfer.

NoteFor your short description, you can enter the transaction type names listed in the Transaction Type column of the table above.

Long Name Enter a long name of your choice, for example, DOC Credit Transfer.

NoteFor your long name, you can enter the transaction type names listed in the Transaction Type column of the table above.


Field Entry

Item Type Recipient


Relevant Checks

Table 495:

Field Entry



ValDte/SFP Selected



Prenote Deselected

Account Names Name of Account Holder

Access Limit None






Own Check Selected

Control

Table 496:

Field Entry

CreditMemo Selected



Field Entry





Cus. Initiation Deselected








PaytDistr. Payment Item Transferred






Use

Table 497:

Field Entry


Online PO Selected

Online FO Selected


Field Entry


Assignment

Table 498:

Field Entry


TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules BRCRED (see Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules [page 427])



4.7.5 Assign Offsetting Transaction Types

Use

You determine the relationship between transaction types, for example, a DOC C debit transaction, and the associated offsetting transaction types. The settings that you make in this step determine what you can choose on the selection screen of the Brazil-specific Create Order for Payment Processing (/FSLBR/PP_CREATE_ORDER) report.

Prerequisites

You have created the required transaction types (see Create Transaction Types for Brazilian Bank Transfers [page 430]).

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Payment OrderAssign Offsetting Transaction Types to Transaction Types Assign Offsetting Transaction Types (PO

Dialog) .



2. Make the settings described below:

DOC Transactions

1. Select the transaction type that you created for DOC C debit and choose Assign Offsetting Transaction Type.2. Enter the following data:

Table 499:

OfTrTy (Offsetting Transaction Type)

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for rent payment.

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for duplicatas.

3. In the left frame, choose Transaction Type for Payment Order – Dialog and repeat the previous step for the transaction type that you created for DOC D debit.


TED Transactions

1. Select the transaction that you created for TED C debit and choose Assign Offsetting Transaction Type.2. Enter the following data:

Table 500:

OfTrTy (Offsetting Transaction Type)

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for exchange transaction.

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for credit card/debit transaction.

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for public service payment.

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for tax payment.

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for public sector payment.

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for dividend payment.

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for salary payment.

3. In the left frame, choose Transaction Type for Payment Order – Dialog and repeat the previous step for the transaction that you created for TED D debit.



4.7.6 Assign Processing Priority to Recipient Items

Use

When you execute the outgoing payment dispatcher using a mass run, the system processes external recipient items based on their processing priorities. If you do not specify a particular processing priority, the system processes all items sequentially according to their priorities.

Prerequisites

You have defined the transaction types that you require (see Create Transaction Types for Brazilian Bank Transfers [page 430]).

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Payment OrderOutgoing Payment Dispatcher Assign Processing Priority for Recipient Item .


Table 501:

Trans. Type (Transaction Type) Priority

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for credit in checking account.

Fast Payments

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for rent payment.

Fast Payments

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for duplicatas.

Fast Payments

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for exchange transaction.

Fast Payments

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for credit card/debit.

Fast Payments

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for public service payment.

Fast Payments

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for tax payment.

Fast Payments



Trans. Type (Transaction Type) Priority

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for public sector payment.

Fast Payments

Enter the technical name of your offsetting transaction type for dividend payment.

Fast Payments


4.7.7 Define Payment Media and Methods

Use

To enable the system to process incoming payments from the payment transaction system (PTS), you define the required payment media.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Define Medium/Payment Method .


Table 502:

Screen Element Entry

Medium 0080

Medium Description DCR

Short D (Short Description) DCR

Format 2

PayMeth (Payment Method) Selected

St.Payt (Standard Payment Method) Deselected

Internal Acct (Payment Method for Internal Recipient Accounts)

Deselected

Control None



PFTy (Payment Form Type) Leave field blank.

AccSymbPF (Account Symbol (Payment Form)) Leave field blank.

Table 503:


Medium 0081

Medium Description STR_AND_PAG

Short D (Short Description) STRPAG

Format 2

PayMeth (Payment Method) Selected



Deselected

Control None



Table 504:


Medium 0082

Medium Description CNAB240

Short D (Short Description) CNAB

Format 5

PayMeth (Payment Method) Deselected



Deselected

Control None







4.7.8 Set Default Values for Order Creation Report

Use

To meet requirements in Brazil, you use a special report to create payment orders and forward orders. In this step, you determine which values you want the system to enter by default on the selection screen of the report.

Note

You access the report on the SAP Easy Access screen under Financial Services Account ManagementAccount Payment Transaction Orders Country-Specific Functions Brazil Create Order for Payment Processing .

You can specify default values for the following fields on the selection screen of the report:

● Transaction type● Payment medium● Payment method

Prerequisites

You have defined the transaction type, payment medium, and payment method that you want to specify as defaults.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsSet Default Values .

2. Enter the required default values for the transaction code /FSLBR/OPP_ORDER.



Use

This section contains the product-specific parameters that are necessary to meet requirements in Brazil. The parameters contain standard values that enable the system to process payments according to the configuration you make by following the instructions provided in this chapter. You can customize the parameters to determine how the system processes incoming and outgoing payments. For example, you can define the amount limits for DOC payments and the transaction types that the system uses to validate TED transactions.

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country Brazil and the parameter group PAYMENT_PROCESSING.3. Review and configure the parameters as required, as described below.

The following parameter subgroups are available for customizing:

Table 505:

Parameter Subgroup Description

BP_TAX_CODE_TYPE Specifies the tax number categories that you use in the business partner (BP) master data for a given set of tax numbers (for example, CPF).

ERROR_TYPE Defines the own check results that the system uses for a given posting rule.

MAP_PAYMENT_NOTE Determines the type of payment notes that the system uses when it maps or validates the data in a payment order (for example, for information such as the account holder name, tax number).

MAXIMUM_VALUE Determines the limits for DOC and TED payment transactions.

MINIMUM_VALUE

MEDIUM Determines which payment media the system uses to verify that a payment is permitted in Brazil.

PAYMENT_ADVICE Defines the payment advice types that you use for DOC and TED payment transactions.

PAYMENT_NOTE Determines which payment notes type you use for the payment description in specific cases.



Parameter Subgroup Description

TRANSACTION_TYPE Determines the transaction types that you use in the Brazil-specific Create Order for Payment Processing (/FSLBR/PP_CREATE_ORDER) report. The system also uses these transaction types when it verifies the minimum and maximum amounts for DOC and TED transfers

4.7.10 Define Customer-Specific Validations

Use

To meet customer-specific requirements for incoming payment requests (for example, related to the PIS or PASEP number), you can include customer-specific validations. This step shows how you proceed to add customer-specific validations that you use when the system processes incoming payment requests.

Procedure

1. Create a new function module by copying the code in the Define Own Checks (/FSGLO/BTE_00010026) function module, which is assigned to the Define Own Checks (00010026) Business Transaction Event (BTE).You access the function module that is assigned to the BTE in Customizing for Financial Services under

Account Management Technical Settings Business Transaction Events / Event Control (FS-AM) Display Information System (P/S) .

2. Add the code required to carry out your customer-specific validations to the function module that you create.For more information about creating your own function modules, see the documentation for the BTE in the aforementioned Customizing activity.

CautionYou must not change or delete the code in the standard Define Own Checks (/FSGLO/BTE_00010026) function module, which is assigned to the Define Own Checks (00010026) BTE. The code in the standard function module ensures that the system validates data in line with legal requirements in Brazil.

3. Assign your new function module to the Define Own Checks (00010026) BTE in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Technical Settings Business Transaction Events / Event Control (FS-AM) Display Information System (P/S) .


4.8 Configuration for Payment Advice

4.8.1 Introduction

This section describes the standard settings and how to configure the system to process payment advices in line with requirements in Brazil.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to payment advice, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP BrazilAccount Management (FS-AM) Payment Advice .

4.8.2 Define Payment Directive Types

Use

To enable the system to process payment advices in line with the requirements for debit interbank transfers in Brazil, you use country-specific payment directive types.

By default, the system includes the payment directive types that are necessary to meet FEBRABAN’s CNAB 200 standard. The standard delivery comprises payment directive types for DOC C, DOC D, TED C and TED D.

The configuration steps described below show how to proceed to create your payment directive types to meet your specific requirements.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Basic Settings Define Payment Directive Types .

2. For each payment directive type you create, enter the following data:

Table 506:

PayDirType Cash Flow Description of Payment Directive Type

Enter a unique number of your choice, for example, 08000079.

Subtract Enter a description of your choice, for example, DOC C - Credit to Checking Account.





4.8.3 Define Payment Advice Types

Use

To enable the user to select the payment advice types that are necessary to meet the requirements for debit interbank transfers in Brazil, you use country-specific payment advice types. The settings that you make in this step determine what you can choose on the selection screen when you create or edit a payment advice and select the Brazilian Bank Transfer payment advice category.

By default, the system includes the payment directive types that are necessary to meet FEBRABAN’s CNAB 200 standard. The standard delivery comprises payment advice types for DOC C, DOC D, TED C and TED D.

The configuration steps described below show how to proceed to create your payment advice types to meet your specific requirements.

Prerequisites

You have defined the required payment directive types (see Define Payment Directive Types [page 446]).

Note● To enable the system to send the correct posting text to the outgoing payment dispatcher, there must be a

1:1 relationship between the offsetting transaction types, payment advice types, and payment directive types that you use for debit interbank transfers in Brazil.

● For the payment advice types that are delivered as standard in the system, this step is not required.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Define Payment Advice Type .

2. For each payment advice type you create, enter the following data:

Table 507:

PA Type Payt Adv. Ty. Desc. PA Catg. Dr./Cr. PayDirType

Enter a unique number of your choice, for example, 800079.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, DOC C - Credit to Checking Account.

800000 Credit Enter the corresponding payment directive type that you created in Define Payment Directive Types [page 446] (for example, 08000079).



4.8.4 Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules

Use

To enable the system to use the same posting rules for similar transactions, you create a transaction type group, and assign posting rules to the transaction type group. The system then uses the same posting rules for all related transaction types.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Define Transaction Type Groups .

2. Create a transaction type group for credit transactions by entering the following data:

Table 508:

Field Entry

TransTypGr (Transaction Type Group) Enter a technical name of your choice, for example, CNAB200.

Descript. Transaction Type Group Enter a description of your choice, for example, Credits - CNAB Bank Transfer.


4.8.5 Define Main Rule Sets

Use


Prerequisites

You have defined the required transaction type groups (see Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules [page 448]).



Procedure


2. Define rules for the CNAB200 transaction type group, creating one rule for each error type, from C01 through C12, using the same values for each, as listed in the table below:

Table 509:

Field Entry

ErrorType Ty. (Type of Payment Item) C01 (from C01 through C12)


Recipients CNAB200 (see Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules [page 448])




4.8.6 Create Offsetting Transaction Types for Brazilian Bank Transfers

Use

To differentiate standard transaction types from the credit transaction types that are required for payment advice in Brazil, you create new transaction types for use in Brazil. The settings that you make in this step determine the posting text that the system sends to the outgoing payment dispatcher for payment advices that use the Brazilian Bank Transfer category.

NoteTo enable the system to send the correct posting text to the outgoing payment dispatcher, there must be a 1:1 relationship between the offsetting transaction types, payment advice types, and payment directive types that you use for debit interbank transfers in Brazil.

Prerequisites

You have defined the required payment directive types (see Define Payment Directive Types [page 446]) and payment advice types (see Define Payment Advice Types [page 447]).


Procedure


Items .2. For each payment advice type that you use (see Define Payment Advice Types [page 447]), you have to create

a corresponding offsetting transaction type. For each offsetting transaction type, enter the data described in the tables below.

Note○ The sequence of the fields in the tables below is correct in the detail view of the transaction types. We

therefore recommend that you make all settings in the detail view.○ Each subheading in this section represents a group box in the detail view of the transaction types.



Table 510:

Field Entry

Trans. Type Enter a technical name of your choice, for example, BRPA01.

Short Description Enter a short description of your choice, for example, Cred. Checking Acct.

NoteFor your short description, you can enter the same names that you use for the payment advice types (see Define Payment Advice Types [page 447]).

Long Name Enter a long name of your choice, for example, Credit to Checking Account.

NoteFor your long name, you can enter the same names that you use for the payment advice types (see Define Payment Advice Types [page 447]).

Item Type Recipient


Relevant Checks



Table 511:

Field Entry



ValDte/SFP Selected



Prenote Deselected

Account Names Name of Account Holder

Access Limit None






Own Check Selected

Control

Table 512:

Field Entry

CreditMemo Selected





Cus. Initiation Deselected





Field Entry











Use

Table 513:

Field Entry


Online PO Selected

Online FO Selected


Assignment

Table 514:

Field Entry


TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules CNAB200 (see Define Transaction Type Groups for Posting Rules [page 448])





4.8.7 Assign Offsetting Transaction Types

Use

You determine the relationship between transaction types, for example, a DOC C debit transaction, and the associated offsetting transaction types.

Prerequisites

You have defined the required debit transaction types for bank-bank transfers (see Create Debit Transaction Types [page 432] in the Configuration for Payment Processing [page 427] chapter), and offsetting transaction types for payment advice (see Create Offsetting Transaction Types for Brazilian Bank Transfers [page 449]).

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Payment OrderAssign Offsetting Transaction Types to Transaction Types Assign Offsetting Transaction Types (PO

Dialog) .2. Select the transaction type that you created for DOC C debit and choose Assign Offsetting Transaction Type.3. Enter the offsetting transaction types that you created for DOC C debit.4. Save your entries.5. Repeat steps 2-4 for the transaction types that you created for DOC D debit, TED C debit, and TED D debit.

4.8.8 Assign Counterparty External Representation

Use

The settings that you make in this step define the display format of the counterparty for the Brazilian Bank Transfer payment advice category.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Advice Counterparty Assign Counterparty External Representation .



NoteThe settings described in this step are a suggestion for the display format. You can adapt the settings to use any of the counterparty fields that you want to meet your specific requirements.

Table 515:

PA Catg. Language Priority Field Name Separator

800000 Enter the language code of your choice, for example, EN.

1 BANKLAND Leave it blank or enter a separator of your choice, for example, /.


2 BANKKEY Leave it blank or enter a separator of your choice, for example, /.


3 ACCT_NUM_EXT Leave it blank or enter a separator of your choice, for example, /.


4 CN_HOLDER_NAME Leave it blank or enter a separator of your choice, for example, /.


4.8.9 Assign Payment Directive Types with Transaction Types and Medium/Payment Methods

Use

To enable the system to use the Brazilian payment system and process debit interbank transfers based on payment advice, you assign your payment directive types to the offsetting transaction types that you create for payment advice.

Prerequisites

You have defined the required payment directive types (see Define Payment Directive Types [page 446]), transaction types (see Create Offsetting Transaction Types for Brazilian Bank Transfers [page 449]), and payment method (see Define Payment Media and Methods [page 441] in the Configuration for Payment Processing [page 427] chapter).



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Payment OrderCorrespondence Assign a Payment Directive Type with Transaction Types and Medium/PaytMeth .

2. For each payment directive type that you use for DOC C, enter the following data:

Table 516:

PayDir Type TT OrdPart TT Recip. Med. PM

Enter the payment directive type.

Enter the transaction type that you created for DOC C debit bank-bank transfers.

Enter the offsetting transaction type that corresponds to the payment directive type.

Enter the medium of your choice, for example, 1

Enter the payment method of your choice, for example, 81 (see Define Payment Media and Methods [page 441] in the Configura-tion for Payment Processing [page 427] chapter).

3. Save your entries.4. Repeat steps 2-3 for DOC D, TED C, and TED D.


To meet requirements for payment advice in Brazil, the system uses a subgroup of the localization parameters for payment processing (the PAYMENT_ADVICE subgroup). For more information, see Configure Localization Parameters [page 444] in the Configuration for Payment Processing chapter.

4.9 Configuration for Compound Interest Calculation on Loans

4.9.1 Introduction

This section describes how to customize the system to calculate compound interest on loans accounts in Brazil.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to inflation adjustment for Brazil, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP

Brazil > Account Management (FS-AM) Loans Business Transactions for Loans Compound Interest Calculation .



Before you make the settings described here, you must customize the reference rates for each variable interest rate that you use, for example, CDI.

4.9.2 Define Condition Type for Variable Interest

Use

To use compound interest, you must create at least two conditions in your system, one for fixed interest and another for variable interest. In this step, you define the condition type that the system uses to retrieve the compound interest amount in cash flow.

The standard system contains the condition type 501100 (PrCond: (PP) Nom.Int.Rate), which you can use for fixed interest. Follow the steps described in this section to create the condition type for variable interest.

Procedure


2. Choose the standard condition type for fixed interest, 501100 (PrCond: (PP) Nom.Int.Rate) and then Copy As (F6).

3. Enter a number and name for your new condition type for variable interest, for example, 901101 (PrCond: (PP) Var.Int.Rate).

4.9.3 Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type

Use

To process your financial condition types for fixed and variable interest on loans, assign them to the condition group type that you want to use for this purpose.

Prerequisites

You have created your condition type for variable interest as described in Define Condition Type for Variable Interest [page 456].



Procedure


2. Select the condition group type 210 (Loan Settlement) or any group type that you use for loans.3. Open the Condition Type folder to the left.4. Choose New Entries.5. Add the condition type that you have created in the previous step.

NoteIf you use another condition group type, you must also assign the condition type that you use for fixed interest.

NoteIf you use a condition type for fixed interest other than the standard 501100 (PrCond: (PP) Nom.Int.Rate), you must also assign it to the condition group type that you use in this step.

4.9.4 Create Financial Conditions for Settlement

Use

Create a new condition group with condition types 501100 (PrCond: (PP) Nom.Int.Rate) and 901101 (PrCond: (PP) Var.Int.Rate) to set the product attributes for this solution.

Prerequisites

● You have created the condition type for variable interest as described in Define Condition Type for Variable Interest [page 456].

● You have assigned condition types to the condition group type for fixed and variable interest as described in Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type [page 456].

Procedure

1. In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Financial Services Account Management Current SettingsFinancial Conditions Condition Group Edit Conditions Group .


2. Create a new condition group with the following data:

Table 517:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type 210 (Loan Settlement) or your custom condition group type.

Condition Group Enter the unique identifier of your choice, for example, 900212.

Condition Group Description Enter a description of your choice, for example Fin. Cond. Group for PPP Loan.

3. Add condition type 501100 (PrCond: (PP) Nom.Int.Rate) (or any custom condition type that you have created for fixed interest) to this newly created condition group.


Table 518:

Field Entry

Valid From Enter the validity period for your condition, for example, 01.01.2000

Currency BRL

Percentage Rate Enter the percentage rate that you want to apply for fixed interest calculation, for example, 3.6.

Int. Calc. Method Enter the calculation method for fixed interest, for example, 2 (ACT/360)

Interest Calc. Enter the type of interest calculation that you want to apply, for example, X (Exponential)

Paymnt Currency BRL

5. On the Time Periods tab page in the Calculation section, enter the following data:

Table 519:

Field Entry


Repet. Period Enter a number representing the period over which interest must be calculated, for example, 21.

Repet. Unit Enter the unit of time for the period, for example, Days.



Field Entry

RefDatStartdate 1 (At Contract Start)

Work. Day Shift 0 (No Shift)


6. Still on the Time Periods tab page, in the Due Date section, enter the following data:

Table 520:

Field Entry

Frequency Cat. R (Relative)

Ref. Date Catg 220010 (Calculation)


7. Add the condition that you have created for variable interest in Define Condition Type for Variable Interest [page 456] to this newly created condition group.


Table 521:

Field Entry

Valid From Enter the validity period for your condition, for example, 01.01.2000.

Currency BRL

Ref. Int. Rate Enter the reference interest rate that you want to use, for example, CDI.

Int. Calc. Method Enter the calculation method for variable interest, for example, A (ActW/252).

Interest Calc. Enter the type of interest calculation that you want to apply, for example, X (Exponential).

Int. Calendar BR

Paymnt Currency BRL



Table 522:

Field Entry


Repet. Period Enter a number representing the period over which interest must be calculated, for example, 21.


RefDatStartdate 1 (At Contract Start)

Work Day Shift 0 (No Shift)



Table 523:

Field Entry





11. n the Adjustment tab page in the Adjustment Date section, enter the following data:

Table 524:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit D (Days)

RefDatStartdate 2 (At Fixing Start)

Shift Number 1

Shift Unit 1 Day(s)




Field Entry


12. On the Adjustment tab page in the Fixing Date section, enter the following data:

Table 525:

Field Entry


Ref. Date Catg 220030 (Adjustment)




4.9.5 Define Inpayment Agreement

Use

Create a new condition group with condition types 511100 (Rec.: (PP) Nom. Int. Rate) and 511010 (Rec.:(PP)LoanRepaytConCap) to set the product attributes for this solution.

Prerequisites

You have assigned condition types to the condition group type for fixed and variable interest as described in Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type [page 456].

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account Management Current SettingsFinancial Conditions Condition Group Edit Conditions Group .



Table 526:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type 240 (Payment: Loans) or your custom condition group type.

Condition Group Enter the ID of your choice, for example, 4040.

Condition Group Description Enter a description of your choice, for example, Compound Interest Paymt.

3. Add condition type 511100 (Rec.: (PP) Nom. Int. Rate) (or any custom condition type that you have created for fixed interest) to this newly created condition group.


Table 527:

Field Entry


Currency Amt BRL

Determ.Cat. 0040 (Installment Calculation for Interest Adjustment - Annuity Repayment)


Table 528:

Field Entry


Repet. Period Enter a number representing the period over which interest must be repaid, for example, 21.





6. Still on the Time Periods tab page, in the Due Date section, enter the following data



Table 529:

Field Entry




7. Add condition type 511010 (Rec.:(PP)LoanRepaytConCap) (or any custom condition type that you have created for loan repayment) to this newly created condition group.


Table 530:

Field Entry


Currency BRL

Clearing Amt Settlement on Due Date

Determ.Cat. 0020 (Installment Repayment)


Table 531:

Field Entry






Calendar for Working Day Shif BR


Table 532:

Field Entry



Field Entry




11. On the Settlement tab page in the Clearing section, enter the following data:

Table 533:

Field Entry








4.9.6 Create Loan Account Product and Configure Attributes

Use

To enable the calculation of compound interest in line with the requirements for Brazil, create your loan account product using the template provided and configure the product attributes listed in this section.

Prerequisites

You have created the condition groups for variable and fixed interest as described in Create Financial Conditions for Settlement [page 457].



Procedure

1. Create your own loans account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .


Table 534:

Field Entry

New Product Enter a technical name for your product, for example, CI_LOAN_01.

Template Prod. _LO_MORG

Version Latest version


choose Enter.5. In the product attributes structure, configure the product attributes in the table below:

Table 535:


Currency Used Attributes Basic Data

Administration Currency

BRL



1 (Settlement)



001 (Standard Settlement)



210 (Loan Settlement)



Enter the custom condition group that you created in Create Financial Conditions for Settlement [page 457].

Proposed Value Used Attributes Country-Specific

Attributes Brazil Compound

Interest Condition Types for

Compound Interest

Enter the condition type that you use for fixed interest, for example, 501100 (PrCond: (PP) Nom.Int.Rate).



Enter the condition type that you use for variable interest, for example, 901101 (PrCond: (PP) Var.Int.Rate).


4.10 Configuration for Inflation Adjustment of Loan Installments

4.10.1 Introduction

This section describes how to customize the system to calculate inflation adjustments of loan installments in line with the requirements in Brazil.

Before you make the settings described here, you must customize the reference rates for each variable interest rate that you use, for example, IPCA and TJLP.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to inflation adjustment for Brazil, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP

Brazil Account Management (FS-AM) Loans Business Transactions for Loans Calculation of Inflation Adjustments .

4.10.2 Define Condition Types for Inflation Adjustment

Use

To enable inflation adjustment, you must create at least two conditions in your system, one for fixed interest and another for variable interest. In this step, you define the condition type that the system uses to retrieve the compound interest amount in cash flow.

Procedure





2. Choose the standard condition type for debit interest, Debit Interest (105100) and then choose Copy As (F6).3. Enter the following data to create a new condition type for inflation:

NoteFor the fields that are not listed in the table below, keep the current values.

Table 536:

Field Entry

Condit. Type Enter a number for your condition type, for example, 105107.

Cond. Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Infl. Adj. for Deb. Int.

Update Category Interest: To be Requested (1010)

Calc. Basis Interest Calculation Capital - Loan (30000014)

4. Choose Enter.5. Choose Copy All.6. With the new condition type selected, under Dialog Structure, choose Date Category.7. Enter the following data:

Table 537:

Field Entry

Date Cat 220010

Date Cat 220030

Date Cat 220040

Date Cat 225010

8. Choose the Credit Interest (105110) standard condition type and then choose Copy As (F6).9. Enter the following data to create a new condition type for deflation:

NoteFor the fields that are not listed in the table above, keep the current values.

Table 538:

Field Entry

Condit. Type Enter a number for your condition type, for example, 105111.


Field Entry

Cond. Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Infl. Adj. for Cred. Int.

Update Category Interest: To be Requested (1010)

Calc. Basis Interest Calculation Capital - Loan (30000014)

10. Choose Enter.11. Choose Copy All.12. With the new condition type selected, under Dialog Structure, choose Date Category.13. Enter the following data:

Table 539:

Field Entry

Date Cat 220010

Date Cat 220030

Date Cat 220040

Date Cat 225010


4.10.3 Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type

Use

To process your financial condition types for inflation adjustment of credit and debit interest on loans, you assign them to the condition group type that represents a loan settlement.

Prerequisites

You have created your condition types for inflation adjustment of credit and debit interest as described in Define Condition Types for Inflation Adjustment [page 466].



Procedure


2. Select the condition group type 210 (Loan Settlement) or any group type that you use for loans.3. Choose Condition Type and create new entries to add the condition types that you have created in Define

Condition Types for Inflation Adjustment [page 466].

4.10.4 Create Financial Conditions for Settlement

Use

Create a new condition group with condition types PrCond: (PP) Nom.Int.Rate (501100), Interest Adj. Deb. Int. (105107) and Interest Adj. Cred. Int. (105111).

By following the settings below, you create a condition group for a loan account with two interest rates, one comprising a fixed annual interest rate of 5% and another consisting of a variable index, namely IGPM. Adjust the settings according to your needs.

Prerequisites

● You have created the condition types for inflation adjustment of credit and debit interest as described in Define Condition Types for Inflation Adjustment [page 466].

● You have assigned the condition types to the condition group type for loan settlement as described in Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type [page 468].

Procedure

1. In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Financial Services Account Management Current SettingsFinancial Conditions Condition Group Edit Condition Group .


Table 540:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type 210 Loan Settlement condition type or your custom condition group type.

Condition Group Enter the ID of your choice, for example, 9402.


Field Entry

Condition Group Description Enter a description of your choice, for example Inflation Adjustment IGPM.

3. Add condition type PrCond: (PP) Nom.Int.Rate (501100) to this condition group.4. On the Calculation tab page, enter the following data:

Table 541:

Field Entry

Valid From 01.01.2000

Currency BRL

Percentage Rate 5

Int. Calc. Method 360/360

Interest Calc. Exponential

Paymnt Currency BRL

5. On the Time Periods tab page in the Calculation group box, enter the following data:

Table 542:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 3

Repet. Unit Months

Key Date 11



6. On the Time Periods tab page, in the Due Date group box, enter the following data:

Table 543:

Field Entry


Ref. Date Catg Calculation (220010)



Field Entry


7. Add the condition type Interest Adj. Deb. Int. (105107) to this condition group.8. On the Calculation tab page, enter the following data:

Table 544:

Field Entry


Currency BRL

Ref. Int. Rate Enter your reference interest rate, for example, IGPM.



Paymnt Currency BRL


Table 545:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 3

Repet. Unit Months

Key Date 11





Table 546:

Field Entry


Ref. Date Catg Calculation(220010)


Field Entry



11. On the Adjustment tab page in the Adjustment Date group box, enter the following data:

Table 547:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Months




12. On the Adjustment tab page, in the Fixing Date group box, enter the following data:

Table 548:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Months


Work Day Shift No Shift


13. Add condition type Interest Adj. Cred. Int. (105111) to this condition group.14. On the Calculation tab page, enter the following data:

Table 549:

Field Entry


Currency BRL



Field Entry

Ref. Int. Rate Enter your reference interest rate, for example, IGPM.



Paymnt Currency BRL

15. Choose the Formula button and then select the LB01 (V1 * V2) formula.16. In the Interest Formula group, enter the following data:

Table 550:

VarN Const. Value Var. Value

V1 1,0000000000-

V2 0,0000000000 Enter your reference interest rate, for example, IGPM.


Table 551:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 3

Repet. Unit Months

Key Date 11





Table 552:

Field Entry





Field Entry


19. On the Adjustment tab page in the Adjustment Date group box, enter the following data:

Table 553:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Months




20.On the Adjustment tab page, in the Fixing Date group box, enter the following data:

Table 554:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 1

Repet. Unit Months





4.10.5 Define Inpayment Agreement

Use

Create a new condition group with the condition types Rec.: (PP) Nom. Int. Rate (511100) and Rec.:(PP)LoanRepaytConCap (511010) to set the product attributes for this solution.



Prerequisites

● You have created the condition types for inflation adjustment of credit and debit interest as described in Define Condition Types for Inflation Adjustment [page 466].

● You have assigned the condition types to the condition group type for loan settlement as described in Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type [page 468].

Procedure

1. In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Financial Services Account Management Current SettingsFinancial Conditions Condition Group Edit Condition Group .


Table 555:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type 240 Payment: Loans or your custom condition group type.

Condition Group Enter the ID for the condition group that you created in the previous section, for example, 9402.

Condition Group Description Enter a description of your choice, for example, Inflation Adjustment Paymnt.

3. Add condition type Rec.: (PP) Nom. Int. Rate (511100) to this condition group.4. On the Calculation tab page, enter the following data:

Table 556:

Field Entry


Currency Amt BRL

Determ.Cat. Installment Calculation for Interest Adjustment - Annuity Repayment (0040)


Table 557:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 3


Field Entry

Repet. Unit Months





Table 558:

Field Entry




7. Add condition type Rec.:(PP)LoanRepaytConCap (511010) to this condition group.8. On the Calculation tab page, enter the following data:

Table 559:

Field Entry


Currency BRL

Clearing Amt Settlement on Due Date

Determ.Cat. 0020 ( /Installment Repayment)

Receivable Enter your receivable amount, for example, 2,500.00.


Table 560:

Field Entry


Repet. Period 3

Repet. Unit Months




Field Entry




Table 561:

Field Entry



Work Day No Shift

Shift Calendar for Working Day Shift BR


4.10.6 Create Loan Account Product and Configure Attributes

Use

To enable the calculation of inflation adjustment in line with the requirements for Brazil, create your loan account product using the template provided and configure the product attributes listed in this section.

Prerequisites

You have created the condition group for inflation adjustment as described in Create Financial Conditions for Settlement [page 469] and Define Inpayment Agreement [page 474].

Procedure

1. Create your own loans account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .



Table 562:

Field Entry

New Product Enter a technical name for your product, for example, IA_IGPM_02.

Template _LO_MORG

Prod. Version Latest version

3. Choose Enter.4. In the product attribute structure, configure the product attributes described in the table below:

Table 563:


Currency Used Attributes Basic Data

Administration Currency

BRL



Settlement



Standard Settlement (001)



210 (Loan Settlement)



Enter the custom condition group that you created in Create Financial Conditions for Settlement [page 469].

Accumulation Type for Inflation Adjustment


Attributes Brazil Inflation

Adjustment

Negative Accumulation Accepted

Condition Type for Inflation Adjustment Used Attributes Country-Specific


Adjustment

501100

Condition Type for Inflation Used Attributes Country-Specific


Adjustment

Enter the condition type that you created for inflation, for example, Infl. Adj. for Deb. Int. (105107).




Condition Type for Deflation Used Attributes Country-Specific


Adjustment

Enter the condition type that you created for deflation, for example, Infl. Adj. for Cred. Int. (105111).



4.11.1 Introduction

This section describes how to configure the system to process interest on arrears (IoA) in line with requirements in Brazil.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to IoA processing, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP Brazil Account Management (FS-AM) Loans Business Transactions for Loans Interest on Arrears (Brazil) .

4.11.2 Settings Delivered As Standard for IoA

Calculation Bases

Calculation Bases for Interest on Arrears Calculation

For the calculation of interest on arrears (IoA), the standard delivery for Brazil contains the following calculation basis templates:

● LIOA_RC: Interest on Arrears Based on Periodic Calculation● LIOA_PC: Interest on Arrears Based on Calculation on Payment Date● LIOA_RC_AA: Interest on Arrears Based on Periodic Calculation + IOA on IOA● LIOA_PC_AA: Interest on Arrears Based on Calculation on Payment Date + IOA on IOA


Calculation Bases for Late Payment Penalty Calculation

For the calculation of late payment penalty, the standard delivery for Brazil contains the following calculation basis template:

● LIOA_PNLTY: Late Payment Penalty



If you want to create your own calculation base, you can use the template above for reference.

Interest on Arrears Types

IoA Types for Interest on Arrears Calculation

For the calculation of IoA, the standard delivery for Brazil contains the following IoA types:


IoA Types for Late Payment Penalty Calculation

For the calculation of late payment penalty, the standard delivery for Brazil contains the following IoA types:

● PPCI: Late Payment Penalty Paym Date

4.11.3 Configuration for Calculation Bases


For the calculation of interest on arrears (IoA), you can use the calculation basis templates delivered for Brazil (see Settings Delivered As Standard for IoA [page 479]). However, if you want to create your own calculation bases, you must make the settings described below.

4.11.3.2 Create Interest on Arrears Type

Use

You define interest on arrears (IoA) types and associate them with a calculation class as described below. Note that the system includes the following two template IoA types:


You can use these templates to create your own IoA types.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Interest on Arrears Define IoA Types .




Table 564:

Field Entry

IoA Type Enter a name for your interest on arrears type, for example, Z_IOA.

IoA Type Description Enter a description for your IoA type.

Interest on Arrears Calculation Class Enter one of the standard calculation classes below or your own custom calculation class:

○ /FSGLO/CL_IOA_CALCULATORCalculator for Interest on Arrears Based on Periodic Calculation

○ /FSGLO/CL_IOA_PAY_CALCULATORCalculator for Interest on Arrears Based on Payment Date


4.11.3.3 Assign Turnover Classes to IoA Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Interest on Arrears Assign Turnover Classes to IoA Type .


Table 565:

Field Entry

IoA Type Enter the ID of the IoA type that you created in the Define IoA Types Customizing activity (for example, Z_IOA).

Turn.Class Enter any turnover class that corresponds to the installment items whose amounts are used as the basis for IoA calculation, for example, interest (L013), deferral (L223) and capital (L023).

NoteDo not use the turnover class L053 (Insurance Int: Owed) for exponential calculation method. Instead, use the exponential calculation basis formula on the condition type, such as LIOA_PC_AA or LIOA_RC_AA).



4.11.3.4 Create Calculation Basis for IoA Type

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Foundation Cash flow Calculator Define Customer Calculation Bases and Display SAP Calculation Bases .


Table 566:

Field Entry

Calculation Basis Enter a name for your calculation basis (for example, Z_IOA).

Cal. Basis Description Enter any description as required.

3. On the Formula Edit screen, choose the IOA (Dispatch calculation basis for IoA) function.Your formula appears as IOA ( , ).

4. Place your cursor in the first field of the formula and choose the Constant pushbutton.5. Enter the IoA type that you created in the Define IoA Types Customizing activity (see Create Interest on

Arrears Type [page 480].6. Place your cursor in the second field of the formula and choose the String pushbutton.7. If you want to include posted IoA items in the calculation basis (that is, you want to charge IoA on IoA), enter X

in this field. Otherwise, leave this field blank.For example, if you used the IoA type Z_IOA, your formula can appear either as IOA( ‘Z_IOA’, ‘X’) or IOA(‘Z_IOA’, ‘’).


4.11.4 Create Condition Types for Interest on Arrears

Use

You define two condition types for interest on arrears (IoA) processing:

● Condition type for IoA settlement● Condition type for IoA repayment


Note● You must not maintain any date category for the pricing condition types for IoA. The IoA item is related to a

previous period, the period that is overdue.● You must maintain a date category for the repayment condition types for IoA.



Procedure

Create Condition Type for IoA Settlement



Table 567:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Interest on arrears for Brazil.




Calc. Category 1010

Update Category GIA0


○ LIOA_RC○ LIOA_PC○ LIOA_RC_AA○ LIOA_PC_AA










Field Entry




Number Calendar 3


















Table 568:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105020




Field Entry



Table 569:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1





Create Condition Type for IoA Repayment



Table 570:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, IOA Repayment for Brazil.




Calc. Category 1555

Update Category GIA1


Field Entry


○ LIOA_RC○ LIOA_PC○ LIOA_RC_AA○ LIOA_PC_AA














Exch.rate type M










Field Entry









Table 571:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 160000



5. Choose Enter.6. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Date Category node and enter the following data:

Table 572:

Field Entry



Table 573:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1



Field Entry





Use

To process financial condition types, you assign all condition types that are relevant for a given financial product to a condition group type. To execute the settlement and repayment conditions for loans, the standard system contains the condition groups 210 and 240, respectively. To meet your customer-specific requirements, you can assign the condition types specific to Brazil to these standard condition groups. Alternatively, you can use your own custom condition groups for loans settlement and loans repayment.

Prerequisites

You have created condition types for interest on arrears (IoA) settlement and IoA repayment. For more information, see Create Condition Types for Interest on Arrears [page 482].

Procedure


2. Select the condition group type 210 - Loan Settlement (or your custom condition group), double-click Condition Type in the Dialog Structure, and add the condition types that you created for IoA settlement.





4.11.6 Configuration for Late Payment Penalty


In Brazil, in addition to interest on arrears (IoA), banks charge an additional fee, called late payment penalty, for loan installments that are overdue.

This section describes how to configure the system to process late payment penalty in line with requirements in Brazil.

4.11.6.2 Create Condition Types for Late Payment Penalty

Use

You define two condition types for late payment penalty processing:

● Condition type for late payment penalty settlement● Condition type for late payment penalty repayment


NoteYou must not maintain any date category for the condition types of any interest on arrears (IoA) type. IoA and late payment penalty do not have a fixed calculation period or an expected payment date; interest on arrears is only charged at the moment of repayment. The IoA item is related to a previous period, the period that is overdue.

Procedure

Create Condition Type for Late Payment Penalty Settlement



Table 574:

Field Entry

Condit. Type Enter a code for your condition type.

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Late Payment Penalty Brazil.


Field Entry




Calc. Category 1010


Calc. Basis LIOA_PNLTY


PstingType PAdj 10

PstgType NgAdj. 13









Number Calendar 3










Field Entry











Table 575:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 105020




Table 576:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1






Create Condition Type for Late Payment Penalty Repayment



Table 577:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Late Payment Penalty Repayment.




Calc. Category 1555


















Field Entry

Exch.rate type M
















Table 578:

Field Entry

Amt Categ. 160000


Capitaliz. Selected



5. Choose Enter.


6. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Date Category node and enter the following data:

Table 579:

Field Entry



Table 580:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1





4.11.6.3 Assign Condition Types to Condition Group Types

Use

To process financial condition types, you assign all condition types that are relevant for a given financial product to a condition group type. To execute the settlement and repayment conditions for loans, the standard system contains the condition groups 210 and 240, respectively. To meet your customer-specific requirements, you can assign the condition types specific to Brazil to these standard condition groups. Alternatively, you can use your own custom condition groups for loans settlement and loans repayment.

Prerequisites

You have created condition types for late payment penalty settlement and late payment penalty repayment. For more information, see Create Condition Types for Late Payment Penalty [page 489].



Procedure


2. Select the condition group type 210 - Loan Settlement (or your custom condition group), double-click Condition Type in the Dialog Structure, and add the condition types that you created for late payment penalty settlement.

3. Select the condition group type 240 - Payment: Loans (or your custom condition group), double-click Condition Type in the Dialog Structure, and add the condition types that you created for late payment penalty repayment.


4.11.6.4 Create Condition Group and Condition for Late Payment Penalty

Use

To process late payment penalty settlement, you define a condition group and the corresponding condition.

NoteDo not assign the condition type for late payment penalty repayment to your condition group for inpayment agreement. If you do that, your condition for late payment penalty repayment will be valid for the whole loan period. The financial condition for late payment penalty repayment has to be created only on the day of the repayment, and it is valid only for that specific day. This financial condition is automatically created when a repayment occurs in an overdue loan account.

Prerequisites

● You have created condition types for late payment penalty settlement. For more information, see Create Condition Types for Late Payment Penalty [page 489]

● You have assigned your condition types for late payment penalty settlement to a condition group type. For more information, see Assign Condition Types to Condition Group Types [page 494].

Procedure

Create Condition Group for Late Payment Penalty Settlement




Table 581:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Select the condition group type that you use for late payment penalty settlement.



4. Choose Enter.5. Create the condition as described below.

Create Condition for IoA Settlement

1. On the Condition Group Edit screen (see above), choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition type you created for late payment penalty settlement.


Table 582:

Field Entry

Currency BRL

Valid From Enter the start date of the validity period.


Table 583:

Field Entry



Percentage Rate Debit interest rate



Use

To enable the system to process interest on arrears (IoA) in line with the requirements for Brazil, configure the product attributes for your loan account product as described in this section.



Prerequisites

● You have created a loan account product. For more information, see Create Loan Product [page 12].● You have defined a condition group for interest on arrears.● You have defined turnover classes. For more information, see Define Turnover Classes [page 24].● You have created clearing categories for IoA in your Open Item Management System.

Procedure


2. In the product attributes structure, configure the product attributes as described below:

○ In Used Attributes Financial Conditions Condition Groups Condition Group , enter the condition groups you created for IoA.

○ Activate the product attribute Generate Number of Installments under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Interest on Arrears .

○ Activate the product attribute Calculate Interest on Arrears under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Interest on Arrears .

○ In Used Attributes General Settlement Attributes Relevant to Clearing Logical Turnover Class , assign the following logical turnover classes to real turnover classes:

Table 584:


GIA0 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA settlement.

GIA1 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA billing.

GIA2 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA repayment.

GB10 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA settlement.

GB11 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA billing

GB12 Enter the real turnover class created for IoA repayment.



4.11.8 Configuration for Disbursement with IoA for Brazil


This section describes the settings to configure the system to process interest on arrears on disbursement, in line with the requirements for Brazil.

4.11.8.2 Assign Transaction Types for OIM Payment Distribution Types

Prerequisites

To configure the relation between payment distribution usage category, payment distribution type, and open item management transaction type, you make the settings described in this section.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Assign Trans. Types for OIM System to Paymnt. Distr. Types .


Table 585:


008 GB11 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003

008 GB21 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003

008 GIA1 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003

008 GTX1 Enter the same PD Type Desc. config-ured for this Trsn Type on Usage Cat. 003




4.12 Configuration for Revenue Recognition for Performing Loans

4.12.1 Introduction

This section describes how to customize the system to calculate revenue recognition for performing loans in line with Brazil-specific requirements.

4.12.2 Maintain Nonbalance-Balance-Changing Transaction Types

Use

To support the posting of revenue amounts to be recognized, two non-balance changing transaction types are required, one for credit postings and another for debit postings.

NoteThe posting of revenue recognition amounts is not supported by the localization.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management > Item Management > Basic Functions > Maintain Non-Balance-Changing Transaction Types.


Table 586:

Non-Bal.ChngTransTyp Desc.Trans. Typ CreditMemo

Enter a number of your choice, for example, 999999.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Revenues to be Recognized - Credit.

Selected

Enter a number of your choice, for example, 999998.

Enter a description of your choice, for example, Revenues to be Recognized - Debit.

Deselected



4.12.3 Assign Nonbalance-Changing Posting Categories to Nonbalance-Changing Transaction Types

Prerequisites

You have created your nonbalance-changing transaction types as described in Maintain Nonbalance-Balance-Changing Transaction Types [page 499].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsAssign Non-Bal-Changing Posting Categories to Non-Bal-Changing Trans.Types .


Table 587:

Non-Bal. Chg PostCat Non-Bal.ChngTransTyp

64 Enter the nonbalance-changing transaction type that you have created for credit in Maintain Nonbalance-Balance-Changing Transaction Types [page 499].

65 Enter the nonbalance-changing transaction type that you have created for debit in Maintain Nonbalance-Balance-Changing Transaction Types [page 499].



Prerequisites

● You have created your credit interest condition types for revenue recognition.● You have created your nonbalance-changing transaction types as described in Maintain Nonbalance-Balance-

Changing Transaction Types [page 499].

Procedure




2. Choose the localization country Brazil and the parameter group REVENUES_2B_RECOGNIZED.3. Enter the following data:

Table 588:

Parameter Subgroup Parameter Name Entry

CONDITION_TYPE INTEREST_CONDTYPE Enter the interest condition types that you use for revenue recognition.

TRANSACTION_TYPE CREDIT_TTYPE Enter the nonbalance-changing transaction type that you have created for credit in Maintain Nonbalance-Balance-Changing Transaction Types [page 499].

TRANSACTION_TYPE DEBIT_TTYPE Enter the nonbalance-changing transaction type that you have created for debit in Maintain Nonbalance-Balance-Changing Transaction Types [page 499].


4.13 Configuration for Installment Prepayment

4.13.1 Introduction

This section describes how to configure the system to process installment prepayment orders in line with requirements in Brazil.

For information about the generic configuration for installment prepayment orders, see Configuration for Installment Prepayment [page 86].

4.13.2 Settings Delivered As Standard for Installment Prepayment

Validation Object

The standard delivery for Brazil contains the validation object VO_INP_PRPAYMT_DATE_VAL, which is used in the extensible object (XO) framework (transaction XO80).

This object validates the installment prepayment order value date against the order prepayment date. This object ensures that the prepayment date is equal to or falls later than the value date.



Use

If the revenue recognition feature is activated in your system, in the localization parameter for revenue recognition, you must specify the condition type that is used for posting the interest when an installment prepayment order is executed.

Prerequisites

You have defined the condition types as described in Define Condition Types for Installment Prepayment [page 89].

Procedure



Table 589:

Column Value

Localization BR Brazil

Parameter Group REVENUES_2B_RECOGNIZED


Parameter Name INTEREST_CONDTYPE

3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Customer Parameter Values node.4. Enter the condition type you defined for the interest in the Define Condition Types for Installment Prepayment




5 Configuration Information for Canada and the United States

5.1 Introduction

This section describes the configuration information that is necessary to meet legal requirements and conduct business according to common practices in Canada and the United States.

The configuration information for Canada and the United States comprises the following topics:

● Lines of credit● Early withdrawal penalty on time deposits

5.2 Configuration for Lines of Credit

5.2.1 Introduction

This section describes the standard settings and how to configure the system to process lines of credit in line with requirements in Canada and the United States.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to lines of credit, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP Canada and the United States Account Management (FS-AM) Lines of Credit .

5.2.2 Configuration Steps in Customizing


This section describes how to configure the system to deal with the specific requirements of LoC in Canada and the United States.

NoteBefore executing these configuration steps, consider creating or reviewing the required master data, as described in Master Data Settings [page 545].

Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0Configuration Information for Canada and the United States C U S T O M E R 503


5.2.2.2 Create Line of Credit Account Product

Use

To use the LoC products that you create based on the product template delivered by SAP for Canada and the United States (_ACC_MAX), you make the settings described below.

Prerequisites

You have made the settings described in Master Data Settings [page 545].

Procedure

1. Create your own LoC account product in Customizing for Financial Services under Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .


Table 590:

Field Entry


Template Product _ACC_MAX

Product Version Enter a version number for your product, for example, 0001.


choose Enter.

5. Under Used Attributes Extended Settlement , enter the following data:

Table 591:

Product Attribute Description

Track Identification Number Enter the settlement track that you use for capital calculation (see Define Settlement Type [page 508]) and customize it not to post the corresponding results.


Configuration Information for Canada and the United States

6. Under Used Attributes Financial Conditions Condition Groups , enter the following data:

Table 592:


Condition Group Enter the IDs that you want to use for the following condition groups:

○ Settlement (for interest calculation)○ Settlement (for capital calculation)○ Transaction

7. Under Used Attributes Clearing Account , enter the following data:

Table 593:


Bank Country Enter your bank country.

Bank Key Enter your bank key.

Account Number Display Field

Contract Currency Leave this attribute disabled.

Differentiation Characteristic Leave this attribute disabled.

IBAN Display Field

Same Account Holder Leave this attribute disabled.

Propose Loan Account as Clearing Account Selected

8. Under Used Attributes Posting Data Payment Item Control , enter the following data:

Table 594:


Notify Payment Distribution Yes

9. Under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Billing Engine , enter the following data:

Table 595:


Billing Type Enter the billing type that you use, for example, LoC. See Define Billing Types [page 527].



Lead Days Enter the number of lead days for the account billing runs.

Time Periods Leave this field grouping disabled. For LoC account billing, the system uses the settlement time periods.

10. Under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Lines of Credit , enter the following data:

Table 596:


Installment Composition In this grouping of attributes, specify the financial conditions that you want to include in billing runs. You can enter any combination of capital, interest, and fees.

Positive Balance Specify whether you want to allow positive balance for the LoC accounts based on this product.

Validity Period In this grouping of attributes, specify the time period during which the customer can withdraw funds from the LoC account.

11. Under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Lines of Credit Limits , enter the following data:

Table 597:


Approved Limit In this grouping of attributes, specify the amount and currency of the approved fund limit for the product.

LoC Fund Access In this grouping of attributes, specify the rules for fund access.



5.2.2.3 Define Product Change Reasons

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Account OrderProduct Change (Account) Define Product Change Reasons .



2. Create a new entry and enter the following data:

Table 598:

Field Entry

Prod.ChgID 4

Description Enter a description of your choice, for example, Change Approval for LoC.


5.2.2.4 Define Customer Calculation Bases

Use

To enable the charge of a stand-by fee over the unused approved limit of your LoC accounts, you assign a localization-specific function to your calculation basis for fees.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Foundation Cash Flow Calculator Define Customer Calculation Bases and Display SAP Calculation Bases .

2. Enter a name and a description for your calculation basis.3. Add the function UNUSED_APPROVED_LIMIT( ) to your formula.4. Save your entries.

5.2.2.5 Settlement Track for Capital Calculation


To control the calculation of capital in your LoC accounts without posting the corresponding results, you create a dedicated settlement track and use it with the standard extented settlement function. For that, you specify a settlement type and track. Follow the steps described below to create your settlement track for capital calculation.


5.2.2.5.2 Define Settlement Type

Use

To categorize the settlement track for capital, you create a settlement type.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management SettlementDefine Settlement Type .


Table 599:

Field Entry

Sett. Type Enter an ID for your settlement type, for example, 030.

Settlement Type Enter a description for your settlement type, for example, LOC CAPITAL.

Session Definitive (1)

Capitalize Leave field blank.


5.2.2.5.3 Define Settlement Track

Use

To enable capital calculation in extended settlement, you need to define a new settlement track.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management SettlementExtended Settlement Define Settlement Track




Table 600:

Field Entry

Track ID Enter an ID for your settlement track, for example, 030.

Name of Track Enter a description for your settlement track, for example, LOC Capital.

CYT-Relev. Leave field blank.


5.2.2.5.4 Assign Settlement Type to Settlement Track

Use

After creating your settlement type and track, you assign them together.

Prerequisites

You have created your settlement type and track for LoC capital calculation as described in Define Settlement Type [page 508] and Define Settlement Track [page 508].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management SettlementExtended Settlement Assign Settlement Type to Settlement Track .Enter the following data:

Table 601:

Field Entry

Sett. Type Enter the ID for the settlement type that you created in Define Settlement Type [page 508]

Track ID Enter the ID for the settlement track that you created in Define Settlement Track [page 508]



5.2.2.6 Configure Posting Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Financial Services Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Maintain Posting Types .


Table 602:

PT Credit Memo Proc Desc. Posting Type

Enter a unique identifier for your stand-by fee posting type, for example, SF.

Leave field blank. 0090 Enter a description of your choice, for example, Stand-By Fee Charge.

Enter a unique identifier for your one-time fee posting type, for example, TM.

Leave field blank. 0090 Enter a description of your choice, for example, One-Time Fee Charge.


5.2.2.7 Condition Types and Condition Group Types for Capital Repayment


To specify rates or amounts for monthly capital repayment on LoC accounts, you create a specific pair of condition types and a condition group type as described below.

NoteFor the rates for monthly debit interest calculation, you can use the condition that is provided in the standard system.

5.2.2.7.2 Create Condition Type for LoC Capital Repayment (Fixed Amount)





Table 603:

Field Entry

Condit. Type Enter an ID for your condition type, for example, 999999.

Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, LoC Capital Amount.




Calc. Category 2010


Calc. Basis

Posting Type 26

PstingType PAdj

PstgType NgAdj.

ProcResCat

Proc. Res.Positive

ProcResultCategNeg

Process Result Type

Determ. Time StdCon. End of Condition Group Change


Ref. Cond. Type


Number Calendar


Exch.rate type M



Field Entry

Waiver Method




Bal. Time Type



Overlap






3. Choose Enter.4. Open the Amount Category folder and enter the following data:

Table 604:

Field Entry Perc. Fee

Amt Categ. 115060 No Percentage Charge Leave all checkboxes deselected

5. Choose Enter.6. Open the Differentiation Category folder and enter the following data:

Table 605:

Different. Category 1 CO Dimension

075 = Value Request

7. Choose Enter.



8. Open the Waiver folder and enter the following data:

Table 606:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1

ProcResCat

Proc. Res.Positive

ProcResultCategNeg


5.2.2.7.3 Create Condition Type for LoC Capital Repayment (Rate)

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type .Enter the following data:

Table 607:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, LoC Capital Rate.




Calc. Categoty 1010


Calc. Basis 20000003


Field Entry

Posting Type 26

PstingType PAdj

PstgType NgAdj

ProcResCat

Proc. Res.Positive

ProcResultCategNeg

Process Result Type



Ref. Cond. Type


Number Calendar


Exch.rate type M


Waiver Method




Bal. Time Type



Overlap





Field Entry





Table 608:



4. Choose Enter.5. Open the Waiver folder and enter the following data:

Table 609:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1

ProcResCat

Proc. Res.Positive

ProcResultCategNeg


5.2.2.7.4 Create Condition Group Type for LoC Capital Repayment


2. Choose the condition group type 1000 (Settlement: LoC).3. Under Dialog Structure, open Condition Type.4. Create a new entry and select the condition types created in Create Condition Type for LoC Capital Repayment

(Fixed Amount) [page 510] and Create Condition Type for LoC Capital Repayment (Rate) [page 513].

Save your entries.


5.2.2.8 Condition Types for Fees

5.2.2.8.1 Create Condition Type for LoC Maintenance Fee (Fixed Amount)



Table 610:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Acct Maintenance Charge.




Calc. Category 2010


Calc. Basis

Posting Type 26

PstingType PAdj

PstgType NgAdj.

ProcResCat

Proc. Res.Positive

ProcResultCategNeg

Process Result Type

Determ. Time StdCon. End of Condition Group Change


Ref. Cond. Type 0



Field Entry


Number Calendar 0


Exch.rate type M


Waiver Method




Bal. Time Type 0



Overlap 0







Table 611:



5. Choose Enter.


6. Open the Differentiation Category folder and enter the following data:

Table 612:

Different. Category 1 CO Dimension

075 = Value Request

7. Choose Enter.8. Open the Waiver folder and enter the following data:

Table 613:

Field Entry

Posting Type W1

PstgType NgAdj. W2

PstingType PAdj. W1

ProcResCat

Proc. Res.Positive

ProcResultCategNeg


5.2.2.8.2 Create Condition Type for LoC Stand-By Fee (Rate)



Table 614:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Stand By Fee [%].






Field Entry

Calc. Categoty 1010


Calc. Basis Enter the calculation basis that you created in Define Customer Calculation Bases [page 507].

Posting Type Enter the posting type that you created in Configure Posting Types [page 510].

PstingType PAdj

PstgType NgAdj.

ProcResCat 00004400





Ref. Cond. Type


Number Calendar 0


Exch.rate type M


Waiver Method




Bal. Time Type




Field Entry

Overlap 0







Table 615:


Amt Categ. 105020 No Percentage Charge

Leave all checkboxes deselected


5.2.2.8.3 Create Condition Type for LoC One-Time Fee (LoC Approval)

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product ManagementFinancial Conditions Define Condition Type .


Table 616:

Field Entry


Condition Type Name Enter a name for your condition type, for example, 1-Time Fee [LoC Appr].






Field Entry

Calc. Categoty 2060


Calc. Basis

Posting Type Enter the posting type that you created in Configure Posting Types [page 510].

PstingType PAdj

PstgType NgAdj.

ProcResCat

Proc. Res.Positive

ProcResultCategNeg

Process Result Type



Ref. Cond. Type


Number Calendar


Exch.rate type M


Waiver Method




Bal. Time Type



Field Entry


Overlap


One-Time Cond. Selected





Table 617:


Amt Categ. 115010 No Percentage Charge

Leave all checkboxes deselected.

5. Choose Enter.6. Open the Differentiation Category folder and enter the following data:

Table 618:

Different. Category CO Dimension

006 = Value Request

086 = Value Request


5.2.2.9 Turnover Classes


To control capital and interest debit, you create two turnover classes.



5.2.2.9.2 Define Turnover Classes


2. Create new turnover classes by entering the following data:○ Turnover class for capital:

Table 619:

Field Entry

Turn.Class LOCC

Description Turnover Class LoC - Capital: Owed

Agg Selected

Assignment Assignment via Product Configurator

Update Update by Application or Posting Process

IA Deselected

3. Turnover class for interest:

Table 620:

Field Entry

Turn.Class LOCI

Description Turnover Class LoC - Int: Owed

Agg Selected



IA Deselected

4. Turnover class for fee:

Table 621:

Field Entry

Turn.Class LOCF

Description Turnover Class LoC - Fee: Owed

Agg Selected


Field Entry



IA Deselected


5.2.2.9.3 Assign Turnover Classes to Account Product

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product .

2. Choose your LoC account product.

3. Maintain the product attributes, and under Used Attributes choose Posting Data Turnover Classes Assignment of Turnover Classes .

4. Under Proposed Value, enter the turnover classes that you created in Define Turnover Classes [page 523].5. Save your entries.

5.2.2.10 Posting Control Rules


To cover for some scenarios that can result in errors, you customize posting control rules by creating own check results and error types and configuring a main rule set. The specific scenarios are the following:

● Use of LoC funds after the draw period ends● Insuficient funds available for a withdrawal


The standard delivery contains a set of own check results, error types, rejection reasons, and other settings that you can use as a template to create your own rules for posting control. The sections below describe each of the settings that are available.



Own Check Result

The standard delivery contains own check results for debits after the draw period ends. The own check result delivered are:

Table 622:

Check Objs Check Result No Appl. Area Message

Own Check Own Check LC01 /FSGLO/LOC_CONT_ELEM

023

Own Check Own Check LC02 /FSGLO/LOC_CONT_ELEM

022

You find the settings in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Define Own Check Results .

Error Types

The standard delivery contains a template for the error type for debits after the draw period ends. The error type delivered is:

● LC1 – Debit After Draw Period● LC2 – Positive Balance not Allowed

You find the settings in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Error Types Define Error Types .

Assignment of Error Types

The standard delivery contains a template for the assignment of the previous own check result and arror type.

You find the settings in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Error Types Assign Error Types .


Field Sequence for Rule Search in Main Rule Set

The standard delivery contains a template for field sequences for rule search in main rule set that covers the following error types. The template delivered is:

Table 623:

Error Type Description Field Sequence Position 1

Field Sequence Position 2



015 Insufficient Funds Product Posting Control Group

Transaction type Group

Sending Application

LC1 Debit after draw period

Product Posting Control Group

Transaction type Group

Sending Application

You view the settings in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Posting Control Rules Define Field Sequence for Rule Search in Main Rule Set .

Rejection Reasons

The standard delivery contains a template for rejection reason for debit after the draw period ends. The rejection reasons are:

● LC1 – Debit After Draw Period● LC2 – Positive Balance not Allowed

You find the settings in Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Define Rejection Reasons .


Use

This step describes a proposed reaction to the error types that are provided in the standard delivery. To cover your own needs, you can add your own entries in the main rule set based on the entries listed below.

Procedure





Table 624:

Error Type Description Type of Item Product First Response Reason

015 Insufficient Funds

Turnover Enter the product that you created in Create Lines of Credit Account Product [page 504].

Post Processing

01

LC1 Debit After Draw Period


Reject LC1

LC2 Positive Balance Not Allowed


Post Processing

LC2


5.2.2.11 Configure Account Billing


This section describes the settings that you need to make to enable account billing for LoC.

5.2.2.11.2 Define Billing Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Billing Engine Define Billing Types .



Table 625:

Field Entry

Bil. Type LOC

Bill. Cat. 02

Blng Engine Exec. Class /FSGLO/CL_LOC_BILLING


5.2.2.11.3 Define Billing Business Processes

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Billing Engine Define Billing Business Processes .


Table 626:

Blng Proc. Business Process Description

CORRECT CORRECTION OF BILLING ITEMS

CREATE CREATION OF BILLING ITEMS

REVERSAL REVERSAL OF BILLING ITEMS


5.2.2.11.4 Define Billing Engine Processes

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Billing Engine Define Billing Engine Processes .


Table 627:

BE Pr. ID Interface Component

GETBLIC GET_BILING_ITEMS_TO_CREATE

GETBLID GET_BILLING_ITEMS_TO_DELETE




GETBLIP GET_BILLING_ITEMS_PLANNED

GETCALCD GET_CALCULATION_DETAILS

GETCONTR GET_CONTRACT_DATA

GETMPCRE GET_MP_ITEMS_TO_CREATE

GETMPDEL GET_MP_ITEMS_TO_DELETE

GETSCIC GET_SCHEDULED_ITEMS_TO_CREATE

GETSCID GET_SCHEDULED_ITEMS_TO_DELETE

GETSCIH GET_SCHEDULED_ITEMS_CREATE_H

GET_BLIM GET_BILLING_ITEMS_TO_MODIFY

LOADCONT LOAD_CONTRACT_DATA

VLDBLI VALIDATE_BILLING_ITEMS

VLDCFICA VALIDATDE_CONTRACT_IN_FICA

VLDCONTR VALIDATE_CONTRACT_STATUS


5.2.2.11.5 Map Billing Engine to Business Processes

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Billing Engine Map Billing Engine to Business Processes .


Table 628:

BE Proc. Step Previous BE Proc. Bil. Type Blng. Proc. BE Pr. ID

1 0 LOC CREATE GETCONTR

1 0 LOC REVERSAL GETBLID

2 1 LOC CREATE GETBLIC

2 1 LOC REVERSAL GETSCID



3 2 LOC CREATE GETSCIC

3 2 LOC REVERSAL GETSCIC

4 3 LOC CREATE GETSCID

4 3 LOC REVERSAL GETSCIH

5 4 LOC CREATE GETSCIH



Prerequisites

You have created condition types for capital repayment and for fees as described in Condition Types and Condition Group Types for Capital Repayment [page 510] and Condition Types for Fees [page 516].

Procedure


2. Select the following parameter:

Table 629:

Localization Parameter Group Parameter Subgroup Parameter Name

Global BILLING_ENGINE LINES_OF_CREDIT BILLABLE_CONDITIONS

3. Under Dialog Structure, choose Customer Parameter Values and choose the New Entries pushbutton.4. In the Parameter Value column, enter the condition types to determine as billable for line of credit accounts.5. Save your entries.



5.2.2.12 Configure Billing Engine for Backdated Changes


This section describes the settings that you make to enable backdated changes to line of credit accounts for a period that has already been billed.

5.2.2.12.2 Define Billing Business Processes

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Billing Engine Define Billing Business Processes .


Table 630:

Blng Proc. Business Process Description

BACKDATE BACKDATED CHANGES OF BILLING


5.2.2.12.3 Define Billing Engine Processes

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Billing Engine Define Billing Engine Processes .


Table 631:


BACKDATE GET_BILLING_ITEMS_BACKDATE_ADJ


5.2.2.12.4 Map Billing Engine to Business Processes

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Billing Engine Map Billing Engine to Business Processes .



Table 632:


1 0 LOC BACKDATE GETCONTR

2 1 LOC BACKDATE BACKDATE


5.2.2.13 Create Derivation Rules for Payment Distribution

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Payment Distribution Define Derivation Rules for Payment Distribution .

2. Choose the parent node and create a new node as the last lower-level node.3. Under Condition, enter the following data:

Table 633:

Field Entry

CONDITION FIELD dervatParam1

CONDITION CAT. Template

VALUE *LOC*

4. Under Target, enter the following data:

Table 634:

Field Entry

RULE SET 20




5.2.2.14 Configure Transaction Types

5.2.2.14.1 Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Transaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment

Items .2. Open the transaction type 030000.3. Select the Own Check checkbox.4. Save your entries.

5.2.2.14.2 Assign Transaction Types for Transaction Charges and Event Charges

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Transaction Types for Transaction Charges and Event Charges .

2. Create a new entry and enter the following data:

Table 635:

Field Entry

CondTyp Condition Type for 1-Time Fee

Diff.Value Diff. Value for Product Change or LoC Approval

TranTy Transaction Charge


5.2.2.14.3 Create Transaction Types for Payment Distribution Items

Use

To correctly clear open items with the available capital or with any credit in the LoC account, it is necessary to adjust the payment distribution items via parallel processing that posts an adjustment to the payment items in the account. You create two transaction types, one for debit and another for credit, as described below.


Procedure


Items .2. Create a debit transaction type by entering the following data:

NoteYou may adjust the entries below according to your specific needs.

Table 636:

Field Entry

Transaction Type Enter a number for your debit transaction type.

Item Type Turnover

Short Description Internal Debit: LoC


Long Name Internal Debit: Lines of Credit



ValDte/SFP Selected

Facilities Selected


Prenote Deselected

Account Names None

Access Limit All

Availability Checks All







Field Entry

Own Check Selected

CreditMemo Deselected


Prenote Required Deselected




Cust.Initiation Selected



Change PaytPlan Leave field blank

Übergabe ZA ZV Deselected




Deriv. SFP Date No SubFinPayt Date for More Payment Items Position

Payt From Type Leave field blank

Event Leave field blank

Corresp. Type Leave field blank


Other P/R Leave field blank

Update Category Leave field blank


Sett. Type Leave field blank


Field Entry



Keine BuchBenachr Deselected






TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules Debits - Category Sender


TT Grp CrcyExch Cash Debit

3. Create a credit transaction type by entering the following data:

NoteYou may adjust the entries below according to your specific needs.

Table 637:

Field Entry

Transaction Type Enter a number for your credit transaction type.

Item Type Turnover

Short Descriptn Internal Credit: LoC


Long Name Internal Credit: Lines of Credit



ValDte/SFP Selected




Field Entry


Prenote Deselected

Account Names None

Access Limit Turnover-Based Only






Own Check Deselected

CreditMemo Selected


Prenote Required Deselected




Cust.Initiation Selected



Change PaytPlan Leave field blank

Übergabe ZA ZV Deselected





Field Entry


Payt From Type Leave field blank

Event Leave field blank

Corresp. Type Leave field blank


Other P/R Leave field blank

Update Category Leave field blank


Sett. Type Leave field blank



Keine BuchBenachr. Deselected

Online Ent. PI Selected





TTGroup Pst Ctrl Rules Credits from Cash Deposit


TT Grp CrcyExch Cash Credit


5.2.2.14.4 Assign Transaction Types for Payment Distribution to Lines of Credit

1. Run transaction SM30 and maintain the view /FSLNA/VLOCCOPDI.



2. Add a new entry with the following data:

Table 638:

Field Entry

Credit Trans. Type Enter the credit transaction type that you created in Create Transaction Types for Payment Distribution Items [page 533]

Debit Trans. Type Enter the debit transaction type that you created in Create Transaction Types for Payment Distribution Items [page 533]


5.2.2.15 Overdraft Protection


To enable the use of LoC as participant funding accounts in master contracts with overdraft protection, proceed as described below.

5.2.2.15.2 Assign Transaction Types as Relevant to Overdraft Protection


Items .2. Choose the 092000 transaction type and all the other debit transaction types that are relevant for LoC.3. In the Relevant Checks group box, select the Overdraft Protection checkbox.4. Save your entries.5. Choose the 042000 transaction type.6. In the Relevant Checks group box, select the Overdraft Protection checkbox.7. In the Control group box, select the Prenote Required checkbox.8. Save your entries.

5.2.2.15.3 Create Prenote Types

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Item ManagementPrenote Define Prenote Types .


2. On the Maintenance View for Prenote Types screen, choose the New Entries pushbutton and create the following prenote types:

3. Enter the following data to create a debit prenote type:

Table 639:

Field Entry


Description of Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reservation: Debit Prenote Type.

Activate Account-Posting Check Selected

Activate Account-Name Check None


Activate Access Limit Check None

Activate Check for Overdraft Protection Deselected

Activate Payment Form Check Deselected

Activate Currency Exchange Check Deselected

Activate Facility Check Deselected

Control of Availability Checks None

Activate Own Check Selected


Credit Memo Deselected

Creation Mode of Prenote Only and/or BAPI

ACTIVE Status after Payment Item Reversal Deselected

Do Not Send Posting Notification Deselected

Indicator: Archive Prenote Deselected

Payment Form Type (PF Type) None

Transaction Type Group for Posting Check Other Debits

Transaction Type Group for Currency Exchange Payment Transaction Debit

Prenote Type as Posting Control-Relevant Indicator Selected



Field Entry

Relevant for Amount Check Deselected

Prenote Type Is Relevant for Facilities Deselected

4. Save your entries.5. Enter the following data to create a credit prenote type:

Table 640:

Field Entry


Description of Prenote Type Enter a description of your choice, for example, Reservation: Credit Prenote Type.

Activate Account-Posting Check Selected

Activate Account-Name Check None


Activate Access Limit Check None

Activate Check for Overdraft Protection Deselected

Activate Payment Form Check Deselected

Activate Currency Exchange Check Deselected

Activate Facility Check Deselected

Control of Availability Checks None

Activate Own Check Selected


Credit Memo Selected

Creation Mode of Prenote Only and/or BAPI

ACTIVE Status after Payment Item Reversal Deselected

Do Not Send Posting Notification Deselected

Indicator: Archive Prenote Deselected

Payment Form Type (PF Type) None

Transaction Type Group for Posting Check Other Credits


Field Entry

Transaction Type Group for Currency Exchange Payment Transaction Credit

Prenote Type as Posting Control-Relevant Indicator Selected

Relevant for Amount Check Deselected

Prenote Type Is Relevant for Facilities Deselected


5.2.2.15.4 Create Posting Control Rules


To handle fund availability of LoC funding accounts, proceed as described below.

5.2.2.15.4.2 Define Error Types



Table 641:

Error Type Error Type Descript.

750 Enter a description of your choice, for example, Funding account with insufficient funds.

751 Enter a description of your choice, for example, Funding account with sufficient funds.


5.2.2.15.4.3 Assign Error Types





Table 642:

Check Obj. Check Result No. Amnt Limit Netw.Affil ErrorType

Own Check Own Check 0001 750

Own Check Own Check 0002 751


5.2.2.15.4.4 Define Main Rule Set



Table 643:

Field Reject Post

Error Type 750 751

First Response Reject Post

Processing Reason 01 Blank

3. Locate the error type 230 and redefine the First Response field to Reallocation.4. Save your entries.



2. Choose the localization country Global and the parameter group LINE_OF_CREDIT, subgroup MASTER_CONTRACT.


Table 644:


AMT_RESERV_PRENOTE_TYPE_DEBIT Enter the debit prenote type that you have created in Create Prenote Types [page 539].



AMT_RESERV_PRENOTE_TYPE_CREDIT Enter the credit prenote type that you have created in Create Prenote Types [page 539].


5.2.2.15.6 Configure Transaction Types

5.2.2.15.6.1 Online Limit Reservation

Use

To enable the use of online limit reservation for LoC, make the following settings for the debit and credit transaction types used in all master contracts that include a LoC participant account.

Procedure


Items .2. Select your debit or credit transaction types.3. Select the Own Check checkbox.

5.2.2.15.6.2 Payment Distribution for Lines of Credits

To enable the use of payment distribution with LoC, make the following settings for all credit transaction types used to credit funds into a LoC account:


Items .2. Select the transaction types.3. In the PayDistr. field, select Payment Item Transfered.4. Save your entries.



5.2.2.15.7 Create Master Contract Product for LoC Repayment

Use

If you want to enable automated LoC repayment using overdraft protection with master contracts, make the settings described below.

Prerequisites

You have made the settings described in Master Data Settings [page 545]

Procedure

1. Create your own LoC master contract product in Customizing for Financial Services under Master Contract Management Product Management Product Definition Master Contract Products Create Account Product .

2. Enter the basic data for your master contract product and then choose Enter.3. On the Product Create: Administration screen, enter your master contract data and choose Enter.

4. Under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Overdraft Protection , enter the following data:

Table 645:


Relevant for Repayment Enable this attribute to determine the master contract as relevant for LoC repayment when a LoC participant account is used as a funded account.

5.2.3 Master Data Settings


To use the LoC account product that you create based on the sample product for Canada and the United States, you enter the master data described below.


5.2.3.2 Create Condition Group and Conditions


To define rates for interest, rates and amounts for fees, and rates or fixed amounts for capital repayment, you create different condition groups and the corresponding conditions.

5.2.3.2.2 Create Condition Group for LoC Settlement

Use

You create a condition group for LoC settlement to include the conditions for debit and credit interest, as well as the conditions for the maintenance and stand-by fees.

Prerequisites

You have created your condition types for the maintenance and stand-by fees as described in Create Condition Type for LoC Maintenance Fee (Fixed Amount) [page 516] and Create Condition Type for LoC Stand-By Fee (Rate) [page 518].

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account Management Current Settings Financial Conditions Condition Group Edit Condition Group .

2. Create a new condition group and enter the following data:

Table 646:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Settlement: Current Acct.


Condition Group Description Enter a description of your choice, for example, LoC Settlement.

3. Choose Enter .4. Choose the Condition Type pushbutton and select the standard condition types for debit and credit interest,

and also the condition types that you created for maintenance fee and stand-by fee.




5.2.3.2.3 Create Condition for LoC Settlement

Prerequisites

You have created your condition types for maintenance and stand-by fees as described in Create Condition Type for LoC Maintenance Fee (Fixed Amount) [page 516] and Create Condition Type for LoC Stand-By Fee (Rate) [page 518].

Procedure


2. On the Condition Group Edit screen, choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the standard condition types for debit interest and credit interest, and the condition types that you created for the maintenance and stand-by fees.


Table 647:

Field Entry

Currency USD or CAD


4. On the Calculation tab page, enter the following data:○ For debit interest:

Table 648:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Enter any description, for example, LoC: Debit Interest.


Percentage Rate Enter your rate for debit interest.


○ For credit interest:

Table 649:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Enter any description, for example, LoC: Credit Interest.


Percentage Rate Enter your rate for credit interest.

○ For the maintenance fee:

Table 650:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Enter any description, for example, Acct Maint Charge.

Amount Enter a fixed amount of your choice, for example, 32,00.

○ For the stand-by fee:

Table 651:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Enter any description, for example, LoC: Stand-by Fee.


Percentage Rate Enter your stand-by fee rate.


5.2.3.2.4 Create Condition Group for LoC Transaction

Use

You create a condition group for a line of credit (LoC) transaction to include the condition for expiry date prenotes, which enables the amount reservation during master contract scenarios for LoC and the condition value date.



Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account Management Current Settings Financial Conditions Condition Group Edit Condition Group .

2. Create a new condition group and enter the following data:

Table 652:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Transaction: LoC


Condition Group Description Enter a description of your choice, for example, Trans.Lines of Credit CA2.

3. Choose Enter .4. Create a new condition with the standard condition type 205030 (Expiry Date – Prenotes).5. Enter data as required.6. Save your entries.

5.2.3.2.5 Create Condition Group for Capital Repayment

Prerequisites

You have created your condition group type and condition types for capital repayment (fixed amount and rate) as described in Condition Types and Condition Group Types for Capital Repayment [page 510].

Procedure


2. On the Condition Group Edit screen, choose the Create Condition Group pushbutton.3. Enter the following data:

Table 653:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Enter the condition group type that you created for capital repayment.


Field Entry


Condition Group Description Enter a description of your choice, for example, Settl: LoC (Capital).

4. Choose Enter .5. Choose the Condition Type pushbutton and select one of the condition types that you created for capital

repayment.

NoteChoose from your condition types according to whether your LoC repayment amount is fixed or determined by a rate.


5.2.3.2.6 Create Condition for LoC Capital Repayment

Prerequisites

You have created your condition group types for LoC capital repayment (fixed amount and rate) as described in Create Condition Type for LoC Capital Repayment (Fixed Amount) [page 510] or Create Condition Type for LoC Capital Repayment (Rate) [page 513].

Procedure


2. On the Condition Group Edit screen, choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition type that you created for LoC capital repayment.

NoteChoose the same condition type that you selected for your condition group in Create Condition Group for Capital Repayment [page 549].




Table 654:

Field Entry

Currency USD or CAD



Table 655:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Enter any description, for example, LoC: Capital.


Percentage Rate (or Amount) Enter a rate or amount of your choice, according to the condition type that you use.


5.2.3.2.7 Create Condition Group for One-Time Fee


2. On the Condition Group Edit screen, choose the Create Condition Group pushbutton.3. Enter the following data:

Table 656:

Field Entry

Condition Group Type Settlement: Current Acct.


Condition Group Description Enter a description of your choice, for example, LoC One-Time Fee.

4. Choose Enter.5. Choose the Condition Type pushbutton and select the condition type for LoC one-time fee (LoC approval) that

you have created on Create Condition Type for LoC One-Time Fee (LoC Approval) [page 520].6. Save your entries.


5.2.3.2.8 Create Condition for One-Time Fee (LoC Approval)


2. On the Condition Group Edit screen, choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition for one-time fee on LoC approval that you have created.


Table 657:

Field Entry

Currency USD or CAD



Table 658:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Enter any description, for example, One-Time Fee.

Features 0800

Amount Enter the fixed amount of your choice, for example, 14.00.


5.2.3.2.9 Create Condition for One-Time Fee (Product Change)


2. On the Condition Group Edit screen, choose the Condition (Create Condition) pushbutton and select the condition for one-time fee on product change that you have created.


Table 659:

Field Entry

Currency USD or CAD





Table 660:

Field Entry

Description of Condition Enter any description, for example, One-Time Fee.

Features 0800

Reason for Prod.Change 000004

Amount Enter the fixed amount of your choice, for example, 14.00.


5.2.4 Configuration for BDT Events for Contracts

Use

You configure BDT events for contracts to enable correct product change to and from a line of credit product using the Change Account Product (BCA_OR_COP) transaction.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account Management Tools BDT Customizing Contract Structure Events (transaction F9BACN_S7, and select the DINP2 entry.

2. In the Dialog Structure, choose the EVENT -> FUNCTION MODULE node.3. Add the following new entries:

Table 661:

Item Function Module Name Call Appl.

7000100 /FSGLO/LOC_BCCA_BACN_EVT_DINP2

X BCCA

7000200 /FSGLO/LOC_BCPB_BACN_EVT_DINP2

X BCPC


4. Change the following entries:

Table 662:

Item Function Module Name Call Appl.

3100000 BCPC_BACN_EVENT_DINP2 <leave blank> BCCA

850000 BCCA_BACN_EVENT_DINP2 <leave blank> BCPC


5.2.5 Configuration for Payment Distribution Management for LoC


To enable the clearing of open items in a Line of Credit (LoC) contract, the Create LoC Payment Distribution Items – Mass Run report (/FSGLO/LOC_PDI_PP transaction) creates a new payment order, which allows the system to create and post internal payment items for debit and credit positions.

To enable the clearing of open items in a LoC contract make the settings as described below.

5.2.5.2 General Settings for Payment Distribution Management

The following documentation describes the generic Customizing settings required for payment distribution management.

5.2.5.2.1 Create Transaction Type for Payment Items

In this step, you create the transaction types required for payment items.

Procedure


Items .



2. Select the 005000 - Debit from Collection Authorization Procedure transaction type and choose Copy As.3. In the <Trans. Type> field, enter a number and description for your debit transaction type as required, for

example, 905001 and Debit for LoC PDI Management.

4. Save your entries.5. Select the 071100 - Cr: Debit Collection Deposit transaction type and choose Copy As.6. In the <Trans. Type> field, enter a number and description for your credit transaction type as required, for

example, 971101 and Credit for LoC PDI Management.


5.2.5.2.2 Assign Offsetting Transaction Type

In this step, you assign an offsetting debit transaction type to the credit transaction type you created for payment items.

Prerequisites

You have created new transaction types as described in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items [page 554].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account ManagementOrder ManagementPayment OrderAssign Offsetting Transaction Types to Transaction TypesAssign Offsetting Transaction Types (PO Dialog).

2. Select the credit transaction type you created in the Create Transaction Type for Payment Items section, for example, 971101.

3. In the Dialog Structure, choose Assign Offsetting Transaction Type and enter the following data:

Field Value

Off Transaction Type Enter the debit transaction type that you created in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items.

Desc. Transact. Type Debit for LoC PDI Management

Default Select the checkbox.



5.2.5.2.3 Define Payment Directive Types

In this step, you define payment directive types to be used in payment distribution item management for line of credit (LoC) accounts.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Basic Settings Payment Directive Types Define Payment Directive Types .

2. Create a new entry, as shown in the example below:

Field Value

PayDirType 90000000

PayDirCat. Leave the field empty.

Cash Flow Leave the field empty.

Description of Payment Directive Type Line of Credit PDI Management


5.2.5.2.4 Assign a Payment Directive Type with Transaction Types and Medium/Payment Method

In this step, you assign the payment directive type that you created for payment distribution item management for line of credit accounts to credit and debit transaction types for payment items and to medium and payment methods.

Prerequisites

● You have created new transaction types as described in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items [page 554].

● You have created a new payment directive type as described in Define Payment Directive Types [page 556].



Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Order Management Payment OrderAssign a Payment Directive Type with Transaction Types and Medium/PaytMeth .

2. Create a new entry, as shown in the example below:

Field Value

PayDirType Enter the payment directive type that you created in Define Payment Directive Types, for example, 90000000.

TT OrderPart Enter the credit transaction type that you created in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items, for example, 971101.

TT Recip. Enter the debit transaction type that you created in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items, for example, 905001.

Med. 0001

PM 0001


5.2.5.3 Define Payment Note Type

In this step, you define the payment note type the system uses to identify the payment order created due to a backdated posting by the Adjust LoC PDIs for Backdated Changes – Mass Run report (transaction /FSGLO/LOC_PDI_BD_PP).

Procedure


2. Create a new entry, for example:

Field Value

Payt Notes Type L03

Descr. Type Payt Nts LoC PDI Backdated ind

Corr. Type Leave this field empty.



5.2.5.4 Configure Account Products

Context

Procedure

1. Change your existing account product or create a new one in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create/Change Account Product as shown below:

Table 663:

Product Attribute Path in the Product Attribute Tree


Transaction Type Groups / Media

Used AttributesTransaction Type Groups /

Media Postings

Required Enable transaction type 1300 - Credits from Debit Collectors for Media 0001 - Internal.



Prerequisites

You have created new transaction types as described in Create Transaction Type for Payment Items [page 554].



Procedure


2. Find the parameters for localization country Global, parameter group LINE_OF_CREDIT, parameter subgroup PAYMENT_DISTRIBUTION.

3. Select the relevant parameter, and in the Dialog Structure, choose Customer Parameter Values to enter the parameter values as follows:

Parameter Name Parameter Value

CREDIT_TRANS_OPEN_ITEM Enter the credit transaction types for which the creation of payment distribution items is allowed for LoC accounts. These transaction types are excluded when calculating the payment distribution item amounts by the Create LoC Payment Distribution Items - Mass Run (/FSGLO/LOC_PDI_PP transaction) and Adjust LoC PDIs for Backdated Changes - Mass Run (/FSGLO/LOC_PDI_BD_PP transaction) reports.

GENERATION_PDI_PAYM_DIREC Enter the payment directive type of payment orders that the Create LoC Payment Distribution Items – Mass Run report (/FSGLO/LOC_PDI_PP transaction) uses when generating payment orders.

PDI_RESULT_PAYM_DIREC Enter the payment directives used by the payment orders that are created during payment distribution by the Execute Payment Distribution report (/FSPD/IPD_MR1 transaction).

PAYMENT_NOTE_TYPE_BACKDATED Enter the payment note type that you created as described in section Define Payment Note Type, for example, L03.



5.3 Configuration for Early Withdrawal Penalty on Time Deposits

5.3.1 Introduction

This section describes how to customize the system to calculate early withdrawal (EWD) penalty on time deposits in line with Canada and U.S. requirements.


NoteYou can also configure your account products to allow or require uses to specify a reason for waiving EWD penalties. For more information, see Configuration for Waiver Reasons for Early Withdrawal Penalties [page 85].

5.3.2 Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items

Use

You can assign the standard transaction type Early Withdrawal Penalty (100310) to your condition types for penalty calculation or create your own transaction types to meet your specific needs, for example, if you want to segregate different types of EWD penalties for accounting purposes.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transactions Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment

Items .2. Enter the required transaction types, such as the standard Early Withdrawal Penalty (100310).

5.3.3 Maintain Transaction Types for Information Items

Use

For the EWD penalty calculation process, two transaction types for info items are required, one for linear and another for exponential interest calculation. You use them to post the penalty amount calculated over the interest accrued from the last settlement to the EWD date.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transactions Type Groups Maintain Transaction Types for Information Items .

2. Create two transaction types as follows:○ Transaction Type for Information Item - Linear Calculation Method



Table 664:

Field Entry


Item Type 05 Item Relevant to Settlement

Short Description Enter a description of your choice, for example, EWD Penalty (Linear).

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Early Withdrawal Penalty (Accrued).

Account Posting Check Deselected








Display as Interest Penalty for PostingCtr Selected

TT Group Posting Check 0900 Debits - Interest and Charges

TT Grp CrcyExch Leave field blank.

○ Transaction Type for Information Item - Exponential Calculation Method

Table 665:

Field Entry


Item Type 05 Item Relevant to Settlement

Short Description Enter a description of your choice, for example, EWD Penalty (Exponential).

Long Name Enter a description of your choice, for example, Early Withdrawal Penalty (Accrued).


Field Entry

Account Posting Check Deselected








Display as Interest Penalty for PostingCtr Selected

TT Group Posting Check 0900 Debits - Interest and Charges

TT Grp CrcyExch Leave field blank.


5.3.4 Define Turnover Classes

Use

For exponential interest calculation, you have to create a turn over class to aggregate the amount accrued for interest penalty.

Procedure





Table 666:

Turn.Class Description Turnover Class


Enter an identifier of your choice, for example, TDIP.

Accrued Interest Penalty

Deselected P Assignment via Product Configurator

Update via Posting Process

Deselected


5.3.5 Define Derivation Rules for Turnover Classes

Prerequisites

● You have created your transaction type for exponential interest calculation in Maintain Transaction Types for Information Items [page 560].

● You have created your turnover class in Define Turnover Classes [page 562].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Turnover Classes for Flexible Account Balances Define Derivation Rules for Turnover Classes .


Table 667:

Node Active Condition Field Condition Cat Value Turnover Class

Selected TRNSTYPE Trans. Type

EQ Equal Enter the transaction type for info items that you have created for exponential interest calculation.

Enter the turnover class that you have created in the previous step.



5.3.6 Calculation Basis for Exponential Interest Calculation

Prerequisites

You have created your turnover class in Define Turnover Classes [page 562].

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Customer Calculation Bases and Display SAP Calculation Bases .

2. Create a new calculation basis with the following formula:BALANCE ( Value Date-Based , Credit , Aggregate , '' ) + BALANCE ( Posting Date-Based , Total Bal. , Period , '<TURNOVERCLASS>')

NoteReplace <TURNOVERCLASS> with the turnover class that you have created in the previous step.


5.3.7 Create Condition Types

Use

Each EWD penalty calculation method that you apply requires a financial condition. This step contains examples of condition types that you can use as a basis to define your own.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type .○ Condition Type for Credit Interest

The condition type that you use to calculate credit interest needs to make reference to the calculation basis created in the previous step. You can use the standard condition type Credit Int. Time Deposit (105115) as a template.

○ Condition Type for Fixed Penalty Amount




Table 668:

Field Entry

Condition Category 115070 (Early Withdrawal Penalty)





Calc.Basis 40000004 (Withdrawal Amount)

Determ. Time StdCond. 0 - Use Conditions at Calculation Time

Determ. Time Ind.Con 0 - Condition Determination Timepoint as Standard Condition

ChargeEventCat. 1 - Event Charge

2. Under Amount Category, enter the following data:

Table 669:

Field Entry

Amount Category 115010 (Fixed Amount)



○ Condition Type for Proportional Interest Penalty (Interest Proportional to an Amount of Days)To create a condition type for interest calculation proportional to an amount of days, you can use or copy the standard condition type Early Withdr. Penalty TD (115510).

NoteThis condition type is assigned to the standard condition type Credit Int. Time Deposit (105115) as reference condition type for calculation of EWD penalty. You may edit this setting according to your needs.

○ Condition Type for Reduced Interest Penalty



Table 670:

Field Entry

Condition Category 115070 (Interest Penalty)




Determ. Time StdCond. 0 - Use Conditions at Calculation Time

Determ. Time Ind.Con 0 - Condition Determination Timepoint as Standard Condition

Ref. Cond. Type Enter the condition type that you have created in the previous step.

2. Under Amount Category, enter the following data:

Table 671:

Field Entry

Amount Category 105060 (Interest Penalty)




Use

To process condition types for early withdrawal penalty calculation, you assign the condition types that you created for proportional interest penalty, fixed interest penalty, and reduced interest penalty to condition group types.

Prerequisites

You have created the condition types as described in Create Condition Types [page 564].



Procedure

Assign Condition Type for Proportional Interest Penalty


2. Select the condition group type 32 (Events: Time Deposit).3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Condition Type node.4. Enter the condition type you created for proportional interest penalty as described in the Create Condition

Types section.5. Save your entries.

Assign Condition Type for Fixed Interest Penalty


2. Select the condition group type 32 (Events: Time Deposit).3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Condition Type node.4. Enter the condition type you created for fixed interest penalty as described in the Create Condition Types


Assign Condition Type for Reduced Interest Penalty


2. Select the condition group type 31 (Trans: Time Deposit).3. In the Dialog Structure, double-click the Condition Type node.4. Enter the condition type you created for reduced interest penalty as described in the Create Condition Types


5.3.9 Assign Condition Types for Clearing of Info Items

Use

In this step, you assign your transaction types for interest penalty calculation to the corresponding condition types so that the system clears the relevant interest penalty info items during account settlement.

Prerequisites

You have created the relevant condition types and transaction types as described in the previous steps.


Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management SettlementAssign Condition Types for Limitation/Clearing of Info Items .

2. Create a new entry for each transaction type for information items created in previous step, as follows:

Table 672:

TranTy KVrgArt Prod.Limit Limit Offset Surplus Details

Enter the info item transaction type for linear calculation.

Leave field blank.

Deselected Leave field blank.

Enter the condition type that you use to clear the calculated amount.

Enter the condition type that you use to post the balance from condition type clearing.

Enter the condition type whose amount the system displays in the settlement results.

Enter the info item transaction type for exponential calculation.

Leave field blank.

Deselected Leave field blank.

Enter the condition type that you use to clear the calculated amount.

Enter the condition type that you use to post the balance from condition type clearing.

Enter the condition type whose amount the system displays in the settlement results.


5.3.10 Assign Posting Types to Transaction Types

Use

To enable the system to post reduced interest penalty amounts, assign the transaction type to the posting type used in the relevant financial condition type.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsAssign Posting Types to Transaction Types .




Table 673:

PT TranTy

Enter the posting type used in your financial condition type for reduced interest penalty, for example, Debit Interest (10).

Enter the transaction type that you use for reduced interest penalty.


Use

In this step, you define localization-specific parameters that enable the system to create EWD penalty info items according to your transaction types for exponential and linear interest calculation.

Prerequisites

You have created your info item transaction types for exponential and linear interest calculation in Maintain Transaction Types for Information Items [page 560].

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country Canada or United States and the parameter group TIME_DEPOSIT_EWD_PENALTY, subgroup TRANSACTION_TYPE.


Table 674:

Parameter Entry

BAL_CHANGING_ACCRL_PENALTY Enter the info item transaction type for exponential calculation.

NON_BAL_CHANGING_ACCRL_PENALTY Enter the info item transaction type for linear calculation.



5.4 Configuration for Bank Statement for Loans

5.4.1 Introduction

This section describes how to customize the system to generate bank statements in line with requirements for Canada and the United States.

5.4.2 Maintain Application Forms for Correspondence

1. In Customizing for Cross Application Functions, choose General Application Functions CorrespondenceDefine Application Forms for Correspondence .


Table 675:

Corr.type CorresRole CorresName Appl. Form RDI Form

BA01 BUSI Corporate Customer /FSLNA/BANK_STATEMENT

BA01 PRIV Private Customer /FSLNA/BANK_STATEMENT


5.5 United States

5.5.1 Introduction

This section describes the configuration information that is necessary to meet legal requirements and conduct business according to common practices in the United States.

The configuration information for the United States comprises the following topics:

5.5.2 Servicemembers Civil Relief Act (SCRA)


The Servicemembers Civil Relief Act (SCRA) aims at the protection of military service members during their duty. Therefore banks need to be able to record the military status of a customer and take the relevant actions to ensure



that the loans of the service members are compliant with the benefits of the regulation. In order to enable the system to be compliant, the SCRA feature is now available in the system. This section explains the steps you must follow to configure this feature in the system.

5.5.2.2 Assign Business Partner Role

Assign the BP role to the customer under Customizing for Financial Services under SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General Settings Business Partner Basic Settings Business Partner Roles Define BP Roles .

● Select the BP role as US0001 for Service Member● Select the BP role as US0002 for dependent of Service Member.

NoteFor configuring state compliance, while selecting the roles, in Specific attributes tab assign service category and choose the relevant service category. You maintain the service category in Customizing under Financial Services SAP Business Partner for Financial Services United States of America Servicemembers Civil Relief Act (SCRA) Create Service Category .

5.5.2.3 Map Exemption Reason with Differentiation Mode

The bank has to configure different set of price conditions corresponding to assigned differentiation mode to provide loan exemptions. During the execution of the exemption order, condition fixing is adjusted or created with proper differentiation mode based on the reason of exemption order mapped with it.

Assign the differentiation mode as exemption order for different exemption reasons:

NoteEnsure that a financial condition with Exemption Order differentiation category exists before proceeding with differentiation mode customizing.

1. In Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Differentiation Characteristics Define Differentiation Mode for Condition Fixing Agreementselect the differentiation mode as EO.

2. In Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product , specify the Product, and press Enter.

1. In the Product Change: Used Attributes screen, under Used Attributes, expand Country-Specific AttributesGeneral Localization enable and expand Exemption Request Attributes , select Reason for Exemption.

2. For every reason for exemption, map the differentiation mode as EO, and save the changes.


5.5.2.4 Configure Exemption Order

Table 676:

Configure order category in Transaction BCA_ORDER_DEV

Order Category EXMP

Data Model Structured Model

Version Model Free Model

Search Help

Set Parameter

Get Parameter

Customizing in TBCA_ORDER_CUST

Order Category Name LOAN_EXMP

Archiving Object

Archiving Object Class

Archiving SAPGUI Class

Archive Display Structure

Archive FCAT

Backdated check required

5.5.2.5 Maintain a Number Range for Exemption Order

1. Create a new transaction for number range object for SCRA, using transcation code /FSGLO/OR_EXM_NMRNG.

1. Maintain the settings under Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Basic Settings General Localization Settings Exemption Order (Account Order) Define Number Range Interval for Exemption Order .



5.5.2.6 Define OperationsTable 677:

Order Category Operation Rel Short Name

EXMP 100 Mark Enter

EXMP 110 Delete

EXMP 120 Mark Activate

EXMP 150 Mark Execute

Define Order Status

Table 678:

Order Category Status Short Name Attribute

EXMP 100 Enter Initial Status

EXMP 110 Delete Final Status

EXMP 120 Activate Normal Status

EXMP 150 Execute Normal Status

EXMP 160 Cancelled Final Status

Define Status Graph

Table 679:

Order Category Ori. Status Short Name Operation Short Name Target

EXMP 100 Entered 100 Enter 100

EXMP 100 Entered 110 Delete 110

EXMP 100 Entered 120 Activate 120

EXMP 120 Activated 120 Activate 150

EXMP 120 Activated 150 Execute 150

EXMP 150 Execute 160 Cancelled 160

5.5.2.7 Product Customizing

1. Activate the Exemption Order Feature in all the applicable products. You can access it through Country-specific Attributes General Localization Exemption


5.5.2.8 Create Market Data

Create Market Data Area in SAP Easy Access under Financial Services Foundation Market Data InterestEdit Reference Interest Rates .

Create a new Market Data Area for SCRA and define the maximum interest rate provided by authority, applicable for the service members during deputation period.

5.5.2.9 Create Market Rates for Reference Interest Rate

Create Market Rate for Reference Interest Rate under Customizing for Financial Services Account Management Basic Settings Country-Specific Settings United States of America (USA) Servicemembers Civil Relief

Act (SCRA) Create Market Rates for Reference Interest Rate .

Map the Market Data Area created in Step 3 and the products that are Customized in Step 2.

5.5.2.10 Set Release Process for Exemption Order Approval

For Release Process to approve Exemption Orders reported later than the notification period :

1. Assign a Release Procedure to Release Object under Customizing for Financial Services Account Management Basic Settings General Localization Settings Exemption Order (Account Order) .

1. Assign a Rule to Release Steps under Customizing for Financial Services Account Management Basic Settings General Localization Settings Exemption Order (Account Order) .

1. Assign a Release Procedure to Release Procedure Work flow nder Customizing for Financial Services Account Management Basic Settings General Localization Settings Exemption Order (Account

Order) .

5.5.2.11 Configuration for Archiving of Exemption Orders for SCRA with /FSGLO/EXM


Make residence time customizing settings from the localizations for banking services and perform standard archiving customizing activities as described below.



5.5.2.11.2 Define Residence Time for Exemption Order

Make the settings in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Data Archiving and Data Destruction with Archiving Object Residence Time Account Localization Settings Define Residence Time for Exemption Order .

5.5.2.11.3 Standard Customizing for Archiving

Execute the following standard transactions to complete the configuration for the archiving of exemption orders:

● IRM_CUST - IRM Customizing● IRM_CAT - IRM Policies● ILMARA - Audit Area Processing● IRMPOL - ILM Policies

5.5.2.12 Configurations for Validations based on Region-Specific Rules

5.5.2.12.1 Configuration for BRFplus

Banks in different regions in the United States follow region-specific rules which complement the federal SCRA. The system allows you to define your own region-specific rules in Business Rules Framework plus (BRFplus), and validate whether the input in the exemption order and the requested exemption align with the regional banking rules for SCRA.

The following sections describes how to customize BRFplus with region-specific rules for SCRA:

● Configuration for SCRA Interest Rate Validation [page 576]● Configuration for Minimum Service Period Validation [page 577]● Configuration for Grace Period Validation [page 578]● Configuration for Notice Period Validation [page 579]


5.5.2.12.1.1 Configuration for SCRA Interest Rate Validation

Context

To enable the system to validate the exemption interest rate granted as per region-specific rules, follow the procedure below:

Procedure

Procedure

1. Access Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRF+).2. Search for /FSGLO/LR_SCRA_BENEFITS_RULES Application Name with Object Type Application.

3. Open decision table SCRA_BENEFITS_INT_RATE, under /FSGLO/LR_SCRA_BENEFITS_RULESExpression Decision Table .

4. 4. Select Edit, then enter the following data in Table Contents to each rule to be validated:

Field Entry

Exemption Reason Enter the reason for interest exemption relevant for the rule

Country Location Enter the country relevant for the rule

Region Location Enter the region relevant for the rule

Contract Product Enter the account product if it is relevant for the rule

Scra Interest Rate Enter the interest rate allowed as per SCRA relevant for the rule

5. Save your entries and Activate.



5.5.2.12.1.2 Configuration for Minimum Service Period Validation

Context

To enable the system to validate the minimum service period defined as per region-specific rules that the servicemember must serve to be eligible for interest exemption under SCRA, follow the procedure below:

Procedure

Procedure

1. Access Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRF+).2. Search for/FSGLO/LR_EXEMPTION_REQ_RULES Application Name with Object Type Application.

3. Open decision table MIN_EXMP_PRD_DUR, under /FSGLO/LR_EXEMPTION_REQ_RULES ExpressionDecision Table .

4. Select Edit, then enter the following data in Table Contents to each rule to be validated:

Field Entry





Min Emp Prd Term (Number) Enter the minimum number of days of service relevant for the rule



5.5.2.12.1.3 Configuration for Grace Period Validation

Context

To enable the system to validate the grace period defined as per region-specific rules that is granted to the servicemembers beyond the end date of active military service, follow the procedure below:

Procedure

Procedure

1. Access Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRF+).2. Search for /FSGLO/LR_EXEMPTION_REQ_RULES Application Name with Object Type Application.

3. Open decision table GRACE_PRD_DURATION, under /FSGLO/LR_EXEMPTION_REQ_RULES ExpressionDecision Table .


Field Entry





Grace Prd Term (Number) Enter the number of days granted as grace period relevant for the rule




5.5.2.12.1.4 Configuration for Notice Period Validation

Context

To enable the system to validate the notice period defined as per region-specific rules by which the servicemembers must notify the bank about their military service period to be eligible for interest exemption under SCRA, follow the procedure below:

Procedure

Procedure

1. Access Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRF+).2. Search for /FSGLO/LR_EXEMPTION_REQ_RULES Application Name with Object Type Application.

3. Open decision table NOTIF_PRD_DURATION, under /FSGLO/LR_EXEMPTION_REQ_RULES ExpressionDecision Table .


Field Entry





Notif Prd Term (Number) Enter the number of days allowed to notify about service deployment relevant for the rule


5.5.3 Internal Revenue Services (IRS)


1. Activate the IRS Feature in all the applicable products. You can access it through Country-specific Attributes United States of America (USA) Internal Revenue Service (IRS)


5.5.3.2 Create Write-Off Reasons

Create write-off reasons under Customizing for Financial Services Account Management Basic Settings Country Specific Settings United States of America (USA) Internal Revenue Services (IRS) .

5.5.3.3 Define Threshold Reference ID

Define Threshold Reference ID under Customizing for Financial Services Account Management Basic Settings Country Specific Settings United States of America (USA) Internal Revenue Services (IRS) .

5.5.3.4 Configuration for 1099-A

5.5.3.4.1 Define Status Profile

Context

To define the status profile, follow the steps below:

Procedure

Procedure

1. Access Customizing in Financial Services Collateral Management Object Management Process ControlStatus Define Status Profiles .

2. Double-click the status profile, CMA_7001.3. Maintain the following entries if not present under User Status:

Table 680:

Stat Status Short Text Lowest Highest Position Priority

10 Ini Initial Screen 10 30 1 1

20 abd Abandoned 20 30 1 1

30 acq Acquired 30 30 1 1



5.5.3.4.2 Assign Status Profile to Process Control Keys

Context

Process control keys represent different asset categories. You can assign the status profile CMA_7001 to the keys where you want to use the functionality.

Procedure

Procedure

1. Access Customizing in Financial Services Collateral Management Object Management Process ControlStatus Assign Status Profiles to Process Control Keys .

2. Assign status profile CMA_7001 to process control area 00001:

Table 681:

Proc Control Key Status Profile Name

0100000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Real Estate

0200000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Ships

0300000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Securities Account

0400000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Devices

0500000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Inventory

0600000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Patents/Copyrights

0700000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Vehicles

0900000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Aircrafts

1000000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Claims

1100000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key – Insurance

1300000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key -Object Bundles

9900000001 CMA_7001 PCN Key -Other Valuables


5.5.4 Unfair, Deceptive, or Abusive Acts or Practices (UDAAP)

5.5.4.1 Account Determination Data

Following entries are maintained in Table TFK033D (Account determination: Data ) for creation of new transaction type in FICA. For newly configured clearing category in transactional banking corresponding transaction type is maintained in FICA. During execution it calls different event which intern calls following customizing to find value of transaction type depending upon keys.

Table 682:

MANDT APPLK BUBER KTOPL KEY

1 KEY02 KEY03 KEY04 KEY05 FUN01 FUN02 FUN04

511 S 2640XSTCLNT100 GF21 GF21 10 US01

511 S 2610 CANA US01 1 GF21 10 800001

511 S 2611 CANA US01 1 GF21 141010

511 S S000 CANA US01 1 GF21 140001

511 S S001 CANA US01 1 GF21 10

5.5.5 Truth in Lending Act (TILA)

5.5.5.1 Regulation Z

5.5.5.1.1 Create New Payment Advice

5.5.5.1.1.1 Define Business Process

1. Define business process under Customizing for Financial Services under Account management Product management Payment advice .

Table 683:

Business process Business process description

90406000 Contract End refund



5.5.5.1.1.2 Define Process Result Category

Define business process under Customizing for Financial Services under Account management Product management Payment advice .

Table 684:

Business process Process result category Process result category description

90406000 90406000 Contract End refund

5.5.5.1.1.3 Define Process Result Type

Define business process under Customizing for Financial Services under Account management Product management Payment advice

Table 685:

Process result type Process result category Default Process result type description

90406000 90406000 X Contract End refund

5.5.5.1.1.4 Maintain Payment Advice Settings

Define business process under Customizing for Financial Services under Account management Product management Payment advice

Table 686:

Business process Process result category Payment advice type

90406000 90406000 400100

90406000 90406000 400110

90406000 90406000 400200

90406000 90406000 400300

90406000 90406000 400700


5.5.5.1.2 Integration with Other Systems (BAPIs, IDocs, and BW Extraction)

The following Regulation Z data is transferred when you use standard BAPIs, IDocs, and SAP Business Warehouse Delta Queue Extraction for collateral agreement and real estate objects:

● Override Primary Dwelling on the Charges tab page of collateral agreements● Is Primary Dwelling field on the Usage tab page of real estate objects whose utilization is set to Self

The data is transferred when you use the following standard communication channels:

BAPIs for Collateral Agreements

To enable the Override Primary Dwelling field to be transferred using the standard BAPIs, the following BAdI implementations are provided for the corresponding BAPI BAdIs:

Table 687:

BAPI BAPI BAdI BAdI Implementation

BAPI_CMS_CAG_CREATE BADI for BAPI: CollateralAgreementCMS.Create (CMS_BADI_BUSISB101_CREATE)

Implementation: BAdI Definition for Creating Collateral Agreements (/FSLUS/BI_CAG_CREATE)

BAPI_CMS_CAG_GETDETAIL_MULTI BADI for BAPI: CollateralAgreementCMS.GetDetailMultiple (CMS_BADI_BUSISB101_GET)

Implementation: BAdI Definition for Reading Collateral Agreements (/FSLUS/BI_CAG_GET)

BAPIs for Real Estate Objects

To enable the Is Primary Dwelling field to be transferred using the standard BAPIs, the following BAdI implementations are provided for the corresponding BAPI BAdIs:

Table 688:


BAPI_CMS_RE_CREATE BAPI: CMS. Real estate object - Create (CMS_BADI_BUSISB104_RE_CREATE)

Implementation: BAdI Definition for Creating Real Estate Objects (/FSLUS/BI_RE_CREATE)

BAPI_CMS_RE_GETDETAIL_MULTI BADI for BAPI: CollateralObjects - Real estate -OMS.GetDetailMultiple (CMS_BADI_BUSISB104_RE_GET)

Implementation: BAdI Definition for Reading Real Estate Objects (/FSLUS/BI_RE_GET)



IDocs for Collateral Agreements and Real Estate Objects

Regulation Z data is extracted when you use the following standard IDocs:

● COLLATERALAGMTCMS_GETDETAILMLT for collateral agreementsTo retrieve the required source data, this IDoc calls BAPI_CMS_CAG_GETDETAIL_MULTI and the corresponding BAdI implementation mentioned above.

● REALESTATEOBJECTCMS_GETDETMLT for real estate objectsTo retrieve the required source data, this IDoc calls BAPI_CMS_RE_GETDETAIL_MULTI and the corresponding BADI implementation mentioned above.

SAP Business Warehouse (SAP BW) Delta Queue Extraction

Regulation Z data is extracted when you use the following standard structures:

● CMS_STR_BW_CAG for collateral agreementsTo retrieve the required source data, the system calls BAPI_CMS_CAG_GETDETAIL_MULTI and the corresponding BAdI implementation mentioned above. Field mapping is performed using the BAdI implementation /FSLUS/EI_BW_CAG_FIELD_MAP of standard BAdI CMS_BADI_BW_CAG_FIELD_MAP.

● CMS_STR_BW_RE for real estate objectsTo retrieve the required source data, the system calls BAPI_CMS_RE_GETDETAIL_MULTI and the corresponding BAdI implementation mentioned above. Field mapping is performed using the BAdI implementation /FSLUS/EI_BW_RE_FIELD_MAP of standard BAdI CMS_BADI_BW_RE_FIELD_MAP.

5.5.6 Configuration for Financial Product Eligibility Checks for Account Holders


This section describes how to set up the system to run a check based on account products to check if certain types of account holders are eligible to use the account.

5.5.6.2 Financial Product Eligibility Checks for Account Holders

1. Define Account Holder TypesIn Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management, choose Contract Management Account Localization Settings USA (United States of America) Define Account Holder Types .You must create account holder types in the table according to the needs of your bank.You assign Account Holder Types in so you can differentiate business partners by the role that they have as an account holder on account product level.


2. Implement BAdI: Account Holder ValidationIn Customizing for Financial Services, under Account Management, choose Contract Management Account Localization Settings USA (United States of America) Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)You must implement this BAdI to enable the system to use the values that you have entered for the Account Holder Type definitions as F4 help on the Account Product Attribute level.

3. Set-Up Account ProductsWhen you set up your account products, you must enable the use of the Account Holder Type account product attribute.You maintain account product settings in Customizing for Financial Services Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Account Product .You enable this product in the account product hierarchy under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes United States of America (USA) Account Holder Account Holder Category .○ For your account products, you must enable this product attribute by setting the traffic light to green.○ You must flag which account holder types are not allowed to be used for the account product.

5.5.7 Regulation D

5.5.7.1 Controlling and Monitoring Payments for Savings Accounts

To control convenient transactions from your savings account products you do the following:

1. Create your savings account product based on template US_ACC_DEP US Savings Account Product (Template)You do this in Customizing, in Financial Services, under Account Management Product management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .In this Customizing activity there are several configuration options available, depending on your bank's policy. These are as follows:○ Block convenient transactions based on the account product.

To do this, change the default settings for 7001 Convenient Transactions in the Transaction Type Group and Media matrix in the product configurator.

○ Apply posting rules for convenient transactions which exceed the limit of 6 transactionsTo do this, you do the following:Assign access limit AC7001 Transactions Limit / AC7002 Transactions Limit (Settlement) in the product configurator.

○ Charge convenient transactions which exceed the limitIf you wish to do this, you must create appropriate conditions based on one of counters: 701 Convenient Transactions /702 Convenient Trans.Settl (for settlement charges) and assign them in the product configurator or to PPL.

2. Assign applicable Transaction Types to Convenient Transactions (Transaction Type Group 7001)You do this in Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transaction Type Groups .

3. Define derivation rules for counter (assign Transaction Types to counter 701 Convenient Transactions/702Convenient Trans.Settl )



You do this in Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Counters Define Derivation Rules for Payment Transaction Counters

NoteThe following steps are applicable if you wish to apply limited, or charge convenient transactions.

1. Create TTG for posting control rules (convenient transactions posted upper the limit have to be reported). Assign applicable Transaction Types to TTG for posting control rules.You do this in Financial Services, under Account Management Item Management Basic FunctionsTransaction Types and Transaction Type Groups .

2. Set posting control rules for the savings account product that you created in step 1 (reallocate the convenient transaction that exceeded the limit).

3. Create PCO worklist (for your own worklist error groups).You do this in Financial Services, under Posting Control Office Worklist Define Worklist .

5.5.7.2 Identifying Trust Fund Accounts

1. You must modify your existing account product by adding the Alternative ID product attribute to your account product. This product attribute is added to a new account when you create a new account, or you create a new account product based on sample account product templateUS_ACC_CUR.You do this in Customizing in Financial Services, under Account Management Product ManagementProduct Definition Account Products and then choose either Change Account Product or .Create Account Product

2. You must assign FS101 Trust to your BP Role Categories and BP Roles.You Create a new BP Role Category and define a new BP role for your business partner in Customizing for Financial Services, under SAP BP for Financial Services General Settings BP -> -> -> Basic Settings -> BP Roles

5.5.8 UCC Lien Collateral Agreements

5.5.8.1 Define Organizational Settings for UCC Lien Collateral Agreements

1. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Basic Settings Organizational Settings Define Administration Organizational UnitsEnsure that you create at least one organizational unit to link the Collateral Agreements for your UCC Lien agreement.

2. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Basic Settings Organizational Settings Define the Root Administration Organizational Unit in Collateral ManagementEnsure that you maintain the root organizational unit for your UCC Lien agreement.


3. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Basic Settings Organizational Settings Assign Process Control Area to Administration Unit

The sample customizing provided for UCC Lien: 000001 supports Process Control Area 1 (no release) as well as Process Control Area 2 (with release). Ensure that all required Process Control Areas are maintained or copied from sample customizing.

NoteIf you are using different Process Control Areas then all subsequent customizing needs to be updated accordingly.

5.5.8.2 Maintain Number Range Settings for UCC Lien Collateral Agreements

Ensure that for the following Customizing activities you maintain the appropriate number ranges for your UCC Lien and CAG Type.

1. In Customizing in Financial Services, under Collateral Management, choose Collateral Agreement Maintain Number Ranges Define Number Ranges

2. In Customizing in Financial Services, under Collateral Management, choose Collateral Agreement Maintain Number Ranges Assign Number Ranges to Collateral Agreement Types

5.5.8.3 Define Collateral Agreement Types and Assign Asset Types to UCC Lien Collateral Types

1. In Customizing in Financial Services, under Collateral Management, choose Collateral Agreement Define Collateral Agreement TypesTwo CAG Types: 067100UCC Lien and 067101 UCC Lien External are available in sample customizing. You may use this to make UCC Lien work or create your own settings by using these as a template.

2. In Customizing in Financial Services, under Collateral Management, choose Collateral Agreement Assign Asset Types to Collateral Agreement TypesAll relevant Asset Types from sample customizing 067100UCC Lien, and 067101 UCC Lien External have been assigned to the CAG Types for UCC Lien.If you have configured additional or different Asset Types in your system make sure that they are assigned to these CAG Types as well, if applicable.



5.5.8.4 Define Basic Process Control Settings for UCC Lien Collateral Agreements

1. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Basic Settings Define Process Control KeysOne Process Control Key for UCC Lien is available in sample customizing: 0000067001. You may use it or create your own settings by using it as a template.

2. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Basic Settings Assign Control Keys to Collateral Agreement TypesThe Process Control Key 067100 is assigned in sample Customizing to both UCC Lien as well as UCC Lien External Keys. You may change this setting if different behavior is required.

5.5.8.5 Define UCC Lien Collateral Agreements Statuses for Process Control

1. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Status Define Status ProfilesStatus Profile CMC_7001 CMS: CAgmt: UCC Lien is available in sample customizing. You may use it or create your own settings by using it as a template.

2. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Status Assign Status Profile to Control KeysThe following sample customizing can be used:

Table 689:

Process Control Area Process Control Key

000001 0000067001

The Status Profile has been assigned to the Process Control Key for UCC Lien. You may change this setting if different statuses are required.

5.5.8.6 Define UCC Lien Collateral Agreement Activity Settings for Process Control

1. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Define Activity GroupsThe following set of Activity Groups for UCC Lien is available in sample customizing. You may use it or create your own settings by using it as a template.


Table 690:

Process Control Key Process Control Area Business Activity

0000067001 000001 1

0000067001 000001 2

0000067001 000001 3

0000067001 000001 4

0000067001 000001 5

0000067001 000002 1

0000067001 000002 2

0000067001 000002 3

0000067001 000002 4

0000067001 000002 5

2. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Define ActivitiesThe following set of Activity Groups for UCC Lien is available in sample customizing. You may use it or create your own settings by using it as a template.

Table 691:

Process Control Key Process Control Area Business Activity

0000067001 000001 0100000001

0000067001 000001 0200000001

0000067001 000001 0200000002

0000067001 000001 0300000001

0000067001 000001 4300000001

0000067001 000001 CR00000001

0000067001 000001 LA00000001

0000067001 000001 RJ00000001

0000067001 000001 RT00000001

0000067001 000001 SI00000001

0000067001 000001 SR00000001



0000067001 000001 0100000001

0000067001 000002 0200000001

0000067001 000002 0200000002

0000067001 000002 0300000001

0000067001 000002 0300000002

0000067001 000002 4300000001

0000067001 000002 CR00000001

0000067001 000002 LA00000001

0000067001 000002 RJ00000001

0000067001 000002 RT00000001

0000067001 000002 SI00000001

0000067001 000002 SR00000001

5.5.8.7 Define Plausibility Check Settings for UCC Lien Collateral Agreements

1. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Define Plausibility Processor (CAG)For UCC Lien Plausibility Checks, you must maintain Processor LUCC.

2. .In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Define Plausibility Processor (CAG)The following sample Customizing is delivered; you may use it or create your own settings by using this as a template.

Table 692:

LUCC10 LUCC

LUCC11 LUCC

LUCC12 LUCC

3. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Define Plausibility Check Sets(CAG)The three additional Plausibility Checks are assigned to the Plausibility Check Sets provided for UCC Lien. You may add or replace your own Plausibility Checks if required.


○ 70_01_0001○ 70_LA_0001○ 70_RL_0001○ 70_SI_0001○ 70_SR_0001

additional checks for 70_LA_0001:○ 700 LUCC10○ 701 LUCC11○ 702 LUCC12

4. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control Business Add Ins BAdI: Additional Plausibility ChecksThe following BAdI implementation is delivered: /FSLUS/UCC_CAG_CHECK

NoteThe BAdI implementation for the additional Plausibilty Checks is only processed if the Plausiblity Check Sets are configured accordingly.

5.5.8.8 Define User Interface Settings for UCC Lien Collateral Agreements

1. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control User Interface Define Screen Structures

2. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control User Interface Define Object Screens

3. In Customizing in Financial Services, choose Collateral Management Collateral Agreement Process Control User Interface Define Assign Object Screens to Collateral Agreement Types



5.5.8.9 Integration with Other Systems (BAPIs, IDocs, and BW Extraction)

UCC lien data (Date of Filing and Time of Filing fields on the Specific tab page of UCC lien agreements) is transferred when you use the following standard communication channels:

BAPIs for Collateral Agreements

To enable the UCC lien data to be transferred using the standard BAPIs, the following Business Add-In (BAdI) implementations are provided for the corresponding BAPI BAdIs:

Table 693:


BAPI_CMS_CAG_CREATE BADI for BAPI: CollateralAgreementCMS.Create (CMS_BADI_BUSISB101_CREATE)

Implementation: BAdI Definition for Creating Collateral Agreements (/FSLUS/BI_CAG_CREATE)

BAPI_CMS_CAG_GETDETAIL_MULTI BADI for BAPI: CollateralAgreementCMS.GetDetailMultiple (CMS_BADI_BUSISB101_GET)

Implementation: BAdI Definition for Reading Collateral Agreements (/FSLUS/BI_CAG_GET)

NoteWhen you use BAPI_CMS_CAG_CREATE to create collateral agreements, you have to pass valid combinations of system and user statuses. The system does not perform any checks to make sure these status combinations are valid. Invalid combinations may lead to inconsistent collateral agreements. In the standard Customizing delivered for UCC lien, the following status combinations are allowed:

Table 694:

System Status User Status

<Initial> <Initial>

Active Ready

Legally Active Perfected

Inactive Terminated

Plausibility checks are performed based on the system status (for all system statuses except <Initial>). For example, the date and time of filing must be filled for UCC lien agreements with the user status Perfected. The system checks this automatically only if the agreement has the system status Legally Active. If the combination of user status and system status is incorrect, the plausibility checks may not be performed as expected.


IDocs for Collateral Agreements

UCC lien data is extracted when you use the standard IDoc COLLATERALAGMTCMS_GETDETAILMLT. To retrieve the required source data, the IDoc calls BAPI_CMS_CAG_GETDETAIL_MULTI and the corresponding BAdI implementation mentioned above.

SAP Business Warehouse (SAP BW) Delta Queue Extraction

UCC lien data is extracted when you use the standard structure CMS_STR_BW_CAG. To retrieve the required source data, the system calls BAPI_CMS_CAG_GETDETAIL_MULTI and the corresponding BAdI implementation mentioned above. Field mapping is performed by the BAdI implementation /FSLUS/EI_BW_CAG_FIELD_MAP of standard BAdI CMS_BADI_BW_CAG_FIELD_MAP.

5.5.9 Military Lending Act (MLA)


Military Lending Act (MLA) aims at the protection of military servicemembers during their duty. Hence, banks need to record the active military period of a servicemember, and ensure that the loans of the servicememebrs are compliant with the benefits defined as per MLA. To enable the system to be MLA compliant, you need to create a pricing attribute for MLA. A pricing attribute stores the start and end dates of a time dependent variant, and acts as a pricing key to retrieve relevant conditions. This section explains the steps you must follow to configure the MLA pricing attribute in the system.

5.5.9.2 Assign Business Partner Role

Use

You assign a customer the status of a service member or a dependent of the service member to register the customer as a covered borrower with the bank. This registration ensures the grant of certain benefits to the customer as per the regulations defined in the MLA.

Procedure

Assign the BP role to the customer under Customizing for Financial Services under SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General Settings Business Partner Basic Settings Business Partner Roles Define BP Roles .



● Select the BP role as US0001 for Military Service Member● Select the BP role as US0002 for dependent of Military Service Member.


Use

In the system, MLA is considered as a Pricing Attribute. A pricing attribute acts as a time dependent variant and stores the start and end dates to determine the validity of a period. To enable the system to maintain the duration for which the service member goes for military duty, configure the Additional Pricing Attributes as described below.

Procedure

1. Change your loan account product in customizing under Financial Services Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product

2. Select Current Version of the product, enter the product name, and press Enter .3. Press Enter .

4. Under Used Attributes Country-Specific Attributes General Localization Additional Pricing Attribute Additional Pricing Attributes , activate the following product attributes:

Table 695:


Pricing Attribute Required

Pricing Attribute Term (Number) Required

Pricing Attribute Term (Unit) Required

Pricing Attribute Start of Term Required

Pricing Attribute End of Term Required

Pricing Attribute Fixed End of Term Required



5.5.9.4 Define APR Valididity Period

Use

You must define the MLA Annual Percentage Rate (APR) validity period for a particular country or region. This enables the system to check if the account is compliant with the MLA regulation in accordance with the APR valid in a particular region.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Country-Specific Settings United States of America (USA) Military Lending Act (MLA) , execute Define APR Validity Period.

2. Click New Entries.3. Enter the following data:

Table 696:

Field Entry

Cty Enter the country name, for example, US.

Region Enter the region code, for example, AL for Alabama.

Valid From Select the date from which the APR is valid for the region.

APR Enter the APR value.


5.5.9.5 Configurations for Validations based on Region-Specific Rules

5.5.9.5.1 Configuration for BRFplus

Banks in different regions in the United States follow region-specific rules which complement the federal MLA. The system allows you to define your own region-specific rules in Business Rules Framework plus (BRFplus), and validate whether the input in the exemption order and the requested exemption align with the regional banking rules for MLA.



5.5.9.5.1.1 Configuration for MAPR Validation

Context

To enable the system to validate the Military Annual Percentage Rate (MAPR) as per region-specific rules, follow the procedure below:

Procedure

Procedure

1. Access Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) system (transaction BRF+).2. Search for /FSGLO/LR_EFF_INT_RATE_RULES Application Name with Object Type Application.

3. Open decision table EFFECTIVE_INTEREST_RULES, under /FSGLO/LR_EFF_INT_RATE_RULESExpression Decision Table .


Field Entry

Bank Branch Country Enter the country relevant for the rule

Bank Branch Region Enter the region relevant for the rule

Product Enter the account product if it is relevant for the rule

CFR Variant Enter the Cash Flow Ratio variant as required for the rule

Agreement Duration Enter the duration of the agreement as required for the rule



6 Configuration Information for Russia

6.1 Introduction

This section describes the configuration information that is necessary to meet legal requirements and conduct business according to common practices in Russia.

The configuration information for Russia comprises the following topics:

● Business Content● Initial Setup● Product Setup● Account Number Engine (ANE) Setup● Business Process Setup

6.2 Business Content

Business Content is a set of customizing settings that provides a preconfiguration of different business scenarios covered by banking services from SAP. After you have activated Business Content, the system contains a ready-to-run configuration for the respective business scenario. The localized Business Content covers the following business scenarios:

● Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments (SAFI) – International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and Russian GAAP

● End-to-end scenarios for savings accounts and checking accounts to comply with Russian GAAP

For more information about the Business Content that is delivered with the localization for Russia, go to the SAP Help Portal at https://help.sap.com. Search for the product, localizations for banking services from SAP, select the version as required and, under Configuration, open the link to the Business Content Guide.

6.3 Initial Setup

6.3.1 Configure Alternative ID Key and Generation Type

Use

The localization for Russia uses an alternative identification in Contract Management. All related customizing is already present in the system. When you want to change or verify it, you customize the alternative ID key. This alternative ID key is used to store multidigit account numbers that are assigned to contracts.


Configuration Information for Russia

https://help.sap.com

Procedure

In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Contract Management AccountIdentification Define Generation Types for Organization .

1. You must define a specific generation type because it is needed for the master data replication to Bank Analyzer (IOA) to work correctly.

2. Ensure that the record with the following information exists, if it is missing, create it:

Table 697:

Field Entry

Organization 310

Generation Type RU_BAC.001

Desc. Of Creation Type <Any comment>

In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account management Contract Management AccountIdentification Define Identification Key .

1. You must specify an alternative ID key that is used to store the reference contract number in the contract. The alternative ID key’s value can be chosen arbitrarily, but you must use the same alternative ID key in every Customizing activity.For Alt ID Key, SAP recommends using the value CUST_ACCT.

2. Ensure that the record with the following information exists, if it is missing you must create it:

Table 698:

Field Entry

ID Key <Alt ID Key>

Description ID Key <Any comment>

In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account management Contract Management AccountIdentification ID Key Organization, Generation Type, Assign Structure .

1. Ensure that the record with the following information exists, if it is missing create the record with the following information:

Table 699:

Field Entry

Structure Name <Leave empty>

Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0Configuration Information for Russia C U S T O M E R 599

6.3.2 Organizational Data

6.3.2.1 Specify Bank Keys and Branch Keys

Use

Bank keys are used to identify banks in the banking services from SAP system. In Russia, most of the banks are assigned a bank identification code (BIC) by the Central Bank of Russia. It’s recommended to use a BIC as a bank key in the localization for Russia.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Collateral Management Securities Create Depository Bank .

2. Create bank keys as follows:

Table 700:

Field Entry

Bank Country RU

Bank Key Enter BIC

Address Enter address data

Control Data Enter control data

3. Perform all Customizing activities related to the new bank key in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Basic Settings Organization .

6.3.2.2 Hierarchical Organizational Structure Configuration


Banks in Russia are organized in hierarchical structures. These structures include head offices, branches, and (internal structural divisions).

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to hierarchical organizational structure, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP Russia Hierarchical Organizational Structure .




6.3.2.2.2 Transactional Banking

6.3.2.2.2.1 Configure Hierarchical Structure

Use

You define the organizational units according to the bank’s organizational hierarchy. The system uses organizational units during account creation as a contract manager. The hierarchy establishes the relationship between each organizational unit.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Tools ABAP Workbench Development SAP Business WorkflowDefinition tools Organizational Management Organizational plan Create .

2. Enter the following data:○ Valid from: 01.01.2000○ To: 31.12.9999

3. In the Basic data tab, enter your organizational unit information.4. Save your changes.5. Right-click on your head office and select Create.6. Choose Is line supervisor of.7. Add your hierarchical structure according to your bank hierarchy repeating steps 1 to 3.

6.3.2.2.2.2 Configure Organizational Units

Use

You must assign an organizational unit category, a bank key, a bank posting area and a branch calendar to your organizational units.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Tools ABAP Workbench Development SAP Business WorkflowEnvironment Organizational Management Detail Maintenance General .

2. On the Maintain Object screen, enter the following information:○ Plan version: Current plan○ Object type: Organizational Unit


○ Object ID: <enter your organizational unit technical name>3. Set the Organizational Unit Category info type to L1 if your organizational unit is not an accounting unit. Or set

the Organizational Unit Category to L0 if your organizational unit is an accounting unit.4. Update any other info types that relate to the organizational unit according to your needs.5. Note down your object ID. This object ID will be your Organizational Unit Identification Number, generated

according to your customizing.6. Save your changes.

6.3.2.2.2.3 ANE Integration

Use

You assign organizational units to bank branches as described below. Note that the system uses the bank branch code in the multidigit account number and that this code is provided by the Central Bank of Russia.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Account Number EngineBranch Settings Define Bank Branch Codes , make the following updates:○ Branch: <any four-digit code>○ Branch Code Description: <enter a description for your branch>

2. Note down the branch code you have just created.

3. In Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Localization Settings Account Number Engine Settings Branch Settings Map Branches to Organizational Unit IDs , make the following updates:○ ID of Organization Unit: <enter organizational unit identification number you have previously noted down>○ Branch: <enter the code of the branch you created in the previous step.

6.3.2.2.3 Bank Analyzer

6.3.2.2.3.1 Configure Organizational Units

Use

The organizational unit must exist as master data in Bank Analyzer in order to derive the accounting unit according to the hierarchical structure of your bank. The information regarding the master data for the organizational unit reflects the content that exists in the transactional banking system.



Procedure

Check if your organizational ID is available as master data following the steps below:

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Bank Analyzer Source Data Layer ToolsMaster Data and Hierarchies Edit Master Data for Custom Characteristics .

2. In the Basic Characteristic field, enter /BA1C/CORG.3. In the Organizational Unit field, enter your organizational unit ID number.

6.3.2.2.3.2 Assign Accounting Unit to Organizational Unit

Use

The accounting unit is an organizational unit type, which can be assigned to your organizational unit. Organizational units, such as branches, should have an accounting unit assigned to it. While creating multidigit accounts, the branch determination considers the accounting unit.

The accounting unit is assigned to the Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments (Smart AFI) results data area (SAFI) as a financial statement entity with organizational unit category L0 – Accounting Unit. While processing external business transactions, under accounting system S_RUGAAP, the system verifies for your organizational unit which is the underlying organizational unit with category L0 – Accounting Unit and derives its ID to the characteristic /1BA/_BA1C_R_AUN. This characteristic represents the accounting unit and is available in the Results Data Layer and G/L Documents for Russian GAAP.

Procedure

Check if there is an accounting unit assigned to your organizational unit following the steps below.

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Bank Analyzer Source Data Layer ToolsMaster Data and Hierarchies Edit Master Data for Custom Characteristics .

2. In the Type of Organization field, enter L0.

6.3.2.2.3.3 Define Organizational Hierarchy

Use

The organizational hierarchy of the bank illustrates how the organizational units relate to each other. This organization also defines the accounting unit of each organizational unit.


Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Bank Analyzer Source Data Layer ToolsMaster Data and Hierarchies Maintain Hierarchies .

2. Choose a hierarchy structure.3. Select the organizational unit you want to edit and click on Details. Make note of the source system ID and of

the organizational unit information.4. Select the same organizational unit again and choose Edit Master Data. Enter the source system ID and

organizational unit and execute.5. Select the type of the organization: L0 if it is an accounting unit; L1 if it is not an accounting unit.

6.3.2.2.3.4 ANE Integration

Use

You assign organizational units to bank branches as described below. Note that the system uses the bank branch code in the multidigit account number and that this code is provided by the Central Bank of Russia.

Prerequisites

You have created the organizational unit.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Account Number EngineBranch Settings Define Bank Branch Codes , make the following updates:○ Branch: <any four-digit code>○ Branch Code Description: <enter a description for your branch>

2. Note down the branch code you have just created.

3. In Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Localization Settings Account Number Engine Settings Branch Settings Map Branches to Organizational Unit IDs and Bank Keys , make the following updates:○ ID of Organization Unit: <enter organizational unit identification number you have previously noted down>○ Branch: <enter the code of the branch you created in the previous step.



6.3.3 Configuration of Integration Between Bank Analyzer and ANE


This section describes how to integrate Bank Analyzer (FS-BA) with the account number engine (ANE) in order to generate the multidigit account numbers that are necessary to meet legal requirements in Russia.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to this integration, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP Russia Bank Analyzer (FS-BA) Business Operation Multidigit Accounting Integration with the Account Number Engine .


Use

The parameters contain standard values that enable the system to process the delivered Business Content in line with requirements in the localizations for banking services from SAP. If you want to change the delivered Business Content, for example, by modifying the name of some local characteristics such as the reference contract number, you must customize the corresponding parameters to enable the system to process that change.

Prerequisites

● If you want to replace a local characteristic delivered in the localization with a new one, first you must create and register the new characteristic.

● If you want to change the accounting system name, first you must create the new accounting system.

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country Russia and the parameter group BUSINESS_CONTENT.3. Review and configure the parameters as required, as described below.



Table 701:

Parameter Group Parameter Subgroup Parameter Value

Business Content Accounting_Settings Chart_Accounts

Business Content Characteristic Account_Subtype

Business Content Characteristic Bank_Key

Business Content Characteristic Bank_Land

Business Content Characteristic Country_Key

Business Content Characteristic Reference_Contract

Business Content Organizational_Structure Head_Office

Business Content YEC_FIN_Statement_Subsegment Branch

Business Content YEC_FIN_Statement_Subsegment Head_Office

Business Content YEC_FIN_Statement_Subsegment Interbranch

The following parameters are available for customizing:


6.3.3.3 Business Add-Ins and Interfaces


The Business Add-In (BAdI) for the integration with the account number engine (ANE) is specific to the localizations for banking services from SAP and is provided with a default implementation. The default implementation can be redefined by customer-specific implementations, as required.

BAdI: Interface with Account Number Engine

You use this BAdI to integrate Bank Analyzer (FS-BA) with the ANE. The default implementation triggers the communication between the two components when processing operational events and posting documents to generate or retrieve the multidigit account numbers that are required. For more information, see the corresponding documentation for the BAdI in the system.

You can access that BAdI in Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Interfaces to Other Applications Country-Specific Settings Russia Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)



6.3.4 Configuration for Multidigit Account Number of External Banks


The multidigit account number in the system that belongs to another bank is the reference for payment operations (External Payment System) between banks. This chapter describes the Customizing settings that you are required to make in the system.

6.3.4.2 Create New Payment Advice Category

Create a new payment advice category in Customzing for Financial Services under Account ManagementProduct Management Payment Advice Counterparty Define Payment Advice Category

Table 702:

PA Catg Dr. Cr. Impl. Class AD Act / Pasv PAC Description

Pymt Method

100001 Required Required /FSPAM/_CARRIER

Customer Account

Active Domestic Payment (Pay & Collect) for CIS

0001

6.3.4.3 Link Payment Advice Category to corresponding memory objects

Create a link between the payment advice category and the corresponding memory object in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Payment Advice CounterpartyMap Payment Advice Category and Tables

Table 703:

Payment Advice category Table

100001 /FSLRU/CP_ACCD


6.3.4.4 Validate details of Payment Advice Category

The following details are available in the system for payment advice category in the view /FSPAM/_V_PAC_VA:

Table 704:

Payment Advice Category Field Name Status

100001 CN_HOLDER_NAME Possible

6.3.4.5 Assign Counterparty External Representation

Create counterparty external representation in Customizing for Financial Services under Account ManagementProduct Management Payment Advice Counterparty Assign Counterparty External Representation .

Table 705:

Payment Advice Category

Language Priority Field Name Separator

100001 DE 1 EXTERNAL_ACC_NO

100001 DE 2 BANK_KEY /

100001 DE 3 CN_HOLDER_NAME ,

100001 EN 1 EXTERNAL_ACC_NO

100001 EN 2 BANK_KEY /

100001 EN 3 CN_HOLDER_NAME ,

6.3.4.6 Extensible Objects (XO) Customizing (/nXO80)

You must assign the counterparty business object to the segment object, which in turn must be assigned to the memory object, as follows:

1. Call transaction /nXO80.2. Select Payment Address as the business object type.

The business object Counterparty is created in the system.3. Create memory object /FSLRU/CP_ACCD.

On the memory object screen, enter the class /FSLRU/CL_MO_MULTI_DIGIT_ACCT in the Individual Implementation field by choosing the Add Memory Object option.

4. Create segment object ADDITIONAL_FIELDS_CIS for the counterparty business object.On the segment object screen ADDITIONAL_FIELDS_CIS, assign the memory object/FSLRU/CP_ACCD. To do so, choose Add Memory Object and enter the memory object /FSLRU/CP_ACCD.



5. On the business object counterparty screen, assign the segment object. To do so, choose Add Segment Object and enter the segment object ADDITIONAL_FIELDS_CIS.

6.3.4.7 Generating Multi Digit Account Number for New Business Object

6.3.4.7.1 Create New Business Object

Create a new business object and assign existing segment objects to it:

1. Execute the transaction /nXO80.2. Choose the business object type as Account Number Engine.3. Create a Business Object providing name and description.4. Select an individual implementation based on where the business object is located:

○ For Transaction Banking, select class /FSLRU/CL_MDA_AM_Business_OBJ or any class inherited from this class.

○ For Bank Analyzer, select class /FSLRU/CL_MDA_BA_TECHNICAL_BO or any class inherited from this class.

5. In the Semantic Structure section, specify the Structure Names as:○ Read Structure as /FSLRU/RE_BO_MDA_COMMON_DETAIL○ Write Structure as /FSLRU/RE_BO_MDA_COMMON_DATA

6. In the Assigned Segment Objects section, include the following segment objects:○ RB_ENTRY_ENHANCEMENT○ RB_ENTRY_HEADER○ RB_ENTRY_MDA_ATTRIBUTES

7. Save the Business Object.

Customizing Activity

Map a registration entry type in a usage application to the newly generated business object in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Account Number Engine Create Utility Objects for Account Number Engine.

6.3.5 Business Partner Configuration

Use

The Central Bank of Russia (CBR) requires specific synthetic accounts to be used for a given category of bank customer, for example, for individual entrepreneurs or state-owned financial organizations. To enable the system


to use the correct synthetic account for a given customer when it generates a multidigit account number, you assign a special classification to each customer. The classification is represented by the customer accounting classification (CAC) in the SAP system. The system uses CACs as follows:

● In Account Management (FS-AM), the CAC is one of the attributes that the system uses to assign the correct synthetic account when it generates a multidigit account number for a given bank customer.

● In Bank Analyzer (FS-BA), the CAC is used as follows:○ In the transactions for business partner master data in Bank Analyzer (FS-BA), you can display the CAC.○ In the Processes and Methods (FS-BA-PM) component, the system uses the CAC as a parameter in the

posting rules to derive the correct general ledger (G/L) account for a business partner.

For more information, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc Localizations for Banking Services from SAP Russia Business Partner .

Procedure

1. Check whether the CACs delivered as standard meet the latest CBR requirements.2. If the CBR defines new synthetic accounts that require you to categorize your bank customers using different

CACs, enter new CACs.You enter CACs in Customizing for Financial Services under SAP Business Partner for Financial ServicesLocalization Settings Multidigit Account Number Settings Enter Customer Accounting Classifications .

NoteIf required, you can restrict the CAC changes that are possible. You enter the permitted CAC changes in Customizing for Financial Services under SAP Business Partner for Financial Services Localization Settings

Multidigit Account Number Settings Determine Permitted Customer Accounting Classification Changes .

6.3.6 Mandatory Business Partner Identification Documents

Use

In Russia, banks must be provided with certain identification documents when they create an account. According to Russian legislation, specific identification documents must be used to identify individual bank customers. These identification documents can be related to specific identification documents but also to documents used for taxation purposes.

Procedure

To ensure that you meet this legal requirement, you enable the system to check whether the minimum of identification documents have been provided for certain BP roles. To enable the system to run the validation




checks, you must maintain the following activities in Customizing inFinancial Services, under SAP Business Partner for Financial Services Localization Settings Mandatory ID Number Validation Settings :

● Assign Mandatory ID Type Groups to Business Partner Roles● Define ID Type Groups for Business Partners

6.3.7 Account Profile Configuration

Use

In the account profile, you can display the balance of a multidigit account (MDA) in rubles. To enable the system to calculate the balance of an MDA in rubles, you enter the current exchange rates provided by the Central Bank of Russia (CBR).

NoteFor more information see .

Prerequisites

As part of the standard currency revaluation functions in the localization for Russia, you must have entered the daily exchange rates provided by the CBR on the SAP Easy Access screen under Financial Services Foundation

Market Data Exchange Rates Edit Exchange Rates .

NoteFor more information about the standard currency translation functions, see .

Procedure

To enable the account profile to calculate the correct account balance in rubles, you must configure the account profile to use the same market data area and exchange rate category that the system uses for accounting purposes. You make this setting in Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Processes and Methods Country-Specific Settings Russia Account Profile Settings Determine Exchange Rate Category to Calculate Ruble Equivalent .

Adding an Index to Improve Performance

To improve the performance of the balance calculation function, you can add an index that uses characteristics in the result types for the localization.


NoteThe following steps are based on the results data area and result types that are shipped with the Business Content for the localization.

To add an index, proceed as follows:

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Bank Analyzer Results Data Layer Basic Settings Edit Technical Settings in Results Data Area .

2. Select the results data area for Russia (SBARU) and, in the left frame, choose Result Types.3. Select the result types for posting documents (SRUF) and imported documents (SRUFISD) individually and,

for each result type, in the left frame, choose Index for Result Types.4. Define an index name and specify Data Table as the target table.

NoteYou can use the same index for both result types.

5. Select the index that you defined in the previous step and, in the left frame, choose Characteristic: Index for Result Types.

6. Add the following characteristics to the index:1. /1BA/_BA1C_R_EGL (Extended G/L Account)2. /BA1/C55POSTD (Posting Date)

6.4 Product Setup

6.4.1 Sample Account Products


This section describes the sample account products that are configured for use in Russia. The account products are templates that you use to create and configure products to meet your requirements.

The guide comprises settings that are delivered as standard and settings that you must make in the areas of Customizing and master data.

The standard delivery for banking services from SAP contains the following sample financial products:

● Checking account● Time deposit● Transit account● Budget account● Cash account● Special account



6.4.1.2 Checking Account


The sample current account for Russia enables you to create checking accounts that have a reference contract number attached to them.


Product Templates

The standard delivery for the localization for Russia contains the following product template for checking accounts: _RU_ACCCUR.

6.4.1.2.3 Create Checking Account Product

Prerequisites

● You have defined the alternative ID (Identification) key (see Configure Alternative ID Key and Generation Type [page 598])

● You have configured the account number engine (ANE) (see Account Number Engine Setup [page 634])○ You have defined the account type (ANE)○ You have defined the derivation rules for synthetic accounts (ANE)

Procedure



Table 706:

Field Entry


Template Product _RU_ACCCUR


Field Entry



choose Enter.

5. In the product attributes structure, choose Country-Specific Attributes Russia Multidigit Account Numbers Reference Contract Number Reference Contract Account Type .

6. Enter the ANE account type that will be used for synthetic account derivation at generation of the reference contract number.


6.4.1.3 Budget Account


The sample budget account for Russia enables you to create budget accounts that have a reference contract number assigned to them.


The standard delivery for the localization for Russia contains the following product template for budget accounts: _RU_ACCBUD.

6.4.1.3.3 Create Budget Account Product

Prerequisites

● You have defined alternative ID (Identification) key (see Configure Alternative ID Key and Generation Type [page 598])

● You have configured the account number engine (ANE) (see Account Number Engine Setup [page 634])○ You have defined the account type (ANE)○ You have defined account subtypes (ANE)○ You have defined the derivation rules for synthetic accounts (ANE)



Procedure



Table 707:

Field Entry


Template Product _RU_ACCBUD



choose Enter.


6. Enter the ANE account type used for synthetic account derivation during generation of the reference contract number.

7. In the product attributes structure, choose Country-Specific Attributes Russia Multidigit Account Numbers Reference Contract Number Account Subtype .

8. Enter the ANE account subype used for synthetic account derivation at generation of the reference contract number.


6.4.1.4 Cash Account


The sample cash account for the banking services from SAP localization for Russia enables you to create cash accounts that have a reference contract number assigned to them.


The standard delivery for the localization for Russia contains the following account product template for cash accounts: _RU_ACCASH and the sample product SRU_CASH_A.

The SRU_CASH_A product is delivered together with Customizing settings in Production Control as part of the Business Content for Bank Analyzer.


6.4.1.4.3 Create Cash Account Product

Prerequisites

● You have defined the alternative ID (Identification) key (see Configure Alternative ID Key and Generation Type).● You have configured the account number engine (ANE) (see Account Number Engine Setup)

○ You have defined the account types (ANE).○ You have defined the derivation rules for synthetic accounts (ANE).

Procedure



Table 708:

Field Entry

New Product Enter the technical name of your product

Template Product _RU_ACCASH



choose Enter.

5. In the product attributes structure, choose Country-Specific Attributes Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) Multidigit Account Numbers Reference Contract Number Reference Contract Account Type .

6. Enter the ANE account type used for the synthetic account derivation for the generation of the reference contract number.


8. In Bank Analyzer, you Customize your product in Customizing for Financial Services under Bank AnalyzerSource Data Layer Primary Objects Master Data Settings for Attributes Basic Data Edit Production Control .

9. In Customizing, you update the posting rules for cash accounts specific to the S_RUGAAP accounting system. To do this, you maintain Derive Posting Key Figures in Customizing in Financial Services, under Bank Analyzer Processes and Methods Accounting for Financial Products After Generation Financial Position Processes Basic Settings Posting Rules Derive Posting Key Figures .Add your product to the conditions of the RUGAAP Acc: Cash Accounts rule.



6.4.1.5 Special Account


The sample special account for Russia enables you to create special accounts that have a reference contract number assigned to them.


The standard delivery for the localization for Russia contains the following product template for special accounts: _RU_ACCSPE.

6.4.1.5.3 Create Special Account Product

Prerequisites

● You have defined the alternative ID (identification) key (see Configure Alternative ID Key and Generation Type [page 598]).

● You have configured the Account Number Engine (ANE) (see Account Number Engine Setup [page 634])○ You have defined the account type (ANE).○ You have defined account subtypes (ANE).○ You have defined tail symbols (ANE).○ You have defined the derivation rules for synthetic accounts (ANE).

Procedure

1. Create your own checking account product in Customizing in Financial Services Account ManagementProduct Management Product Definition Account Products Create Account Product .


Table 709:

Field Entry


Template Product _RU_ACCSPE



3. Choose Enter4. On the Product Create: Administration screen, enter a description and validity period for the product and

choose Enter.


6. Enter the ANE account type used for the synthetic account derivation when generating the reference contract number.

7. In the product structure, choose Country-Specific Attributes Russia Multidigit Account NumbersReference Contract Number Account Subtype .

8. Enter the ANE account subtype used for synthetic account derivation when generating the reference contract number.


6.4.1.6 Account Product Creation Without using Templates

Each account has a predefined account product template that is already present in the system, however there are the steps you take to create an account product for Russia.

Product Attributes

This section contains the product-specific attributes that are required to meet requirements for Russia. You access the product attributes in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Change Account Product .

Table 710:


Reference Contract Number Used Attributes Country-Specific

Attributes Russia - FSLOCAL

Multidigit Account Numbers Reference

Contract Number

Indicates that the contract uses Reference Contract Numbers.

Reference Contract Account Type Used Attributes Country-Specific



Contract Number Reference Contract

Account Type

Indicates the ANE Account Type that is used as a parameter for generation of the Reference Contract Number.




Reference Contract Alternative ID Key Used Attributes Country-Specific




Alternative ID Key

Indicates Alternative ID Key that is used for storing the Reference Contract Number.

Creation Reference ID Used Attributes Administrative Data

Creation Reference Creation

Reference ID

Indicates that the Creation Reference ID field is used in the contract. In the localization for Russia this field is used for storing a Banking Services or Deal Contract Number.

Account Subtype (*) Used Attributes Country-Specific




Account Subtype

Indicates ANE Account Subtype that is used as a parameter for generation of the Reference Contract Number.

Tail Digits (**) Used Attributes Russia – FSLOCAL

Multidigit Account Numbers

Reference Contract Number Reference

Contract Account Subtype

Indicates that the field for manually specifying the reference contract number is enabled in the product. Currently, usages of this field is used for the creation of cash accounts.

(*) indicates optional steps – only for budget and special accounts.

(**) indicates optional steps – only for cash accounts.

Configuration Steps in Customizing

To create a new account product without using product templates delivered as standard you should do the following steps:



Table 711:

Field Entry



Field Entry

Template Product You may choose the standard account product template that suits your needs.



choose Enter.5. Do settings relevant for Reference Contract Numbers:

○ In the product attributes structure, choose Country-Specific Attributes Russia - FSLOCAL Multidigit Account Numbers .

○ Set the traffic light to green for the Reference Contract Number attribute

○ In the product attributes structure, choose Country-Specific Attributes Russia - FSLOCAL Multidigit Account Numbers Reference Contract Number Reference Contract Account Type .

○ Enter the ANE account type that is used for the synthetic account derivation during generation of the reference contract number.

○ (*)Set the traffic light to green for Account Subtype attribute.

○ (*)In the product attributes structure, choose Country-Specific Attributes Russia - FSLOCALMultidigit Account Numbers Reference Contract Number Account Subtype .

○ (*)Enter the ANE Account Subtype that is used for synthetic account derivation at generation of the Reference Contract Number.

○ (**) Set the traffic light to green for the Tail Digits attribute.

○ In the product attributes structure, choose Country-Specific Attributes Russia - FSLOCAL Multidigit Account Numbers Reference Contract Number Reference Contract Alternative ID Key .

○ Enter the Alternative ID Key you specified in Configure Alternative ID Key and Generation Type [page 598] that is used for storing the reference contract number.

6. Settings relevant for Alternative Identification:

○ In the product attributes structure, choose Basic Data○ Set the traffic light to green for the Alternative Identification attribute.

○ In the product attributes structure, choose Basic Data Alternative Identification Alternative ID Code .

○ Add <Alternative ID Key> you specified in Configure Alternative ID Key and Generation Type [page 598] as a Value Restriction.Press Enter.

○ In the product attributes structure, select Basic Data Alternative Identification Alternative Identification .

○ Choose Display Field in Field Modification radio button list. Press Enter.7. Settings relevant for Creation Reference:

○ In the product attributes structure, choose Administrative Data Creation Reference .○ Set the traffic light to green for Creation Reference ID attribute.

○ In the product attributes structure, choose Administrative Data Creation Reference Creation Reference ID .



○ Choose Optional in Field Modification radio button list. Press Enter.8. Save and activate your product.

(*) indicates optional steps – only for budget and special accounts.(**) indicates optional steps — for cash accounts only.

6.4.2 Product Configuration


This section describes the financial products that you must configure end-to-end for use in Russia. The guide comprises settings that are delivered as standard and settings that you must make in the areas of Customizing and master data.

The standard delivery for Russia enables you to configure the system to support multicurrency time deposits.

6.4.2.2 Multicurrency Time Deposit


This section describes how to configure the system to process multicurrency time deposits in line with requirements in the localizations for banking services from SAP. To use a multicurrency time deposit, you must create and configure master contract and account products in a special way.

NoteFor more information about the business processes and functions related to multicurrency time deposits for the localizations for banking services from SAP, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com/bankingservices80loc

Localizations for Banking Services from SAP Russia Account Management (FS-AM) AccountsDeposits Multicurrency Time Deposits .


6.4.2.2.2.1 Transaction Types

The standard delivery for Russia includes transaction types that are used in multicurrency time deposits for internal fund transfers between participating currencies.



6.4.2.2.2.2 Localization Parameters

Use

The following localization parameters are configured to use the transaction types delivered by standard for multicurrency time deposits.

The Validate Multicurrency Time Deposits for Fixing (/FSLRU/MCU_DISTRIBUTION) report uses these parameters in the automatic distribution of contract amounts for multicurrency contracts with individual limits defined (see Configure Individual Limit on Define Scope of Minimum Contract Amount [page 628]).

NoteIf you want to create new transaction types or use your own, you must change the parameter values to correspond to your custom transaction types.

Features

You access the parameters in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization SettingsConfigure Localization Parameters .

Table 712:

Parameter Group Parameter Subgroup Parameter Name

MULTICURRENCY PAYMENT_ORDER_DETAILS ORDERING_TRANSACTION_TYPE

MULTICURRENCY PAYMENT_ORDER_DETAILS RECIPIENT_TRANSACTION_TYPE

MULTICURRENCY PAYMENT_ORDER_VALIDATION ORDERING_TRANSACTION_TYPE

MULTICURRENCY PAYMENT_ORDER_VALIDATION RECIPIENT_TRANSACTION_TYPE

NoteFor more information about the localization parameters, see the corresponding documentation in the system.



This section describes how to configure the system to deal with the specific requirements of multicurrency time deposits in the localizations for banking services from SAP.



6.4.2.2.3.2 Create and Configure Time Deposit Account Product

6.4.2.2.3.2.1 Introduction

To use the multicurrency time deposit, you must create a time deposit product and make the settings described below.

NoteThis product is used as a participant in the master contract product that you have created (see Create and Configure Master Contract Product [page 626]).

6.4.2.2.3.2.2 Define Term Variant

Use

To enable the system to fix a multicurrency time deposit contract correctly, by using the same start of term for all participant accounts, you must define a term variant.

Prerequisites

You have defined start of term variants for multicurrency time deposits in Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Life Cycle Control of Time Deposits Edit Start of Term Variants .

NoteYou must also define a variant for the latest start of term.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Product Management Life Cycle Control of Time Deposits Edit Term Variants .


Table 713:

Field Entry

TrmVrt Enter a technical name of your choice, for example, 9001.

Short Name Enter a short description of your choice, for example, TermVar for MTD.

Long Name Enter a long description of your choice, for example, TermVar for Multicurrency Time Deposit.

STVN Enter the start of term variant that you use for new transactions.

STVL Enter the start of term variant that you use for the latest start of term.

STVR Enter the start of term variant that you use for rollover.


6.4.2.2.3.2.3 Create Product

Prerequisites

You have defined the term variant that you need for multicurrency time deposits in Russia (see Define Term Variant [page 623]).

Procedure

1. Create your own account product for multicurrency time deposits in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Product Definition Account Products Create

Account Product .2. Enter the following data:

Table 714:

Field Entry


Template Product _RU_FTDMAX





choose Enter.5. In the product attributes structure, in addition to the standard settings that you make for a time deposit

product, configure the product attributes in the table below:

Table 715:


Term Variant Used Attributes Time Deposit

Product Specifications

Enter the term variant that you have defined in Define Term Variant [page 623].

Latest Start of Term Used Attributes Time Deposit

Time Deposit Agreement Term

Disable the product attribute by setting it to Off (red sign).

CautionYou must disable this product attribute to avoid reprocessing performance in mass run.

Creation Reference ID Used Attributes Administrative

Data Creation Reference

Required Field

Capital Aggregation Type Used Attributes Country-Specific

Attributes Russia Multicurrency

Time Deposits

Enter any setting according to your business needs.


6.4.2.2.3.3 Define Product Groups

Use

You define a product group to make sure that only the account products defined as participants in multicurrency time deposits can be assigned to a master contract defined to hold multicurrency time deposits.

Prerequisites

You have created and activated the account products that you use as participants in multicurrency time deposits (see Create Product [page 624]).


Procedure

1. Create or edit a group for time deposit accounts in Customizing for Financial Services under Master Contract Management Product Management Product Definition Define Product Groups and Assign Products .


Table 716:

Field Entry

Product Group Enter an identifier for your product group, for example, 000000000000400.

PG Diff Enter a differentiator for your product group, for example, 0000000400.

Name Enter a name for your product group, for example, Time Deposit Accounts: Multicurrency Contracts.

3. Select the line for the newly-created group and choose Products for Product Groups in the left frame.4. Enter new entries for the time deposit account products that you have created (see Create Product [page

624]).5. Save your entries.

6.4.2.2.3.4 Create and Configure Master Contract Product

6.4.2.2.3.4.1 Introduction

To use the multicurrency time deposit, you must create a master contract product and make the settings described below.

NoteThis product is used as a contract bundle, where you assign time deposit accounts in different currencies as participants to make up the multicurrency time deposit.

6.4.2.2.3.4.2 Create Product

1. Create your own master contract product for multicurrency time deposits in Customizing for Financial Services Master Contract Management Product Management Product Definition Master Contract Products Create Master Contract Product .




Table 717:

Field Entry


Template Product _MC_CST (Master Contract for Combined Statement (Template))



choose Enter.5. In the product attributes structure, in addition to the standard settings that you make for a master contract

product, you must make some settings that are specific to Russia, as described in the table below:

Table 718:


Product Group Used Attributes Contract

Relationships Participant Conditions

Permitted Products

Enter the product group that you have defined in Define Product Groups [page 625].

Relevant for Account Contract Used Attributes Contract


Permitted Products

Select this attribute for the product group that you enter in the previous product attribute.

Currency Used Attributes Contract


Currencies Allowed

Enter the currencies that comprise the multicurrency time deposit product.

Relevant for Account Contract Used Attributes Contract


Currencies Allowed

Select this attribute for all of the currencies that you enter in the previous product attribute.

6. In addition to the standard product attributes above, you must also define country-specific product attributes, as described in the following section.


6.4.2.2.3.4.3 Define Scope of Minimum Contract Amount

6.4.2.2.3.4.3.1 Introduction

To enable your master contract product as a multicurrency time deposit, you must define how the system handles the minimum contract amount that is required to going into the fixing phase. You can define the scope either as a global limit or as an individual limit.

6.4.2.2.3.4.3.2 Configure Global Limit

Use

When you define a global limit, the system validates the minimum contract amount as the sum of the balances of all participant accounts, converted into the contract currency of the master contract.

To define the global limit, you must make the settings described below.

Procedure

1. In the product attributes structure, choose Used Attributes Russia Multicurrency Time Deposits .2. Configure the product attributes in the table below:

Table 719:

Product Attribute Entry

Scope of Minimum Contract Amount G (Global)

Currencies for Minimum Contract Amount Enter the currencies that comprise the multicurrency time deposit product.

Minimum Contract Amount per Currency Enter a minimum contract amount for each one of the currencies that you have defined.





6.4.2.2.3.4.3.3 Configure Individual Limit

Use

When you define an individual limit, the system validates the minimum contract amount individually for each one of participant accounts, by using the standard product attributes that you define in the time deposit account product that you use as a participant in multicurrency time deposits.

To define the individual limit, you must make the settings described below.

Procedure

1. In the product attributes structure, choose Used Attributes Russia Multicurrency Time Deposits .2. Configure the product attributes in the table below:

Table 720:

Name of Product Attribute Entry

Scope of Minimum Contract Amount I (Individual)

Automatic Distribution of Contract Amounts Enter X (Yes) or leave it empty (No), according to your business needs.



6.4.2.2.3.5 Define Main Rule Sets

Use



Procedure


2. Create rules for handling insufficient funds, as follows:

Table 721: Rule for ordering party

Field Entry

Error Type 160 (Error in Fixed Deposit)

Type of Item Ordering Party

Tr.Typ.Grp.Pstg 0400 (Debits from Bank Transfers)

Product Enter the technical name of your multicurrency time deposit account product (see Create Product [page 624]).

First Response Post

Processing Reason 01 (Insufficient Funds)

Table 722: Rule for recipient

Field Entry

Error Type 160 (Error in Fixed Deposit)

Type of Item Recipients

Tr.Typ.Grp.Pstg 0700 (Credits from Check Deposit)

Product Enter the technical name of your multicurrency time deposit account product (see Create Product [page 624]).

First Response Reject

Processing Reason 01 (Insufficient Funds)


6.4.2.2.3.6 Create Financial Condition Types

Use

To enable the system to process multicurrency time deposits in line with the requirements, you must create a condition type for credit interest with differentiation categories for term, capital, and capital aggregation type.



Procedure


2. Select the Credit Int. Time Deposit (105115) condition type and choose Copy as...3. Enter a technical name for your condition type, for example, 999115.4. Enter a name for your condition type, for example, Cred.Int. Multcurrency TD.5. Save your entries.6. Select the newly created transaction type and choose Differentiation Category in the left frame.7. Create a new entry and add enter the following data:

Table 723:

Field Entry

Seq.No. Different 3

Differentiat. Category 1 L01 (Capital Aggregation Type)

CO (Relational Operator) =

Dimension Value Request


6.4.2.2.3.7 Assign Financial Condition Types to Condition Group Type

Use

To use the condition type that you have created, you must assign it to the condition group type for time deposits.

Prerequisites

You have created the financial condition type that you require for your financial product (see Create Financial Condition Types [page 630]).

Procedure



2. Select the 30 - Sttlmnt: Time Deposit condition group type, double click Condition Type in the left frame, and add the condition type that you have created (see Create Financial Condition Types [page 630]).


6.4.2.2.3.8 Configure Localization Parameters

Use

Depending on your specific requirements, you must configure some localization parameters that are specific for Russia.

The Validate Multicurrency Time Deposits for Fixing (/FSLRU/MCU_DISTRIBUTION) report uses these parameters in the automatic distribution of contract amounts for multicurrency contracts with individual limits defined (see Configure Individual Limit on Define Scope of Minimum Contract Amount [page 628]).

Procedure


2. Choose the localization country for Russia and the MULTICURRENCY parameter group, PAYMENT_ORDER_DETAILS parameter subgroup.

3. Configure the parameters as described in the following table:

Table 724:


MEDIUM Enter the medium that you want to use for the automatic distribution of contract amounts.

PAYMENT_METHOD Enter the payment method that you want to use for the automatic distribution of contract amounts.


6.4.2.2.3.9 Define Job Nets

Use

You must schedule the Validate Multicurrency Time Deposits for Fixing (/FSLRU/MCU_DISTRIBUTION) report to run during end-of-day processing before the execution of the Fix Time Deposits (RBCA_RC_FTD_FIXING) mass



run report. Otherwise, the standard mass run report may incorrectly fix a multicurrency time deposit contract that does not meet the minimum requirements.

Procedure


2. Double-click Process Flow Template to access this view, choose a process flow, and double-click Reports of the Process Flow Template.

3. Choose New Entries to add a line for the report, and enter the following data:

Table 725:

Field Entry


Report /FSLRU/MCU_DISTRIBUTION

4. Double-click Predecessors <-> Successors, and choose New Entries.5. Enter the following data:

Table 726:

Field Entry

Report No. (First Column) Enter the number for the report that is defined to run before the Fix Time Deposits (RBCA_RC_FTD_FIXING) report.

Report No. (Second Column) Enter the number that you have assigned to the Validate Multicurrency Time Deposits for Fixing (/FSLRU/MCU_DISTRIBUTION) report on the previous step.

6. Choose New Entries again and enter the following data to ensure that the report runs before the Fix Time Deposits (RBCA_RC_FTD_FIXING) mass run report:

Table 727:

Field Entry

Report No. (First Column) Enter the number that you have assigned to the Validate Multicurrency Time Deposits for Fixing (/FSLRU/MCU_DISTRIBUTION) report on the previous step.

Report No. (Second Column) Enter the number for the Fix Time Deposits (RBCA_RC_FTD_FIXING) report.



6.5 Account Number Engine Setup

To configure the account number engine (ANE) to generate and store multidigit account (MDA) numbers, you make the settings described in the following sections. For information about what to enter, see the documentation for the Customizing activities in the system

NoteThe general localization settings are required if you use Account Management (FS-AM) or Bank Analyzer (FS-BA). You make the component-specific settings based on the component that you use.

General Localization Settings

In Customizing for Financial Services, choose General Localization Settings Account Number Engine .

Account Management (FS-AM)

In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Localization Settings Account Number Engine Settings .

Bank Analyzer (FS-BA)

In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Bank Analyzer Localization Settings Account Number Engine Settings .

6.6 Business Process Setup

6.6.1 Document Order Numbers

As per Russian legal requirements, banks should provide the customers and the Central Bank of Russia (CBR) with a printed representation of the transactions performed at the bank. This printed representation contains all information of the transactions, and is identfied by a document number.

The following topics describe the configuration of document order numbers:

1. Configure Document Type [page 635]



2. Configure Document Number [page 637]

6.6.1.1 Configure Document Type

Context

Configuration of document type includes registration of local chracteristics, customizing result data layer, and generating field structure of the characteristics in the Bank Analyzer.. After completing the characteristic configuration, you can create new document types.

6.6.1.1.1 Create Local Characteristic

Context

Register two characteristics, master characteristic /1BA/_BA1C_R_DOT and process or fixed characteristic /1BA/_FSLRU_FR_DOT in the metadata settings for Banka Analyzer.

Procedure

In Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Basic Settings Settings for MetadataCharacteristics Register Characteristics , create the local characteristics:

Table 728:

Local Characteristic Description Data Element Used Primary Info Object

/1BA/_BA1C_R_DOT Doc. Type /FSLRU/DOCUMENT_TYP /BA1C_R_DOT

/1BA/_FSLRU_FR_DOT Doc. Type /FSLRU/DOCUMENT_TYP /BA1C/FRDOT

6.6.1.1.2 Customize Result Data Layer

Context

Create new entries for the master and process characteristics in the result data layer of Bank Analyzer.


Procedure

1. To customize Result Data Layer for master data characteristic, /1BA/_BA1C_R_DOT, make an entry in Customizing under Financial Services Banka Analyzer Result Data Layer Basic Settings Edit Data Structures in Result Data Area (Result Data Area) SAFI (Result Type)S_SLPD (Result Node Type) S_SLPD_1_H Result Node Type Characteristic .

2. To customize Result Data Layer for process characteristic, /1BA/_FSLRU_FR_DOT, make an entry in Customizing under Financial Services Banka Analyzer Result Data Layer Basic Settings Edit Data Structures in Result Data Area (Result Data Area) SAFI (Result Type)S_SLPD (Result Node Type) S_SLPD_3_S Result Node Type Characteristic .

6.6.1.1.3 Generate Field Structure for Characteristics

Context

Replicate the newly created characteristic of the financial position at the master data level /1BA/_BA1C_R_DOT, as a field in the accounting document by customizing segmentation service in the Bank Analyzer.

Procedure

1. In Customizing under Financial Service Bank Analyzer Basic Settings Settings for MetadataCharacteristics Segmentation Service Edit Structure in Characteristic Structure , enter structure S35ISIS1 in change mode.

2. Include the master characteristic /1BA/_BA1C_R_DOT in the structure.3. Activate the structure.

6.6.1.1.4 Create New Document Types

Context

Create new document types in Customizing underFinancial Services Bank Analyzer Process and MethodsCountry-Specific Functions Russia Create Document Type .

The document type entries in Bank Analyzer must be same as the internal document type in transactional banking.



The standard document types mentioned in the table below are available in the system:

Table 729:

Internal Document Types Description

01 Payment Order

03 Document Tupes 03

04 Cash Order

06 Document Type 06

09 Memo Order

17 Bank Order

101 Default

6.6.1.2 Configure Document Number

Context

Procedure

1. Repeat the following steps as performed in Document Type configuration:1. Create Local Characteristic [page 635]2. Customize Result Data Layer [page 635]3. Generate Field Structure for Characteristics [page 636]

2. In Customizing forFinancial Services Bank Analyzer Processess and Methods Smart Accouting for Financial Instruments Subledger Coding Block Flow Data Definition of Flow Characteristics , include the master characteristic /1BA/_BA1C_R_DOT.

3. Save your data.

6.6.2 Customizing for Event After Reporting Date


The banks process the events that happen in a particular fiscal year, and closes the accounts on the last date of the fiscal year. However, there can be some situations where the banks are required to record certain events that


belongs to a particular fiscal year, after the end of the fiscal year. Such transactions are referred to as events after reporting date (EARD) transactions.

6.6.2.2 Customizing for Event After Reporting Date (EARD)

Listed below in the table are the special transaction types are available in the system to process event after reporting date (EARD):

Table 730:

Tr. Type Description

880001 [EARD] Bankrupt declaration

880002 [EARD] Significant decrease of Asset value

880003 [EARD] Decrease of reserves for possible losses

880004 [EARD] Increase of reserves for possible losses

880005 [EARD]Close of Org. unit

880006 [EARD]Tax charges for the last reporting year

880007 [EARD] Services and assets delivered before the report date

6.6.2.3 Customizing for Adding Own Check

In order for the own checks to work, you must Customize the following in the sequence mentioned:

1. Create error types2. Create own checks3. Assign own checks to error types

Create Error Type

Table 731:

Access For Customizing in Financial Services under Account

Management Item Management Posting Control Rules

Error Types Define Error Types .

Delivery Class Type C: Customizing table

Delivered As Default Customizing

Entry: 1



Action: [ x ] Insert [ ] Update [ ] Delete

Field Value

ERRTYP E01

TEXT Postings Beyond EARD Period

Create Own Checks

Table 732:



Define Own Check Results .



Entry: 1


Field Value

CHK_OBJ CUS

SUB_OBJ CUS

RESULT_ID E001

ARBGB /FSLRU/EARD_PROCESS

MSGNO 001

Table 733:



Define Own Check Results .



Entry: 1


Field Value


CHK_OBJ CUS

SUB_OBJ CUS

RESULT_ID E002

ARBGB /FSLRU/EARD_PROCESS

MSGNO 002

Assign Own Checks to Error Types

Table 734:



Error Types Assign Error Types .



Entry: 1


Field Value

CHK_OBJ CUS

SUB_OBJ CUS

RESULT_ID E001

ERRTYP E01

Table 735:



Error Types Assign Error Types .



Entry: 1


Field Value



CHK_OBJ CUS

SUB_OBJ CUS

RESULT_ID E002

ERRTYP E02

6.6.3 Customizing for Interest Accrual


You use this function to split the interest calculated on deposit account, into accrued and nonaccrued interest, as per the requirements of Russian law.

6.6.3.2 Map Transaction Types to Posting Categories and Condition Types

1. Create transaction types for non accrued credit interest items, for savings and time deposit.You can create this in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item ManagementBasic Functions Transaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items .

2. New posting types for posting non accrued credit interest for savings and deposit is available in the system. These posting categories are assigned to the condition types on a one on one basis.

3. Assign posting types to transaction typesYou can assign this in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management

Basic Functions Assign Posting Types to Transaction Types .4. Create condition types for non accrued credit interest item for savings and time deposit.

You can create this in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition type .You must copy the standard condition type for credit interest and assign the following newly delivered posting types, to this condition type:○ 88 for time deposit○ 62 for savings and checking account

5. Map condition type of credit interest to condition type of non accrued credit interest.You can map this in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management

Settlement Country-specific Settings Russia Interest Accrual Map Accrued and Non Accrued Condition Types. .


6.6.3.3 Customizing for Settlement BAdI

1. Activate Business Add-In for enabling the split of interest in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product management Settlement Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Enhancements in

Calculation Layer BAdI: After Rounding of Totaled Results . Here activate the enhancement implementation Localization after Rounding Results (/FSGLO/BCA_SETTL_CALC)

6.6.4 Customizing for Capital Yield Tax


Customers are entitled to earnings in the form of interest for investments such as time deposits. This income is taxable. The system uses tax manager framework to calculate capital yield tax.

6.6.4.2 Creation and Customizing for Tax Item Postings

6.6.4.2.1 Posting Types to Post Tax on Credit Interest

The posting types for posting taxes on credit interest are available in the system, in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Maintain Posting Types .

You can use the following posting types available in the system:

Table 736:

Posting type Credit Memo Proc Description for Posting type

T1 0090 Tax on Cr. Intrst - CYT

6.6.4.2.2 Transaction Types to Post Tax on Credit Interest

You can create and assign transaction types in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Transaction Types and Transaction Type Groups Maintain and Assign Transaction Types for Payment Items.

The following template is available in the system that you can copy for creating a new transaction type.



Table 737:

Transaction Type Desc. Transact. Type Long Name Trans. Type

999100 Tax on Cr. Intrst - CYT Tax on Credit Interest - CYT

While creating transaction types, you must assign it to the following

● Business transaction codeThe system reads the value that you maintain in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Define Business Transaction Codes . These values are available for selection here. You must create a transaction code for Tax Calculation in this table.

● Transaction groupThe system reads the value that you maintain in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Transaction Types and Transaction Type Groups . These values are available for selection here. The template value available in the system is 1300.

You can assign the transaction type to the posting types in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Basic Functions Assign Posting types to Transaction types .

Table 738:

PT Tran Ty Desc. Transact. Type

T1 999100 Tax on Cr. Intrst – CYT

6.6.4.2.3 Condition Types to Post Tax on Credit Interest

You can define condition types in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition type .

You can use the following condition type templates that are available in the system for credit interest.

Table 739:


900001 Tax on Cr. Intrst - CYT

6.6.4.3 Customizing Relevant for Tax Manager

6.6.4.3.1 Define Categories for Reference Interest Rate

1. You can define categories for reference interest rate in Customizingfor Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Reference Interest Rate Define Categories for Reference Interest Rate .


Table 740:

Ref. IR Cat Long Text

0050 Reference Interest Rates for Capital Yield Tax

6.6.4.3.2 Create and Customize Business Partner Tax Classification

1. You can define tax types and tax groups in Customizing for Financial Services under SAP Business Partner for Financial Services General Settings Business Partner Basic Settings Tax Types and Tax Groups Define tax types and Tax Groups .You can use the following template that is available in the system.

Table 741:

Country Tax Type Description Category BPs Products Sequence

RU CYT Capital Yield Tax Withholding

01 Checked Unchecked 2

1. You can assign business partner in Customizing for tax groups in Customizing for Financial Services underSAP Business Partner for Financial Services General Settings Business Partner Basic Settings Tax

Types and Tax Groups Define tax types and Tax Groups .You can use the following templates available in the system.

Table 742:

Country Region Tax Type Tax Group Description

RU CYT 01 Individual Resident - Local Currency

RU CYT 02 Individual Resident - Foreign Currency

RU CYT 03 Individual Non-Resident - Local Currency

RU CYT 04 Individual Non-Resident - Foreign Cur

RU CYT 05 Entrepreneurs Resident - Local Currency

RU CYT 06 Entrepreneurs Resident - Foreign Curr

RU CYT 07 Entrepreneurs Non-Resident - Local Curr

RU CYT 08 Entrepreneurs Non-Resident- Foreign Curr

RU CYT 09 Individual Resident - Precious Metal



Country Region Tax Type Tax Group Description

RU CYT 10 Individual Non-Resident - Precious Metal

RU CYT 11 Entrepreneurs Resident - Precious Metal

RU CYT 12 Entrepreneurs Non-Residnt-Precious Metal

6.6.4.3.3 Business Partner Tax Classification

Business partner tax classifications for capital yield tax calculation is available in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Business Partner Tax Classification .

You can use the following classifications available in the system

Table 743:

Tax Classif. Description

13 INDIVIDUAL-RESIDNT-LOCAL CURR

14 INDIVIDUAL-RESIDNT-FOREGN CURR







21 INDVDL-RESDNT-PRECIS-METAL

22 INDVDL-NON-RESDNT-PRECIS-METAL

23 ENTRPNR-RESDNT-PRECIS-METAL

24 ENTRPNR-NON-RESDNT-PRECIS-METL

6.6.4.3.4 Define Tax Operations

You can define tax operations in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Areas Define Tax Operations .


Table 744:


6 Uncheck Credit Interest

6.6.4.3.5 Define Tax Types

You can define tax types in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax ManagerDefine Tax Types

Table 745:

Tax Type Description Tax Calculator

CYT Capital Yield Tax (Withholding) /FSLRU/CL_CY_TAX_CALCULATOR


You define the tax item types in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Define Tax Item Types .

The following tax item types are available in the system as template Customizing:

Table 746:

Tax Itm Ty Description

2 Operation ID: 006

500003 POST

You map the tax item types to the following:

● Tax Operation ID : in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax ManagerAssign Tax Item Types to Operations

● Business Transactions and Condition Types in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Business Transactions and Condition Types to Tax Item .

● Tax type and Tax Operation ID for Posting in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Posting Transactions to Operations . Note that for this mapping, the item type with description POST has to be used and not the item type for operations.



6.6.4.3.7 Assign Business Partner Tax Classifications to Business Partner Tax Groups

You can assign business partner tax classification to business partner groups in Customizing for Financial Services General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Business Partner Tax Classifications to Business Partner Tax Groups .

Table 747:

Tax Type Tax Group Tax Classification Description

CYT 01 13 INDIVIDUAL-RESIDNT-LOCAL CURR

CYT 02 14 INDIVIDUAL-RESIDNT-FOREGN CURR

CYT 03 15 INDIVIDUAL-NON RES-LOCAL CURR

CYT 04 16 INDIVIDUAL-NON RES-FOREGN CURR

CYT 05 17 ENTRPNR-RESIDNT-LOCAL CURR

CYT 06 18 ENTRPNR-RESIDNT-FOREGN CURR

CYT 07 19 ENTRPNR-NON RES-LOCAL CURRR

CYT 08 20 ENTRPNR-NON RES-FOREGN CURR

CYT 09 21 INDVDL-RESDNT-PRECIS-METAL

CYT 10 22 INDVDL-NON-RESDNT-PRECIS-METAL

CYT 11 23 ENTRPNR-RESDNT-PRECIS-METAL

CYT 12 24 ENTRPNR-NON-RESDNT-PRECIS-METL



1. You can assign tax item types to operations in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Tax Item Types to Operations .You can use the following template available in the system:

Table 748:

Tax Item Ty. Desciption Tax Op ID Description

2 Operation ID: 006 6 CREDIT INTEREST

6.6.4.3.9 Assign Business Transaction and Condition Types to Tax Item Types

You can assign business transaction and condition types to tax item types Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Business Transaction and Condition Types to Tax Item Types .

You can use the following template available in the system.

Table 749:


Tran Ty Description Tax Item Ty. Description RC Dec Places

105110 Credit Interest 150100 CREDIT INTEREST

2 Operation ID: 006

Round to Nearest

Two Decimal Places

105115 Credit Int. Time Deposit

150100 CREDIT INTEREST

2 Operation ID 006

Round to Nearest

Two Decimal Places

900001 Tax on Cr.. Intrst - CYT

999100 Tax on Credit interest - CYT

500003 POST Round to Nearest

Two Decimal Places


1. You can assign condition types to operations in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Assign Posting Transactions to Operations.



You can use the following template available in the system:

Table 750:

Tax Op ID Description Tax Type Description Tax Item Ty Description

6 Credit Interest CYT CAPITAL YIELD TAX (WITHOLDING)

500003 POST


1. You can specify tax rates in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify tax RatesNote that you must use the same values that you use in business partner tax classification as tax rate ID here.


You can specify tax assignments in Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Tax Manager Specify Tax Assignments .

Table 751:

Country Tax Op ID Tax Type Start date End Date Rate Determiner

RU 6 CYT 01.01.2000 31.12.9999 /FSLRU/CL_CY_TAX_RATE_DETERMNR

6.6.4.3.13 Process Integration Settings

1. Under Customizing for Financial Services, go to General Localization Settings Tax Manager Process Integration Settings Determine Process Integrator Implementation Spot

Table 752:



Bus Proc ActStep

ProcOrd Implement. Spot Name

PI Class Name

47 7 DEPT Settlement AFTER_ROUNDING

2 AFTER_ROUNDING

/FSLRU/CL_TAX_PROC_INTEGRATOR




Bus Proc ActStep

ProcOrd Implement. Spot Name

PI Class Name

48 30 ACCT Settlement AFTER_ROUNDING

2 AFTER_ROUNDING

/FSLRU/CL_TAX_PROC_INTEGRATOR

1. Under Customizing for Financial Services, go to General Localization Settings Tax Manager Process Integration Settings Assign Process Integrator Tax Type

Table 753:

ProcIntID Tax Type PrepareRelevant Calc Relevant Post Relevant

47 CYT Unchecked Checked Checked

48 CYT Unchecked Checked Checked

6.6.4.3.14 Map Reference and Determiner to Tax Classification

Use

If you define new business partner (BP) tax classifications (see Define Business Partner Tax Classification [page 645]), you must set up the system to calculate capital yield tax (CYT) correctly for the newly defined BP tax classifications.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Account Management Localization Settings RussiaCapital Yield Tax Map Reference and Determiner to Tax Classification .

2. Enter the BP tax classifications that you defined (see Define Business Partner Tax Classification [page 645]).3. For each BP tax classification, enter the class that corresponds to the calculation formula that you require for

the BP tax classification.

6.6.4.3.15 Maintain Markup Rates

1. Under Customizing for Financial Services, go to Account Management Localization Settings RussiaCapital Yield Tax Maintain Markup Rates .

2. Enter the tax classification ID, the corresponding markup rate and the date from which the markup rate is valid.



Table 754:

Tax Classf Valid from Markup Rate

13 01.01.2000

13 01.01.2009 5,0000000000

14 01.01.2000 9,0000000000

15 01.01.2000 5,0000000000

15 01.01.2009 9,0000000000

16 01.01.2000

17 01.01.2000

18 01.01.2000

19 01.01.2000

20 01.01.2000

21 01.01.2000

22 01.01.2000

23 01.01.2000

24 01.01.2000

6.6.4.3.16 Customizing for Flow Types

1. Under Customizing for Financial Services, go to Product Management Settlement Flow Types Define Flow Types .

Table 755:

Flow Type Flow Type Desc.

317000 Receivable: Capital yield Tax

1. Under Customizing for Financial Services, go to Product Management Settlement Flow Types Assign Flow Types to Condition Types and Clearing Categories .


Table 756:


PT Desc.Posting Type

CCat Desc. Clearing Cat.

Waiver Flow Type Flow Type Desc.




2000 Charge: To be Requested


6.6.4.3.17 Customizing for Events

Under Customizing for Financial Services, go to Account Management Product Management Event Processing Define Contract Events .

The following values are available in the system.

Table 757:

Event Class Name Retention Boole Description

CYTDIRCR /FSLRU/CL_CY_TAX_DIR_CHNG_AGNT

180 Checked CIS- CYT DIR Create

CYTDIRDC /FSLRU/CL_CY_TAX_DIR_CHNG_AGNT

180 Checked CIS- CYT DIR Increase

CYTDIRIN /FSLRU/CL_CY_TAX_DIR_CHNG_AGNT

180 Checked CIS- CYT DIR Increase

6.6.4.4 Customizing for Settlement BAdI

1. Activate Business Add-In for enabling the calculation of CYT in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product management Settlement Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Enhancements in

Calculation Layer BAdI: After Rounding of Totaled Results . Here activate the enhancement implementation Localization after Rounding Results (/FSGLO/BCA_SETTL_CALC)



6.6.4.5 Creating Precious Metal Product

In case the deposits are in form of precious metal, you create a product for precious metal in the system. You must also activate the product attribute Precious Metal Product Identification, by setting the value to X. You can navigate to this product attribute under Country-Specific Attributes Russia - FSLOCAL Precious Metal .

6.6.4.6 Tax on Foreign Currency

6.6.4.6.1 Create Key Figures

1. You can create new key figures relevant for tax on foreign currency in Customizingfor Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Basic Settings Settings for Meta data Key Figures Edit key figures.

Table 758:

Key figure KF Class Unit Type Short Text Long Text Exception aggregat

Agg.referen.char

_ROFTAX 55_BALAMAD 99 ITA: Temp tax a/c

In-Transit Account: Tax Auth.- Capital Yield Tax temp account

empty empty (BW InfoObject)

_ROFITA 55_BALAMAD 99 ITA: Temp tax a/c

In-Transit Account: Tax Auth.- Capital Yield Tax temp account

empty empty (BW InfoObject)

6.6.4.6.2 Create Item Types

1. You can create new item types, in Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Processes and Methods Accounting for Financial Products Financial Position Processes Basic Settings Business Transaction Types and Item Types Create Item Types .

Table 759:

Item Type Item Type Desc. Item Type Descript. Item Type Descript. Aggr. Only

R70A Tax rounding - FC(Dr[R] Tax rounding - For Curr(Dr)

[R] Tax rounding - For Curr(Dr)


Item Type Item Type Desc. Item Type Descript. Item Type Descript. Aggr. Only

R70B Tax rounding - FC(Cr[R] Tax rounding - For Curr(Cr)

[R] Tax rounding - For Curr(Cr)

R71A Tax offset - FC(Dr[R] Tax offset - For Curr(Dr)

[R] Tax offset - For Curr(Dr)

R71B Tax offset - FC(Cr[R] Tax offset - For Curr(cr)

[R] Tax offset - For Curr(Cr)

R72A Tax move – FX [P] Tax move – FX [P] Tax move – FX

R72B Tax transform – FX [P] Tax transform – FX [P] Tax transform – FX

R73A Tax move - FX (CR) [P] Tax move - FX (CR) [P] Tax move - FX (CR)

R73B Tax trans - FX (CR)[P] Tax transform - FX(CR)

[P] Tax transform - FX(CR)

6.6.4.6.3 Assign Item Types to Business Transaction Types

1. You can assign item types to business transaction types, in Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Process and Methods Accounting for Financial Products After Generation Financial Position Processes Basic Settings Business Transactions Types and Item Types Assign Item Types to Business Transaction Types

Table 760:

Business Transaction Type

Bt Type description

Item Type Item Type description

DM04 R70ATax rounding - FC(Dr

DM04 R70BTax rounding - FC(Cr

DM04 R71ATax offset - FC(Dr

DM04 R71BTax offset - FC(Cr



6.6.4.6.4 Edit Procedure Templates

1. You can edit procedure templates, in Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Process and Methods Accounting for Financial Products After Generation Financial Position Processes Processing of Internal Business Transactions Basic Settings Calculation control Edit Procedure templates

2. Choose the subledger scenario ‘S’3. Define new item template

Table 761:

Item Template

Desc. Item Template (Short) Description of Item Template Description of Item Template

Document Class

Flow Direction

Flow Extent Amount Check

Qty Check Checkboxes

LJ66 Trns.: tax Transfer - In-Transit Account - tax

Transfer - In-Transit Account - tax round off

0002( Internal) Only values No validation No validation

Change to Descriptive Characteristics of FPO allowed – unchecked

Invert Plus/Minus sign for quantity – unchecked

Do not derive G/L account – unchecked

Currency translation for structured products – unchecked

Manual posting allowed – unchecked

LJ67 Trns.: tax Transfer – tax amt offsetTransfer - tax amt offset







LJ68 Trns.: tax Transfer – tax amt offsetTransfer – tax amt offset








Item Template

Desc. Item Template (Short) Description of Item Template Description of Item Template

Document Class

Flow Direction

Flow Extent Amount Check

Qty Check Checkboxes

LJ69 Trns.: tax Transfer - tax amt transformTransfer - tax amt transform







LJ70 Trns.: tax Transfer - tax amt transformTransfer - tax amt transform







4. Assign Processing Categories to Item templates:

Table 762:

Item template Debit/credit Processing cat Descr of process cat

Descr of item templ

LJ66 DEBIT 1BG_TRANS

[O] In-Transit Account (Anonymous)

Transfer - In-Transit Account - tax

LJ66 CREDIT 1BG_TRANS


Transfer - In-Transit Account - tax



Transfer – tax amt offset

LJ67 CREDIT 1IX_PL [O]Profit/LossTransfer – tax amt offset

LJ68 CREDIT 1IX_PL [O]Profit/LossTransfer – tax amt offset



Item template Debit/credit Processing cat Descr of process cat

Descr of item templ



Transfer – tax amt offset

LJ69 CREDIT 1BG_FX

[O] Currency Position (Anonymous)

Transfer - tax amt transform




LJ70 CREDIT 1BG_TRANS



LJ70 DEBIT 1BG_FXEV

[O] Currency Position - Equivalent Value


5. Define calculation step categories

Table 763:

Calculation Step category Desc. of Calculation Step Cat.(Short)

Desc. of Calculation Step Category

Desc. of Calculation Step Cat. (Long)

CheckBox Checkboxes Relevance

LF04 FX Tax rounding FX Curr: Tax rounding Fx Curr: tax rounding

A/L Flow status = A/L Status of Pos. after BT – UncheckedProcessing Cat. of Input Key Figure – empty

Key figure step – unchecked Not in Analytical adjustment – unchecked Internal accounting – unchecked Operational – financial accounting

LF05 FX Tax offsetFX Curr: Tax amt offset post rounding

FX Curr: Tax amt offset post rounding



LF06 FX Tax transform FX Curr: Tax amt transform FX Curr: Tax amt transform




Calculation Step category Desc. of Calculation Step Cat.(Short)

Desc. of Calculation Step Category

Desc. of Calculation Step Cat. (Long)

CheckBox Checkboxes Relevance

LF07 FX Tax transform FX Tax transform FX Tax transform



6. Assign item templates to calc step categories

Table 764:

Cat Debit/credit Item Temp Desc of calc step cat Desc of item template

LF04 Credit LJ66 FX Curr: Tax rounding Transfer - In-Transit Account - tax

LF04 Debit LJ66 FX Curr: Tax rounding Transfer - In-Transit Account - tax

LF05 Credit LJ68FX Curr: Tax amt offset post rounding Transfer – tax amt offset

LF05 Debit LJ67FX Curr: Tax amt offset post rounding Transfer – tax amt offset

LF06 Credit 1J39 FX Curr: Tax amt transform Move: Long-Term Receivables - Credit

LF06 Debit LJ69 FX Curr: Tax amt transform Transfer - tax amt transform

LF07 Credit 1J40 FX: Tax transformTransform: Long-Term Receivables - Debit

LF07 Debit LJ70 FX: Tax transform Transfer - tax amt transform

7. Define calculation methods

Table 765:

CalMethod Replacement Method keyFigMeth Calc.meth.Desc.(short) Description of calc method Description of calculation method (long)

MF28 For Curr: Tax Foreign Curr: Rounding tax amountForeign Curr: Rounding tax amount

MF29 For Curr: Tax offset Foreign Curr: Tax amt offsetForeign Curr: Tax amount offset post roundoff

8. Assign Calc. Methods to Calc. step categories



Table 766:

Cat. CalMeth Description of calc step category

Description of Calc method

LF04 MF28 FX Curr: Tax roundingForeign Curr: Rounding tax amount

LF05 MF29FX Curr: Tax amt offset post rounding Foreign Curr: Tax amt offset

9. Assign calc. step categories to calc. templates

Table 767:

Templt Sort Cat. Req PSeq Group PrvDay Chr Description of Template

Description of calc step category

L101 600 1F01 100 Unchecked

Foreign Currency - Tax rounding

FX: Clear Operational Profit

L101 600 1F02 200 Unchecked


FX: Posting of Operational Profit in FC

L101 600 LF04 300 Unchecked


FX Curr: Tax rounding



FX Curr: Tax amt offset post rounding



FX Curr: Tax amt transform



FX: Tax transform

10. Assign relevant item templates and calc step categories

Table 768:

Templt Cat. Relevant item template Relevant calc step category

Desc of template Desc. Of calc step category

Desc. Of item template

L101 1F01 1I29 Foreign Currency - Tax roundingFX: Clear Operational Profit Inflow of Operational Expense/Income


Templt Cat. Relevant item template Relevant calc step category

Desc of template Desc. Of calc step category

Desc. Of item template

L101 1F02 1I29 Foreign Currency - Tax roundingFX: Posting of Operational Profit in FC Inflow of Operational Expense/Income

L101 LF04 1I02 Foreign Currency - Tax rounding FX Curr: Tax rounding Dr In-Trans Acct Prod, Cr In-Trans Anon.

L101 LF05 1I02 Foreign Currency - Tax roundingFX Curr: Tax amt offset post rounding Dr In-Trans Acct Prod, Cr In-Trans Anon.

L101 LF06 1I02 Foreign Currency - Tax roundingFX Curr: Tax amt transform Dr In-Trans Acct Prod, Cr In-Trans Anon.

L101 LF07 LF06 Foreign Currency - Tax rounding FX: Tax transform

11. Assign Calculation Steps to Calculation ProcedureYou can do so, in Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Process and Methods Accounting for Financial Products After Generation Financial Position Processes Processing of Internal Business Transactions Basic Settings Calculation control Edit Procedure templates

Table 769:

Calculation procedure: RP20

Cal. Step No 0 Docs Description

MM01 Unchecked [M] Move P&L (Operational)

MT01 Unchecked [M] Transform (OP)

RP01 Unchecked Foreign Curr: Tax rounding

RP02 Unchecked Foreign Curr: Tax amt offset

RP03 Unchecked FX: Tax Move

RP04 Unchecked FX: Tax transform

6.6.5 Customizing Settings for Early Withdrawal of Time Deposit


To handle termination of an account due to early full withdrawal of the account balance, there are a set of correction actions that the bank must perform. The following chapters explain the settings that must be present in the system so that these actions can be performed.



6.6.5.2 Define Differentiation categories

1. Define relevant differentiation categories in Customizing for Financial Services under Account ManagementProduct management Financial Conditions Define Differntiation Categories . Here you must create new

entry with the following information:

Table 770:

Diff. Category

Description DiffValCat Table Name Field Name Text Table Language Field

Text Field

L10 EWD (full) Interest Correction

1 /FSLRU/DIFF_EWT

EWT_CORR_TYPE

/FSLRU/DIFF_EWTT

SPRAS TEXT

L11 EWD (full) Correction Term

/FSLRU/EWT_TERM

DIFF_KEY /FSLRU/EWT_TERMT

SPRAS TXT_RUNTIM

6.6.5.3 Assign Condition Categories to Differentiation Categories

You assign the condition categories to the relevant differentiation categories in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Assign Condition categories to differentiation categories . Here you must set the following values:

Table 771:

Condition category Condition Category Description

DC1 Diff Category Description

105020 Settlement Interest L10 EWD (full) Interest Correction

105020 Settlement Interest L11 EWD (full) Correction Term

6.6.5.4 Create Posting Types

You map the transaction types with the relevant posting types that are present in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Maintain Posting Types


Here you maintain the following values:

Table 772:

Posting type CreditMemo Proc Desc. Posting Type

65 0090 Adj of int.: pre-prev yr

66 0090 Adj Credit Int.: prev yr

68 0090 Adj Prev Crdt Interest

78 0090 Adj.Accrual Crdt Interest

79 0090 Adj. Non Accr. Crdt Int.

6.6.5.5 Create Posting Types

You map the transaction types with the relevant posting types that are present in Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Item Management Maintain Posting Types

Here you maintain the following values:

Table 773:

Posting type CreditMemo Proc Desc. Posting Type

65 0090 Adj of int.: pre-prev yr

66 0090 Adj Credit Int.: prev yr

68 0090 Adj Prev Crdt Interest

78 0090 Adj.Accrual Crdt Interest

79 0090 Adj. Non Accr. Crdt Int.

6.6.5.6 Define Condition Type

1. On SAP Easy Access screen, choose Financial Services Account management Product managementFinancial Conditions Define Condition Type .

2. Select Condition Type 1051153. Choose Differentiation Category in the left pane4. Create New entry5. Enter a Sequence number6. Choose L10 in the Different. Catergory 1 field.7. Choose Comparison parameter =



8. Choose dimension as Value Request

6.6.5.7 Create Condition Group

1. On SAP Easy Access Screen choose Financial Services Account Management Current SettingsFinancial Conditions Condition Group Edit Condition Group .

1. Select Create Condition Group.

2. In Condition Group type select Sttlmnt: Time Deposit.

3. Enter a condition group number and description4. Select the condition group that you created from the left pane5. Select condition type 1051156. In the Early Withdrawal interest correction field, enter the value 001 if the system should pick the standard

interest rate for normal settlement ; 002 – in case of Early withdrawal correction.Note that you must use the same condition group while setting up the product.

6.6.5.8 Create Condition Types and Assign Posting Categories

For corrections during events after reporting date (EARD), you must follow the steps described in this chapter.

1. In Customizing for Financial Services under Account Management Product Management Financial Conditions Define Condition Type , create the following Condition Types and assign them to respective posting categories:

Table 774:

Condition Type Normal Condition Early Withdrawal and Termination

105005 75 68

105225 88 78

105555 67 66

6.6.6 Customizing Settings for Automatic Product Change


The subsequent chapters under this heading describes the settings involved to let the system perform a product change upon maturity of a time deposit account, in the absence of any specific instruction from the customer


regarding the treatment of the account. The product change involves change of a time deposit product to a demand deposit product.

6.6.6.2 Registering in Product Control

The new Demand Deposit product has to be registered in the production control.

1. In Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Source Data Layer Primary Objects Master Data Settings for Attributes Basic Data Production Control , enter the following:

Table 775:

Production Control Description

SRU_DEPT_D Demand Deposit

6.6.6.3 IOA Customizing for Demand Deposit Product

1. For settings relevant to interfaces to other application, navigate to Customizing for Financial Services underBank Analyzer Source Data Layer Interfaces to Other Applications Interfaces to Account Management

Mapping Tool Module Editor Derivation Steps S_PROD Derivation rule: Information for Products

Table 776:

Production Control

Relevance Indicator for Aggregation

BT Type Relevance indicator for Nominal Accounting

Product Ind. For BT Type

Classification for Risk Basis

SRU_DEPT_D No SSVAC No D ACC

6.6.6.4 Enter Operational Event Type in SDL

The Operational Event type delivered from the Transactional Banking for the Demand Deposit has to be entered in the source data layer in analytical banking as part of the IOA customizing.

1. In Customizing for Financial Services under Bank Analyzer Source Data Layer Primary Objects Flow Data Operational Events Edit Operational Event Type , enter the following:

Table 777:

QET Description

900004 Accnt posting - demand posting



6.6.6.5 Post Processing Settings

In case the mass processing for product change event fails, the system creates post processing orders. To enable the system to create the post processing orders, you must enter the following settings in the system:

1. Enter component (FS-AM) and Business Process ( /FSLRU/PRCH) in the process /SAPPO/VS_BPROC2. Enter Action Class (/FSLRU/CL_PRCH_ORDER_PPO), Persistency (CL_FEH_ECH_MSG_PERSISTENCY) and

Notification (CL_FSL_ECH_FACADE) for the Business Process (/FSLRU/PRCH) in the view ECHV_PROCESS3. Enter Post Processing Process (/FSLRU/PRCH) for the Business Process (/FSLRU/PRCH) in the view

ECHS_PP_PROCESS.

6.6.7 Setup of End-of-Day Processing

6.6.7.1 ANE Reporting

Use

The account number engine (ANE) reporting transaction /FSLRU/ANE_REPORT makes use of a logical file and path

Procedure

1. Execute transaction FILE.2. Choose Logical File Path Definition.

Add an entry with the following values:

Table 778:

Field Entry

Logical file path /FSLRU/REPORT_DAILY

Name File Path: Daily Report

3. Select the added line and choose Assignment of Physical Paths to Logical Path.Enter the following data:

Table 779:

Field Entry

Syntax group /FSLRU/REPORT_DAILY


Field Entry

Physical path Enter the physical file path. Example: /tmp/<FILENAME>

4. Choose Logical File Name Definition, Cross-Client.Add an entry with the following values:

Table 780:

Field Entry

Logical file /FSLRU/REPORT_DAILY

Physical file report_<PARAM_1>_<PARAM_2>.<PARAM_3>

Data format Leave empty

Applicat.area Leave empty

Logical path /FSLRU/REPORT_DAILY

6.6.7.2 Schedule ANE Reporting During End-of Day Processing

Use

The Registration Book Reporting (/FSLRU/ANE_REPORTING) report extracts data for the daily and annual registration book report. You execute the daily reporting during end-of-day processing.

You use SAP Schedule Manager to implement end-of-day processing in Bank Analyzer. Otherwise you can refer to the documentation for the tools that you use for running end-of-day processing.

Procedure

Define the report execution in the Schedule Manager

1. Call transaction SCMA.2. When you need to create a new task list, choose the Task List Create item in the menu bar and enter the

following data:

Table 781:

Field Entry

Task List Enter task list name



3. Choose Task List Other Task List and choose the task list you want to modify.4. Choose the Change Task List push button (F5).5. Right-click the task group to which you want to add a new task and select Create Task in the context menu.6. Enter the following data:

Table 782:

Field Entry

Description Registration Book Reporting

Task Owner Enter user name of the task owner

Type of Task Program

Program /FSLRU/ANE_REPORTING

Variant (Optional) You can use a variant that selects a type of reporting, reporting dates, and a reporting branch.

Choose Enter

7. Choose the Return to scheduling push button (F5).8. Choose the added task name in the task list.9. Choose the Schedule task button.10. Adjust execution options and periodic scheduling according to your preference.11. Choose Enter

NoteFor more information about configuring the Schedule Manager, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp

Application Help English SAP ERP Central Component Accounting Controlling (CO) Cost Center Accounting (CO-OM-CCA) Period-End Closing (CO-OM-CA) Schedule Manager (CA) .

6.6.8 Customizing for Accounting Document Externalization

Context

To derive the rules for processing the account document externalization, the system uses the chart of accounts configuration that is assigned to your legal entity. You assign your chart of accounts to a localization parameter.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=http%3A%2F%2Fhelp.sap.com%2Ferp

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=http%3A%2F%2Fhelp.sap.com%2Ferp

To assign your chart of accounts to a localization parameter follow the steps below:

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services under General Localization Settings Configure Localization Parameters choose the following localization parameter:

Table 783:


Russia BUSINESS_CONTENT ACCOUNTING_SETTINGS CHART_ACCOUNTS

2. Under Dialog Structure Customer Parameter Values configure the Parameter Value according to your needs.

NoteThe default value for this parameter is CARU.


6.6.9 Customizing for Accounting Entry Externalization

6.6.9.1 Define Customer Note Components

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services choose Bank Analyzer Processes and Methods Country-Specific Settings Russia Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments Accounting Entry Externalization Define Customer Note Components .

2. Choose the New Entries pushbutton and define your placeholder as exemplified below:Table 784:

NotePlchld Characteristic Start Date End Date

$1$ /BA1/C55LGENT 01.01.2000 31.12.2000

$1$ /BA1/C55DOCNUM 01.01.2001 31.12.9999



NoteThe placeholder must have a start and an end delimiter in the format $<value>$.


6.6.9.2 Define Customer Note Templates

Prerequisites

You have created placeholders for Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments (Smart AFI) in Define Customer Note Components [page 668].

Context

The Send Posting Documents (/FSLRU/RBR_RU_SEND) report generates the accounting document report that includes notes containing information about the financial operations of a legal entity. These notes are defined by (Smart AFI) note templates.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services choose Bank Analyzer Processes and Methods Country-Specific Settings Russia Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments Accounting Entry Externalization Define Customer Note Templates .

2. Choose the New Entries pushbutton and define your note template as exemplified below:Table 785:

ID NtTmp Start Date End Date Template Text for Smart AFI Notes

1 01.01.2000 31.12.9999 $1$ MADE A TRANSACTION OF TYPE $4$ IN $3$, WITH THE TOTAL AMOUNT OF $6$ $5$.



6.6.9.3 Define Operation Type

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services choose Bank Analyzer Processes and Methods Country-Specific Settings Russia Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments Accounting Entry Externalization Define Operation Type .

2. Choose the New Entries pushbutton and define your posting types as exemplified below:

Post. Ty. ID Posting Type Description

3 030000 - CASH PAYMENT


6.6.9.4 Map Transaction Type to Operation Type

Context

You assign posting types to transactions types so the system can derive this information during the posting document registration and include the posting type ID into the result data layer (RDL) table.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services choose Bank Analyzer Processes and Methods Country-Specific Settings Russia Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments Accounting Entry Externalization Map Transaction Type to Operation Type .

2. Choose the New Entries pushbutton and assign your posting types as exemplified below:Table 786:

TranTy Desc. Transact.Type Post. Ty. ID Posting Type Description

030000 Cash Payment 3 030000 - CASH PAYMENT




6.6.9.5 Technical General Ledger Account

The Technical General Ledger (G/L) Account classifies general ledger as technical accounts. This classification means that the accounts are irrelevant for receiving accounting systems and are ignored during the externalization process.

Context

You use this section to configure General Ledger (G/L) Accounts that you consider irrelevant for the Accounting Document Externalization and FI-GL Document Enrichment processes.

Prerequisites

● You have specified the Customer Parameter Values inCustomizing for Accounting Document Externalization [page 667].

● You have selected the Chart of Account in Customizing for Financial Services Bank Analyzer Processes and Methods Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments Basic Settings General Ledger IntegrationChart of Accounts Define Chart of Accounts .

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Bank Analyzer Processes and Methods Country-Specific Settings Russia Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments Technical General Ledger Account .

2. Configure the parameters below:Table 787:

Chrt/Accts G/L Acct

Enter the Chart of Account as customized in Configure Localization Parameters for Chart of Accounts

90000


9900000001


9902100000



6.6.10 Customizing for Year-end Closing

6.6.10.1 Customizing for Year-end Closing

You use this section to configure Smart Accounting for Financial Instruments (Smart AFI) to allow the movement of balances from Profit and Loss general ledger accounts to intermediate Profit and Loss general ledger accounts at year-end, in order to comply with the rules of the Central Bank of Russia.

6.6.10.2 Localization Parameters for Year-end Closing

Context

You specify the head-office code for the banking organization.

Procedure


2. Select the following entries:Table 788:


Russia BUSINESS_CONTENT ORGANIZATIONAL_STRUCTURE

HEAD_OFFICE

3. In the dialog structure, select the Customer Parameter Values node.4. Enter the head-office code.5. Save your entries.



6.6.10.3 Define Transfer Schema

Context

To execute the process according to the structure of the bank, you choose the schema that the system uses to perform the transfer of balances.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Bank Analyzer Process and Methods Country-Specific Settings Russia Smart Account for Financial Instruments Year End Closing Define Transfer Schema .

2. Select the transfer schema.3. Save your entries.

6.6.10.4 Define Mapping for Subledger Accounts

Context

You use this section to change the preconfigured mapping of source subledger accounts to corresponding branches' and head office's subledger accounts.

NoteThis customizing is preconfigured in the system and this step is optional.

Procedure

1. In Customizing for Financial Services, choose Bank Analyzer Process and Methods Country-Specific Settings Russia Smart Account for Financial Instruments Year End Closing Define Mapping for Subledger Accounts .

2. Change the field BR SL Acct and field HO SL Acct to the correspondent subledger account.3. If you want to add a new mapping, click on the New Entries pushbutton and fill in all the fields.





Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Coding SamplesAny software coding and/or code lines / strings ("Code") included in this documentation are only examples and are not intended to be used in a productive system environment. The Code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax and phrasing rules of certain coding. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the Code given herein, and SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the usage of the Code, unless damages were caused by SAP intentionally or by SAP's gross negligence.

Gender-Neutral LanguageAs far as possible, SAP documentation is gender neutral. Depending on the context, the reader is addressed directly with "you", or a gender-neutral noun (such as "sales person" or "working days") is used. If when referring to members of both sexes, however, the third-person singular cannot be avoided or a gender-neutral noun does not exist, SAP reserves the right to use the masculine form of the noun and pronoun. This is to ensure that the documentation remains comprehensible.

Internet HyperlinksThe SAP documentation may contain hyperlinks to the Internet. These hyperlinks are intended to serve as a hint about where to find related information. SAP does not warrant the availability and correctness of this related information or the ability of this information to serve a particular purpose. SAP shall not be liable for any damages caused by the use of related information unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct. All links are categorized for transparency (see: https://help.sap.com/viewer/disclaimer).

Localizations for Banking Services from SAP 9.0Important Disclaimers and Legal Information C U S T O M E R 675

https://help.sap.com/viewer/disclaimer

go.sap.com/registration/contact.html

© 2017 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary.These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies.Please see https://www.sap.com/corporate/en/legal/copyright.html for additional trademark information and notices.

https://go.sap.com/registration/contact.html

https://go.sap.com/registration/contact.html

https://www.sap.com/corporate/en/legal/copyright.html